THE 



5-Gl 


FT MEADE 
GenCol 1 


OF 


FOJi, CIIILDI^jEN A.ND YOUTH. 


BY THE AETflOn OF FET'Hl FARLEY J TALES. 


WITH SIXTY ENGRAVINGS AND SIXTEEN M. S 

i 


W KEY, MEILKE, & BIDDLE, PflTLAin^LPI ‘ i A ; 
RICH4KpSOi\, LORD, & HOLBROOK, BOSTONT. 
183 >. 








t 

.i 


' ^ r 




V' 


/ o 

N 




*• K 


¥ 

»r^ 'T 

• % 


m 


•i' 




S ' 

\ . 




\, 

'1 


■ M, 


(^t w 

V . 




/ 


• *. .'•:«' 




•> 

<11^ 




^ \ 


\ 


v 


r 






f 

> . 

4 - r, 

a 



• t 

L 





i . - 


4 





‘ V * * 


» 4 


‘ N 


.. *‘V' 


•4 

'<T* 


\ 




.f 


h *: 


;' .• '■ •f‘.V;-> 

J '";• ; 7 V ' ' 


V • •■ -1,^ 0 





4 . ;• 


rv. . 


• • -- ' 1 ■ 
^ • •'". V M'- 




^ 4 



* \ 1 ' 4 ^ 




-<• jV. 









V': 

/ 


Book 






PRKSKNTEI) in’ 


-■r/ 

'^fv 


. 4 



•■ 1 / 

r 


• 1 ! 


s 





•4IC 


e ■ '■' 

U 


I 4 


.7 . ■ ' 




.'I 


* 


' > I 

• ‘ 


‘t/ 


■ f* -4 

f, »<•, 


-v^r,' 


'I . 


/ 


k 

f I 






r' * 


A. 4 . 


irLtl 


V 


1 






/ 


f 






% 


y 


k 


I 



> 


V 





1 I 


s 




/ 




• « 


4 


I 


r 






>' 






•W*k 


I 



\ 





I 


r 

« 





« 


* 


0^ 


i 

I 


t 





t 

\ 

i 


\ 

I *■ 


♦ 





' t 


t 


t 


4 . 


i 


» 


4 



. -fc!-. • -■ .v-.v V 

v-^.' > '. 

5'. 1 ‘ ' 

'• -' J 'V ' 


^ , . v 






' V ^ 


♦ 1 


A 








4 

f 


M 

> % 
I 







f 


% • 


# 


# 

* 


V 


» 1 




< • 

I I 

1 




p 


I 


\ 


I 



j -' 




/ 




r 


4 


0 



\ 




-T 


'in 1 


V 


s 


't 



V 


i 


I 



fu' 



A 4 




^ 4 


r 







« 



• V 




I 






^ • 
> . 


« ' 



i 


I 


A 


f 






• «■' ■ - V A- 

•k < / ^ *. V;<s. 

V. s' - / ‘ 


k t 

r- 


k V 


pj 


* 4 A 




,s 




w • 

4 4 


/ 


; .i 



^ I 













PICTURE OF 


THE NEW 


WORLD. 



DISCOVEHEU BY COLUMBUS OCTOBER 11, 1402, 



A 




THE 


FIRST BOOK 

OF 


H I S T O R Y. 



FOR CHILDREN AND YOUTH. 


t 

BY THE AUTHOR OF PETER PARLEY’S TALES- 
WITH SIXTY ENGRAVINGS AND SIXTEEN MAPS. 


PHILADELPHIA: KEY, MEILKE, AND BIDDLE; 
BOSTON : RICHARDSON, LORD, & HOLBROOK. 

1832 . 



RICHARDSON, LORD AND HOLBROOK 


WILL SOON PUBLISH, 


A SECOND BOOK OF HISTORY, including tlie Historj and Geog. 
raphy of the various countries of Europe, Africa and Asia, with 16 maps and 
numerous engravings, by the same Author, and designed to follow tliis First 
Book of History. 

Also, 

Peter Parley’s History of Ancient and Modern Greece. 

And 

Peter Parley’s History of Ancient Rome, with an account of 
Modern Italy, witli maps and many engravings. 



\ 



Knt£RED according to Act of Congress, in the year 1831, by Samuel G. Goodricii, 


in the Clerk’s Office of tlie District Court of Massachusetts. 


PREFACE. 


Amoxr the multitude of books for juvenile instruction, there are notafcAvof an historical 
nature; hut it is remarkable that History is not an universal, nor even a general study 
in our common schools.^ This cannot arise from any want of adaptation in the subject 
itself, to the i)urposes of instruction; on the contrary, it is manifest that it is peculiarly 
adapted to these j)urposes. We do not mean to say this of history as it lias been 
generally treated ; for most school books of this kind are but little more than ex- 
tended chronological tables, and offer nothing to the reader but a tedious mass of 
dates, and general observations. Such works may be useful to people of mature age, 
but they neither amuse, nor instruct the class of readers, for whom they are designed. 
Hut of all reading, there is none that so readily attracts the attention, anti lays hold of 
the sympatliy of chiklren and youth, as lively narratives of the enterprises, adventures, 
dangers, trials, successes and failures of mankind, and these it is the business of History 
to display. Hooks which treat of the works of nature and art, which exhibit geogra])hi- 
cal details, observations upon natural history, and natural philosophy — any, or all of 
these will be immediately thrown aside by a child left to his choice, for a book of stories, 
delineating events, in corrnexiorr with the developement of human passioirs. 

If tlien history, when propeiiy treated, is one of the most attractive of all studies, why 
is it not regularly taught in all our schools? It is not because it is deemed less useful, 
than other studies; “the proper study of mankind is man,” arrd it cannot be erueretl 
upoir too soon. After possessing a knowledge of religion, and the duties we owe to God 
and our neighbour, history is the most important of all studies. It relates to us what 
has been done by nrankind, arrd thus teaches us what they may do. It acquaints us 
with the true character of our race, and eirables us to know ourselves better. It ap- 
prizes us of the existence of evil, and the way to shun it ; it acquaints us with the ex- 
isterrce of good, arrd -shows us how to attain it. . 

It cannot be, thei'efore, tlrfit the limited use of history in our schools, is owing to an 
idea that it is useless. The fact must arise from the want of historical’ books, written 
in a style which shall render them botli interesting and j)rofitable. Such at least is the 
conviction of the author of this volume ; and believing that a fii-st hook of History for 
general use in our schools is much to be desired, he has undertaken, and now offers 
to the public, the present volume. 

In preparing it, two things have been had in view. In the first place it should be 
useful ; and in the second }>lace to make it useful it must be entertaining. To accom- 

f )lish these ends, the book is provided with majis, and before the pupil entera upon the 
listory of any state or countiy, he is to learn Cinm them, its shape, boundaries, rivers, 
shores, &c. He is then briefly made acquainted with its jiresent state, its towns, and cities, 
and the occupations of its inhabitants. These geographical details are conveyed to the 
])uj)il, by narrating supposed travels through "^rious countries, in which he takes a part. 

The pupil, being thus acquainted with the ^i/scnt condition of a country, is then 
told its Iiistor)\ The author has been careful to introduce precise tlatcs, for without 


VI 


PREFACE. 


them, it would be impossible to give any distinct view of any poition of histoiy. But 
he h;is sought more assiduously to select from the »p-eat mass of events, those topics 
wliicli would be most calculated to ])lease ajid to improve the young reatler. He has 
introduced many tales, anecilotes, adventures, and curious particulars, for the double 
purpose of enlivening the book, and throwing light upon the jieriods and events with 
which they are connected. A large number of engravings have been inserted Jis well 
for illustration, as lor fixing certain ideas permanently in the memory of the jiupil. . ‘ • 

A familiar style has been adopted, and the materials throughout are arranged on a 
new ])lan. The common method is to begin at the earliest date, and follow down the 
train of events to the present time. The author of this work has partially revei'sed 
this method. He begins with the incMvidual states of our own country, and hrst exhib- 
its their present condition. He then notices a few recent events, and liaving fixed tlie 
attention of the reader upon the subject, proceeds to detail its history. Avoiding gene- 
ral statements, lie' has endeavoured to keep the attention and interest of the puytil alive, 
by descriptions, sketcht^, and tales, which may at once gratify the taste, and improve 
tlie understanding. : 

It will be observed, that although the book contains a large quantity of matter, yet it 
only embraces the histoty of the Western Continent. It is believed that it will be more 
useful, than if it contained tlie, history of the Eastern Continent, also, in the same number 
of {)ages. In proportion tia ’a work is condensed, it becomes general, and of coui-se un- 
interesting to children. It tVasMeemed preferable, therefore, to give an ample history 
of our own Hemisphere, andnfthe pkm should be approved, a second volume, embrac- 
ing the histpiy of tlie Eastern Hemisphere, will be pubhshed. 


I' 

SUGGESTIONS TQ TEACHERS. 

The author .would respectfully suggest, tliat this volume be put into the hands of 
pupils, of from nine to sixteen years of fige. It is. not perhaps essential, but it would be 
better, that they siipidd have jiassefl tlirough some small work on geography. The 
teacher is of coui-se at liberty to n'ject the questions on the chapters inserted through- 
out the work, and to frame such interrogations for Exercising the pupil, as he chooses. 
It is recommended even if they afe iKS^l, tliat they bq not strictly adhered to ; the teach- 
er’s knowledge of the character of his jiufiils, wih often suggest to him more apt and 
afipropriate interrogations, than could be framed without that" knowledge. At the end 
of the work is a chronological table, which tlie autbor deems important, and he re- 
commends that it be thorouifhlv riveted in the rnembry of the pupil, before he is al- 
lowed to quit the study. It is also^ recommended thaUlie pupil in his progi-css throufrh 
the work be required to tell the length, and average width, of each of the countries 
ffmnd on the maps ; these may be ascertained witirsufiicient accuracy by applyint? the 
scale of miles. In this and some otiier parts of his studies the pupil may need the aid 
of tiie teaciier. 


CONTENTS 


I 

(•Ichat* 1. — State of Maine. Geography. Trade. 
Ij Fauns. Trees. Moose. 

t Chap. "2. — Maine continued. Indian Old Town. 
I Penobscot U’libe. iii^tory. Setlleinent in I\faine. 

Story oftlie Norridgewock Tribe. History of Maine. 
yC;aAP. 3. — State of ^New Hampsliire. Isles of 
ii Shoals. Sea Serpent. Geouraphy of the State. 
1. C. 4. — x\ew Hani()shire continued. The Notch, 
jl Slide. History. Attack on Dover. 

}' 5. — State of Venuoat. Geogiapliy. Salmon. 

'’! Windsor. Green Mountains. Towiis. 

C. 6. — Vermont C(»ntimied. inundation. Battle on 
1 Lake Cliamplain. Of Bennington. Settlement. 

. C. 7. — State of Massacimseits. Commerce. Agri- 
j' culture. Mantifactures. Btjston. ''J'ovvns. 

C. 8. — Massacliusetts continued. Centennial Cele- 
f bration. Settlenienf of Bctstoa. Settlement of 
1 Plymouth. Otlier Setrlements. History. 

C. 9. — State of Rhode Islami, Towns. Settlement 
Ii of Rhode IsJantl. Hist >ry. 

C. JO. — State (#r Connecticut. Description, Nor- 
1 wich Indians. New liOiidon, Anecd >te. Ilart- 
j ford. New Haven. Other 3\)wns. People. 
jC. 11.— Connecticut continued. He»-mite3s. Cliar- 
! ter Oak. Historw Story of Mr. Cliester. 

C. 12. — New Lhmiand. Cliinafe. Connecticut Riv- 
er. Scliool-houses, Cimrciies. 'I’uwns. 

[C. 13. — New England continued. TJie Puritans, 
I* Settlement of Plymouih, Sarnosot. Massasoit. 

I Anecdote. Otlier Seitlcirs. Settienient of Boston. 

Ei Dorche>ter and Salem. 

C. 14.— New rmirland continued. Sir Henry Vane. 

Ann Hutchinson. Indians. Capture of Mystic. 

C. 15. — New Eiiirland continued. Hatred of the 
Indians. Philip excites tiiein to War. 

C, IG. — New England continaed. Springfield burnt, 
SlaughteraL Muddy Brook. War in Mai ie. New 
liampsiiire. Attack on Brookueid. Tlie Narra- 
garisetts. Death of IMiilip. 

C. 17.— New England continued. Charters of the 
Colonies taken away. Andr ess imprisoned, and 
sent to England. Su:)posed WitcUcraft at Salem. 
C, 18. — New JOnglaud’ continued War lietvvoen 
England and j'^iance. Attack tm Haverhill. Sto- 
ry of Mr. Dunstaii. Mrs Diin^iin. Oueen An- 
ne’s War. Attru k on Deerfield. Port Royal taken. 
C, 19 . — New England c->nrinned. Indian War in 
Maine. Ivitur George’s VV’'ar. <kip:ure of Lou sbiirg, 
C. 20.— Tile Puritans. 3'iieir Character. Object in 
coming to Anr^rica. Persecut on ol ^le BajUists. 

21 . — Puritans roiitinned. Persecution of the Uua- 
kers. Kedexions. Sketches. 

22. — State of New York. Geosraphiral Descrip- 
tion. City of New Voi k. I'assage u() the Hudson, 

C. 23.— New York continued. Albany. Ulica. 

Trenton Falls. Indians. Niagara Falls, Stories. 
C. 21.— New York continued. Erie<kanal. Settle- 
ment of New York. War avitli the [nd aiis. 
Another War. Surrender to the Duke , of York. 
25. — New ^'ork (ami tuned. I’iie Five xNations. 
C. New York continued. Burning of Schenecr- 
tady. Gov. Slaughter. Exploit- of Peter Scin ler. 
C. 27.— New York continued. Pirates. RfdtertKidd. 

Persecution of the Neareeii, Peace of 1747. 

C. 2\ — State of New Jersey. 'JVavels. Orchards. 
Joseph Bonaparte. History. SeUieiue*nts. Divisiun 


j into East and West Jersey. Battle of Monmouth. 53 
C. 29. — State of F’ennsylvania. Philarlelpliia. Fair- 
mount Waterworks. Travels. Roads. Pridg- 
en Quakers. Germans. Aileghnny Mountains. 
Pittsburg. C(->:il-Mines. Canals. Rivers. Climate. 53 
C. 30. — Pennsylvania continued. History. Wm. 
Pent). SerilemtMit. Penn comes to America. 
Foniuls Philadelpliia. Returns to England. Rap- 
id Settlement ofPennsylvania. Penn again visits 
liisCulonv. Death of Penn, ('haracler. Indians. 59 
C. 31. — State of Delaware, Sitnalion. 'i’raveis. 
Break-water. Hevedutionary War. Delaware 
Kejiment. Settlement of Delaware. Paradise 
Point. In li ins. Governor Risingh. Peter Stuy- 
vesan. (Nipture of tlie Dutch. Histoiy. 6J 

C. 3-2. — Slateof Maryland. Travebs. Negro Slaves. 

Slavery. Wheat Fi(dd. d'.ob.icco. Balliinore. 63 
C. 33. — Maryland continued. North Point. Battle. 
Attack on Wasiiinuton. Baltimore, Catholics, 
laird Baltiinore. Settlement of Maryland. In- 
dian village^*. Situation of the Colonists. Death 
of Lord Baltimore. His (Character. History. G1 

C. 34. — Middle States. General Yiew. History. Go 
C. 35. — State of Virginia. Travels. Plantations. 
Slaves. Planters. (Mimate. Face of tlie Coun- 
try. Natural CuriosiMes. Rrthmond. Norfolk. C7 
C. 33. — Virginia continued. IMonlicello. Jetfer.'^on. 

Mt. Vernon. Wa-hinufon. Jamestown, iinlians. 
Spaniards. Chesepeake Bay. Indian (Miiefs. 
Settlement on James River. Jolm Smith. His 
Ad v(^nt tires. Corn! net. Powfnton. Pocahontas. 08 
C, 37. — Virginia CiUitinued. State of tfie Colony 
urid fr »^m’ih’s Government. TheCoIonists dig for 
Gold, lledexion."*. Smith chosen President. Com 
duct of Smi.h. l^ocalionlas. Smith goes to En- 
gland. Misery of the (kdonists. Lord Delaware. 71 
C. 3^. — Virginia C'ltuinued. The fkdony nourishes. 

Capt. Arg:i!. Marria::o of Pocahontas. Deatii. 
Slaves. b[)ecancanm!gh. Sl in 'liter of tiie Colo- 
nists. Vengeance of the Faiglish. History. 73 

C. .39. — State of North Car.. lina. Travels. Slaves. 
Plantations. Forests. Towns. 'J'otiacco. Rice. 
C'otton. SetFem uit l)y Episcopalians. Situation 
of tile Colony . Otlier Settlers. Rtdigion. Gov- 
ernment. Char’e■^ton. Indians. Colonel Barn- 
well. Col. Moore. Six Nations. History. 74 

C. 40. —State of South Carolina. Charleston. P'ant- 
ers. Slaves. 'I rub; of Cliarleston. History. 77 
C. 41.— State of Georgia. Face of the Country, Sa- 
vannah. Trade. Auvusta, MilkuL'evilie. In- 
diana. Okefenoko Swamp. Settlement of Geor- 
gia. Sifoati.m of the Colony. AVar with Spain. 78 
C. 42. — The ft)urs(»ntheiri .Atlantic States. General 
View. Slaves. _ Sale of Slaves. Liberia. 81 

C. 43. — .Alabama. ;* IMigsissippi and Louisiana. 

Soil and Productions of Alabama. History. Mts- 
sissippi. Foie.sts. Alligators. Natche/.. Cot- 
ton, Sugar-cane. New Orleans, Battle of 
New Orleans. Settleunent at Iberville. History 29 
Cr 44.— The Western Slates. Genera! V^ievv. 3'rav- 
els. (>iiuinnati. State (d* Ohio Indiana and 
Illinois, Missouri. Dead IMines. Prairies. St. 
Loui.s, Hunters. Tennessee and Kentuckv, , 

C, 45, — Western States continued. Origin of the 
name of Tennes.^ee. History. Seltlmnent. 
Kentucky. Daniel Bo<)ne Revolutionary War 


9 

10 

12 

13 

15 

16 

18 

19 

21 

22 

24 

23 

28 

30 i 

31 

33 

35 

37 

39 

41 

I 

42 j 

1 1 

45 

47 

49 i‘ 

51 

I 

52 

54 


8 


CONTENTS. 


Flrturishiii 5 State of the CoionT. History of Ohio. 
Settlement. Emigration. SutTertng in 1816. Pros- 
perity of Ohio. History of Indiana and Illinois. 
Settlement of Missouri. History. Slavery. 87 

C. 46. — The six Territories. Geography. History. 89 
C. 47. — The United States. Divisions. Valley of 
the Mississippi. City of Washington. Capitol. 
Presidents. G(»vernment. American Revolution. 94 
C. 48. — The French War. Colonies. French. 
English. George Washington. Governor Dinwid- 
dle. Fort dll Oiiesne. General Braddock. Attack 
of the Indians. Death of Braddock. Expedition 
against Fort Niatrara. Crown Point. • 97 

C. 49. — French War continued. England and 
France declare War. Capture of Fort Wiliam 
Henry. Loiiisburg Fort du Ciuesne. Ticonde- 
roga. Death of Loid Howe. Capture of Fort 
Frontenac. (luebec. General Wolfe. Montcalm. 
Death of Wolfe. Montreal taken. 99 

G. 51). — The Revolution. Parliament of Great Brit- 
ain. People of America. Gen. Gage. Ciuarrels. 109 
C. 51. — Revolution continued. Tax on Tea. 

New Laws. Cargoes of Tea destroyed. Port 
Bill passed. Town Meetings. Anecdote. 105 

C 52. — Revolution continued. State of the Coun- 
try. Gen. Gage. Battle of Lexington. E.xcitement 
of the People. Stories. 108 

C. 59. — Revolution continued. Stateofthe Country. 
Power of England. Revolution of the Ainerif.ans. 
Ticonderoga. Crown Point. Battle of Bunker Hill. 110 
C. 54. — Revidution continued. Continental Con- 
gress. Declaration of Independence. \'\''asliini:tou 
crosses the Delaware. Gen. Howe. Gen. Bur- 
goyne. Battle i fSaratoga. Surrender of Burgoyne. 112 
C. 55. — Revidution continued. Government of 
France. Great Britain. Joseph Reed. Battle of 
Monmouth. Destruction of Wyoming. 114 

C. .56. — Revolution continued. Gen. Sullivan. In- 
dians. Count Rochainbeaii. Benedict Arnold. 

Story of Major Andre. Norlhand South Car diria. i 
Washinston. Surrender of Lord Cornwallis. 116 

C. 57. — United States after t!ie Revolution. Wash- 
ington chosen President. His Death. Character. 
Influence of his Exapiple. La Fayette. Rellex- 
ions. John Adams. Columbia. Thomas Jeffer- 
son. James Madison. Nava! Battles. James 
Munroe. John Q,uincy Adams. Gen. Jackson. 118 
C. 58. — Britisli Possessions in North America. Divis- 
ion. Steamboats. Lakes Huron and Superior. 
Hunters. iMontreal. St. Lawrence. Unebec. 
Newfoundland. Inhabitants. Climate. People 
of Canada. History. Olvect of the Set'Iers. 122 
C. 59. — The Esquimaux. Country inhabited by the 
Esquimaux. Dogs. Rein-deer. Origin. 121 

C. 60. — Greenland. Whaling Voyage. Islands of 
Ice. Whales. White Bears. Description of the 
Greenlanders. Navigators. Animals. Settlement. 125 
C. 61. — Iceland. Face of the Country. Proverb. 
People. Occupations. Habits. Mt. Hecla. Skap- 
tar Yokul. De.scriptiou of an Eruption. Aurora 
Borealis. Discovery. Settlement. History. 127 

C. 62. — Mexico. Voyage to Blexico. Vera Cniz. 
Travelling. City of Mexico. Catholic Prie.-'ts. 
Cathedral. Country of Mexico. Mines. Popula- 
tion. Santa Fe. Mules. People. Caravans. 129 
C. 63. — 5Iexico continued. People. Indians. Te- 
nuchtitlan. Siianiards. Cortez. Capture of Ta- 
basco. Indian Attack. Defeat of the Indians. 
Treaty of Peace. Mexican Warriors. ‘’32 

O. 64. — Mexico continued. Colony founded at Ve- 
ra Cruz. Messaire from Montezuma. Cortez sets 
out for Tenuchtitlan. Ilascala. Slaughter at 
Choliila. 9'enuchtitlan. Cortez and Montezuma. 134 
C C5 — Mexico continued. Religion of the Mexi- 


cans. Temples. Montezuma taken Prisoner 
Governor of C (I ba. Narvaez. Spaniards Assault- 
ed by the Mexicans. Death of .Montezuma. Night 
af Desolation. Retreat of the .Spaniards. 13T 

C. 66. — Mexico continued. QuetliTaca. Guatimo- 
zin. Attack on 'J'emuchtitlan. 'I’ortnre of Gua- 
mozin and his Minister. Government of Mexico. 

City of Mexico.' Fate of Cortez. History. 14 ® 

C. 67. — Gnatiiriala. Mountains. Mahogany and Log- 
wood. City of Gnat imala. Ollier 'I’owiis. Gov- 
ernment. History. Mosquito Indians. Hi.siory. 14i» 
C 68. — Colomliia. Country. Climate. Elevation 
of (iuito and Santa Fe. TJie Andes. Plains. Mines. 144 
C 69 — Colombia continued. Pizarro. The Mos- 
cas. Venezuela. Germany. Spaniatd.s. Gen. 
Miranda. Buonaparte. Caraccas. Conflicts in 
New Grenada. Earthquake. Bolivar, llepultlie 
of Colombia. Independence. Death of Bolivar. 146 
C. 70. — Peru. Division. Lima. Callao. Mines. 

Cusco. Francis Pizarro. Expmlition against Peru. 143 
C. 7i. — Peru continued. Second Expedition to Pe- 
ru. Foundation of the Empire. Reception of tlie 
S|>aniards. Tlie Inca. Procession. Sbui' liter of 
the Peruvians. Atuhualpa taken Prisoner. 150 

C. 72. — Pern continued. 'I'reatment of the Inca. 

His Death. Paula, (luito taken. Conquest of 
Peru. Lima founded. Death of Pizarro. Ili.s- 
torv. Bolivar. Constitution formed. 1.52 

C. 79. — Bolivia.. Andes. Mines, i’o'osi. Discov- 
ery of the ftlines. Other Towns. Pern. 154 

C. 74. — Chili. Travels. Vineytirds. Andes. St. 

Jag ). Arancanians. Death of Valdivia. History. 

Juan Fernandes. Alexander Selkirk. 151 

C. 75. — Patagonia. Ooimtiy. Inn ibit.iiits. Huts. 
Ostriches. Terra del Fnego. People. Discove- 
ry of Pa.tagonin. People. Straits of Magellan. 158 
C. 7G. — United Provinces. Travels. Islands near 
Cane Horn. 7’ravelling. Anecdotes. Wild .Ani- 
mals. (tnndors. J’ampas. Buenos Ayres. Face 
of the Country. Soil. Towns. People. Discov- 
ery. Indians. Jesuits. History. Government. 1.57 

C. 77. — Brazil. Travels. Rio Janeiro. Harbor. 
People. Emperor. Extent of Brazil. I’op’ilalion. 
Indians. Animals. Vegemtion. Discovery. Ean- 
ciing of Cabral. St. Salvador. 9'lie Dutch. His- 
tory. Ros al Family of Portugal, (joverument. ICO 
C. 78. — Guiani. liivis'on. Country. Climate. 

Settlers. Indians. Interior Siory of Capt. 
Wa'erton. Discovery of G. b) Vasco Nunes. Sir 
Walter Raloigli. I'.l Dortido. Settlers in lintch 
Guiana. History. Olhei Settlers in Gniami. 162 
C. 79. — West fniiics. Vitssels. Havana. Sliifss. 
Trade. Fruit. Climate. Cnba. Slaves. Di.s- 
covery of Cuba. Dii^^.Jatro de Velasq'iez. Indians. 
History of C. H.avti. Fonnda'ion of St. Domingo. 
Columbus. Anecdote. History of H. Distmbances 
Christoplie. Independence of II, Government 


Porto Rico. .Tamaica. Disr overy. History. IfA 

C. 80. — West Indies contimied. inhabitants. Span 
iards. Priests. Bahamas. Cat Island. Caribbee ' 
Islands. Discovery. History. Caribs. lOi* 

C. 81. — The Ibicr.aneers. Origin. I'^time. Pieire 
!e Grand. Boldness of tlie Buccaneers. Morgan. 
Bartholomew. His Adventures. 1?0 

C, 82. — Columbus. Pirates. A'oiith of Columbus. 
Adventures. Portuguese Sailors. Pa'-sage to In- 
dia. Thoughts of Coliimlms. Government of 
Genoa. Ferd nand and Isabella. He sets sail. 173 

C. 83 — Columbus continued. First Voyage on the 
Ocean. Discovery of Ijand. Landing. Natives. 
Country. Cnba. Hayti. Return to Spain. Pro- 
cession. Other Voyages. ]75 

C. 84. — General View. I 7 i 

Chronolo-ical Ind«x. 178 


THE CHILD’S 


FIRSIVBOOK OF HISTORY. 


CHAP. 1. 

STATE OF MAINE. 


L The State of Maine is nearly as 
extensive as all the rest of New Eng- 
land, but a great part of it is still cover- 
ed with forests. You will observe on 
the map, that nearly all the towns and 
villages lie in the southern portion, to- 
ward the sea-board. 

2. There are a great many lakes in 
this State, which abound in fish. There 
are a multitude of streams and rivers; 
these afford many excellent mill-seats. 
There are a great many bays, rivulets, 
and islands along the shore. 

3. If you were to go to Maine in 
the summer, you would see many things 
to delight you. The little green islands 

Questions on the Map of Maine . — How is 
Maine bounded on the North 1 East 1 South 1 West I 
Describe the Penobscot river; that is, tell in what 
county it rises, in what direction it runs, through 
what counties it flows, and into what sea it enters. 
Describe the Kennebec in the same way. The An- 
droscoggin, Saco, St Croix. 

• Describe Moosehead Lake; that is, tell what 
county it is in, and which way it lies from Augus- 
ta, the capital of the State. Describe Grand Lake, 
Schoodic, Sebago, Timiscouala. 

Describe the following bays; that is, tell in 
which direction they are from Augusta the capital, 
and what sea or ocean they are foamed by: Penob- 
scot, Casco, Frenchman’s. 

Describe the following i-slands, by telling in what 
waters they lie, and their direction from the capital : 
'^ruud M'ron Island, Mt Desert, Deer, Fox, Boon. 


scattered along the coast, are very 
beautiful ; some of them have very 
handsome houses upon them. You 
would find the Kennebec to be a large 
river, with many handsome villages upon 
its banks. 

4. You would see a great many 
deep forests, and several pleasant to wns. 
At Gardiner you would see one of the 
prettiest churches in New England ; and 
Portland you would find to be a large 
town, almost equal to Providence, or 
Salem. 

5. In travelling through Maine, you 
would not see many manufactories, but 
you would meet with a great many saw- 

How many counties in Maine ? Their names I 
Capital of Maine I In what county i.- Augusta? 
Describe the following towns, by telling ntiat county 
each is in, and its direction from tlie capital. 
Portland, Wiscasset, Cornish, Bangor, Norridge- 
wock, Castine, Paris, York, ftlachias, Bath. What 
is the number of inhabitants in Maine? Nm'<h<»f 
of s(|uare miles ? Greatest length of Maine ? Great- 
est width, and average length ? Average width ? 

Questions on Chapter I. — 1. How extensive Is 
Maine ? Which part of this State is most .settled 1 
2. What of lakes in Maine ? Other waters 1 What 
objects along the shore ? 3. If you were to go to 
Maine in summer, what would you see along the 
coast? What of the Kennebec? 4. What other 
things woidd you see ? 5. Are -iiere many man- 
ufactories in Maine ? What of saw-mills ? Wlurt 


JO 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


mills, employed in sawing logs into 
boards and planks. You would see 
many of the men cutting down trees ip 
the woods; and at Bangor, Portland, 
Wiscasset, and other places, you would 
notice a great many vessels; some of 
them loaded with lumber, and some 
with tire-wood. 

6. If you were to ask some person 
where these vessels were going, he 
would tell you that some of them are 
bound to Boston, some to New York, 
some to Charleston, and some to other 
places. The fire-wood is carried chief- 
ly to Boston; the lumber is carried to 
almost all the sea-ports of the United 
States, and the West Indies. 

7. Y ou would observe also in Maine, 
some very good farms ; you would see 
a great many fields planted with corn, 
or sown with wheat and rye, where the 
ground is almost covered with stumps. 
1 f you were to inquire of the owner, he 
would tell you, that ten or fifteen years 
■igo, his whole farm was covered with 
thick forests. The trees have been cut 
down, one by one, and the land, by pa- 
tient labor, has been changed from a 
wilderness into meadows and wheat 
fields. 

8. If you should happen to be in 
Maine in the winter, you would find the 
snow very deep, and the air exceeding- 
ly cold. It would be weiJ while you 
are travelling, to cover your ears with 
fur, and take care to be well wrapped up, 
or your face and fingers would freeze. 
Perhaps you will meet with people 
cutting blocks of ice from the rivers, 
which they are going to send to Charles- 
ton, New Orleans, the West Indies, and 
other hot countries, to be used in sum- 
mer 


9. If you should chance to be in the 
northern, or middle parts of the State, 
you might have an opportunity of see- 
ing the Indians kill a moose. This is 
the largest animal of the deer kind. 
These animals are found in no part of 
the United States except Maine, and 



Indians Hunting a Moose; 


even there they are scarce. They were 
once common in all the northern parts 
of New England. 

CHAP. II. 

MAINE. CONTINUED. 

1. In Penobscot river, 40 miles from 
the mouth, there is a little island, called 
Indian Old Town. If you go there, you 
will see about three hundred Indians. 
They live in small houses, or huts built 
of sticks and boards, and cultivate the 
land, catch fish, and hunt wild animals. 
They are the remains of a great tribe 
of Indians, that once inhabited a largo 
extent of country in Maine. 

2. You will observe among the In- 
dians, one man, whom they call Chief. 
If you ask him to tell you the story of 
the Penobscot tribe, he will inform you, 
that there were once many thousands 




niay be seen at Bangor and other places 1 6. 

Where are the wood and lumber of Maine carried 1 
7. What of farms and farming in Maine I 8. 


What of the winter in Maine'? 9. What of the 
Moose 1 What does the picture rejiresent 1 

1. What of the Penobscot Indians '? 2. What 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


11 


of them. They, with other Indians, 
many years ago, possessed all the lands 
in Maine. 



Penobscot Chief telling of his Tribe. 


3. There were then no white men 
there; there were none but Indians. 
There were no towns and no villages, 
except small collections of Indian huts, 
called wigwams. The Indians did not cut 
down the trees ; they had no horses, and 
they had no tame animals of any kind. 

4. The whole country, far and wide, 
was covered with forests. In these 
forests there were a great many bears, 
panthers, wild-cats, wolves, deer, moose, 
foxes, rabbits, beavers, and other ani- 
mals. The Indians then did not culti- 
vate the land, except perhaps that they 
raised a little corn, and a few pumpkins. 
They lived almost entirely upon the 
wild animals, which they killed with 
their bows and arrows. 

5. But at length, some v/hite men 
came, and they began to cut down the 
trees, and build houses. Pretty soon 
they erected saw-mills, and tlien they 
cleared the land, and raised wheat, and 
rye, and corn. And at lengtli more 

would the Indian chief tell yon '? What doe s the 
picture represent I 3. Wliat was the state of 
the country before the white people camel 4. 
What wilil animals were there in the woods'? 
How did the Indians live"? 5. What huppeoed 


white people came, and they built more 
houses, and cut down more trees, and 
cultivated more land. 

6. And so the white men increased, 
and they spread their towns and vil- 
lages over the land. And the Indians 
went away, or they died ; for their for- 
ests were cut down, and they could not 
live with the white people.- Thus the 
Penobscot tribe, which once contained 
many thousands, consists now of three 
hundred Indians only. Other tribes, 
once numerous and powerful, are now 
extinct. Such would be the story that 
the Indian chief would tell you, and it 
would be all true. 

7. As early as the year 1607, about 
one hundred English people came to 
Maine, and began a settlement at the 
mouth of the river Kennebec. The 
greater part were soon discouraged, 
and fiftylive returned in the vessel that 
brought them over. 

8. There were at this time none 
but Indians in all New England, except 
the white people I am speaking of. 
These were pretty well treated by the 
natives ; but they found the winter ex- 
cessively severe, and the next year they 
all returned to England in a vessel that 
came to bring them provisions. 

9. The Norridgcwock tribe of In- 
dians preserved, for many years, a story 
about these settlers, which I will tell 
you. The white people were jealous 
of the Indians, and wished to get rid of 
them. So they one day employed a 
large number of them to take hold of a 
rope, and draw a cannon into the fort, 
When a great many had taken hold and 
the rope was drawn in a straight line, 

when the white pewple came "? 6. Wliat became 

of the Iii(>!ans'? What is the present immher of 
the Penobscot tribe I 7. What of tlie settlement 
attempted in 1607 I 8. W'hat did the sctllci-s 
finally do I 9. What storv used to he told hj 

a2 



12 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


then the white people fired the cannon 
and killed all the Indians. This is the 
story; if it is true, the white people be- 
haved very wickedly. 

10. It was in the year 1628, about 
two hundred years ago, that the first 
white men settled permanently in Maine. 
This settlement was made on the Ken- 
nebec, and several houses were built. 

11. More white people went from 
Massachusetts, and other places, and 
settled in various parts of Maine. In 
1651, Maine was attached to Massachu- 
setts, and continued to be so till the 
year 1820, when it became an indepen- 
dent Slate. It has now a governor, and 
a legislature of its own; they meet 
once a year, at Augusta, and there they 
maVe laws for the State. 

12. Maine is rapidly advancing in 
population and improvement. In 1820, 
the number of inhabitants was only 
300,000; in 1830, it was about 400,000. 
If it continues to increase with the 
same rapidity, it will soon be a power- 
ful section of the country. 

' CHAP. III. 

STATE OF NEW HAMPSHIRE.- 

1. There are many things in New 
Hampshire that are very interesting. 
About eleven miles to the east of Ports- 
mouth, are some islands, called the Isles 
of Shoals. Tile largest belongs to New 
Hampshire; it is called Staten Island, 
and on it is a little town called Gosport. 
The people are all fishermen, and are 
occupied chiefly in catching cod-fi^?h. 

(he Norridgewock Indianp ^ 10. Wlien was the 

first permanent settlement made in ]\Iaine by white 
peopled 11. When was Maine attached to Mas- 
iachusetts 1 When did Maine become an indepen- 
•Jent State 1 Wliere does the Legislature of Maine 
.meet 1 12. What can yon say of the Increase of 

Maine t 


2. These cod-fish are caught with 
hooks and lines. They are then car- 
ried ashore, and dried upon the rocks. 
A sea-serpent was seen by several 
people near these islands, a short time 
ago. He came so near to a boat, that 
a man who was in it, could have struck 
him with an oar. His color was nearly 
black; he was larger round than the 
body of a man, and he seemed about as, 
long as the mast of a vessel. 



Sea-serpent near the Isles of Shoals. 


3. Portsmouth is the only sea-porl 
town in New Hampshire. It is about 
as large as Hartford or New Haven, 
It is a very handsome place, and there 
are a number of beautiful buildings 
there. Dover is a large manufacturing 

Questions on the Map of Nexo Hampshire . — ■ 
Boundaries of this State 1 Describe the Merrimack, 
Ammonoosne. Describe Lake Winnipiseogee, 
Sqnam, Sunappee. In what part of tlie vState are 
the White Mountains 1 Where is Mount Washing- 
ton % Describe the Isles of Shoals. How many 
counties in New Hampshire 1 Their names 1 

Capital of New Hampshire'? In what county 13 
Concord '? Describe the following towns : Port^ 
mouth, Exeter, Dover, Keene, Plyinonth, Walpole, 
Lancaster, Haverhill, Amherst. Population of New 
Hampshire 1 Extent'? Greatest length of New 
Hampshire 1 Greatest width'? Average length 1 
Average width 1 

I. What of the Isles of Shoals 1 2. What of 

the Sea-serpent ”? What does the picture repre- 
sent'? 3. What of Portsmouth 1 Dover 1 4. What 


THE child’s first book of history. 


13 


town. Some of the manufactories are 
very extensive. I suppose one of these 
establishments makes at least 8000 yards 
of cotton cloth every day. 

4. There are a great many other 
pleasant towns in New Hampshire. 
Exeter is a handsome place, and Phil- 
lips’ Academy is there, in which boys 
are taught Latin, Greek, and many 
other things. At Concord, where the 
legislature meets every year, there is 
an elegant State-house. 

5. At Franconia, in Grafton Coun- 
ty, there are some very celebrated 
iron-works. There are mines of iron 
there, and the people get great quanti- 
ties of it. They make it into stoves, 
kettles, hollow ware, and castings for 
machinery. The mountains around this 
place, are very wild and beautiful. At 
Hanover is Dartmouth College, an old 
and respectable seminary, where a great 
many young men are educated. 

6. There are several very fine lakes 
in New Hampshire. If you should ev- 
er travel in this State, you will find the 
country very hilly, and very interesting. 
Most of the people are engaged in 
farming. They have a great many 
horses, cattle and sheep. 

7. As you pass along, yoinvill some- 
times find yourself on the top of a high 
hill. You will see around you a great 
many other hills ; and in the distance, 
you will observe the tops of blue moun- 
tains. By and by, you will descend in- 
to a valley. You will see the streams 
running rapidly down the sides of the 
hills, and at the bottom of the valley 
you will frequently find a sheet of 
bright water, sparkling like a mirror. 

8. Before you return, you must vis- 
it Lake Winnipiseogee. It is really 

of Exeter 1 Coneord 1 5,. Franconia'? Hanover'? 

6. Wiiat of Lakes'? Face of the country 1 The 
peojjle '? 7. What will you observe in travel- > 

r 


one of the most delightful lakes in the 
world. I suppose you have heard a 
great deal about Loch Lomond in Scot- 
land ; but I assure you. Lake Winni- 
piseogee is much more beautiful. 

9. After you have seen this lake, 
you should visit the White Mountains. 
These are the highest mountains in the 
United States east of the Mississippi. 
Mount Washington, the tallest peak, 
is more than six thousand feet above 
the level of the sea. 

10. It is a delightful thing to travel 
about these mountains in summer. A 
great many people visit them every 
year, and they all come back much 
gratified with their journey. Among 
the mountains, there is a place called 
the Notch. Here the mountain seems 
to be divided into two parts, from the 
top to the bottom. 

11. This chasm affords a passage 
through which the river Saco runs. 
There is also a road through it, and as 
you pass along, you will be astonisned 
at the mighty rocks that lie heaped up 
on both sides of you. 

CHAP. IV. 

NEW HAMPSHIRE.— CONTINUED. 

L A few years since, an awful 
event occurred at the Notch in the 
White Mountains. An immense mass 
of rocks, earth, and trees, of several 
acres in extent, slid doAvn from the 
height into the valley. It is scarcely 
possible to describe the scene. The 
mountains were shaken for several 
miles around. The air, put in motion 
by the falling mass, swept by like a hur- 
ricane. The noise was far louder than 

in^'? S. What of Lake Winnipiseogee '? 9. The 

White Mountaing '? Mount \V^•^shington '? 10. 

What of the Notch '? 11. The river Saeo 1 


14 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTOR/. 


thunder. Rushing down to the bottom 
of the valley, the rocks overturned 
and buried everything before them. 

2. The bed of the river Saco was 
filled up; the road was covered over; 
and acres of ground, before fit for cul- 
tivation, now exhibited a confused mass 
of rocks split and shivered, and trees 
torn up b)^ the roots, their trunks broken 
into a thousand pieces. 

3. There is a circumstance of pain- 
ful interest connected with this event. 
There was, on the side of the valley, a 
small house belonging to a man of the 
name of Willey. He, with his wife and 
two or three children, was in this house, 
when the mountain began to slide down. 
They heard the dreadful sound, and ran 
out of the house, to save themselves. 



Slide in the White Mountains. 


4 . But alas, the avalanche of rocks 
and earth swept o’f^er and buried them 
forever in the ruins ! The house stood 
still, safe and untouched, and if they 
had remained in it, they too had been 
saved. The house, I believe, remains 
tliere still, but the happy family that 
once inhabited it, are not there ! 

5. Somewhat more than two hun- 
dred years ago, New Hampshire, like 

1. What of tlie Notch in the White Mountains ? 
3. Wliat of the Willey Family 1 Describe the pic- 
lur'>. 5. What of N. 11. about two hundred years 
ago 1 What took place in 1623 1 When was the 


Maine, was covered wita forests, and 
inhabited by Indians ; but in 1623, some 
English people came and built a house 
on Piscataqua river, which was called 
Mason Hall. The same year some of 
the people went farther up the river, and 
settled at Cocheco, now called Dover. 
The first house in Portsmouth was 
built in 1631. 

6. In 1641, New Hampshire was 
attached to Massachusetts, but in thirty- 
eight years after, that is, in 1679, the 
king of England separated it from Mas- 
sachusetts. It then became a royal 
province; the governor being appoint- 
ed by the king of England. 

7. In 1775, New Hampshire, with 
the other colonies, engaged in the revo- 
lution. A constitution, or form of gov- 
ernment, was then adopted by the peo- 
ple, which remained till 1783. At that 
time, a new constitution was formed, 
which remains in force till this day. 
The early history of New Hampshire 
is full of incidents relating to the wars 
with the Indians. I shall have occasion 
to notice some of these, when I come 
to give an account of New England. 

8. I will however tell you one of 
these stories now. In 1689,/^he sava- 
ges made a dreadful attack upon Dover. 
They had been provoked by the white 
people, and determined on revenge. 
But they pretended to be friendly, and 
on the fatal night sent their women to 
get lodgings in the houses of the white 
people. These were admitted, and when 
all was quiet, they softly opened the 
doors. The Indians then rushed in, kill- 
ed twenty persons, carried twentynine 
away as prisoners, and fled with such 
rapidity, as to escape from the people, 
who came to attack them. 

first house in N. II. built 1 6. What took place 

in 1641 1 In 1679 1 7. In 17751 What io 

17831 8. What of Dover 1 


THE child’s first ROOK OF HISTORY. 


15 


CHAP. V. 

STATE OF VERMONT. 

1. Connecliciit river separates Ver- 
mont, as you see by tlie map, from 
New Hampshire on the east. This 
river runs through a valley of several 
miles in width, which is very rich and 
beautiful. The meadows here are ex- 
ceedingly fine. Very large crops of corn, 
wheat and oats are also cultivated in 
the valley. 

2. Vermont has several very plea- 
sant towns along Connecticut river. 
Brattleborough is one of the prettiest 
villages in the State. It has several 
manufactories, and it is a place of a 
good deal of business. Bellows Falls 
is situated where the river tumbles over 
some rocks, in a very violent manner. 

3. There are a great many mills at 
this place. There is a bridge over the 
cataract, from which you can look down 
upon the whirling waters. There were 
once a great many salmon in Connec- 
ticut river, and the Indians, about one 
hundred years ago, used to kill a great 
many of them with spears, as they at- 
tempted to ascend the falls. They 
were very expert at this, and would 
often take several of them in the course 
of an hour. 

4. Windsor is a very pleasant town, 
and has considerable business. If you 
ever go to Windsor, I hope you will 
go to the top of Ascutney Mountain. 
It is very lofty, and when you are on 

Questions on the Map of Vermont. — Bounda- 
ries 1 I)escril)e Lainoile River, Onion, Missisciue, 
Otter Creek. Descrilje Lake Champlain, jMeinplire- 
magog, Dunrnore. Through what counties do the 
Green Mountains run d How many counties inV. 1 
Their names 1 Capital t In what county is Montpe- 
lier 'I Describe the following towns: Windsor, 
Brattleborough, Royalton, Middlebury, Burlington, 
Bennington, VV'cslininster, Rutland, Woodstock. 


i the top, you can see all around you, to 
;an immense distance. You will also 
llnd, quite on the summit of this moun- 
tain, a beautiful little lake of clear 
water. 

5. In going from the eastern to the 
western part of Vermont, you will cross 
a great many mountains. These are 
called the Green Mountains. There is 
a range of them running through Ver- 
mont from north to south. They spread 
over all the middle parts of this State. 

(). On the western border of Ver- 
mont, is a very large lake called Cham- 
! plain. At Burlington, you will find a 
steam-boat ready to carry you on the 
lake toward Canada. A^ou will be very 
much pleased with Burlington, for it is 
one of the handsomest towns in New 
England. It is situated on the shore 
of the lake, and gives you a very fine 
prospect of it. 

7. At this place is a college called 
the University of Vermont. If you go 
to Middlebury, you will also find a col- 
lege there. You will see at Middle- 
bury, a great many manufactories, and 
a quarry, where they obtain very hand- 
some colored marble. 

8. Montpelier is a handsome town, 
and there the legislature meets once a 
year, to make laws for the State. In 
passing through Vermont, y‘.'U will per- 
ceive that most of the people are farm> 
ers. They raise a great many horned 
cattle, and sheep, and hogs, and horses, 
"rhe horses are very fine ones. !Many 
of the tine horses you see in New York, 

Population of Vermont 1 Stpiare miles 1 Great- 
est length of V. t Greatest width 1 Average 
length 1 Average width ] 

O O 

1. What of Connecticut River '? Valley of 
Connecticut River t 2. Brattleboro’ ? .^.Bellows 
Falls Inrlians % 4. Windsor 1 Ascutney Moun- 

tain "? 5. Green Mountains t 6. Lake Cham- 
i plain 1 Biirlingtor 1 7. Middlebury 8. Montpe- 


16 


THE child’s first book of history.' 


Boston, and Hartford, come from Ver- 
mont. 

9. During the winter, the weather 
is cold and the snow falls to a great 
depth. It is sometimes four or five feet 
deep. The people have three or four 
months’ line sleighing. Although the 
air is very sharp, yet the winter is a 
very merry season in this State. The 
children ride on their sleds down the 
hills, and the people glide swiftly over 
the hills and valleys in their sleighs. 



CHAP. VI. 

VERMONT. CONTINUED. 

1. About twenty years ago, a very 
singular event occurred in Vermont. 
There was a very large pond or lake, 
in the northwestern part of the State; 
it was three miles long, and one wide. 
One' day, some men were at work at a 
bank of earth at the end of this pon*!. 

2. Suddenly tlie bank gave way, 
and the water came rushing out at the 
place with great violence. For several 
miles, it rolled on in a torrent, sweep- 
ing off mills, houses, barns, and cattle, 
and barely giving the inhabitants time 

tier t What of tlie people in Vermont 1 Horses'? 
Q. Winter 1 Describe the picture. 

1 . What event took place in Vermont, about 


to escape. It did not stop, till the 
whole pond was exhausted. Where 
the pond used to be, there is now only 
the bed of a small river. 



Inundation in Vermont. 


.3. Almost twenty years ago, there 
wiit§ a* famous battle fought on Lake 
Champlain, between some American 
and' /British ships. The battle took 
place -in sight of Burlington. There 
were thousands of people along the 
shore to witness it. There were sev- 
eral American vessels and several Brit- 
ish vessels also. The American shij)s 
were commanded by Commodore Mac- 
donough* 

4. They fought each other with 
cannon for more than two hours. At 
length the British,/ ships were beaten, 
and the American.4 took them nearly 
all. Thisdiappened ^during the late war 
with England, of wlinch I shall tell you 
more before I get through the book. 

5. A little more than tifty years 
ago, there was a celebrated battle fought 
at Bennington between some American 
and British soldiers. Gen. Stark, with 
some New Hampshire and Vermont 
troops, attacked some British soldiers 
commanded by Col. Baum at that place. 

twenty years ago '? 3. What battle on Lake Cliani- 
plain near twenty years ago 1 Describe tills bat- 
tle. 5. What battle at Bennington near lifty years 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


17 


6. The British troops were dressed 
in fine red coats, and white pantaloons. 
They had beautiful music, and their 

; officers were mounted on fine horses. 

\ But the Vermont and New Hampshire 
^len were not regular soldiers; they 
were farmers, and mechanics, and mer- 
chants, who went to war merely to drive 
these British soldiers from the country. 

7. The Americans were dressed in 
their common clothes. The British 
troops, who were so finely attired, de- 
spised them. They called them Yan- 
kees, and laughed at their homespun 
dress. But when the battle began, the 
laughter of the British troops was done. 
The Americans fell upon them, and 
killed a great many of them, and by 
and by the British fled. 

8. As they w'ere running away, they 
met a good many more British soldiers. 
Thinking themselves now strong enough 
to beat the Americans, they went back, 
and began to fight again. But the 
Americans attacked them with such 
vigor, that soon seven hundred of the 
British were killed and wounded. Col. 
Baum was killed, and the rest of the 
British ran away. This battle took 
place during the revolutionary war, of 
which I shall tell you more by and by. 

9. Vermont was not settled by the 
white people till some time after the 
other New England States. There, 
was a fort built near Brattleborough, in 
1724, called Fort Dummer. The re- 
mains of it are still to be seen. It was 
built to protect the people, who had 
settled near there, from the Indians. 

10. Vermont was settled principally 
by people from Connecticut. They 
first established themselves along on 
Connecticut river, and afterwards in 


ago 1 Describe this battle. 9. Settlement of 
Vermont'? Fort Diimrner ? 10. ^Vbo were the 

first settlers of Vermont What of these «ettlers 1 


Other parts of the State. They had a 
good many skirmishes with the Indians, 
and for a long time there was a great 
I dispute whether the land belonged to 
New York or New Hampshire. 

11. It was decided in England, in 
1664, that it belonged to New York, and 
consequently, the government of that 
colony began to sell the land to any 
persons who would buy. The settlers 
thought this very unjust, and determin- 
ed to resist. New York then sent 
troops into Vermont and there was 
some fighting. These difficulties were 
not settled till years after. 

12. During the revolutionary war, 
Vermont \vas independent, and in 1791, 
it became one of the United States. It 
is now little more than one hundred 
years since this State was a mere wil- 
derness occupied only by' scattered tribes 
of savages, bears, and wolves. Now it has? 
a great many flourishing towns, and it 
is expected that steam-boats will soon 
navigate the Connecticut, as far up as 
Windsor. A year or two ago, a steam- 
boat ascended the riverto the distance of 
two hundred miles from its mouth, and 
was warmly greeted by the inhabitants 
along the hanks. 



The People ot Vermont welcoming a Steam-boat 


11. VVluit took place in 1664 1 12 When did 

V. become one of the United States'? What of 
Vermont one hundred years ago 7 What of it now 1 
Describe tlie picture. 


18 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


CHAP. VII. i 

I 

STATE OF MASSACHUSETTS. 

1. Massachusetts is not a large State, 
but there are a great many people in it. 
Those who live along the sea-board at 
Boston, Salem. New Bedford, Nantuck- 
et, and other places, own a great many 
ships, brigs, sloops, and schooners. 
Some of these ships are sent to Eng- 
land, and other parts of Europe, and 
tliey bring back various kinds of goods. 

2. Other ships are sent to China, 
and they bring back tea. The trade 
carried on by these ships, is called 
commerce. Some of the vessels go to a 
great distance to catch whales, for their 
oil. Other vessels go out to catch cod- 
fish. A great many sloops, and schoon- 
ers, and brigs, go to New York, Phila- 
delphia, Charleston, and other places. 

3. They carry a good many articles 
away, which are not wanted in Massa- 
chusetts, and get in exchange for them, 
other articles that are wanted here. So 
you see, there are a great many people 
constantly occupied in managing these 
ehips. You may often see several hun- 
Ired vessels of various kinds at Boston. 

4. In those parts of the State re- 
mote from the sea, the people of Mas- 

QuestioJis on the Map of Massachusetts . — 
Boundaries 1 Describe the Merrimack, River 
Cliai les, Deerfield, Westfield. What range of moun- 
tains in M.l Through what counties do these moun- 
tains run 1 Describe Massachusetts Bay. Barns- 
table, Cape Cod Bay, Buzzard’s Bay. Describe the 
following islands: Martha’s Vineyard, Nantucket, 
Elizabeth, Dukes. 5. How many counties in M. 1 
Their names "I Capital 1 In what county is Bos- 
.on 1 Describe the following towns: Salem, New 
Bedford, Newbnryport, Worcester, Amherst, Cam- 
oridge, Northampton, Springfield, Greenfield, Deer- 
Held, Concord, Lexington, Pittsfield, Stockbridge, 
Westfield, Williamstown. Population of M.l 
Square miles I Greatest length of M. I Greatest 
tt idth 1 Average length I Average width 1 


sachusetts are chiefly occupied in agri- 
culture. There are a great many very 
fine farms, and the people manage them 
extremely well. There are also very 
extensive manufactories in Massachu/ 
setts. Lowell is a great manufacturing 
town* I suppose there are 40,000 yards 
of cotton cloth made there every week. 

5. There are many other manufac- 
tories, at Waltham, Taunton, Canton, 
Ware, Springfield, Framingham, and 
other places. The goods manufactur- 
ed in these towns are chiefly carried 
to Boston, and are thence taken to New 
York, Philadelphia, Charleston, New 
Orleans, and various foreign markets. 

6. Boston is the largest town in New 
England. It has more than sixty thou- 
sand people in it. There are a great 
many interesting things in Boston. The 
Common is a very beautiful place. It is 
delightful to see it covered with people, 
men, women and children, on a pleasant 
summer evening. How pleased the 
boys are to get around the Frog-pond, 
and throw sticks into it, so that they 
may see the dogs swim in and get them ! 



Boys playing in Boston Common. 


1 . What of M.l The people along the sea- 
board 1 2. Wliat is commerce '1 What of ves- 

sels belonging to M. I 4. What of the people re- 
mote from the sea 1 Manufactories in M.l 5, 
What of the goods manufactured in M.l 6. What 
of Boston 1 The Common 1 Describe the pictu»»- 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


19 


7. The State-house is finely situated, 
and it has a good appearance. When 
1 was young, I used to love to go to the 
top of the State-house, from which there 
is a splendid prospect. I could see the 
ocean, with a great many islands in it, 
and I could see a great many fine towns 
all around Boston, and I could look 
down upon the city itself, and see al- 
most all that was going on in the streets. 

8. There are a great many hand- 

some buildings in Boston. The Stone 
Market is a very fine building, and I do 
not think there is a more beautiful mar- 
ket in the W'-orld. Tremont House, 
King’s Chapel, St Paul’s Church, and | 
Trinity Church, are very elegant edi-j 
fices. I 

9. Salem is a large town, and many j 
of the people are engaged in commerce. 1 
Worcester and Northampton are two i 
remarkably handsome towns. Massa- 
chusetts abounds in beautiful villages. 
It is pleasant to observe, in travelling 
through it, the great number of very 
neat meetinghouses. 

10. At Cambridge there is a Univer- 
sity, w'here young men are educated. 
There is a library there, of about thir- 
ty thousand volumes. There is a col- 
le-o at Amherst, and one also at Wil- 
liamstown. There are a great, many 
academies and schools in the State. 

11. It is not as cold in Massachu- 
setts during the w inter, as in Vermont. 
The snow is not as deep, and there is 
not as much sleighing. If you ever! 
travel through the State, you will find 
It very hilly. Near Northampton, is a 
high mountain called Holyoke. From 
the top of it, you can look down upon 
Connecticut river, winding through a 


! valley, so rich and beautiful, that it 
j seems like a carpet woven with various 
bright colors. 

CHAP. VHI. 

MASSACHUSETTS— CONTINUED. 

1. On the 17th day of September, 1830, 
there w-as a great parade in Boston 
There w^as the Governor of the State, 
and the Mayor of the Gity, and the 
President of Harvard College, and a 
great many other men; and then there 
w^ere a great many children, little boys 
and girls, from all the schools in Boston. 

2. It was a very bright day, and 
they all assembled in the Common. 
There w^ere a great many thousand 
people beside, who came to look on. 
I was there myself, and I was delighted 
at the long row^s of good little boys and 
girls. By and by, the men all w ent in 
a long procession to the Old South 
Church, and there Mr Quincy delivered 
an oration. 



Celebration of the Settlement of Boston. 


j 3. Now you will be curious to know 
wdiat all this parade w'as about. I will 
tell you. It w'as to celebrate the settle- 


7. State-house 1 8. What fine Iniiiding-s in B. 1 

9. Salem 1 Worcester I Nortluunpton 1 In 
what does M. abound ? \Vhat of meetingliouses 1 | 

10. Cambridge 1 Amherst 1 Williamstown 1 j 


Academies and schools 1 11. Winter 1 Face of the 
country 1 Mt Holyoke 1 

1. What took place in Boston in September, 
1830 I 3. What was this celebration for I Uetcrib^^ 



20 


THE child’s FIRS'! BOOK OF HISTORY. 


ment of Boston, which took place just 
two hundred years before ; that is, on the 
17th of September, 1630. 

4. About ten years before, some per- 
sons had come from England, and set- 
tled at Plymouth. At that period, many 
of the people in England were persecu- 
ted, and could not be happy there. — | 
They chose therefore to come to Amer- 
ica, and live in the woods with Indians 
and wild beasts around them, rather than 
stay there. 

5. Accordingly fifteen hundred per- 
sons came over in 1630, and settled at 
Charlestown, Dorchester, and other pla- 
ces. A man, by the name of Blackstone, 
came to the place where Boston now 
stands, and liking it pretty well, he told 
some of the people about it, and they 
went and settled there. 

6. The place was surrounded by 
swamps then, and there were so many 
wolves, that they used often to attack 
the sheep and cattle at night, and kill 
them. The first settlers here suffered 
a great deal. They had poor miserable 
luits to live in, and in winter, the wea- 
tlier was excessively cold. They were 
almost starved, too, for want of food. A 
great many of them died from hunger, 
cold, and distress. 

7. Such is a brief sketch of the first 
settlement of Boston. What a won- 
derful change has taken place in two 
hundred years ! The spot where Bos- 
ton stands was then a wilderness. The 
hills and the islands were covered with 
trees, and the Indians were living all 
around. Now the Indians are all gone, 
and there are sixty thousand white peo- 
ple living in this place; in the towns 
around it, there are at least as many 
more. 

the picture. \Vl>en did the settlement of Boston 
take place 't 4 . Why did some English people 
come to live in America 1 6. What of woives 1 


8. The forests have all been cut 
down, the hills have been levelled, the 
valleys have been filled up; houses, 
churches, and other public edifices now 
stand on the very places which were 
then occupied by Indian wigwams. The 
Bay, where then you could see only a 
few Indian canoes, is now covei^d with 
hundreds of vessels, and in the streets 
you hear the noise of a thousand wheels, 
where then were heard only the cries of 
wild beasts and savage men. 

9. Such are the mighty changes 
that have taken place in this country, 
since it was settled by the white people 
It is very interesting to look arounu, 
and see the present condition of towns, 
cities, and countries. But I think it is 
still more interesting to go back, and 
study the history of places, and see 
what has happened there in times that 
have now gone by. 

10. The first settlement inNew Eng- 
land, was made at Plymouth in 1620. 
The settlers were English people, call- 
ed Puritans. Within ten years after, Sa- 
lem, Dorchester, Charlestown and Bos- 
ton were settled. A great many people 
came over from England, and thus the 
colony grew very rapidly. 

11. They had a great many difficul- 
ties to encounter. Before they could 
raise grain to make bread of, they were 
obliged to cut down trees, and till the 
land. They had also to build houses, 
to make roads, and defend themselves 
against the Indians. Their condition 
was indeed a very hard one, and some 
of the people who came over, died from 
want and fatigue, as I have said before. 

12. Many of them were killed by 

Sufferings of the first settlers 1 7. What change 

has taken place in 200 years'? 10. When was 
the first settlement in New England '? What were 
the settlers called '? What of Salem, and other 
towns'? 11 What had the settlers to do '? What 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


21 


the savages, but in spite of all these 
evils, the colony continued to increase. 
The white people penetrated further 
into the interior, cut down the trees, 
built towns and villages, and soon spread 
themselves over the whole country that 
is now called Massachusetts. 

13. But after a while, the revolution- 
ary war broke out, and then the people 
had to defend themselves against Bri- 
tish soldiers. I shall tell you all about 
this war by and by. 1 shall tell you of 
the battle of Lexington, and of Bunker- 
hill, and many other interesting things. 

CHAP. IX. 

STATE OF RHODE ISLAND. 

1. Rhode Island is the smallest of 
the United States; but there are a great 
many manufactories there, and the peo- 
ple carry on a good deal of commerce. 
At Pawtucket tliere are some very ex- 
tensive cotton manufactories. These 
are situated on the falls of the Pawtuck- 
et river. 

2. Providence is a large town, with 
a college, called Brown University. If 
you ever visit Providence, you should 
go and see the Arcade. This is a very 
beautiful building, where you can pur- 

was llieir situation 1 12. Describe the progress 

of the settlements in Massachusetts. 13. Revolu- 
tionary war '? 

Qtcestions on the Map of Rhode Island . — 
boundaries 7 Describe the Pawtucket River, 
Charles, Wood, Pawtuxet. Describe Narragan- 
Fctliav. Describe Rhode Island, Block Island. — 
How many counties in Rhode Island 7 Their 
names 7 Capital 7 In what county is Providence 7 
Describe the following towns : Bristol, Newport, 
Pawtucket, Warren, E. Greenwich, W. Green- 
wich, Richmond, Coventry, Hopkinton. Pop- 
llation of Rhode Island 7* Extent 7 Greatest 
fcngth of R. T. 7 Greatest width 7 Average length 7 
Average width 7 


chase almost every kind of elegant mer- 
chandise. A'ou should also go and see 
the basin of the canal. This is a large 
place for boats, that come down the 
canal from Worcester, or that are pre- 
paring to go up. 

3. At Providence you can take the 
steam-boat, and go to Newport. You 
will sail down Narraganset Bay, which 
I think is one of the most beautiful baj^s 
in the world. As you go along, you 
will see Bristol at your left. It is a 
very pleasant town, and there are a 
number of beautiful houses there. 

4. Near Bristol, you can see a hill 
called Mount Hope. This is very cele- 
brated, as having been the residence of 
a famous Indian Chief, whose name was 
Philip. His story is very interesting, 
and I shall tell it to you, by and by. 

5. You will find Newport very plea- 
santly situated, but it has rather a dull 
and decayed appearance. It stands up- 
on a large island called Rhode Island. 
This gave name to the State. Newport 
is resorted to by many people in sum- 
mer, for its healthy and pleasant sea 
breezes. 

6. The first white man that settled 
in Rhode Island, was Roger Williams, 
He was a clergyman, and lived in Bos- 
ton ; but he did not think exactly as the 
other clergymen of Boston did, and so 
he was banished from Massachusetts. 

7. He went away with his family into 
the woods. After travelling a consider- 
able time, he stopped, and began to 
build himself a house. Here he made 
a settlement, and called it Providence, 
This took place in 1630, and was the 
first settlement in Rhode Island. He 


1. What of Rhode Island Manufact'-ries 7 Paw- 
tucket 7 2. Providence 7 The Arcade 7 The B»- 
sin 7 3. Steam-boat 7 Narranganset Bav 7 Bris- 

tol 7 4. MonnlHope7 5. Newport. 6. Roger 
Williams'* 7. When was tlie first seult'mcin 


2 


22 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


irc-S Mndly treated by the Indians, who 
seemed pleased at his arrival among 
them. 



Roger Williams emigrating to Rhode Island. 


8. The colony thus begun, increased 
rapidly, and in the revolutionary war, 
it united with the other colonies, in the 
struggle for freedom. It became one 
of the United States in 1790. 

CHAP. X. 

STATE OF CONNECTICUT. | 

T. Connecticut, with the exception j 
of Rhode Island, is the smallest of the 
New England States; but it has more 
inhabitants than any of them, except 
Massachusetts and Maine. The conn- 

made in Rhode Island 1 Describe the picture. 8. 
When did Rhode Island become a State 1 

Questions on the Map of Connecticut. — Boun- 
daries t Describe the Connecticut, Housatonic, 
Farmington, Thames. What range of mountains 
in Connecticut '! Through what counties do they 
runt Describe the following islands: Falkners, 
Fishers, Coos, Thimble. How many counties in 
Connecticut 1 Their names 1 Capital t In what 
county is Hartford 1 New Haven t Describe tlie 
following towns : Norwich, New London, Wind- 
ham, Tolland, Windsor, Wethersfield, Middletown, 
Litchfield, Fairfield, Danbury, Groton, Brooklyn. 
Population of Connecticut t S(juare miles t Great- 
est length of Connecticut t Greatest width t Aver- 
:*,ge length t Average width 


try is very hilly, but it abounds in 
streams and rivers, and is generally 
quite fertile. 

2. The people are very industrious. 
A great many of them are occupied in 
cultivating the land, and they culti- 
vate it very well. They raise a good 
many cattle, horses, hogs, sheep, and 
some grain and kitchen vegetables. A 
great many of the people are occupied 
in manufactories, and a considerable 
number are engaged in commerce. Al- 
most every person in this State is busy 
about something. 

3. Let us suppose that we begin at 
the eastern part of the State, and travel 
through it. We will commence our 
journey at Norwich. This town is 
situated on the Thames, and we shall 
see quite a number of vessels there, en- 
gaged in carrying on trade with New 
York, Philadelphia, and Charleston. 
There are several falls in the river, at 
Norwich, and these afford fine mill-seats, 
where there are some very extensive 
cotton manufactories. 

4. The country around Norwich, 
was once occupied by a celebrated tribe 
of Indians, called Mohicans. These 
Mohicans were once at war with some 
other Indians. One night, several of 
these Indians had encamped on the top 
of some high rocks. 

5. Their enemies discovered their 
situation, and secretly encircled them 
on all sides but one. On that side, was 
a steep precipice, at the foot of which 
was the river. When the morning 
came, the party of Indians first men- 
ti(ined were about to depart, when they 
discovered that they were surrounded 
by their foes. 

6. They made a short resistance; 

1. Wluit of Connecticut 1 2. The people! 

What do they raise ! What of Manufactures 1 
Commerce! S. What of Norwich! 4. In- 



THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


23 


but perceiving that they were outnum- 
bered by their enemies, they leaped 
over the rocks, and were killed by the 
lull. 

7. Having examined Norwich, we 
will take a boat, and go down the river 
Thames, to New London. At this place, 
we shall see a steam-boat that goes to 
New York, and we shall also observe a 
good many other vessels. Among the 
vessels, we shall see a large ship htting 
out to go to the Pacific Ocean to catch 
whales. 

8. We shall perhaps see another 
' vessel, that has just come back from 
■ a whaling voyage, after an absence of 

three years. If she is not unloaded, 
we shall find on board of her, about! 
three hundred barrels of Avhale-oil, and 
a good deal of whale-bone. The oil is 
used for burning in lamps, and the whale- 
bone is for umbrella frames, and many 
other purposes. 

9. Near New London, we shall see 
two forts; one of them is called Fort 
Trumbull, and the other. Fort Griswold. 
The latter is situated in Groton, just 
across the river Thames. 

10. I will tell you an odd story of 
what happened in Groton, near twenty 
years ago. There was war then, be- 
tween our country and Great Britain. 
There were several British ships in 
sight, and it was expected they would 
soon make an attack upon the forts. A 
company of soldiers from Hartford oc- 
cupied a house in Groton, as their bar- 
racks. 

11. One night as they were asleep, 
there was a sudden cry of alarm among ; 
the soldiers. They seized their arms, 1 
and rushed out of the barracks. The . 
drums were beat, the sentinel fired his 
gun, and all supposed that the British ; 

riians 1 7. New London '? Steam-boat 1 Whale 1 

ships'! 8. Whale-oil'! Whale-bon« '? 9. Forts 1 < 


were now about to make the expected 
attack. Some of the men declared they 
could see the enemy landing, and others 
thought they could hear the roar of can- 
non in the distance. 

12. The officers assembled, and in- 
quired into the matter. They soon dis- 
covered, that the British had nothing to 
do with the alarm. It seems that one 
of the soldiers, whose name was Tom 
Stire, while he was sleeping with the 
rest, fell into a dream. He dreamed 
that the British were coming, and in 
his sleep he exclaimed, ‘Alarm! alarm! 
the enemy are coming ! ’ This occasion- 
ed the whole disturbance. 

13. After we have examined New 
! London, we will set out and go to Hart- 
ford. This is a very fine town, situa- 
ted on Connecticut river. We must 
visit the Deaf and Dumb Asylum, where 
we shall see about one hundred deaf 
and dumb pupils, who are taught to read 
and write, and who can converse by 
signs, almost as well as we can by talk- 
ing. We shall also see at Hartford, a 
place for persons who are insane, call- 
ed the Retreat. Here they are taken 
care of, and many of them are cured. 
Before we leave town, we must go to 
Washington College, which is a fine in- 
stitution. 

14. After leaving Hartford, we will 
go to Middletown, which is beautifully 
situated on Connecticut river. On our 
way from Hartford, we shall pass through 
Wethersfield, a pleasant place, where 
the people raise many thousand bushels 
of onions, every year. These onions 
are sent to all parts of the country. 
Some of them go as far as Charleston, 
New Orleans, and the West Indies. 

15. After leaving Middletown, we 

10. What story of the late war 1 13 Hartford'! 
Deaf and Dumb Asylum'! Retreat '! Washing- 
ton College '! 14. Middletown 1 Wethsr'sfield ? 


24 


THE CHILD S FIRST BOOK OF HISTORY. 


shall pass through Durham, where the 
people make an immense quantity of 
shoes. At length we shall arrive at 
New Haven, which is the handsomest 
town in New England. Here w'e shall 
see a large basin, where there are a 
great many canal boats. These boats 
go up and down the Farmington canal ; 
they carry up a great deal of merchan- 
dise, and bring down the produce of 
tlie country. 



Picture of New Haven. 


10. At New Haven we shall also see 
Yale College. This consists of several 
brick buildings, in which there are three 
or four hundred students. We must go 
into one of these buildings and see the 
cabinet. This is a collection of beau- 
tiful minerals from all parts of the 
world. 

17. It is very interesting to exam- 
ine this cabinet, for there are stones 
there, which have been brought from 
various parts of Europe, Asia, Africa, 
and America. There are two stone pil- 
lars there, which came from the famous 
Giant’s Causeway, in Ireland. 

18. There are al&o some specirnens 
of stones, which fell from the air in 
Connecticut, about twenty years ago. i 
These stones f 'rm'^ol a pa'’t of a vast red 

15. nurliuin t New Iluven'? The ha.^iu 1 Canal 
buats 1 16 Yale College 1 17. Cabinet 1 18. Meteo- 1 


meteor, that flew along in the sky, and 
Anally exploded with a great noise. 
The stones fell in the town of Weston. 

19. If we travel in other parts of 
Connecticut, we shall And at Berlin, a 
great many people busy in manu- 
facturing tin ware. At Meriden, they 
make tin and pewter ware. At Bris- 
tol, they make wooden clocks, and 
very good clocks they are. At Water- 
bury, they make buttons ; at Danbury, 
they make hats ; at Salisbury, there 
are extensive iron-works. 

20. In short, the people of Connec- 
ticut are very busy and ingenious. Ma- 
ny of them go to the Southern and 
Western States, and even as far as Mex- 
ico, to sell the articles that are manu- 
factured in this State. 

CHAP. XI. 

STATE OF CONNECTICUT.— CONTINUED. 

1. On the western border of Con- 
necticut, is a range of low mountains, 
forming in some places the boundary 
between that State and New York 
About twenty years ago, there was a 
woman in these mountains who lived 
alone in a cave. She had no bed but 
the rock, and no furniture but a Bible. 
Here she dwelt, summer and winter, for 
thirty years. 

2. She had no light at night, and 
she had never any Are. In summer 
she occasionally wandered to the neigh- 
bouring villages, and begged a little 
milk, or other food. But she lived 
chiefly upon roots and nuts. The wild 
animals were so accustomed to see her, 
that they were not afraid of her. The 
foxes would come close to her, and the 

ric stones'? 19. Berlin I Meriden'? Bristol'? Darv- 
bury '? Salisbury 1 20. People of Connecticut 1 

1. Mountains in the West of Connecticut 1 2. 


TUB child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


25 


birds would alight on her head. She 
died about the year 1810. 



Hermitess in Connecticut. 

‘ 3 , The name of this singular wo- 

man was Sarah Bishop. She lived on 
Long Island, at the time of the revolu- 
tionary war. Her father’s house was 
burnt by the British, and she was cru- 
elly treated by a British ofiicer. She 
then left society, and wandered to the 
mountains. There she found a cave at 
a distance from any house, and there 
she resided, till about the time of her 
death. 

4. At Hartford, there is a celebra- 
ted tree, called the Charter Oak. There 
is a story of that tree, which 1 will tell 
you. About 140 years ago, the king 
of England sent Sir Edmund Andros to 
take away the charters of the American 
colonies. These charters were papers, 
signed by the king, granting the colo- 
nies certain privileges; and the people of 
the colonies did not wish to give them 
up. 

5. Well, Sir Edmund Andros came 
to Hartford to get the charter of Con- 
necticut. Some of the people being 
assembled, at evening the charter was 
brought in. Sir Edmund was present, 
and was about to take the charter away. 

What of Sarali P>i.s!mp'? Describe the picture, 


when the lights were all suddenly blown 
out, and the people were left in the 
dark. 

6. By and by, the candles were 
lighted again, but the charter was gone, 
and it could not be found. Sir E. was 
therefore obliged to go away without 
it. After a long time, the charter w^as 
found in a hollow place, in an old oak- 
tree, standing in the southern part of 
the city. It was hid there by Captain 
Wadsworth, who took it, and carried 
it off, when the lights were blown out 



Charter Oak at Hartford. 


7. The first house built in Connec- 
ticut by th4 white men w^as erected at 
Windsor, in 1633, by some people from 
Massachusetts. Two years after, about 
sixty persons came from Massachusetts, 
and settled at Windsor, Hartford, and 
Wethersfield. They went across the 
w ilderness, instead of going round by 
water, as the first settlers had done. 

8. The next year some more per- 
^| sons removed from Massachusetts. 

I They too Avent by land through the 
I woods. There were then, of course, no 

roads; the whole space Avas an un- 
broken forest. They had nothing to 
I guide them but a pocket compass, Avhich 
I tliey carried. They had a number of 
J cows Avith tliem, Avhich they droA^e 


4. Tree at Hartford ? What were the charlei’! 
which Sir Edmund Andros came to get T Describe !' the charter 1 7>. \V liat of the first house ii» 

2 * R 


2(5 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


th-rough the woods ; they subsisted 
principally on their milk, during their 
long and difficult journey. 

9. The stages now travel from Hart- 
ford to Boston in a day. These people 
were several weeks then, in going over 
the same country. 

10. I will tell you a story of what 
happened at Wethersfield, a few years 
after that place wifs settled. A very 
respectable man lived there, whose 
name was Chester. One day he went 
into the woods, to see about his cattle. 

11. By and by, he set out to return, 
but he soon discovered that he had lost 
his way. He wandered about for a 
great while, hoping every moment to 
get out of the woods ; but the farther 
he went, the thicker were the trees, 
and the deeper was the forest. 

12. He now grew very anxious, for 
the night was approaching. He hal- 
looed and shouted for help, but no one 
came. At length it was night, and the 
forest all around was covered with 
darkness. The wanderer listened, but 
he could hear no human voice ; he 
could hear only the howling of wild 
beasts. 

13. He climbed a tree, and there he 
remained in great anxiety till morning. 
Worn out with watching and fatigue, 
and faint for want of food, Mr Chester 
still made exertions to escape. He as- 
cended to the top of a hill, and there 
he obtained a sight of the country all 
around. 

14. But it was one boundless forest 
on all sides. He Avas now in the great- 
est distress. The Aveathcr was cloudy : 
he could not see the sun, so as to direct 
his course, and he had no hope but to 
lie doAAm, and perish in the wilderness. 

15. But at this moment, his ear 

Connecticut t Other settlers 7 8. What of their 

journey 1 10 Story of Mr Chester 1 


caught a distant sound. He listened 
attentively ; it Avas the beat of a drum. 
He heard a shout and a call. He an- 
sAvered, and soon he Avas in the arms 
of his friends, Avho had come in search 
of him. The people of Wethersfield 
had felt great anxiety for his absence, 
and imagining that he Avas lost in the 
Avoods, the men had set out in A^arious 
directions to look for him. 

16. By this means he Avas discoA^er- 
ed, and taken back to his family. His 
grave-stone is still to be seen in the . 
burying-ground at Wethersfield. The, 
place Avhere he Avas lost is called Mount 
Lamentation — you Avill pass it on the 
road from Hartford to Ncav Haven. 

CHA?. XH. 

NEW ENGLAND. 

1. I have now given you some ac- 

count of the six States, Avhich bear the 
general title of New England. In trav- 
elling through this portion of our coun- 
try, you aatII observe that it is generally 
hilly, and is crossed by a range of moun- 
tains, extending from the northeastern 
part of Maine, to the southAvestern part 
of Connecticut. ,, 

2. The climate is not extremely 
hot, nor extremely cold. SnoAV begins 

Questions on the Map of New England.-^ 
Boundaries 1 Boundaries of each of the six New 
England States 1 Which is the largest river 1 
What five principal rivers in New England 1 Which 
way do they all run 1 What range of mountains 
in New England! Extent and direction of this 
range ! Distance and directions of the following 
towns from Boston : Augusta. Concord. MonU 
pelier. Providence. Hartford. New Havea 
Extent of New England ! Population 1 Greatest 
length of New England 1 Greatest Avidth ! Aveav 
age length 1 Average width ! 

1. How many States in New England ! Tbclr 
names! Face of the country ! Mountains 1 2 


THE child’s first BJOK OF HISTORY. 


27 


to fall about the first of December. 
Spring returns in April. There is 
usually sleighing in all parts of it, for a 
few weeks during the winter. In sum- 
mer, the weather is delightful. There 
are plenty of strawberries, cherries, cur- 
rants, and other berries, and in the au- 
tumn, there are apples, pears, peaches, 
walnuts and chestnuts, and melons in 
abundance. 

3. The largest river is the Connec- 
ticut. It is a beautiful stream, and 
waters four of the New England States. 
There is not a river on the globe whose 
banks afibrd more charming scenery 
than this. I have seen the Thames in 
England, the Rhone in France, and the 
Rhine in Germany, and they are all less 
pleasing to my eye than this. 

4. You should see this river in June. 
The meadows and mountains along its 
borders are then in their glory. If you 
are there in May, you will see the fisli- 
ermen, with their long nets, catching 
shad, for v/hich this river is famous. 
In former times, there were a great 
many salmon in this river; but for 
some reason or other, they have entire- 
ly deserted it. I suppose they went 
away on account of the locks and canals 
that have been built upon it. 

5. Not many years since, salmon were 
often to be taken as far up as Vermont. 
They even used to ascend the little 
streams that come down from the moun- 
tains, and were often caught in them. 
An old gentleman told me, that about 
thirtyfive years ago he was travelling at 
night on horseback, among the moun- 
tains in that State. As his horse was 
going through a small stream, that ran 
across the road, he heard a great pound- 
ing and plashing in the water. lie 

Climate 1 Fruits 1 3. Connecticut River 1 4, 

Shad '? Salmon'? 5. Story of a salmon'? 6. 
School-houses 1 Churches? 7 Forests? 'J’owns jj 


went to the spot, and there he found 
a salmon that Aveighed nine pounds, 
which had got into a shalloAV place, and 
could not get out. He easily caught it 
with his hands, and then carried it home. 

6. In travelling through New Eng- 
land, you will observe a great many 
school-houses, by Avhich you may know 
that the children are well educated ; 
and you will see a great many churches 
and meeting-houses, by Avhich you will 
understand that the people are attentive 
to religion. 

7. There are still a good many for- 
ests, and much unoccupied land in New 
England. But the greater part of its 
surface is under cultivation. There are 
more than one thousand towns and vil- 
lages scattered over its hills, valleys, 
and plains, and there are at least 2,000,- 
000 inhabitants within its borders. The 
people are generally industrious, and 
are engaged in the various pursuits of 
agriculture, commerce, and manufac- 
tures. 

8. Such is New England noAv; but 
what was it a little more than tAvo hun- 
dred years ago ? A mere Avilderness, 

j inhabited by bears, Avolves, and other 
Avild beasts, and by scattered tribes of 
! Indians, Avho lived in AvigAvams, hunted 
I with boAvs and arroAvs for subsistence, 

I and Avere constantly slaying each other 
in battle. 

9. What a great change has taken 
place in a short space of time! Yet 

I many interesting things have happened 
j Avithin these tAvo hundred years. It is 
I pleasant to go back, and trace the his- 
tory of former times. J’here is no part 
of our country, not a toAvn or A'illage, 
that has not some interesting story con- 
nected AAOth it. 

and villages ? Ntiml)cr of iuliabitants ? IJow are 
they occupied ? 8. What of New England two 

hundred years ago ? 9 . What of it now ? 


28 


THE CHILD S FIRST BOOK OF HISTORi. 


10. I shall endeavor to collect the 
most amusing and instructive portions 
of New England history, and tell what 
I have to say in such a manner as to 
please you. You are now acquainted ■ 
W'ith the geography of this section of 
the country ; I shall therefore take you 
back at once to the period when our 
forefathers first landed upon these 
shores. 

CHAP. XIII. 

NEW ENGLAND. — continued. 

1. A little more than two hundred 
years ago, there were in England, a 
great many people, called Puritans. 
They were not happy in England, for 
they had peculiar notions about reli- 
gion. They were cruelly treated, and 
some of them at length fled from the 
country. They went first to Holland, 
but finally they concluded to come to 
America. 

2. They set out in two vessels, but 
one of them was leaky, and went back. 
They all entered the other ship, and af- 
ter a long and stormy passage, they 
reached a broiad harbor. They then 
sent some people ashore to examine 
the country. These found some Indian j 
corn in baskets, buped in the sand. 
They also discovered Indian burial- 
})laces, surrounded by sticks stuck in 
the ground. 

3. One night, the exploring party 
built a fire in the woods, and slept by 
the side of it. In the morning, some 
arrovrs, pointed with eagles’ claws and 
sharp pieces of deer’s horns, fell among 
them. These were sent by some In- ' 

I Wliat of the Britons t 2. How did they 
tt.oiie to America 1 What did they do after their 
arrival 1 Indian corn I Indian burial-placet 
Jjtory o-f Indians who attacked an exploring ^ 


dians who came to attack them. The 
white men fired their guns at them, 
and the Indians ran oft’ in great alarm. 
At this time the savages had no gims, 

I and they imagined that the fire of the 
musket was lightning, and the report 
thunder. No wonder they were afraid 
of people, who, as they believed, made 
use of thunder and lightning. 

4. Having examined the shores, the 
emigrants pitched upon a place, where 
they concluded to settle. On the 22d 
of Dec. 1620, they landed and called tho 
place Plymouth. It v/as winter when 
they arrived, and the country had a most 
dreary aspect. There were no houses 
to receive them, there were no friends 
to welcome them; there was nothing 
before them but a gloomy forest, inhab- 
ited by savages and wild beasts. There 
was nothing behind them but the vast 
ocean, rolling between them and their 
native land. This little colony consist- 
ed of one hundred and one persons. 
They were divided into nineteen families, 
and each family built itself a log house. 

5. For some time, the settlers were 
not visited by any of the Indians. They 
saw a few soon after their landing, but 
they ran away as if they were very 
much frightened. One day, however, 

i an Indian came among them, saying in' 
English, ‘Welcome Englishmen! \1rTl- 
come Englishmen !’ 

6. This surprised the white people 
very much. The Indian tol'l them that 
his name was Samoset, and that he had 
learnt to speak English of the fisher- 
men he had seen upon the coast. 

7. After some time an Indian chief, 

I called Massasoit, came near to the set- 
tlement with some of his men. He was 

party 1 4. When did the emigrants land 1 Naraa 

of their settlement I What of the season I Situ- 
ation of the pilgrims 1 Number of the Colonists t 
.What did they do I 5 Indians'! 6. Samoset I 


THE child’s first ROOK OF HISTORY. 


29 


a sort of king, and ruled over several 
tribes. He was at first afraid to go 
down into the village, but by and by he 
went down, and the people saluted him 
with a drum and fife, which he liked 
very much. 

8. Then he went into the governor’s 
house, where he ate a very hearty din- 
ner, and drank a prodigious draught of 
rum. He then made a treaty with the 
white people, and agreed to be at peace 
with them. This treaty he and his des- 
cendants kept faithfully for fifty years. 



Making a Treaty with Massasoit. 


9. I will now tell you of two white 
men that got lost in the woods. It was 
winter, and it was snowing very fast. 
The snow had covered up the path, and 
they could not find their way back to 
the villajre. At length niorht came on, 
and as it grew dark, they heard a dread- 
ful howling near them. 

10. They w^ere very much alarmed, 
for they did not know what wild beasts 
might be in the woods. All night they 
continued in the storm, shivering with 
cold, and frightened at the wild sounds 
they heard. At length the morning came, 
and tliey reached the settlement. I 
suppose the noise they heard, v/as the 
howling of wolves. 

7. What of Massasoit T 8. Describe the picture. 9. 
Story of two iijen tiiat got lost 1 Sufferings of tlic 


11. The settlers found their situation 
extremely uncomfortable. The winter 
was very severe, their houses were mis- 
erable, and they were destitute of all 
those conveniencies, which they had 
been accustomed to enjoy in England. 
Borne down with suflering, many of 
them were taken sick, and when the 
spring arrived, half of their number 
were dead. 

12. Notwithstanding these discour- 
aging circumstances, other persons 
came out from England and joined the 
settlers, so that, in ten years after, the 
whole number amounted to three hun- 
dred. In the year 1630, more than fif- 
teen hundred persons came from Eng- 
land, and settled at Boston, Dorchester, 
Salem, and other places in the vicinity. 

13. These people were nearly all 
Puritans, but many of them possessed 
wealth, and had been brought up in a 
very delicate manner. Their sole ob 
ject in coming to America, was to en- 
joy their religious opinions without re- 
straint. But they had not foreseen the 
sufierings that were before them. 

14. The winter set in with unusual 
severity. The snow fell to a great 
depth, and the cold became intense. 
Assembled in log houses, which aflbrded 
but a poor shelter from the driving 
blasts, the emigrants had to endure hun- 
ger as well as cold. Their stock of 
provisions became nearly exhausted, 
and many of them were compelled to 
subsist on clams, muscles, nuts and 
acorns. 

15. Unable to sustain these priva- 
tions, many of them died. Among 
these was one woman whose fate has al- 
vrays excited peculiar sympathy. This 
was Lady Arabella Johnson. Her fa- 
ther was a rich man in England, and 

I Colonists 1 12. Other settlers 1 What ha|)pene(l in 
i 16.30 1 13. What of these fifteen hmnireil settlers ? 


30 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


she had been brought up in the enjoy- 
ment of every luxury. 

. 16. But in America, she was depriv- 
ed of the common comforts of life. 
Her delicate frame could not endure 
these trials. Although her husband came 
with her, and every care and kindness 
were bestowed upon her, yet in about 
a month after her arrival, she died. 

17. Such were the sufferings that 
attended the first settlers in New Eng- 
land. Yet these were sustained with 
the utmost fortitude. Those who died, 
left a state of sorrow, in the conscious- 
ness of having done their duty, and the 
strong hope of entering a state of peace 
beyond the grave. Those who lived, 
prayed to Heaven for strength to sup- 
port them in their troubles, and their 
prayers seemed to be answered. 

18. Thus prepared for life or death, 
they continued to struggle with their 
misfortunes with a degree of firmness, 
which we cannot fail to admire. 

CHAP. XIV. 

NEW ENGLAND. — continued. 

1. I have now told you something 
about the two colonies of Plymouth 
and Massachusetts. The settlement at 
Plymouth was tlie first permanent Eng- 
lish settlement in New England. The 
colony of Massachusetts was so named, 
from an Indian tribe that originally in- 
habited the country. This colony in- 
creased much more rapidly than Ply- 
mouth. 

2. Such favorable accounts were 
given of it in England, tliat many per- 
sons of distinction came from that coun- 


15. Lady Arabella Johnson 1 IS. Conduct of 
the settlers 1 

1. What colony was first settled in New Eng- 
land 1 Colony of Massachusetts 1 2. Sir Ileii- 


try and settled in Boston and other 
parts of the colony. Among these was 
Sir Henry Vane. He was but twenty- 
five years old when he arrived, but he 
was so grave that he won the hearts of 
the people, and they made him governor. 

3. You will recollect it was in the 
year 1633, that the first settlement was 
made in Connecticut. In 1636, Roger 
Williams was banished, and settled in 
Rhode Island. New Hampshire was 
first settled in 1623, and Maine in 1628. 
In 1638, a settlement was made at ' 
New Haven, which was afterwards call- 
ed, the Colony of New Haven. Ver- 
mont was not settled till 1724. 

4. About the year 1635, a woman 
whose name was Ann Hutchinson, be- 
gan to preach strange doctrines in Mas- 
sachusetts. She had a pleasing address. ' 
and fluent speech, and she persuaded 
many persons to believe as she did. 
Among these was Sir Henry Vane. 

5. By and by, some of the principal 
people assembled to consider the sub- 
ject. They talked a great deal about 
it, and some of them became very angry. 
At length Ann Hutchinson’s doctrines 
were condemned by a majority, and she 
was banished from the colony. Sir 
Henry Vane was very much displeased 
at this ; so he went back to England, and 
after several years, he was executed, by ] 
having his head cut off for high treason 
against his king and country. 

6. For a long time, the Indians did 
not molest the inhabitants of Massachu- 
setts and Plymouth colonies. The trea- 
ty made with Massasoit, as before stated, 
was faithfully observed by them; but 
the Pequots, who lived in Connecticut, 


ry Vanel 3. When was tlie first settlement 
I made in Connecticut 1 Kliodc Island '? New Hamp- 
shire! Slaine ! Colony of New Haven! Ver- 
I inoiit! 4. Anil Hutchinson ! Sir Henry Vano! 
jj 6. Indians of Massachusetts ! retiuots ! Wlial 


THE CHILD S FIRST BOOK OF HISTORY. 


31 


troubled the people there very much. In ! 
1637, they killed three men at Saybrook, 
and at Wethersfield they killed six men, 
three women, and twenty cows. 

7. These things caused great alarm. 
Consequently, some of the people met 
at Hartford to consider what should be 
done. It was determined to send a 
body of men against them. About 
ninety white men and seventy friendly 
Indians were’ soon assembled. They 
were all placed under the command of 
Captain Mason. 

8. They entered some boats at Hart- 
ford, and went down Connecticut river 
to Saybrook. Here they resolved to 
make a sudden attack upon Mystic, an 
Indian fort, situated where Stonington 
now stands. This was one of the prin- 
cipal places belonging to the Indians. 

9. They reached the spot about day- 
break. The Pequots had no suspicion 
that an enemy was near. But by and 
by, a dog barked, and then one of the 
Indians, who saw the white men, gave 
the alarm. At this instant, the soldiers 
fired upon the Indians. Many of the 
savages were killed ; but very soon the 
rest recovered from their astonishment, 
and then they fought bravely. 

10. They shot their arrows and 
guns at the white men, and hurled 
stones and sticks at them with the great- 
est fury. The Indians were far more 
numerous than the white men, and the 
latter were at length nearly exhausted. j| 
At this moment, Capt. Mason ordered |i 
their fort to be set on fire. The flames jj 
caught quickly, and spreading from wig- f| 

set them all in |i 


blaze. 

11. It was an awful 


scene, am 


th( 


struggle was soon terminated. 

did the Pequots do in 1637 1 7. What did the 

colonists do 1 Capt. Mason 1 8. Fort Mystic 1 [I 

V Describe the taking of the fort. What did the J 


wigwams were reduced to ashes, and 
six or seven hundred Indians were kill- 
ed, either by the bullets, or the fire. 

12. This dreadful event alarmed the 
Pequots, and they fled with their chief, 
Sassacus, to the west. They were 
followed by the white men, who over- 
took them in a swamp, near Fairfield. 
Here a battle was fought, and the In- 
dians \vere entirely defeated. This was 
followed by a treaty with the remaining 
Indians, and the Pequots gave the col- 
onies no more trouble. 

13. In 1643, the four colonies of 
Plymouth, Massachusetts, Connecticut 
and New Haven, entered into an agree- 
ment, for the purposes of mutual de- 
fence. They were led to do this, by 
fear of the Indians, who were now very 
unfriendly, and who watched every op- 
portunity to do the white people mis- 
chief. 

CHAP. XV. 

NEW ENGLAND.— CONTINUED. 

1. We now approach a period of 
great interest in the history of New 
England. The Indians perceived that 
the. English were rapidly increasing in 
numbers, while they Avere as fast di- 
minishing. They foresaw that in a 
short time, the English colonies Avould 
overspread the whole land, while they 
should themselves be driven back into 
the wilderness. 

2. This excited their jealousy, and 
led them cordially to hate the English. 
Beside this, quarrels occasionally rose 
between the Avhite inliabilants. and tlie 

Pequots do after (he battle t Wliat did tlie white 
peoide do 1 What ehect had the second dedcat 
upon the Perpiots 1 1-3. What was done in 1643 1 
Whv was this agreement made between the New 
Ent^land colonies 1 

1. What of the Indians! TUe English! 3. 


32 


THE child’s first book of history. 


savages, Whetlier these originated 
with the English or the Indians, the lat- 
'ter were always sure to be ihonght in 
the wrong, and were punished by the 
white people accordingly. 

3. In short, the Indians had discov- 
ered that the English, being wiser and 
more artful than they, \vere likely soon 
to become their masters ; and the ha- 
tred thus excited, was aggravated by 
acts of injustice and oppression, com- 
mitted on the part of the English to- 
ward the savages. 

4. There lived, about this time, in 
Rhode Island, an Indian, who was call- 
ed Philip by the English. He was 
Chief of the Wampanoags, and lived 
at Mount Hope, near Bristol. The 
country was then called Pokanoket. 

5. Philip, being a man of great sa- 
gacity, saw that, unless the English 
colonies were checked, the Indians 
Vv^ould, in the course of a few years, 
cease to exist as independent tribes. 
After reflecting upon these things, he 
resolved to make one great eflbrt to 
drive the English from the land, and 
free his country from such dangerous 
intruders. 

G. Accordingly, he visited, in secret, 
several of the tribes in New England. 
He conversed with the chiefs, and told 
them, that if they remained inactive, in 
a few years the beautiful rivers, and 
hills, and forests, which had descended 
from their fathers, Avould cease to be 
their inheritance. He described the 
English as crafty, long-sighted, and 
greedy, who added township to tOAcn- 
ship, and colony to colony, and who 
would never be content until they pos- 
sessed every foot of land west of the 
Hudson. 

What liad the Indians discovered 1 What inc-reas- 
ed the hatred of the Indians I 4. Who n as I’hil- 

1 5. What did Philij) perceive I Wliat did 



7. He prophesied the gradual de- 
crease, and the final extinction, of all 
those tribes who once reigned over the 
whole land. He told them that their 
forests would be cut down, that their 
hunting grounds Avould be soon taken 
from them, that their Avarriors Avould 
be slain, their children Avander forth 
in poverty, their chiefs be beggars, and 
their tribes be scattered and lost like the 
autumn leaves. 


Philip addressing the Indian Chiefs. 

8. To remedy these evils, Philip 
proposed that a mighty eflbrt should 

! be made by all the tribes in Netv Eng- 
I land to destroy the English. He had 
! little diflicultA’ in bringing the chiefs in- 
I to his schemes. A general eflbrt AA'as 
j agreed upon, and soon the Avar began. 

9. In .Tune, 1675, as the people of 
! Swanzey, in Plymouth Colony, Avere re- 

' turning home from church, a sudden 
I attack was made by some Indians up- 
I on them. At this period, the Indians 
Avere supplied Avith muskets, poAAuler 
I and ball, and they had learnt to use 
fire-arms Avith considerable skill. 

10. In a feAV moments, therefore, 
eight or nine of ihe inhabitants of SAA^an- 


! he resolve upon I 6. What did he do 1 What 
! did he tell the chiefs 1 8. What did Philip pro- 

i pose to tlie Indian cliiefs that they should do 1 9. 

j What occurred in June, 1675 1 10. What follow 


THE FIRST BOOK OF HISTORY. 


33 


zcy were killed. The country was im- j 
mediately alarmed, and the people flew 
to the succor of the inhabitants, from all 
quarters. An attack was made upon 
the Indians the next morning, and sev- 
eral of them were killed. 

11. This resolute conduct awed the 
Indians ; and Philip himself, expecting 
an attack, fled from Mount Hope with 
his warriors. It was soon ascertained 
that they had gone to a swamp in Po- 
casset, now Tiverton. The white peo- 
ple followed them thither, and entering 
the swamp, pursued them till night. 
They were then obliged to retreat. 

12. The English linding it impossi- 
ble to encounter the enemy in the 
swamp, determined to surround it, and 
starve them out. But Philip guessed 
their design, and privately stole away 
with his men. 

CHAP. XVI. 

NEW ENGLAND. — continued. 

1. I can hardly tell you all that hap- 
pened, during the bloody war that fol- 
lowed. In all parts of New England, 
the Indians seemed to be moved by a 
spirit of deadly revenge. They set the 
town of Springfield on fire, and no less 
than thirty houses were consumed. 

2. About eighty young men were 
attacked at Muddy Brook, as they were 
employed in transporting some grain 
from Deerfield to Hadley. They had 
no idea that an enemy was at hand. 
They had stopped a moment with their 
teams, and were gathering some grapes 
by the road side. 

* 3. Sudden as the thunderbolt, the 

ed the attack upon the people of Swanzey 11. 
What did Philip and his warriors do 1 12. What 

did the white people do '? What of Philip 1 

1, W’hal of the Indians'! Springfield 'I 2. 


savage yell broke upon their ears. They 
were immediately surrounded by the 
Indians, and having no arms, they were 
incapable of defence. Seventy of them 
were shot down, and these were all 
buried in one grave. 

4. In New Hampshire and Maine, 
the Indians fell upon the towns, set the 
houses on fire, and killed the inhabit- 
ants. At Saco, Dover, Exeter, and 
other places, they committed the most 
dreadful outrages. 

5. In Massachusetts, they attacked 
Quaboag, now Brookfield, and burnt all 
the houses except one, in which the in- 
habitants had taken refuge. This they 
also assailed, and for two days inces- 
santly, they poured their musket shot 
upon it. A great multitude of balls 
passed through the sides of the house, 
but only one person in it was killed. 



Indians besieging the House. 

6. Finding it impossible to destroy 
the people in this way, they attempted to 
set fire to the house. With long poles, 
they thrust against it fire-brands, and 
rags dipped in brimstone. They shot 
arrows of fire upon it, and finally they 
loaded a cart with flax and tow, set it 
on fire, and pushed it against the house. 

What happened at JMuddy Brook '? 4. What 

took place in New Hampshiie and Maine f 5. 
What at Brookfield 1 Describe the attack af tho 
Indians on a house at Brookfield. Deserroe th 



84 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


7 . The curling flame was soon com- 
municated to the building ; and now, 
feeling certain of their prey, the sava- 
ges took their stations, so that they 
might cut down those who should at- 
tempt to escape. But in this moment 
of peril, the white men were saved, as 
if by the hand of Heaven. A sudden 
shower fell upon the flames, and at once 
extinguished them. 

8. Soon after. Major Willard with 
some soldiers came to their relief. He 
attacked the Indians, killed a number 
of them, and the rest fled away. 

9. At length it was thought neces- 

o o 

sary to humble the Narragansetts. 
They were a powerful tribe in Rhode 
Island, and occupied a fort of great 
strength. Near two thousand white men 
went against them. The fort was built 
on a hill in the centre of a swamp, and 
in it there were four thousand Indian 
warriors. 

10. There was but one entrance to 
the fort. This was accidentally dis- 
covered by the white men, and they 
gallantly rushed in to attack the enemy. 
But the Indians met them, and many of 
the English were killed. They were 
at length obliged to retreat; but by and 
by, some Connecticut troops entered 
the fort on the opposite side, and at 
tlie same moment the attack was vigo- 
rously renewed at the entrance. 

11. The Indians were now cut down 
with dreadful slaughter. The fort was 
taken, and six hundred wigwams were 
set on fire, and burnt to the ground. 
More than one thousand of the Indian 
warriors tvere killed, and three hundred 
were taken prisoners. 

12. Such were some of the events 

picture. 9. What of the Narragansetts'? 10. 
Describe the attack upon them. 11. What was 
‘.lie result 1 12. Wliat did New England present 

fcr near two years '? 13. What was the result of j 


of this remarkable Avar. For near two 
years, almost every part of NeAV Eng- 
land was a scene of bloodshed. But 
although the Indians killed great num- 
bers of white people, yet their own 
loss Avas far greater. In truth, they 
never recovered from the many reverses 
they experienced. 

13. Although there were perhaps 
ten times as many of them as of the 
Avhite people, yet such was the superior 
skill and management of the latter, that 
the Indians Avere effectually defeated, 
and their poAver in NeAV England finally 
overthroAvn. 

14. At length the Avar Avas closed by 
the death of Philip. He Avas found in 
a sAvamp near Mount Hope, Avith several 
other Indians. Captain Church, Avith a 
feAV AA'hite men, surrounded the sAvamp 
at night. 

15. When the morning came, Philip 
perceiving that he could not escape, 
rushed toAvard the spot Avhere some of 
the Avhite men lay. An English soldier 
levelled his gun, but it missed fire. An 
Indian Avho Avas of the party, took a 
deliberate aim, and shot the chief 
through the heart. Thus fell the most 
celebrated of all the Indian chiefs. 
From this time, the Indians finding far- 
ther resistance vain, began to submit to 
the English. The struggle Avas contin- 
ued aAvhile in Maine, but that soon end- 
ed, and no general efibrt Avas ever after 
made, on the part of the Indians, to sub- 
due the English. 

IG. This Avar, the story of Avhich I 
have just related, lasted from the year 
1GT5 till 1678. About six hundred 
white men Avere killed in the struggle, 
thirteen toAvns Avere destroyed, and six 

this war to the Indians'? 14. Wliat event ter- 
minated the war '? 15. Describe TMilllp’s death. 

What of tlie Indians after this 1 16. How long 

did Philip’s war last ? What losses were sufi'ered 


THE CHILD'S FIRST BOOK OF HISTORY. 


35 


hundred dwelling-houses burnt. These 
were dreadful losses to the poor colon- 
ists, but the unhappy Indians suffered 
still more. 

17. Their chiefs and their principal 
men were nearly all killed. Their wig- 
wams Avere burnt, they were driven 
from their homes ; and now defeated 
and subdued, their situation Avas one 
which may Avell excite our pity. Sav- 
age life, in its happiest state, is a mis- 
i, erable condition ; but the Ncav England 
, Indians had noAV lost their indepen- 
' dence, and all that savages hold most 
dear. 

j 18. From that period they rapidly 
diminished ; most of the tribes are noAV 
extinct, and a fcAv hundreds are all that 
remain of a mighty people, that once 
threatened to drive our forefathers from 
this land. 


CHAP. XVII. 

NEW ENGLAND.— CONTINUED. 

1. Soon after Philip’s AA’^ar, the co- 
lonies began to be involved in difficulty 
with England. The king of England 

< ■ daimed these colonies as his OAvn, and he, 
Avith the parliament, made certain law^s 
respecting trade and commerce Avith 
^ America. 

2. Noav it Avas pretended that the 
colonies had violated these laws, and 
therefore the king determined to take 
away their charters. These charters 
Avere of great importance, for they gave 
the colonies many ])rivileges. I'lie 
king, Avho reigned in England at the 
time, Avas .James II. He sent Sir Ed- 


mund Andros over to this country, to 
take aAvay all the charters of the Ncav 
England colonies, except Plymouth. 

3. He also appointed Sir Edmund 
governor over all the colonies, whoso 
charters he thus proposed to take aAvay. 
Accordingly he came. I have told you 
hoAV the charter of Connecticut Avas hid 
in an oak tree ; but Sir Edmund assumed 
the government of the NeAv England 
colonies, although he could not find that 
charter. 

4. At first he governed the people 
pretty Avell ; but by and by, he did many 
things, Avhich displeased them very 
much. Many unjust and oppressive 
laAvs Avere passed, and the people saAV 
that Sir Edmund had no\egard to their 
happiness and prosperity in his admin- 
istration. 

5. Sir Edmund began to rule in 1680. 
Tavo years after, the neAvs arrived that 
James II., King of England, had become 
so unpopular as to be obliged to leave 
the country, and that a new king, Wil- 
liam HI., had taken his place on the 
throne. This news gave the colonies 
great joy, for they hated James H. on 
account of his conduct tOAvard them, and 
more especially on account of the goA^- 
ernor. Sir Edmund Andros, Avhom he 
had sent to rule over them. 

6. Under the excitement of this joy, 
the people of Boston seized Sir Edmund 
and about fifty of his associates, and 
put them in prison. There they re- 
mained for some time ; they Avere then 
sent to England, to be tried for their 
misconduct. 

7. I Avill noAV relate Avdiat may seem 
to you very strange. In the year 1G92, 


by the colonists in this war '? 17. How did the 

Indians suffer l)yit't 18. What of the Indians' 
from that time 1 What of them now I i 

1. Wliat of the colonies and the kin^ of Eng- j 
lundl 2. Wiiut did the king determine to doll 


Vv’liat king reigned at this time 1 What of Sir 
Edmund Andros 1 4. What of his government 1 

5. What news arrived in 1688 1 What effect 
had this news on the colonists 1 6. What did the 

people of Boston do 1 7. What took place at 


86 


TUB child’s first book of history. 


iwo children of Mr Paris, a minister in 
Salem, Massachusetts, were taken sick. 
They were affected in a very singular 
manner, and the physicians were sent 
for. They were at a loss to account for 
the disorder, and one of them finally 
said they must be bewitched. 

8. The children hearing this, and 
being in great distress, declared that an 
Indian woman living in the house, had 
bewitched them. Mr Paris believed 
what the children said; the Indian 
woman was accused of the crime, and 
in a state of agitation and alarm, partially 
confessed herself guilty. This aflair 
excited great attention, many people 
came to see the children, and they were 
very much pitied. 

9. By and by other children imagin- 
ed that they were affected in a similar 
manner, and they said that they were 
secretly tormented by an old woman in 
the neighborhood. All these things 
were believed, and more children and 
several women soon declared themselves 
bewitched. They charged several per- 
sons with being the authors of their 
distress. 

10. They pretended that these per- 
sons entered their rooms through key- 
holes or cracks in the window, pinched 
their flesh, pricked them with needles, 
and tormented them in the most cruel 
manner. Nobody could see these tor- 
mentors but the sufierers themselves, 
although several persons might be in 
the room, where one of the bewitched 
was wailing and shrieking, from the 
pinches of the witch. 

11. Strange as it may seem, this 
matter, instead of being regarded as a 
delusion, was thought to be founded in 
reality. The people in those days be- 

Salem in the yciir 1692 1 8. What did the people 

Biijiposed to he bewitched pretencll 11. What 
did the people believe in those days 1 12. What 


licved that the devil sometimes gave to 
certain persons, great power for purposes 
of evil. These persons were said to 
deal with the devil, and they were 
considered very wicked. 

12. The business they were supposed 
to carry on with him, was called witch- 
craft, and any person under their 
influence was said to be bewitched. In 
England, parliament had thought it 
necessary to make severe laws against 
witchcraft. Several persons there had 
been condemned and executed under 
those laws. It was now thought proper 
to proceed in a similar manner at Salem 
Accordingly, those persons accused of 
practising witchcraft upon their neigh- 
bors, were put in prison, and a court 
was formed to try them. 

* 13. Many of them were examined 
and found guilty, and some, under the 
influence of a distempered imagination, 
confessed that they Avere guilty. The 
business at length reached a very alarm- 
ing height. Nineteen persons had 
been executed ; one hundred and fifty 
were in prison ; and many more were 
accused. 

14. In this state of things, the peo- 
ple began to doubt the correctness of 
their proceedings. They examined the 
subject more carefully, and were very 
soon satisfied that they had acted rashly. 
The judges of the court also began to 
take different vieAvs of the subject. 
Those who were brought to trial, were 
therefore acquitted, and those in prison 
were released. 

15. Thus ended this extraordinary 
delusion. We at the present day, who 
know that there is no such thing as 
Avitchcraft, cannot but Avonder that our 
ancestors should have believed in it 

had been done in England 1 W<,di was done in 
I Salem 1 14. What at length did the pert])le be- 

1 gin to do 1 What followed 1 15. Is there any 


37 


THE child’s first 

and that many persons should have been 
hung, for a crime that was only imagi- 
nary. But we should remember that it 
was a common error of that age. 

16. It was not an invention of their 
own. They received their notions from 
England, and it was natural they should 
act agreeably to them. We must do 
them the justice to say, hotvever, that 
tliey very soon discovered their error, 
and expressed their sorrow for it. 

CHAP. XVIII. 

KEW ENGLAND. — continued. 

1. Soon after the accession of Wil- 
liam III. to the throne of England, a war 
broke out between that country and 

' France. Now the French had several 
settlements in Canada, extending along 
the river St Lawrence, and including 
Montreal and Quebec. They had also 
several forts on Lake Champlain and 
Lake George. 

2. The war between France and 
England in Europe, of course, extended 
to their American colonies. The French 
from Canada, assisted by large numbers 
of Indians, invaded several parts of 
Nev/ England, liurnt tlie houses of the 
inhabitants, killed many of the people, 
and carried large numbers of men, wo- 
men and children into captivity. 

3. The cruelties practised during this 
war, almost exceed belief. Towns were 
attacked at midnight, and in mid winter ; 
llie people were often killed in their 

such thing ;is witchcraft 1 16. Why did our 

forefathers believe in it 1 

Ou^’siio7^s on the Maps of the United States 
and North America, fyc . — In which direction is 
(atnada from New' England 1 Nova Scotia from 
New England^ Newfoundland'? In which direction 
is lloston fi om Quebec ? From IMontreal ? From 
Lake George? Lake Champlain ? 


BOOR OF HISTORY. 

beds, and those whose lives were spar- 
ed, were torn from their homes, and 
obliged to endure sufferings worse than 
death. The history of these things is 
too painful for my little readers; I will 
therefore only tell them one story of 
this cruel war. 

4. In tlie winter of 1696, a party of 
Indians made an attack on the town 
of Haverhill, Massachusetts. Among 
the people of that town, was a Mr 
•Dunstan. He was in a field at work, 
when the news of tlie attack reached 
his ears. Lie immediately started, and 
ran to his house, to save his family 
He had seven children, and these, he 
collected for the purpose of taking them 
to a place of safety before the Indians 
should arrive. 

5. His wife was sick, and she had 
an infant but a week old. He now 
hurried to her, but before she could get 
ready to leave the house, Mr Dunstan 
perceived that a party of the savages 
were already close to his dwelling. Ex- 
pecting that all would be slain, he ran 
to the door and mounted his horse, with 
the intention of taking one of his chil- 
dren, the one he loved best, and flying 
with that to a place of safety. 

6. But which should he take, which 
of his seven children should he leave to 
the savages? He could not decide, and 
therefore telling the children to run for- 
ward, he placed himself between them 
and the Indians. The savages discharg- 
ed their guns at him, but they did not 
hit him. He had a gun, too, and he 
fired back at them. 

7. Then he hurried his little chil- 
dren along, loaded his gun as he went, 
and fired at his pursuers. Thus ha 

1. What of Englanri and France ? What poa 
sessions had the French in America ? 2. What did 
theFrencli Indians do ? 3. What of the cruelticii 

of this war ? 4. What happened in Uio winter 


38 


THE CHILD'S FIRST BOOH OF HISTORY. 


more than a mile — protect- 
family, defending himself, 
and keeping the enemy at a distance. At 
length he reached a place of safety, 
and there, with feelings of joy which 
cannot be described, he placed his chil- 
dren beyond the reach of the Indians. 



Mr Dunstaa saving his Children 


8. But Mrs Dimstan wiis destined to 
undergo the severest trials. Although 
she was very ill, the savages compelled 
her, with the nurse and her little infant, 
to go with them. They soon left the 
town of Haverhill, and set out to go 
to the homes of the Indians. These 
were at the distance of one hundred 
and fifty miles. You must recollect 
that it was winter, and the journey 
was to be performed on foot through 
the wilderness. 

9. Mrs Dunstan and the nurse were 
soon overcome Avith fatigue. The In- 
dians perceiving that the little infant 
occupied much of their attention, snatch- 
ed it from the mother, and killed the 
little innocent, by striking it against a 
tree. After a toilsome march, and the 
greatest suffering, Mrs Dunstan and her 
companion completed the journey. 

10. But noAv the Indians concluded 
to remove to a distant place, and these 

nf 1696 1 Tell the story of r»Ir Diiastan. 8. Tell! 
the story of Mrs Dunstan. 13. When die’ Q,* ‘ i 


I tAVO Avomen Avere forced to accompany 
them. When they reached the end of 
their journey, they discovered they 
Avere to undergo severe torture. They 
therefore determined if possible to 
make their escape. 

11. One night, Mrs Dunstan, the 
nurse and another Avoman rose secret- 
ly, while the Indians Avere asleep. There 
were ten of them in the AvigAvam Avhere 
they Averer' These the Avomen killed 
with their OAvn hands, and then depart- 
ed. After Avandering a long time in 
the woods, they reached Havferhill, 
and Mrs Dunstan was restored to hei 
family. This is a strange story, but 1 
believe it is perfectly true. 

12. A few years after the Avar of 
which I have just been telling you, 
another Avar broke out Avith the French, 
Avhich occasioned gr-eat distress in the 
colonies. It Av^as called Queen Anne’s 
Avar, for at that time King William Avas 
dead, and Queen Anne Avas on the Brit- 
ish throne. 

13. This Avar tsommenced in 1702, 
and the French and Indians immediate- 
ly invaded NeAv England. In 1704, a 
party of French and Indians made an 
attack on Deerfield. It Avas at night, 
and in the midst of Avinter. All the 
people Avere asleep ; they had no fear 
that an enemy AAuas at hand. The sud- 

i den yell of the savages burst on their 
ears, and they then kneAv the dreadful 
scene that Avas coming. 

14. The tOAvn Avas set on fire, fort}^ 
seven of the people were killed, and 
one hundred men, Avomen and children 
Avere carried into captiAuty. Among 
these Avas Mr Williams, a clergyman, 
and his Avife and five children. They 
set out on foot, and began their journey 
through the suoav. 

I 

I Anne’? war begin t What happened in 17041 
Describe the attack on Deerfield. 14. What of 


proceeded for 
mg his little : 



THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


39 


15. On the second day, Mrs Wil- 
liams, who was in bad health, was very 
weary, and unable to keep up with the 
rest. Her husband was not allowed to 
assist her, and she seemed to be on the 
point of fainting, from weakness and fa- 
tigue. At this time, one of the Indians 
came up to her, and killed her. 

16. The party then went on; but 
seventeen other persons Avere killed by 
the savages, before they arrived in 
Canada. Mr Williams Avas kindly 
treated by the French people there, 
and after tAV'O years, he returned, Avith 
fiftyseA^en other captiA^es, to Deerfield. 
He Avas minister of that tOAvn for twelve 
years after his return, and then he died. 

17. This story afibrds a fair example 
1 the cruelties of this Avar. It contin- 

the 1713. The people of 

mad olonies suffered very much ; they 
^e several attempts to take Canada 
iiom the French. Queen Anne sent 
over a considerable number of troops, 
to assist them in doing so. But this 
project failed. They hoAvever took 
Port Royal in NoA^a Scotia, Avhich is 
noAV called Annapolis. 

18. At length, in 1713, the French 
and English made peace Avith each 
other in Europe, and the Avar ceased there 
and in the colonies also. From this 
time, NoA'a Scotia, and NeAvfoundland 
belonged to the English. Canada still 
belonged to the French, and continued 
so till the year 1759, Avhen it Avas cap- 
tured by the British, and has since re- 
mained subject to that government. 

Mr Williams and his family'? 15. Of Mrs Wil- 
liams 1 16. What of the other captives '? What 

farther account can you give of Mr Williams and 
tlie other cajfjtives 1 17. How long did Queen 

Anne’s Avar continue '? What did the colonies at- 
tempt to do '? What place did they take '? 18. 

What took place in the jtar 1713 1 To whom did 
Newfoundland and Nova Scotia belong from this 
time 1 To whom did Canada belong 1 


CHAP. XIX. 

NEW ENGLAND. — continued. 

1. lam sorry that I have but little 
to tell you about this period, except 
tales of Avar. It is painful to read the 
history of times gone by, and learn 
Avhat dreadful sufferings have been en- 
dured by the generations that have liv- 
ed before us. But painful as it is, Ave 
must still read it. It may teach us the 
sad consequences of Avar, and shoAV us 
how much better it is to be ahvays at 
peace. 

2. In the past ages of the Avorld, 
kings and generals and great men have 
been fond of making Avar, and I am 
afraid that some people are disposed to 
applaud them for it. But the Avisest 
and best of men look upon all AA^ars as 
eAuls, and they deem those persons very 
Avicked, who promote a Avar that could 
safely be avoided. 

3. About the year 1722, the Indian 
tribes in Maine, and along the eastern 
and northern border, made Avar upon the 
English settlers. It is supposed that 
theyAvere incited to this by some French 
Jesuits, Roman Catholic priests, Avho 
lived in Nova Scotia. These Indians 
often attacked the people in Maine, 
Massachusetts, and Ncav Hampshire, 

i and annoyed them very much. But in 
1725, this Avar ceased. 

4. In 1744, England and France 
Avere again involved in strife. George 
II. Avas then king of England, and thij 
Avar is called King George’s Avar. The 
most important event to NeAV England, 
that took place during this period, Avas 
the capture of Louisburg. This AA’as a 

3. What took place about the year 17221 What 
did the Indians do 1 Wlien did this Avar cease 1 4. 
j What happened in 1744 1 What was the most inv- 
I portant event in America during King George’s Avar 1 


40 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


very strongly fortified town, belonging 
to the French, on the Island of Cape 
Breton in the Gulf of St Lawrence. 

5. Here they kept a good many 
ships, and in time of war, these drove 
away the English and American sailors, 
who" went to the banks of Newfound- 
land to catch cod fish. To take Louis- 
burg was therefore a great object. To 
accomplish this, the colonies united, 
and sent about 4300 men, under the com- 
mand of Sir William Pepperell, against 
it. They went in twelve ships, and 
some smaller vessels. 

G. They arrived at Louisburg the 
last of April, 1744. They were occu- 
pied fourteen days in drawing their 
cannon across a swamp, so as to bring 
tliem near the town. They then be- 
seiged it; that is, they surrounded it 
both by land and water. They also 
made frequent attacks upon the soldiers 
in the forts. 

7. This continued till the 15th June, 
when the French Commander request- 
ed them to stop, and on the 19th he 
surrendered the place into the hands of 
the Americans. Thus Louisburg and 
llie Island of Cape Breton came into 
tlie possession of the English. 

8. In 1748, France and England 
again made peace, and the colonies once 
more enjoyed tranquillity. But this 
did not last long. A still more exten- 
sive and important war was at hand ; 
this commenced in 1755, and is called 
in this country the French and Indian 
war. There are people now living 
who remember this war. I have seen 
myself a good many of the old soldiers 

In wliicli direction is the Island of Cape llieton from 
Boston I Describe Lonisl)nr". 5. Wliy was it a 
great ol)ject with the colonies to take liouisburg'? 
Wi lat did tlie colonies do I 6. Describe the 
proceedings (»f tlie expedition against Louisburg. 7. 
Dow and when was Louisburg taken I 8. What 
Uajipened in 17431 What began in 17551 9. 


that were engaged in it, and they have 
told me many stories about it. I shall 
tell you some of these by and by. 

9. But as several colonies beside 
those of New England Avere engaged 
in this war, and as it was carried on 
chielly in Canada, and along the remote 
parts of the country, it docs not seem 
proper to give an account of it, while I 
am only telling you the history of New 
England. After I have told you about 
the other colonies, I shall give you an 
account of the French war. 

10. I need only say now, that New 
England took an active part in It, and 
that her soldiers contributed very much 
to the success of the British arms. The 
whole of Canada was conquered by the 
English, and from that time to the pr.^" 
sent, has been subject to Great Brit'^^”]’ 
together with Nova Scotia, Newh " 
land, and Cape Breton. This war 
closed by a treaty of peace, made 
Paris in 1763. 

11. It was about the time that this 
peace was concluded, that the people 
of America began to be agitated by the 
coming revolution. The conduct of 
the British king and parliament, was 
marked with sellishness from tlie first 
settlement of the country. 

12. I mean by this, that, in tlie laws 
they had passed, the regulations they 
had made, and the officers they had ap- 
pointed for America, they had it less in 
view to promote the happiness and 
prosperity of the colonies, than to make 
them profitable to England, the mother 
country. 

13. A"^et in spite of this unkind poli- 
cy, the people here loved and honored 


Where was the French war chiefly carried on 1 
10. What part had New England in the French 
j warl What was the result of that war I Wliea 
1 and how was the French war closed 1 11. What 

I of the king and parliament of England 1 13. 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


41 


the king, and cherished the strongest 
attachment to Old England. Many of 
the inhabitants had come from that] 
country, and the rest had descended! 
from English emigrants. England was 
therefore always spoken of as Home, 
the Mother Country, the Land of their 
Fathers. By such tender epithets did 
the colonies express the affection they 
felt for England. 

14. But these feelings were no se- 
curity against injustice. The British 
parliament passed a series of acts rela- 
ting to America, from 1760 to 1770, 
which roused the indignation of the 
people, and brought on the Revolution- 
ary War. New England took a leading 
part in this noble struggle. 

15. I shall have occasion to tell you [ 
many interesting things that happened 
in this section of the country, during 
that ivar. But as the whole nation was 
engaged in it, I shall defer my account 
of it till I have told you the history of 
the other colonies. 

CHAP. XX. 

THE rURlTANS. 

1 . As stated in the preceding chap- 
ter, the separate history of the New Eng- 
land colonies, properly closes about the 
time of the French war. They then 
began to act in concert with the other 
colonies, and from that period their his- 
tory is soon lost in that of the nation. 
But before that time, the history of 
New England is but little connected 
with the other parts of the country. 

2. The Dutch, having settled New 

What were the feelings of the colonies toward Eng- 
land 1 How were they accustomed to speak of it 1 
14 . What occasioned the Pi.evolutionary W ar 1 

i. Why does the history of New England 
prpperly close with the French war 1 What of the 


lYork, interrupted the intercourse be- 
tween them and the more southern Eng- 
lish colonies ; but they were not more 
separated by this circumstance, than 
by difference of character. New Eng- 
land was settled almost wholly by the 
Puritans. 

3. These were very singular peo- 
ple. They held religion to be of the 
greatest importance. They loved the 
services of religion, and it was one of 
their greatest enjoyments to meet to- 
gether and v/orship in their own way. 
They spent much time in praying to 
God in secret. They read the scrip- 
tures with a deep and careful interest, 
and they held it to be the great busi- 
ness of this life, to make preparation 
for another. 

4. Such were the views and feelings 
of the Puritans. In England, they 
were miserable, for they could not in- 
dulge their religious feelings, and ex- 
press their religious opinions in peace. 
They were ridiculed, despised, and per- 
secuted. To them, therefore, the wil- 
derness of America, was a better place 
than England; for there, in the woods, 
they could assemble together, and wor- 
ship God in their peculiar manner, 
without reproach and without opposi- 
tion. 

5. Ill coming to this country, there- 
fore, the principal object of these peo- 
ple was to enjoy their religion. Being 
all of one mind, they seemed not to 
foresee, that future generations would 
be divided in opinion; and, taking the 
example of the .Jews, they proposed to 
form a community as nearly as possible 
according to the ancient Jewish system. 

history of New England previous to the French 
war 1 2. What of the Dutch 1 What of New 

England '? 3. What of the Puritans 1 A. 

Puritans in England 1 o. Their object lii 
to America 1 What did they not foresee 1 Wha^ 
C 


43 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


6. Some time after the colonies were 
settled, persons came among them, and 
began to preach doctrines different from 
their own. The Puritans had never 
thought of allowing people to enter 
the colonies, and utter sentiments and 
opinions different from those held b^ 
the first settlers. 

7. They had no idea of giving free 
toleration to all religions; they there- 
fore committed the same error that had, 
driven them from England. They with- 
held charity from their opponents ; they 
gave them hard names ; they imprison- 
ed some, banished some, and put oth- 
ers to death. 

8. I have told you how Roger Wil- 
liams vras expelled, and I will now tell 
you some other things of a similar na- 
ture, About the year 1G50, several 
persons in the Plymouth and Massachu- 
setts colonies adopted the sentiments of 
the Baptists, and were of course excom- 
municated from the churches to which 
they belonged. 

9. After this, Mr Clark, a Baptist 
clergyman of Rhode Island, came into 
Massachusetts with two other Baptists, 
named Holmes and Cranfield. One 
sabbath morning, as they had assem- 
bled for worship, they were seized by 
the public officers, and forcibly carried 
to the Congregational church, where 
they were kept during the service. 
Mr Clark refused to take off his hat ; so 
he sat with it on, and when the minis- 
ter began to pray, he took a book out 
of his pocket and amused himself with 
reading. When the service was done, 
he addressed the people and explained 
his conduct. 

did they propose! 6. What took place some 
time alter the colonies were settled 1 7. Of what 

had they no idea 1 What error did they commit ! 
What did they do ! 8. Wdiat took place about 

1650 1 9. What of Mr Clark and two other 


10. These three Baptists were tried 
by a court, a fortnight after this, and 
sentenced as follows ; — Mr Clark was to 
pay a fine of about 100 dollars ; Mb^ 
Holmes about 150, and Mr Cranfield 
about 25 dollars. In case they riaiVised, 
they were to^ be publicly whipped. 
They all refused ; but Mr Clark’s fine 
was privately paid by.ffiis friends. 
Cranfield was relea^ff, and Holmes 
suffered the sentence’ of the court. 

11. He receded a number of cruel 
lashes upoiiythor naked back, Avhich he 
endured 1!^h great fortitude. Two of 
his friends were present, and after the 
punishment was over, they shook hands 
with him, and praised him for his 
courage and constancy. For this act, 
these men were tried and sentenced to 
pay forty shillings, or be publicly 
whipped. The fines were however paid 
by their friends. 

12. Such were some of the proceed- 
ings against the Baptists ; but still more 
cruel steps were taken in respect to the 
Quakers. Of these, I will now give 
you some account. 

CHAP. XXI. 

THE PUI^TANS. — continued. 

1. The first Quakers that came into 
Massachusetts, M^ere Mary Leisher, and 
Anna Austin, Mdio reached Boston, from 
England, by way of the West Indies, in 
1656. They brought with them some 
Quaker books, which the deputy gov- 
ernor caused to be burnt by the hang- 
man, v/hile the women themselves were 
put in prison. Here tliey were kept in 
close confiiiement for five weeks, no 

Baptists'? What did Mr Clark do ! 10. What 

sentence was passed upon the three Baptists 11, 
What of Holmes '1 Two of his friends ? 

1. Who were the first Quakers that came to 


43 


THE child’s first 

person being permitted to converse with 
them even through the window. They 
were finally sent back to the West In- 
dies in a ship, and the jailor kept their 
beds and bible for his trouble. 

2. A short time after this, eight 
other Quakers came to Boston, who 
were immediately put in prison, where 
they were kept eleven weeks. Very 
severe laws were then passed, banish- 
ing all Quakers from the colony upon 
pain of death. But the greater the cru- 
elty with which they were treated, the 
more they flocked to the colonies. 

3. At length, four of them, who had 
been banished, having returned, were ap- 
prehended, convicted, and sentenced to 
death. They were then led out, and 
executed, agreeably to the sentence. 
Tliey died with great courage, and de- 
clared to the people, who were assem- 
bled, that they rejoiced in their death, 
and thanked God that he had given 
them this opportunity to attest the truth 
and sincerity of their faith. Thus they 
died triumphing, at the very gallows, 
over their persecutors. 

4. These cruelties had an effect di- 
rectly oppos-ite to that intended by the 
Puritans. It led the people in the first 
place to pity them, then to defend, and 
finally to agree with ^hem. Instead, 
therefore, of suppressing either the Bap- 
tists or the Quakers, the laws and pro- 
ceedings against them actually induced 
a great many persons to join those sects. 

5. It is very certain that the New 
England Fathers made great mistakes 
in this matter, but we must consider 
that these things happened almost two 

Ne-vf England 1 What of them '? 2. What of 

eight other Quakers 1 AVhat laws were then pa.«s- 
ed 1 3. What of four Quakers that had been 

Ivinished 1 4. What effect had these cruelties 1 

5 . What is therefore obvious 1 What, however, 
nhoiild we coosider 1 What idea had not yet en- 


BOOK OF HISTORY. 

I hundred years ago. The idea, now so 
common, and now so clear to us all, 
that every person has a right to worship 
God in his own way, had not then en- 
tered into the minds of men. Our fore- 
fathers were not alone in their narrow 
views; all over the wide world, mankind 
were in darkness on this subject. 

6. The shadow has indeed passed 
away from our own country. Here, 
every man may freely choose in what 
manner he will hold communion with 
his God. But in many parts of the 
world, even now, there are persons, 
who suffer much on account of their 
faith. There are, I think, even in our 
own land, at this very day, those who 
are spoken of unkindly and uncharita- 
bly, because of their religion. 

7. Let us not, therefore, think too 
harshly of the New England Fathers, 
for their narrow-mindedness on this 
point. Let us look rather to their vir- 
tues; their patience under misfortune 
their steady endurance of cold, hungei, 
want, and privation; their deep and 
fervent piety; their strict observance 
of what they deemed right; and their 
stern rejection o‘f whatever they thought 
wrong. 

8. Let us look also to the wisdom 
of these men. They immediately estab- 
lished schools for the education of all 
classes. Thisw^as a noble thought, and 
one that had not yet entered into the 
heads of the wisest men in Europe. Ob- 
serve their courage, vigor, and enter- 
prise in war ; how ready were they all 
to assemble at the moment of danger, 


tered into the minds of men 1 Were the Puritans 
alone in their intolerance '? What \vas the con- 
dition of the rest of mankind on this subject } 6 . 

What of our own country 1 What of many other 
parts of the world 1 7. What therefore should 

we do in respect to the New England Fathers 1 8. 
What of their wisdom % Of their courage Of 

c2 


41 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


whether it came from their savage or 
civilized foes! 

9. Consider their self-denial. The 
labors of the field, the services of reli- 
gion, the calls of war, and their domes- 
tic duties, alone engaged their atten- 
tion. They had no amusements ; they 
had parted with them all. They were 
brave stern men, ready to die if God so 
ordained it; yet resolute in discharging 
all the duties of life, so long as it lasted. 

10. To give you a more lively idea 
of the character of our New England 
ancestors, I will sketch a picture of 
what might have been seen, in any of 
the New England villages, in the earli- 
er part of their history. 

11. We will suppose it to be the 
morning of the sabbath. Surrounded 
by a few houses, some of them built 
of logs and some of boards, is a small 
‘brown building, without a steeple ; this 
is the meeting-house. At the appoint- 
ed hour, the worshippers are seen 
gathering to the church from various 
quarters. 



A New England Church in early Times. 


13. But each man carries a gun, 
and over his shoulder he has the trap- 
pings of a soldier. The guns are all 
placed together near the meeting-house 
door, and one man is stationed there to 

tlieir self-denial t 11. What spectacle might ha\e 
=es!n or. a sabbath morning in a New England 


give the alarm, if the Indians are seen 
to be approaching the spot. Thus pres 
pared to fly to the defence of their 
houses and their families, they enter the 
house of God, and there they worship. 
How powerful must have been the mo- 
tive, which drove our fathers from Eng- 
land, into the wilderness, to live a life 
like this ! 

13. I will sketch another picture. 
We M'ill suppose it to be a week day; 
a day of labor. You see a man going 
with his scythe into tlie field; but he is 
armed with a musl<(‘t. Y^ou see a man 
ploughing, and anotlier hoeing his corn; 
they have each muskets lashed to their 
backs. 

14. You see a man on horseback, 
going from one village to another; he 
too is armed. You see a man reniov- 
ing with his family to some distant set- 
tlement ; he is provided with the means 
of instant defence. 

15. Thus lived our New England 
Fathers, for more than one generalion. 
They were in a state of constant prepa- 
ration for attack ; ahvays siipjiosing 
that the next instant, an Indian arrow, 
or an Indian bullet, might be in the air, 
speeding with a deadly aim to the 
heart. 

16. Nor was this all. The woods 
were full of wdld animals. At night, 
the wolves would come about the houses 
and barns, and often carry ofi’ a sheep 
or a lamb. If a traveller on foot linger- 
ed in the forest till sunset, he heard the 
howl of these hungry beasts upon his 
track ; or perchance a bear crossed his 
path, turning back ^vith a wistful look ; 
or a panther glared on him from the 
top of some aged oak, or the lonely cry 
of , the wild cat filled his ears. 

village ? 13. What might be seen on a week 

day ? 15. How did our New England Fathers 

live for more than one generation ? 16. What 


THE CHILB’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


45 


17. A people living under circum* 
stances like these, surrounded by dan- 
gers, inured to toil, strangers to relaxa- 
tion and amusement; living partly on 
the iiesh of deer, which they hunted in 
the woods, and partly upon the fruits 
yielded by the fields to their own labor ; 
were likely to possess great courage, 
sternness and decision of character. 
And such indeed were leading peculiar- 
ities of the New England settlers. 

18. There can be no doubt that 
many of our blessings in New England 
have descended to us from the Pilgrim 
Fathers. The abundance of our schools, 
the love and reverence felt for religion, 
and, as consequences of these, the intel- 
ligence and morality of the people gen- 
erally, are things for which we have to 
thank the piety and wisdom of the Pu- 
ritans. 

CHAP. XXII. 

STATE OF NEW YORK. 

1. New York is the richest and 
most })opulous of the twentyfour Uni- 
ted States. Its territory is very exten- 
.sive, but it is not so large as some of 
the other States. The land is in gen* 

of wolves and other wil.l beasts 1 17. What was 

likely to be the efiect of circumstances like those in 
New England! What were tlie leading peculiari- 
ties of the New England settlers ! 18. Of what 

can there be no doubt ! For \\ hat are we to thank 
tlie piety and wisdom of the Puritans ! 

Questions on the Map of Neto York . — 
Boundaries! Describe the Hudson River, 3Io- 
hawk, Geneseee, Oswego, Saranac. Describe 
Lake Oneida, Cayuga, Seneca, Skeneatles, Onon- 
daga, Chataciue, Champlain, Ontario, Erie, Crooked 
Ovvasco. What mountains in New York ! Where 
are they! What gretit island at the southeast 
corner of the State ! N. B. A part of this island 
is on the Map of Connecticut. Describe Staten 
Island. Counties in N'^'v York. N.B. Letthe pupil 

4 


} eral fertile, and some of it is exceed- 
ingly so. The means of water com- 
munication in this State, are unrivalled; 
in the eastern part is the Hudson river, 

■ which is navigated by sloops and steam- 
boats for 160 miles. On the north and 
east, are lakes George and Champlain, 
the St Lawrence, and lake Ontario. On 
the west, is lake Eric. 

2. The grand canal extends the whole 
length of the State, from east to Avest, 
and connects the Avaters "of the great 
lakes Avith the Hudson. Beside these,^ 
there are in the interior, a great number 
of smaller streams and lakes, navigable 
by boats. I believe there is not a spot 
of the same extent on the earth, more 
favored by Avater communication, than 
the State of Ncav A'ork. 

3. The produce of almost CAmry 
portion of it may be easily carried to 
its great city, and this is the centre of 

I commerce for the United States. The 
I city of Ncav York is the largest in Nortli 
I America, and is rapidly increasing. Al- 
I bany is the seat of ihe State governm?nt. 
Utica, Rochester, Canandaigua, and 
Troy, are flourishing places. Tliere 
are also many other tOAvns of consider- 
able importance. 

4. The Hudson river is a noble 

unswer tliisquestion witiitliemap before him. How 
many counties in New York ! Capital! Inwnat 
countv is Albanj" ! Describe tlie following towns : 
New York, Poughkeepsie, Hudson, West Point, 
Troy, Saratoga, Plattsburg, Utica, Ogtlensburg, 
Canandaigua, Cooperstown, Calskill, Bufl’alo, Ni- 
agara, Geneva. Through what countie.s does tho 
great canal run ! Where does it begin ! Where 
end ! Where is the northern canal ! Population 
of the State of Now York! Extent! Greatest 
length of New York ! Greatest width ! Average 
length ! Average width ! 

1. What of New York ! Its territory ! Land ! 
Water communication ! 2. The grand canal ! 

Lakes and streams ! 3. What is said about the 

produce ! City of New York ! Albany ! Other 


46 


THE child’s first book of history 


stream. It was, I believe, on ibis river 
that steam-boats were first used. They 
were invented by the celebrated Robert 
Fulton, of New York, about 25 years 
ago. There was but one boat on the 
river for a long time. But now there 
are a great many. Sometimes one of 
these boats carries 500 passengers. 
They are very rapid, and wdll go from 
Albany to New York, a distance of 150 
miles, in about 12 hours. 

5. It is delightful to go up the Hud- 
son in one of these boats. Let us 
suppose that we make a trip in this State 
from the city of New York to Niagara 
Falls. Before we start, Ave must go 
ibout the city of New York a little. 

must go up and down Broadway, 
which is one of the finest streets in the 
world. 

G. We shall see a great many ladies 
and gentlemen very gaily dressed, and 
we shall see some old women sitting 
doAvn on the pavements Avith oranges, 
and apples and nuts to sell. And Ave 
shall see a great many coaches and 
carts driAung through the streets, and 
Ave must be very careful that Ave are 
not knocked doAvn and run over by 
some of them. 



City Hall in Ne\y York. 

7 . We must stop and admire the 

towns t 4. The Hudson t Steam-boats 1 5. The 

Hudson 1 What of Broadway 1 7. City Hall 1 


City Hall, Avhich is an elegant building 
of white marble. We must go doAvn 
into Pearl Street, and there Ave shall see 
the merchants so busy and in such a 
hurry, that they almost run over each 
other. There we shall hear a great 
rattling of carts, and Ave shall see every- 
body Avalking very fast, and Ave sliall 
see a great tumbling about of bales, 
boxes, bags, and barrels. 

8. After this, Ave must go to Castle 
Garden, and see the fire-Avorks ; and 
haAung seen a great many more things, 
Ave Avill then go on board the steam- 
boat, and set out for Albany. AAvay 
Ave go, dashing through the Avater in fine 
style, and by and by Ave come to the 
Palisadoes, AAdiich are very high perpen- 
dicular rocks, on the Avest side of the 
river. 

9. We soon come to West Point, 
Avhere there is an excellent academy, 
in Avhich young men receive a milita- 
ry education. After this, Ave come to 
the Highlands, or Catskill Mountains. 
These are tall blue mountains, Avhich 
seem to reach to the clouds. A great 
many travellers ascend them, and they 
tell us that the prospect from them is 
truly sublime. 

10. There is here a beautiful little 
cascade, Avhere the Av^ater falls 300 feet 
over the rocks. These mountains 
afford many picturesque aucavs. They 
used to be inhabited by many wild 
animals, such as deer, cougars, &c. 

11. It is not many years since, that 
tAvo huntsmen Averc searching for game 
among these mountains. Coming to a 
hill, they agreed to pass around it, one 
going one Av^ay, and the other going the 
other Avay. At length one of them 
heard the report of a gun. He ran to 

Describe the picture. Pearl Street "I 8. Cas- 
tle Garden I 9. West Point'? Ilighlunda'? H, 
Tell tho story of two bi’Jitsmen, 


THE child’s first book of history. 


47 


the spot, but could see nothing of his 
Companion. 

12. He found his dog at length, 
torn in pieces ; and by and by saw a 
cougar or panther, with the body of his 
friend in the top of a tree. He fired a 
gun, and the animal dropped with his 
prey to the ground. The dog of the 
huntsman now attacked the wounded 
animal, but was instantly killed by a 
stroke of his paw. 

) 13 The man soon procured help 

at a neighboring village. The party 
found the cougar dead, and by it the 
body of the unfortunate sportsman, who 
was also dead. 

CHAP. XXIII. I 

I 

NEW YORK. CONTINUED. 

1. Soon after leaving the Catskill 
Mountains, we shall reach Albany. 
This we shall find to be a large city, 
with near twenty thousand inhabit- 
ants. Here we will enter a canal-boat 
and proceed to Utica. We shall go at 
the rate of about four miles an hour, 
and we shall find the boat filled with 
men, women, and children. 

2. On arriving at Utica, we shall 
be surprised to find it so large and so 
handsome a place. We must now go 
in a carriage about twelve miles north 
of Utica, and see Trenton Falls. A small 
river here tumbles over the rocks, and 
presents several exceedingly beautiful 
cascades. 

3. A very sad accident happened 
here, a few years ago. A young lady 
from New York, came with some of 
her friends, to see the cataract. She 
was standing on the edge of one of the 
highest rocks, and her friends were at a 
little distance. Suddenly she disap- 

1 . Albany 1 Canal-boat 1 2. Utica 1 Tren- 


peared from their view. They ran to 
the spot, and looked over the precipice. 
She had fallen to a great depth below, 
and was instantly killed. 

4. From Utica I think we had better 
travel in the stage, for by this time we 
shall be tired of canal-boats. We must 
be particular, however, to stop and see 
the Indians at Vernon, about seventeen 
miles west of Utica. There are near 
one thousand of them, and they are the 
remnants of two famous tribes, that 
once inhabited this part of the State. 

5. These Indians are called Oneidas 
and Tuscaroras; they are partly civiliz- 
ed, for they till the land, go to meeting, 
and live peaceably. They are, however, 
a degraded people, and will rather ex- 
cite your pity than your respect. We 
shall perhaps on our way meet with 
other Indians ; the poor remains of tlie 
celebrated tribes, which I shall have 
occasion to mention by and by, under 
the name of the Five Nations. 

6. After leaving the Indians, we 
shall pass through Auburn, Canandaigua, 
and Buffalo, and at length arrive at 
Niagara Falls. These are formed by 
an immense mass of water, which comes 
from the great lakes, and pours over 
the rocks to the depth of 150 feet. 

7. The roar of these 'waters is like 
thunder. Sometimes it is heard at the 
distance of thirty miles. The earth 
trembles around, as if in fear of the aw- 
ful scene, and a thick cloud of vapor 
rises high into the air, stretching itself 
far away over the hills and valleys. 

, 8. A few years ago, some people 
got a large ship, and placed in it a wiid 
bear and some other animals. They 
then brought it near, the Fails, and left 
it in the swift current. Many thou- 
sands of people were there to see the 


ton Falls'? 3. Accident'? 4. Vernon 1 In* 
dians '? 6. Describe Niagara Falls. 8. Wha; 


48 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


sight. The sliip was instantly drawn 
along by the tide toward the falls; it 
came to the edge of the rocks,, and 
down, down it went, broken in a thou- 
sand pieces. The poor bear went over 
with it. For a long time, he was buried 
in the water, but at length he rose upon 
the surface, and then he sprang ashore. 

9. I will tell you another story of 
these falls. There was once an Indian 
sleeping in his canoe, on the lake. He 
was not far from the falls, but the canoe 
was tied, and he felt safe. But by and 
by, the string was loosed by some acci- 
dent, and the canoe floated out upon 
the water. 

10. It went silently along, and the 
Indian still continued to sleep. Soon 
the current began to take the boat to- 
ward the falls. It went more and 
more rapidly, and soon was near the 
cataract. At this moment the Indian 
woke; he saw his situation, and knew 
that it Avas vain to struggle against his 
fate. He therefore seated himself erect, 
wrapped his blanket closer round his 
body, and, folding his arms, went down 
with the thundering tide. 

11. After staying awhile at the falls 
we must set out to return. We may 
go back to Albany by the canal, or by 
stage, or we may cross Lake Ontario, I 
and go to Montreal, and thence by way 
of Lake Champlain to Boston. By the 
time we get home we shall be satisfied 
that the State of New York abounds in 
interesting objects. The western part 
of the State will fill us with surprise. 

12. It now presents many large 
towns, and a multitude of thriving villa- 
ges; yet it has been wholly settled with- 
in the last thirty years. Twenty years 
ago, there was not a house in Rochester, 


and now there are thirteen thousana 
people there. Thirty years ago, Utica 
had scarcely fifty houses, and now it 
has, I believe, ten thousand inhabitants. 

13. The growth in this part of the 
i State, seems indeed quite magical. I 
! recollect a story of what happened near 
I Rochester within the last fifteen years. 

I Two persons were travelling on horse- 
back through the woods in winter, guid- 
ed only by a horse path. The snow 
had recently fallen to a great depth, and 
they at length lost their way. They un- 
dertook to retrace their steps, but night 
came on, while they w'ere still in the 
midst of the forest. 

14. They knew they were a consid 
erable distance from any settlement, 
and had no hope of reaching a house 
during the night. It therefore became 

I apparent that they must spend it in the 
I woods. But as the sun went down, the 

I cold increased, and in a short time, it 
; was exceedingly severe. 

15. The horses were worn out with 
fatigue, and the travellers began to, fear 
that they should be frozen. They look- 
ed about for the shelter of a rock, or 
some other place, but nothing of the 
kind presented itself. Their situation 

j was now alarming; they could not pro- 

II ceed, and to remain idle, was certain 
I death. 

1 16. Atlenglh, one of them recollect- 

I ed that he had a small tinder-box in his 
I pocket. This he took out, and the 
I travellers set about making preparations 
to build a fire with great alacrity. They 
got together the bark of some trees, 
and some dry branches; they then be- 
gan to prepare the tinder-box, but on 
! examining it, the tinder was entirely 
gone. 

I 17. There was, however, in the box 


of a ship 1 9 Story of an Indian 1 11. How 

jnay we return from Niagara to Boston 1 What 
of the western part of New York 1 1^ Roches- 


ter 1 13. Tell the story of two men lost in the 

woods. 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


49 


a small piece of linen rag, the edges of 
which were burnt. These edges were 
carefully rolled together, and with a 
trembling hand, the sparks of hre were 
struck upon them. Again and again 
the effort was made, but without success. 
With feelings of the deepest anxiety j 
the travellers bent over the box. Life j 
and death were on the issue. If thel 
spark caught, they were safe ; if not, 
they must perish. To such a narrow 
point is human fortune often reduced. 

18. The flint is now struck with 
greater force. The Are descends in a 
shower, but without avail. Again, again, 
and again they make the trial, and they 
are on the point of giving themselves 
up in despair. 

19. Another blow is struck; it is 
caught by the tinder, and a match is light- i 
ed; some small fibres of wood are set on j 
fire, and in a few minutes the travellers i 
are warming themselves by a briglit j 
blaze ! Here they remained during the i 
night. In the morning, they mounted ; 
their horses, and reached the place of 
their destination in safety. 

CHAP. XXIV. 

NEW YORK. CONTINUED. 

1 . I think you cannot fail to admire | 
the great Erie Canal, in the State of j 
New York. It is 362 miles in length;, 
it is 40 feet wide, and has 83 locks. It! 
is one of the longest canals in the world, I 
and it is certainly one of the most use-j 
ful. It is frozen up in winter, but dur- j 
ing the spring, summer, and autumn, i 
many hundreds of boats, loaded with | 
every kind of produce, and all sorts ofi 
goods, are passing to and fro upon it. I 

1 . Length of the Erie canal'? Width'?! 
Number of locks d Of what use is tliis canal ? 2. ! 

When was it begun t When finished ? Cost 1 

4 * 


2. This canal was begun in 1817, 
and finished in 1825. It was made by 
the people of New York. A great many 
men were occupied for eight years, in 
digging the earth, in cutting through 
the rocks, and in building walls and 
dams for the locks. The whole cost 
of the canal was 8,000,000 of dollars. 

3. I will now tell you the early his- 
tory of this great State. In the year 
1609, Henry Hudson, an English navi- 
gator, was employed by some Dutch 
people to go on a voyage of discovery. 
He came to America, and discovered 
the river, which now bears his name. 
He sailed up as far as Albany, and 
went in his boat a little further. 

4. He saw along the banks of the 
river then, nothing but trees, and In- 
dians, and wild .animals. What a change 
has taken place in a little more than 
two hundred years ! The island at the 
mouth of the river, which was then 
covered only with trees and shrubs, is 
now the seat of a mighty city ; and the 
banks of the Hudson, then so solitary, 
are now sprinkled over with towns, 
cities, villages, and country-seats. 

5. Five 'years after Hudson’s dis- 
covery, some Dutch people came to Al- 
bany, and began there a settlement. 
This was in the year 1614, six years 
before the Pilgrims arrived at Plymouth. 
It was the first settlement made in New 
York. About the same time they built 
a few houses, on an island called by 
tlie Indians Manhattan, where the city 
of New York now stands. 

6. You will observe that New York 
was settled by Dutch, not English peo- 
ple. They came from Holland or the 
Netlicrlands, and the colony was claim- 

3. What of Henry Hudson 1 4. What did ho 

see 1 What change has taken place in 2^ years 1 
5. What settlement in 16141 What other set- 
tlement about the same time 1 6. By whom waa 


50 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


cd by that country. It increased rap- 
dly. 

7. In 1643, a war broke out with 
the Indians. The Dutch governor em- 
ployed a brave captain by the name of 
Underhill, to go against them. He 
had been a soldier in Europe, and knew 
well how to conduct the business of 
war. He took with him one hundred 
and fifty men, and they had a great 
many battles with the Indians. The 
latter were defeated, and four hundred 
of them were killed during the war 

8. In 1646, a severe battle was 
fought with the Indians, near Horse- 
neck. Great numbers were killed on 
both sides, but the Dutch wei'e victori- 
ous The dead bodies were buried at 
a place called Strickland’s Plain, and 
100 years afterwards the graves were 
still to be seen. 

9. There were some disputes be- 
tween the people of New England and 
those of New York about territory. 
At length the Dutch governor went to 
Hartford, where he met some people 
sent by the New England colonies, and 
they came to an agreement about the 
land. But king Charles of England 
said that the Dutch had no right to any 
of the land, and so he granted what the 
Dutch had settled upon, to his brother 
the duke of York and Albany. 

10. In 1664, the duke came with 
three ships to New York, and command- 
ed the people to surrender the town. 
They refused at first, but in a little 
while they gave it up, and he took pos- 
session of it. The name of this place, 
which was before called Manhattan, 
was now changed to New York, and the 
place on the Hudson where the first 

New York settled 1 7. What took place in 

1€43'? What of captain Underhiin 8. What 
took pface in 1646 1 ' 9. I)i.«putes between New 
England and New York 1 What did king Charles 
do 1 10. V.'hat did the dnko of York and Al- 


settlement was made, which had been 
called Fort Orange, was now called 
Albany. These names have since been 
retained. 



The Dutch Commander surrendering New York. 

11. In 1673, the city of New York 
was retaken by the Dutch. The fort 
and city were surrendered by the 
treachery of John Manning, the com- 
manding officer, without firing a gun. 
The next year peace was concluded be- 
tween England and Holland, and the 
colony was restored to the English. 

12. The duke of York and Albany, 
the former proprietor, now came again 
into possession of the colony, and sent 
Sir Edmund Andros, afterwards the ty- 
rant of New England, to govern it. He 
was succeeded by other governors ; and 
in 1682, the people were permitted to 
meet and choose representatives. 

13. These representatives assem- 
bled. and made laws, but they could 
not go into force, till they were ratified 
by the duke. This arrangement was 
satisfactory to the people, and the col- 
ony now felt the blessings of good gov- 
ernment. 

bany do 1 Wlmt did the people do 1 Describe 
the picture. What change of names now took 
place 1 11. What happened in 16731 What 

took place the next year 1 12. What did the 

Duke of York and Albany now do 1 What came 
to pass in 1682 1 13. What of the ropresenla* 

tives 1 WHiat of the laws made by them 1 


THE CHILD'S FIRST BOOK OF HISTORY 


61 


CHAP. XXV. 

NEW YORK. CONTINUED 

1. I will now tell you about the In- 
dians in the northern part of New York. 
The interior of the country was origi- 
nally inhabited by five nations, call- 
ed* the Senecas, Cayugas, Onondagas, 
Oneydas, and Mohaivks. These na- 
tions were friendly to the English colo- 
nies, and being very powerful, they 
protected the inhabitants from the 
French settlements in Canada. 

2. At length the French governor, 
De La Barre, being afraid of these In- 
dian tribes, raised an army of seventeen 
hundred men, and Avent against them. 
But his troops suffered A^ery much from 
hardship and sickness, and many of 
them died. 

3. Being surrounded by his enemies, 
he Avas noAV obliged to ask peace of the 
saA'ages, Avhom he had come to destroy. 
He sent to the chiefs of the Five Nations, 
requesting them to come and see him, 
and three of them came. A circle Avas 
formed, consisting of the French offi- 
cers and chiefs, and then De La Barre 
addressed the chief of the Onondagas as 
folloAVs: — 

4. ‘ Chief, listen to AAffiat I have to 
say. I am sent to this country by a 
great king, Avffio commands many armies. 
He is good to his friends, but he is ter- 
rible to his enemies. What are ye, his 
friends or his enemies? I tell you that 
ye are his enemies. 

‘You protect the English, and you 
fight for them. You have made a 
league with them for peace and AA^ar. 
Y'ou have led them into the country, 
and shoAvn them the trading-grounds 


of the French, and noAV they carry 
aAvay the furs Avhich the French ought 
to get. 

5. ‘ Such is your conduct, and that 
of the Five Nations; and what shall the 
king my master do to you for these 
things? He can send an army into this 
land, that shall scatter your tribes, as 
the dry leaves of autumn arc scattered 
by the Avhirlwind ; and this he Avill do, 
unless you change your conduct, and 
instead of enemies become his friends.’ 

6. Garrangula, the Onondaga chief, 
kncAv perfectly Avell the distress of the 
French army. He therefore heard this 
haughty speech Avith contempt. After 
Avalking six times around the circle, he 
made the folloAving reply, in Avhich you 
Avill perceive he calls De La Barre 
Yonnondio, and the English governor 
Corlear. 

7. ‘ Yonnondio, I honor you, and the 
Avarriors that are Avith me honor you. 
Your interpreter has finished your 
speech ; I now begin mine. My Avords 

i|jnake haste to reach your ears ; hearken 
to them. Yonnondio, you must have 
believed, Avhen you left Quebec, that 
the sun had consumed all the forests 
Avhich render our country inaccessible 
to the French; or that the great lakes 
had overfloAvn their banks and surround- 
ed our castles, so that it Avas impossible 
for us to get out of them. 

8. ‘Yes, Yonnondio, you must haA^e 
dreamed so ; and the curiosity of so 

! great a Avonder has brought you so far. 
Noav you are undeceived ; for I, and the 
I AA'arriors here present, are come to as- 
j sure you that the Senecas, Cayugas, 
I Onondagas, Oneydas, and MohaAvks, 
are yet alive. 

I 9. ‘ I thank you, in their name, for 


1. What of the Five Nations 1 Their names 1 2. jj What scene followed 1 4. What did De La Bai-^ 

What of De La Barre 1 3. What was he obli- j' re say 1 6. What of Garrangula '? 7. Repeal 

ged to dol Who did he send for 't Who came 1 j the speech of Garrangula to La Barre 12^ 


52 


THE child’s FIHST BOOK OF HISTORY. 


bringing back into their country the 
pipe of peace, which your predecessor 
received from their hands. It was hap- 
py for you that you left under ground 
that murdering hatchet which has been 
so often dyed in the blood of the French. 
Hear, Yonnondio, I do not sleep; I 
have my eyes open ; and the sun which 
enlightens me, discovers to me a great 
captain at the head of a company of 
soldiers, who speaks as if he was dream- 
ing. He says that he only came to 
smoke the great pipe of peace with tlie 
Onondagas. But Garrangula says, that 
he sees the contrary; that it was to 
knock them on the head, if sickness 
had not weakened the arms of the 
French. 

10. ‘We carried the English to our 
lakes, to trade with the Utawawas, and 
t^uatoghies, as the Adisomdoes brought 
the French to our castles, to carry on 
a trade which the English say is theirs. 
We are born free; we neither depend 

' on Yonnondio, nor Corlear. We may 
go when we please, and buy and sell 
what we please. If your allies are 
your slaves, use them as such ; com- 
mand them to receive no other but your 
people. 

11. ‘Hear, Yonnondio ; what I sav 
is the voice of all the Five Nations. 
When they buried the hatchet at Cada- 
racai, in the middle of the fort, they 
planted the tree of peace in the same 
place, to be there carefully preserved, 
that instead of a retreat for soldiers, 
the fort might be a rendezvous for mer- 
chants. Take care that the many sol- 
diers who appear there, do not choke 
the tree of peace, and prevent it from 
covering . your country and ours with 
its branches. I assure you that our 

What of De La Barre 1 What of another French 
governor 1 What did the Indians do I What 
effect had these wars 1 


v/arriors shall dance under its leaves, 
and will never dig up the hatchet to cut 
H dov/n, till their brother Yonnondio 
I or Corlear shall invade the country 
which the Great Spirit has given to our 
ancestors.’ 

1‘2. De La Barre heard this scorn- 
ful speech with shame and rage. But 
knowing his weakness, he was obliged 
to make peace. Not long after anoth- 
er French governor went against these 
Indians with a still larger army than 
that of De La Barre. But the cunning 
Indians concealed themselves till the 
French were near, and then suddenly 
fell upon his army, and obliged him to 
retreat out of their country. These 
I wars made the Five Nations hate the 
French, and attached them to the Eng- 
lish colonies. 

CHAD. XXVI. 

NEW YORK. CONTINUED 

1. In the year 1685, the duke ol 
York succeeded liis brother Charles the 
Second, and became king of England, 
under the title of James the Second. I 
I have told you before, that this king was 
hated by the English people, and he was 
equally disliked in the colonies. 

2. He claimed absolute authority 
over the American people, and beside 

j that he was a Catholic. These things 
I caused him to be dreaded by the peo- 
j pie. They were therefore very much 
I rejoiced when the news came, in 1689, 
that he had been driven from the throne, 
and that William, Prince of Orange, had 
succeeded him, 

3. Elated by this news, and stimu- 
lated by the example of the people at 
Boston, who had seized and imprison- 

1. What took place in 16851 2. Why did 

j the people hate James the Second 1 What new* 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


53 


ed Andros, they began to make prepa-| 
rations to depose tlie governor, whose 
name was Nicholson. 

4. Alarmed at this, he tied by night, 
and the chief magistracy was assumed 
by a militia captain, whose name was 
Leisler. He was a weak man, and 
managed the aflairs of the colony very 
badly. 

5. While the settlement was suffer- 
ing from the troubles occasioned by 
Leisler’s administration, war was declar- 
ed between England and France. This 
was king William’s war, of which I 
have told you something in the history 
of New England. Count Frontenac 
was now governor of Canada. 

0. In the winter of 1G90, he sent a 
small party of French soldiers and In- 
dians, to 'attack Albany. These con- 
cluded to destroy Schenectady first. 
The people of Schenectady had been 
warned of their danger, but they would 
not believe that men would come from 
Canada, a distance of two or three hun- 
dred miles, tliroiigh the deep snows of 
winter, to molest them. 

7. But they were fatally deceived. 
On a Saturday night, the enemy came 
near the town. They divided them- 
selves into small parties, so that every 
house might be attacked at the same' 
instant. Thus prepared, they entered 
the place about eleven o’clock. 

8. The inhabitants were all asleep, 
and stillness rested upon the place, i 
With a noiseless step, the enemy dis-j 
tributed themselves througli the village, j 
At a given signal, the savage war-whoop | 
was soundecl. What a dreadful cryj 
was this to the startled fathers and mo-' 
thers of this unhappy town ! 

catne in 1689 1 3. What effect had this news 

upon the people 1 4* What of Nicholson ? 

Leisler 1 5. What war now broke oiit?l| 

What of Count Frontenac 1 6. What took i)lace j| 


9. It is scarcely possible to describe 
the scene that followed. The people, 
conscious of their danger, sprang from 
their beds, but were met at the door, 
and slaughtered by the savages. Every 
house was set on fire ; and the Indians, 
rendered frantic by the wild scene, ran 
through the place, slaying those they 
chanced to meet. 



Slaughter at Schenectady. 

10. Sixty of the people were killed, 
and twentyfive were made prisoners. 
Some attempted to escape, but they 
were naked ; the weather was extreme- 
ly severe, and they had a considerable 
distance to go before they could reach 
a place of security. A part arrived in 
safety, and twentyfive lost their limbs 
bytlie cold. 

11. To avenge these cruelties, with 
others of a similar nature committed in 
New England, an attack upon Canada 
was determined upon. An army, raised 
in New York and Connecticut, proceed- 
ed as far as Lake Champlain ; but find- 
ing no boats to take them across, they 
were obliged to return. Thus the 
whole expedition failed, and this was 
attributed to the imbecility of Leisler. 

12. It was about this time, that king 

ill the winter of 16901 7. Describe tlie attack 

upon Schenectady. Describe the picture. IL 
Wliat attack was now determined upon 1 What 
army was raised 1 What did they do 1 12, 


54 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


William sent Col. Henry Slaughter to j 
be governor of New York. But unhap- 
pily, he was totally unlit for the oliice. I 
When he arrived, Leisler refused to 
give up his authority. He sent two 
messengers, however, to confer with 
Slaughter. These messengers were im- 
mediately seized by the governor, and 
put in prison as rebels. 

13. This alarmed Leisler and his 
associates, and they attempted to escape. 
But he, with his son-in-law Milborne, 
were taken, tried and condemned to 
death, for high treason. But the gov- 1 
ernor refused to sign the warrant for 
their execution, as he did not wish to 
sacrilice two men, who had been rather 
weak, than wicked. 

14. But the enemies of Leisler and 
>Iilborne contrived a plot for their de- 
struction. They made a great feast, 
and invited governor Slaughter to go 
and partake of it. He went, and when 
he was intoxicated with wine, they ask- 
ed him to sign the death warrant of the 
two prisoners. This he did, and before 
he had recovered his senses, Leisler 
and Milborne were executed. Thus, 
through his folly and wickedness, two 
men suffered an ignominious death. 

15. In 1691, governor Slaughter 
died. The same year a man, by the 
name of Peter Schuyler, at the head of 
three hundred Mohawk Indians, went 
to make an attack upon the French set- 
tlements at the north end of Lake Cham- 
plain. A body of about eight hundred 
men were sent from Montreal against 
him. With these, Schuyler and his 
Mohawks had several battles, in all of 
which they were successful. They kill- 
ed more of the enemy [than the whole 
number of their party. 

What of Governor Slaughter 1 IS. What of 
Leisler 1 14. In what manner was the execution 

oflieisler and his son-in-law effected 1 15. What 

4ook place in 16.91 1 What of Peter Schuyler 1 


I CHAP. XXVII. 

I NEW YORK.— CONTINUED. 

! 1. In 1692, Col. Fletcher was made 

Governor of New York, and in 1698 lie 
was succeeded by the Earl of Belja- 
Inont. About this time, the American 
seas were very much infested by pirates. 

I These bold men attacked such ships as 
they met with on the ocean, plundered 
' them of whatever they wanted, and 
either murdered the crew and took th^ 
ships, or sunk them both together in 
the deep. 

2. Governor Bellamont was particu- 
larly charged by the English govern- 
ment, to clear the American seas, if pos- 
sible, of these desperate men. But the 
necessary ships not being furnished, 
he, with some other individuals, deter- 
mined to fit out a vessel on their own ac- 
count, and send it against the pirates. 

3. They accordingly procured a ship 
of war, and gave the command of it to a 
sea captain, whose name was Robert 
Kidd. But when he got out upon the 
water, Kidd determined to become a 
pirate himself. He proposed the plan 
to his men, and they consented to it. 



Kidd attacking a Vessel. 


1. What took place in 1692 1 What in 1698 1 
What of the pirates! 2.* What did Governor 
Bellamont and some others do 1 3. What of 

Robert Kidd! Describe the pidure. What wm 


THE child’s first book of history. 


4. So ha went forth and became one 
of the most famous pirates that was 
ever known. He attacked many ves- 
sels upon the Atlantic and Indian Oceans, 
and after three years he returned. He 
burnt his ship and went to Boston, where 
he was seen in the streets. He wasj 
seized, and carried to England, and there 
he was tried, condemned, and executed. 

5. I suppose you have heard a great 
many stories of Captain Kidd. It isi 
said that he buried a great deal of gold 
in pots, somewhere along the coast. A 
great many attempts have been made 
to find this gold, but without success. 
I suspect that Kidd and his sailors 
spent all the money they got, and never 
buried any of it. 

6. I will now pass over a considera- 
ble space of time, during which notliing 
very remarkable happened in this colo- 
ny. Several governors had been sent 
from England, most of whom were ut- 
terly unworthy of the trust. 

7. About the year 1736, circumstan- 
ces occurred in the city of New York, 
which it is painful to dwell upon. 
Some persons of very bad character, 
circulated a report that the negroes of 
which there were a good many in the 
city, had formed a plot to burn the 
town, and make one of their number 
governor. 

8. A great many fires had taken 
place, and these led the people to be- 
lieve that the rumor "was true. ’ Many 
of the negroes were arrested and put in 
prison. Other accusers now came for- 
ward, and so strong v/as the prejudice 
against the negroes, that when the trial 
came on, all the lav/yers offered their 
services to plead against them. 

9. Thus left without defence, these 
unhappy people were all condemned. 

the fate of Kidd '? 7. What occurred in the city j 

of New York in the year 1736 1 9. How many i 


Fourteen were burned to death, eigh- 
teen were hung, and seventyone were 
transported out of the country. It is 
gratifying to feel sure that, in our day, 
the v/eakest and most defenceless are 
not exposed to such cruelty and in- 
justice. 

10. In 1743, George Clinton w^as 
sent over as governor of the colony. 
He was warmly received by the people, 
and his administration was on the whole 
acceptable. In 1745, during George 
the Second’s war. New York was much 
distressed by the incursions of the In- 
dians. 

11. Saratoga w'as destroyed, and 
other parts of the colony suffered very 
much. Some of the Indians came to 
Albany, and concealing themselves in 
the neighborhood, laid in wait to take 
prisoners. One savage, bolder than the 
rest, called Tohnonwilemon, came with- 
in the city itself, and carried off people 
by night. 

12. In 1746, New ITork united Avith the 
eastern colonies in an expedition against 
Canada, but the project totally failed. 
The next year, the welcome news of 
peace between England and France ar- 
rived, and the colony was relieved from 
the distresses brought upon them by the 
war. 

1.3. Thus I have told you of some 
of the principal events in the history 
of New York, up to the time of the 
French Avar, Avhich commenced in 1755. 
From that time the colonies acted in 
concert ; and I shall therefore leave the 
separate history of Ncav York here, and 
give you a vieAV of Avhat remains, in the 
general account of the French Avar and 
the American revolution. 

negi'oes were burnt 1 How many hung 1 How 
many transported 'I 10. What happened in 1743 1 
111 1745 1 11. What of Saratoga 1 What of Tol- 
moinvilemon 1 12. What took place in 1746 7 

What news came the next year 1 


56 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY 


CHAP. XXVIII. 

STATE OF NEW JERSEY 

1. I will now tell you about New 
Jersey. It is not a large State, but in 
travelling through it we shall see many 
things that are interesting. We must 
start at New York in a steam-boat and 
cross the North River to Jersey city. 
This is done in a few minutes. Then 
we get into the stage, and ride nine 
miles, over a very level road to Newark. 

2. This is a beautiful town, with se- 
veral handsome churches, and many 
handsome houses. We shall see many 
of the people busy in making shoes, 
gigs, coaches, stages and wagons. 

- Newark is the largest town in the State. 

3. We must not omit to make an ex- 
cursion from Newark to Patterson, to 

''see the Passaic Falls. These are form- 
ed by the Passaic River, which rolls 
over the rocks to the depth of 72 feet. 
The spectacle is very brilliant and 
beautiful. 

4. Some years ago, a gentleman and 
his v.nfe from New York were stand- 
ing on tlie rock, which hangs over the 
cataract. The lady suddenly became 
dizzy, and fell over the awful precipice. 
She was instantly killed by the fall. 
Patterson is a brisk manufacturing town, 
situateil near the cataract. 

t5. In an hour and a half after leav- 
ing this place we shall -arrive at Eliza- 
bethtown. In passing along, we shall 
observe many fine orchards ; and if it ! 

Questions on the Map . — Boundaries d De- 
scribe tlie Raritan River, Delaware, Passaic. 
Counties in New Jersey 1 Their names'? Capi- 
tal ? In what county is Trenton "? Describe the 
following towns: Elizabethtown, Newark, Prince- 
ton, New Brunswick, Morris, Patterson, Bonlen- 
tQwn, Burlington. Population of New Jersey '? Ex- 
tent 1 Greatest length of New Jersey '? Greatest 
width ? Average length '? Average width "? 


II is autumn, we shall see abundance of 
very excellent apples. The cider made 
! here is very celebrated. 

G. On arriving at Elizabethtown, we 
shall be struck with the beauty of the 
place. After looking about us, the 
stage driver, who is very much in a 
hurry on this road, will blow his horn : 
the passengers will jump into the stage, 
and away we go. 

7. We shall pass through Bruns- 
wick, and at length reach Princeton. 
Here we shall observe a large building, 
with a green lawn in front, covered with 
shady trees. This is Princeton College; 
it is quite celebrated, and a great many 
young men are educated here. 

8. After leaving Princeton, we shall 
soon arrive at Trenton, which is beau- 
tifully situated on the Delaware. We 
shall here notice a fine bridge across 
this river. I think we had better take 
the steam-boat now, and go down the 
Delaware to Philadelphia. 

9. We shall be delighted with this 
part of our journey. On both sides of 
the river, we shall see many very hand- 
some towns. Those on the west side 
belong to Pennsylvania, those on the 
east, to New Jersey. Among other in- 
teresting things, we shall see Joseph 
Bonaparte’s house, at Bordentown. 

10. Joseph-Bonaparte is a brother 
of the famous Napoleon Bonaparte. 
His house is large, and quite different 
from other houses in this country. He 
has a very lofty tower on his grounds, 
called an Observatory. From the top 
of this, there is a very extensive and 
beautiful prospect. 

1. What of New Jersey"? How do you go 
from New York to Newark 1 2. What of New- 
ark "? 3. What of the Passaic Falls I 4. Patter- 

son "? 5. What of orchards "? Apples "? Cider 1 
6. Elizabethtown 1 7. What of Princeton 

College"? 8. Trenton 1 9. What of Joseph 

Bonap..rte’3 house "? 10. Who is Joseph Boxu^ 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


57 


11. Soon after passing Bordentown, I 
vre shall come to Burlington, and then I 
in a little while we shall reach Phila- 
delphia. If we go into the market at 
Philadelphia, we shall observe large 
quantities of the finest apples, pears 
and peaches, and sweet potatoes and 
other vegetables, that we have ever seen. 
Many of these things are brought from 
that part of New Jersey which lies onj 
the Delaware, opposite to Philadelphia. I 

12. If we stay some time in the! 
State of New Jersey, we shall observe! 
that the people differ considerably from j 
those in Ncav England. This differ- i 
ence is owing to the difference of ori- 
gin. The people of New England are 
descended entirely from the English, 
while those of New Jersey are the 
mixed descendants of English, Dutch, 
Danes, Germans and Sw^edes. 

13. The first settlement in ' this 
State w^as made by the Danes in 1624. 
Some Dutch and Swedes soon after 
made settlements in the territory ; the 
population was, how’^ever, very small. 
In 1664, New Jersey came wdth New 
York into the hands of the English. 
The next year, a settlement w^as made 
ot Elizabethtown, by three men who 
purchased the land of the Indians. 



Settlement of ElizaVjethtown. 


.•ifirte 1 His observatory '? 11. Market ayPbil- 

utkljihia 1 12. What of die people of Nctv Jcr- 1^ 


14. The same year Sir George Car- 
teret w'as appointed governor, and the 
colony received the name of Jersey, iu 
compliment to him, who w^as a native 
of the island of Jersey, on the southern 
coast of England. 

15. In 1676, the province was di- 
vided into East and West Jersey, and so 
continued until 1702. The* govern- 
ment w^as then surrendered to Queen 
Anne of England, and East and West J er- 
sey w-ere united, under the title of New 
Jersey. From this date to the Revo- 
lutionary War, very little happened iu 
this colony, the story of wdiich would 
be interesting to you. 

16. The wars wdth the French and 
Indians, wdiich afHicted New England 
and New York so much, did not reach 
New Jersey. But during the Revolu- 
tionary War, this State W'as occupied 
by the English and American armies, 
and it consequently met with losses, 
and suffered great distress. Of these 
things I shall tell you more by and by. 

17. I wdll howxver tell you of one bat- 
tle now. This took place at Monmouth 
in the summer of 1778, between tlie 
Americans under Washington, and the 
British under Sir Henry Clinton, llie 
two armies fought terribly, and hun- 
dreds 'were killed on both sides. The 
weather was hot, and a wmman, named 
Molly Pitcher, W'as engaged in carry- 
ing w'ater to some soldiers wdio w'ere 
managing one of the cannon. By 
and by, her husband, wdio was among 
them, was killed. Molly immediate- 
ly took his place at the gun, and 

sey'? Their origin'? 13. First' settlement iu 
New Jersey'? What occurred iu 1664? Whet< 
was Elizabethtown settled? 14. What of Sir 
George Carteret ? Why was the territory called 
I New Jersey? 15. What took place in 1676? 

I What happened in 1702? 16. What of New 

i Jersey during the Revolutionary Avar ? 17. Bal- 
tic of Monmouth ? ^ 


58 


THE CHILP’S FIRST BOOK OF HISTORY, 


fought like a trooper. She was called f 
Major Molly ever after. 

CHAP. XXIX. 

STATE OF PENNSYLVANIA. 

1 . This is a large, wealthy and 
flourishing State. Our travels through 
it will alibrcl us much gratification. 
We must examine Philadelphia in the 
first place. In my opinion, it is the 
handsomest city in the United States. 
The streets are all straight, and cross 
each other in a regular manner. 

2. We shall find many interesting 
objects in the city. The Bank of the 
United States is built of white marble, 
and is one of the most beautiful edifices 
in the world. The Arcade is a very 
curious building, in which there are a 
great many shops. In the upper part 
of this building is Peale’s Museum. 

3. This is a most interesting collec- 
tion. There are hundreds of stuffed 
birds and animals, which look as if they 
Vvere really alive. There are grisly 
bears, and deer, and elks, and prodi- 
gious great serpents, and birds with 
beautiful feathers, and cranes, with legs 
as long as a man ; and there are bugs 
and butterflies, and Indian, tomahawks, 
and a multitude of other things. 

Questions on the Map . — Bouiulaiies 1 De- 
soribc the Delaware, Susquehanna, Schuylkill, Ju- 
niata, Lehi^i, Ohio, Alleghany. What ranges of 
niou.t.tains in Pennsylvania! Through what coun- 
liee do they run ! Describe Delaware Bay. How 
many counties in Pennsylvania ! Which lie west 
of the Alleghanies ! Which East ! Capital ! In 
what county is Harrisburg! In what county is 
Philadelphia! Ans. In the county of Philadel- 
phia. Describe the following towns : Lancaster, 
Harrisburg, Pittsburg, Chester, Wilkesbarre, Hun- 
tingdon, liedford, Carlisle, York, Easton, Popula- 
tion of Pennsylvania ! Extent! Greatest length 
of Pennsylvania! Greatest >vidtli ! Average 
length ! Average width ! 


4, But the most wonderful of all 
is the skeleton of the Mastodon, or 
Mammoth. These bones were found in 
the State of New York ; the animal to 
which they belonged must have been as 
large as a small house. No animals of 
this kind now live in America, or any- 
where else. But long before the white 
people came to this countr}", it is cer-- 
tain that they roamed through the forests 
of America. Some of them must have 
I been at least four times as large as the 
largest elephant. 




Skeleton of the Mastodon at Philadelphia. 


5. After leaving the museum, we 
should go and see the Fairmount water- 
works, about two or three miles out 
of town. These are situated on the 
Schuylkill river. There are here seve- 
ral large Vvdieels, which arc so con- 
trived as to force the water from the 
river up into a reservoir on tlie top of 
a liigh hill. From thence the water 
flows to the city, and supplies the whole 
town. This is a most useful invention, 

I and one that may well excite our admi- 
!| ration. 

G. We must now leave Philadelphia, 

1, What of Pennsylvania ! Philadelphia! 2. 
Bank of the United Slates ! Arcade! 3. Peale’s 
I Mu-seum! What is to be seen there! 4. What 
I of the IMastodon ! Describe the picture, fi, 
j r'airniount water-works ! What is the use 


THE child’s f<irst book of history. 


59 


and set out for Pittsburg. We shall 
travel over excellent roads with line 
stone bridges, and Vv’e shall see a great 
many large farms, Vvith abundance of 
very fine cattle. We shall pass through 
Lancaster, vdiich is one of the most 
beautiful tov*'ns in the United States, 
and Harrisburg, where the Legislature 
meets to make laws for the Slate. 

7. As we pass along vre shall notice 
a great many Quakers, and I think you 
will like them very much. Ther are 
very friendly, and dress in a singular 

jnanner. You will meet with a good 
many people here v/ho can talk no- 
thing but German. There are indeed 
a great many German people, and some 
entire villages are composed of Ger- 
mans, and their descendants. They 
have almanacs, newspapers, and some 
books printed in their language. 

8. At length, you will reach the Alle- 
ghany mountains. These consist of a 
great many separate ranges. You will 
first go over one, and then another, 
and another, and another. 8ome of 
them are very high, and the sides are 
exceedingly steep. 

9. After travelling a whole day, you 
will find that you have passed over 
these lofty mountains. You will be 
much fatigued, and I think you will be 
glad that you have got over them, for 
they have a very desolate and gloomy 
appearance. These mountains used to |j 
be inhabited by many wild animals ; 
deer and elk are still found there, as 
well as wolves and foxes. The wild 
cat and cougar, are also occasionally 
met with. 

10. After having passed me Allegha- 
nies you will arrive at Pittsburg. This 

them 1 6. What of roads and bridges T Farms 1 

Cattle '? Lancaster '? Harrisburg 1 7. Quakers 'I 

Germans 1 8. Alleghany Mountains '? 9. Wild j 
animals'? 10. Pittsburg'? Coal? 11. Lehigh 


is a great manufacturing place. As you 
approach it, you will observe a cloud 
of black smoke rising over the town, 
and you Avill notice that almost all the 
buildings are blackened with the coal- 
smoke. Coal is so very abundant here, 
that you may buy a bushel of it for a 
few cents. , 

11. We shall hardly have time to 
set doAvn in this little book, all the in- 
teresting things to be seen in Pennsyl- 
vania. There are the Lehigh and Schuyl- 
kill coal-mines, Avliere the people get 
a great deal of coal, Avhich is carried 
doAvn in little cars, on rail-roads, to the 
canals, and then put into boats, and car- 
ried to Philadelphia and other places. 

12. There are several fine canals, 
and some of the most beautiful iWers 
in the Avorld. The banks of the 
Schuylkill, the Juniata, and the Sus- 
quehanna, are truly enchanting during 
the summer. On the Avhole, we shall 
find Pennsyh^ania a most interesting 
State. It is not so cold there in Avin- 
ter as in Noav England. Many parts of 
it are fertile and highly cultivated, and 
the comforts and luxuries of life are 
very cheap and abundant. 

CHAP. XXX. 

PENNSYLVANIA — coittikued. 

1. I Avill noAv tell you the history of 
Pennsylvania, but I must begin Avith 
William Penn, for he Avas the chief in- 
strument of its settlement. He Avas the 
son of a British admiral, and lived in 
London. He Avas educated as a laAvyer, 
but he joined the Quakers, then an ob- 
scure and persecuted sect. 

and Schuylkill coal-mines 1 12. Canals ? Ri 

ers ** Climate ? Soil ? Comforts and luxiiri 
of life 1 

) What of William Penn? 2. AVlrat took 

d2 


6D THU child’s First 

2. In 1681, King Charles granted 
to him a large tract of land, between 
New Jersey and Maryland. This in- 
cluded Pennsylvania and Delaware. In 
the fall of the same year, a good many 
persons, chiefly Quakers, to whom he 
had sold some of the land, set out in 
three ships, and came to America. 
These people settled on the Delaware 
river, near where Philadelphia now 
stands. 

3. These brought with them a let- 
ter from Penn to the Indians. In this 
he said to them, ‘that the great God 
had been pleased to make him concern- 
ed in their part of the world, and that 
the king of the country where he lived 
had given him a great province therein ; 
but that he did not desire to enjoy it 
without their consent ; that he was a 
man of peace, and that the people whom 
he sent were men of the same disposi- 
tion ; and if any difference should hap- 
pen between them, it might be adjusted 
by an equal number of men chosen on 
both sides.’ 

4. In the fall of 1682, Penn him- 
self came to the colony with two thou- 
sand emigrants. While he was in the 
country, he met some of the Indian 
Chiefs, and made a treaty with them. 



Penn making a Treaty with the Indians. 


in 1681 1 What did the grant to Penn include 1 
look place in the fall of 1681 1 Where and 


BOOK OF HISTORY. 

His mild and gentle manners made a 
great impression on the savages. 

5. He walked with them, sat with 
them on the ground, and ate with them 
of their roasted acorns and hominy. 
At this they expressed great delight, 
and soon began to show how they could 
hop and jump. Penn, it is said, then 
got up and began to hop too, and soon 
showed that he could beat them all 
Whether this is true or not, I cannot 
say;, but it is certain the Indians long 
remembered him with feelings of love 
and veneration. 

6. Penn also marked out the plan 
of a great city, to which he gave the 
name of Philadelphia; by which is meant 
‘ the city of brotherly love.’ Before the 
end of the year, this place contained 
eighty buildings. In 1684, Penn re- 
turned to England, leaving the province 
in a happy and prosperous condition. 

7. No part of America was settled 
more rapidly than Pennsylvania. The 
soil was fertile; the climate mild and 
agreeable ; the deer, and other wild an- 
imals were abundant. The govern- 
ment, too, arranged by Penn, was just 
and liberal, giving perfect freedom to 
every man to worship God in his own 
way. 

8. Thus at peace among themselves, 
the Indians being made their friends by 
justice and gentleness, the people of this 
colony aflbrdcd a striking contrast to 
the less fortunate settlements in the 
north and east. Attracted by the favora- 
ble circumstances I have mentioned, 

when was the first settlement in Pennsylvania 
made 1 3. What did Penn say in his letter to 

the Indians'?** 4. What took place in 1682 1 
What of Penn and the Indians '? Describe the pic- 
ture. 6. What great city did Penn lay tho 
foundation of'? When did Penn return to Eng- 
land? 7. Why was Pennsylvania very rapidly 
settled? 8. In what respects did Pchnsylvania 
differ from the Borthern and eastern colonial 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 61 


numerous emigrants flocked to Penn- 
sylvania ; and in four years after Penn re- 
ceived the grant, the province contain- 
ed twenty settlements, and the city of 
Philadelphia two thousand inhabitants. 

9. In 1699, Penn returned to the 
province. He found some uneasiness 
among the people. To remove this, he 
gave them a new charter in 1 701. This 
was submitted to the assembly chosen 
by the people, and accepted. But the 
inhabitants in that part of the province 
which now forms the State of Delaware 
did not like the charter, and refused to 
accept it. 

10. They were therefore separated 
from Pennsylvania, and had a distinct 
assembly chosen by the people, who 
made their laws. The same governor, 
however presided over Pennsylvania 
and Delaware. 

11. Penn soon returned to England, 
and never visited America again. He 
died in 1718, leaving behind him the 
character of a truly pious and good man. 
He was twice imprisoned in England, 
by the government, for his religious 
opinions; and his enemies accused him 
of very wicked conduct. But he lived 
to see every suspicion wiped away from 
Ins reputation ; and his life teaches us 
that the world fails not to honor a man 
of kindness, piety and truth. 

12. His colony continued to flour- 
ish, and its increase in population was 
unexampled. The Indians, conciliated 
by kindness, remained for seventy years 
at peace wdth the inhabitants ; and thus, 
until the French war, nothing more oc- 

What was the condition of the colony in fonr years 
after Penn received the grant 1 9. What did 

Penn do in 16991 What in 1701 1 What of the 
people of Delaware 1 10. What of the govern- 
ment of Delaware 1 11. When did Penn return 

finally to England 1 When did he diel What 
of his life ar> l character 1 12. What of his colo- 

ny 1 Indians 1 


curred in Pennsylvania that would in- 
terest you. 

CHAP. XXXI. 

STATE OF DELAWARE. 

1. This is the smallest State in the 
Union, except Rhode Island ; but it is 
beautifully situated along the western 
shore of Delaware Bay, and, like every 
other part of our country, affords inte- 
resting topics of geography and history. 
In our travels through it, we shall ob- 
serve some of the finest wheat-fields in 
the world. 

2. At Wilmington, on the Brandy- 
wine, we shall see extensive manufac- 
tories of paper, and some of the best 
flour-mills in the country. We shall 
notice a very useful canal, crossing the 
northern part of the State from Dela- 
ware Bay to Chesapeake Bay. We 
shall pass Dover, a pleasant little town, 
which is the seat of government ; and 
if we proceed to Lewistown, at the 
southern point of the State, we shall 
see the people engaged in making salt 
from sea-water. 

3. At the mouth of Delaware Bay, 
and near Cape Henlopen, we shall ob- 
serve an immense wall of stone in the 
sea, called a Breakwater. This was 
built by the government of the United 
States, to protect vessels which may 
be at anchor in the bay, from the waves 
thatroll in from the ocean during storms. 

Questions on the Map . — Boundaries '? What 
bay east of Delaware 1 Number of Counties'? 
Their names 1 Capital 1 In what county is Do- 
ver I Describe Wilmington, Newcastle. Where 
is Cape Henlopen 1 Cape May I Extent of Del- 
aware 1 Population 1 

1. What of Delaware'? Wheat-fields? 2. 
Wilmington? Canal? Dover? Lewistown? 
,3. What of the Breakwater at the mouth of Deb 


G2 


THE CHILH’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


and fiom the ice that comes floating 
down from the rivers in the spring. 

4. This Breakwater is near three 
quarters of a mile in length, and is 
truly a grand and useful work. The 
stone for it was brought from a great 
distance — some of it from Boston, and 
some from other places. 

5. In the Revolutionary War, the 
people of this little State put forth 
their Avhole strength for the cause of 
liberty. The Delaware regiment was 
reckoned the finest in the whole army. 
In the famous battle of Camden, in 
South Carolina, 17S0, these, wdth some 
Maryland troops, were commanded by 
a French otiicer, named De Kalb. — 
This brave man was wounded in eleven 
places, and died on the field. He was 
so impressed with the gallant cond-uct 
of his Delaware and Maryland soldiers, 
that with his dying breath he expressed 
his regard for them. 

G. But it is not my intention to tell 
you of the Revolutionary War now. I 
must take you back to a much earlier 
date. More than two hundred years 
ago, there lived in Sweden, a famous 
king named Gustavus Adolphus. Un- 
der his patronage, some Swedes and 
Finns, or Finlanders, came to America, i 
and landed at Cape Henlopen, in 1G27. 
It was a, beautiful spot, covered with 
green trees, beneath which the wild 
deer with their young fawns were 
sporting. The emigrants were soj 
charmed with the place, that they called 
it Paradise Point. 

7. They now proceeded farther up 
the bay, and had some intercourse v/itli 

a vare Bay 1 5. What of the Revoiuticn 1 The i 

Delaware regiment 1 Battle of Camden 1 6. ! 

What of Giistavais Adolphus '1 'When did the first I 
settlers arrive in Delaware'? Who were they 1 ^ 
What of Cape Henlopen "I What did the emigrants i 
call it ”? 7. What 6f the Indians 1 Where did j 


I the Indians. The latter treated them 
kindly, and sold them the land on both 
sides of the wu'.er. The settlers now 
established themselves near Wilming- 
ton, and called the country New Sweden. 

8. But the colony was not permit- 
: ted to enjoy, its fine lands and delightful 

climate in peace. The Dutch claimed 
the territory, and after annoying them 
in various ways, finally built a fort at 
New Castle. A man by the name of 
Risingh, was then governor of the 
Swedish colony. 

9. One da}^ he proposed to the com- 
mander of the Dutch fort, to pay him a 
friendly visit. This was accepted, and 
Risingh went, accompanied by thirty 
men. They were received with kind- 
ness, and treated with great hospitality. 
But disregarding this, they treacherous- 
ly took possession of the fort, and made 
prisoners of the garrison. 

10. The governor of New York at 
this time, was Peter Stuyvesant, whom 
history describes as possessing a pretty 
hot temper. Such a man was not like- 
ly to permit the treachery of Risingh , 
to go unavenged. So he fitted out an 
armament which v/ent against the 
Swedes in several vessels, in the year 
1G55. 

11. There was considerable fight- 
ing; but the Dutch \vere victorious, and ^ 
having taken the Swedish forts, allow- 
ed a few of the inhabitants to remain, 
and sent the rest prisoners to Holland. 
The settlement continued in the hands 
of the Dutch till 1GG4, when it came 
into the possession of the English, Avith 
the surrender of New York. 


the emigrants settle'? What did they call the 
country 1 8. What of the Dutch'? 9. What 

did the Swe.lrsh governor do"? 10. Who 'vvas 
now governor of the colony of New York '? What 
was done in 1()55'? 11. What of the Delaware 

colony from this time to IGCll What happciW 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


63 


12. In 1682, the territory was pur- 
chased by William Penn, and until 
1703, formed a part of Pennsylvania. 
At that time, it was partially separated, 
having a distinct assembly chosen by 
the people, though the same governor 
that ruled over Pennsylvania, ruled 
also over Delaware. The colony re- 
mained in this situation till 1775, when 
it became an independent State. 

CHAP. XXXII. 

STATE OF 31ARYLAND. 

1. Maryland is divided into two 
parts by Chesapeake Bay, called the 
Eastern and Western Shores. In trav- 
-elling through this State, we shall find 
that the land on both sides of the bay 
is generally level, or moderately uneven. 
If we proceed into the more western 
parts, between the Potomac river and 
Pennsylvania, we shall find hills, moun- 
tains and valleys. 

2. We shall not be long in Mary- 
land, bef )re we discover that there are 
a great many negro slaves there. These 
slaves are owned by the white people, 
who buy and sell them at pleasure. 
The slaves are not at liberty to choose 
their employments, like other people; 
they are obliged by their owners to 
remain in slavery, and labor for them 
as they direct. They can hold no 
property ; they own no houses ; even 
their children are not their own. These, 

in 1664'? 12. What in 16821 What of Dela- 

ware between 1632 anti 1 703 1 What of Delaware 
after 1703 1 What took place in 1775 1 

Questions on the Map . — Boundaries 1 By 
what bay is jMaryland separated into two parts 1 
What counties in the eastern part 1 What in the 
western 1 Describe the SnstineluuinalL^Poton^ 
Capital 1 In what county 1 De- 

scribe Baltimore, Fredericktown. 


too, are slaves, and may be taken away 
and sold at the pleasure of the white 
people. 

3. In the States north of Maryland, 
slavery is not authorized by law. The 
people there consider it a great evil, 
and have taken care to abolish it. But 
in Maryland, and the States south of 
it, the laws permit people to hold slaves. 
Many persons even there, believe it 
wrong, but it has been long practised : 
there are many thousands of slaves in 
the country, and it is therefore not 
easy to devise any plan by which they 
can safely be set free. It is to be hoped, 
however, that before many years, no 
such thing as slavery will exist in oui 
country. 

4. We shall observe many fine 

wheat-fields in Maryland, and many 
plantations of tobacco. This plant is 
cultivated in rows, like Indian corn, 
and it has broad leaves like a mullein. 
We shall notice that almost all the la- 
bor in the fields is performed by the 
negro slaves. • 

5. You will be delighted with Bal 
timore. It is larger than Boston, and 
has many interesting objects in it. 
There is a tall monument with a statue 
of Washington on the top, that you 
cannot fail to admire. The Roman 
Catholic Cathedral is one of the finest 
churches in America. When you go 
into it, you must be particular to take 
off your hat, for the Catholics reverence 
their churches very much, and expect 
others who enter them to do so too; 

I You will see several beautiful pictures 
in this church. 


1. Face of the country in RI. '? 2. What ol 

negro slaves *? 3. What of the States north of 

I Maryland 1 What of Maryland and the States 
! south of it I 4. Wheat-fields in M. "? Tobacco'? 
I Who cultivate the land in JI. '? 6. Whatof Eal- 

i timore 1 A monument 1 Catholic Cathedral '? 


64 


THE child’s FIRS;r BOOlS OF HISTORY. 


6. After seeing the rest of the city, 
you should go to Howard Street, where 

'ou will notice a great many wagons, 
oaded with flour. Baltimore is the 
greatest flour market in the world. 
Thousands and thousands of barrels 
are brought here every year from va- 
rious parts of Maryland, and from Del- 
aware, Pennsylvania, and Virginia. 
It is then sent in ships to New York, 
Boston, Charleston, and various foreign 
countries. 

7. But the most curious thing at 
Baltimore is the Rail-road. I must tell 
you that there is a great trade between 
Baltimore and the States west of the 
Alleghany Mountains. The western 
people buy a great many goods at Bal- 
timore, and send in return a great deal 
of western produce. There is, there- 
fore, a vast deal of travelling back and 
forth, and hundreds of teams are con- 
stantly occupied in transporting goods 
and produce to and from market. 



Rail-road Car. 


8. Now in order to carry on all this 
business more easily, the people are 
building what is called a rail-road. 
This consists of iron bars laid along 
the ground and made fast, so that car- 
riages with small wheels may run along 

6. Howard Street t What of Baltimore as a 
flour-rnarket t 7. Trade of B. 1 8. What is : 

the object of the rail-road building from Baltimore i 


upon them with facility. In this way, 
one horse will be able to draw as much 
as ten horses on a common road. A 
part of this rail-road is already done, 
and if you choose to take a. ride upon 
it, you can do so. You will mount a 
car something like a stage, and then 
you will be drawn along by two horses, 
at the rate of twelve miles an hour. 

9. Beside Baltimore, there are seve* 
ral pleasant towns in Maryland. Anna- 
polis, the seat of government, has a 
handsome State-house, and Frederick'’ 
town is a pleasant place. 

10. The climate of Maryland is very 
agreeable. The winter is never severe, 
and often when the rivers and lakes ol 
New England are frozen over, the 
creeks and inlets along Chespeake Bay, 
are covered with flocks of wild water- 
fowl. 

CHAP. XXXIII. 

MARYLAND. — continued. 

1. Baltimore is situated on the 
river Petapsco, which enters Chesa- 
peake Bay, about fourteen miles from 
the city. On the northern side of this 
river, is a piece of land running into 
the bay, called North Point. You 
should visit this spot, for a famous bat- 
tle was fought there on the 12th of 
September, 1814. At that time, our 
country was at war Avith England. A 
great many English soldiers and ships 
were sent over to fight Avith our people. 

2. On the tAventythird of August, 
they ' nade an attack on the city of 
Wasiiington, and as there Avere fcAAr 


to the western country ^ Describe tlie rail-road. 
Describe the picture. 9. What of Annapolis 1 
Fredericl^to|||^^^. Climate of M, 1 

1 . Wha^^PPBaltimore t The Petapsco 1 
Noi ih Point 1 2, What took place on the twen> 


THE child’s first BOUK OF HISTORY. 


65 


A.merican troops there, they burnt the 
capital, and several other public build- 
ings, and the President’s house. The 
President himself was obliged to ride 
very fast, to keep out of their way. 

3. After they had done this, the 
British went to attack Baltimore. They 
entered the mouth of the Petapsco with 
a fleet of sixty ships, and on the day 
abovementioned, six thousand troops 
were landed at North Point. 

4. Now the people of Baltimore, 
were not in the humor for having their 
city taken by the British soldiers; so 
there was a great bustle in the streets. 
INIen were seen running to and fro, with 
muskets in their hands, and counte- 
nances full of resolution. The mer- 
chants left their counting rooms ; the 
lawyers, their offices ; the mechanics, 
their various employments; the drums 
beat; the fifes screamed; and, assembled 
under the command of their leaders, the 
bravest and best men in the city went 
down to meet the enemy. 

5. They met, and there was hard 
fighting. The cannon bellowed, and the 
musquetry rent the air with a continu- 
ed roar. Many brave men fell on both 
sides. But the Americans, being few 
in number, were obliged to retreat. 
General Ross, the British leader, was 
killed ; and finding by the experiment 
they had made, that the people of Bal- 
timore were inclined to treat them too 
roughly, the British went away, ships, 
sailors, soldiers and all. 

6. Such are the brave deeds which 
have recently taken place in Maryland. 
Let us now contemplate the period, 
when the white people first settled up- 
on these shores. 

tythird of August 1814 1 3. What took place at 

North Point on the twelfth of September'? 4. 
What took place in Baltimore before the battle "? 
fi. What took place when the British and Ameri- 


7. Two hundred years ago, the Cath- 
olics in England were persecuted bb 
the Puritans had been before. One of 
them. Lord Baltimore, determined there- 
fore to come to America. Accordingly 
he went to Virginia, which had now 
been settled some time. But he found 
the people there as little disposed to 
treat the Catholics kindly as in Eng- 
land. So he went back to EnglancL 
and begged the king to give him a 
charter of the land lying on Chesapeake 
Bay, then occupied only by the Indians. 

8. This request was granted, but 
before the business was completed, he 
died. His son Cecil, also called Lord 
Baltimore, determined to carry into 
effect the plans of his father. So he 
obtained the grant for himself, and in 
1634, sent his brother, Leonard Calvert, 
with two hundred Catholic emigrants, to 
settle upon the land on the Chesapeake. 

9. When they arrived at the mouth 
of the Potomac river, they found an 
Indian village there, called Yoamaco. 
This village they purchased of the sa- 
vages, and thus obtained good shelter, 
till they could build better houses. 
They ’also acquired some good land, 
which had been cultivated. Their sit- 
uation was therefore very comfortable. 

10. The colonists found plenty of 
wild deer in the woods, and abundance 
of fish along the shores of the bay. 
The sea-fowl were also numerous. 
There were countless flocks of ducks, 
‘skimming along the water, and settling 
down arouncP the islands ; and there 
were numbers of wild geese at the 
mouths of the creeks and rivers. 


cans met at North Point 1 Describe the battle. 
What followed 1 7. What of the Catholics two 

hundred years ago'? What of Lord Baltimore 1 
Virginia '? 8. What of Cecil, Lord Baltimore ■? 

Leonard Calvert 1 9. What did the emigrants 

do on arriving at the mouth of the Potomac '? 10« 


66 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


11. The colony flourished, as well 
on account of its pleasant situation, as 
the liberal policy of its government. 
These Catholics did not persecute those 
who differed with them in religious 
opinion. Lord Baltimore, and Roger 
Williams, of Rhode Island, seem to 
have discovered about the same time, 
that every man has a right to worship 
God as he pleases. Thus Rhode Island 
and Maryland, at this early date, enjoy- 
ed the blessings of entire religious free- 
dom. 

12. Yet the colony, whose story I 
am now telling you, had its share of 
troubles. A man by the name of Clay- 
borne, stirred up the Indians to hostili- 
ty, and they made war on the settlers. 
This continued for several years, and 
the people suffered great distress. In 
1645, the same Clayborne induced some 
of the settlers to rebel against their ru- 
lers, and Calvert the governor was obli- 
ged to fly to Virginia. But the next 
5 '^ear, the revolt was suppressed. Gov- 
ernor Calvert returned, and the colony 
once more enjoyed a state of peace. 

13. In 1666, the colony contained 
about 12,000 inhabitants. In 1676, 
Lord Baltimore, the founder of the col- 
ony, died ; leaving behind him the en- 
viable character of a wise and good man. 
He was succeeded by his son Charles, 
as proprietor of the colony, and he dis- 
played the same amiable qualities as 
his father had done. 

14. In 1689, king William assumed 
the government of the colony; but in 

What did the Colonists find 1 Wild fowl'? 11. 
Did the Colony of M. flourish 1 Why "I Lord 
Baltimore and Roger Williams'? Maryland and 
Rhode Island "? 12. What of the Indians '? 

What took place in 1645 1 13. How many in- 

habitants in M. in 1666 ? What in 1676 1 Char- 
acter of Lord B. '? What of Charles, Lord Balti- 
more t 14. What took place in 16S9 '? What 
im 17161 What in 17751 


1716, it was restored to Lord Baltimore^ 
and continued in the family till 1775. 
The people then engaged with the 
other colonies in the revolution, and 
Lord Baltimore’s claims ceased. 

CHAP. XXXIV. 

MIDDLE STATES. 

1. I have now given you a brief 
sketch of the geography and history 
of the five Middle States. These are 
classed together merely on account of 
their situation, and not because of any 
similarity either in the history, or the 
manners of the people. They were 
settled at difierent times by people from 
different countries, who came for differ- 
ent purposes ; — some for trade ; some to 
improve their fortunes ; and some for 
religious peace. 

2. There is no such reseiiblance be- 
tween the people of these five States, 
their manners, customs and opinions, 
as between the people of New England. 
On the contrary, we shall find great va- 
riety among the inhabitants, their houses, 
dress, manner of tilling the land, thoughts, 
feelings, and opinions, in different parts 
of this section of the Union. 

3. If you will look at the map, you 
will observe, that the three largest 
cities, and three of the finest rivers in 
the Union, are in these States. New 


Map of the Middle States . — Boundaries of 
each of the five Middle States '? Distance and di- 
rection of the several capitals of the Middle States, 
from the city of New' York'? What three great 
cities in the Middle States d What three great 
rivers'? Describe them. Extent of the Middle 
States '? Population ? 

1. What of the Middle States '? Settlement oT 
the Middle States. When and by whom w'as each 
of the Mifldle States settled '? 2. What of tho 

people of the Middle States '? Houses, dress, &c. I 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


67 


! York is the largest city on the Ameri- 
! can continent, and the Hudson is one 
of the noblest navigable rivers in the 
world. 

4. In point of soil and climate, these 
States doubtless surpass all the others 
situated upon the Atlantic. They are 
generally very fertile, producing grain 
and fruit in the greatest perfection and 
abundance. They are equally remov- 

I ed from the severe winters of the north, 
and the burning summers of the south. 

5. Thus happily placed in the heart 
I of the country, they are growing in 

population and wealth. Previous to 
the French war, which has been before 
mentioned, these States never acted in 
concert. They were then separate 
colonies, with separate interests. They 
i have therefore no common history un- 
til the year 1756, when they united 
with the otl colonies, to resist the 
French an^^ ns. The history of 

that war wi^* given hereafter. 

CHAP. XXXV. 

STATE OF VIRGINIA. 

1. We have now reached Virginia, 
the oldest and largest State in the Union. 
We shall not find as good roads, nor as 
good stages here, as in the Middle and 
Eastern States, nor shall we meet with 
so many handsome houses, nor. shall 

3. What of New York 1 The Hudson I 4. Soil 
of the Middle States 1 Climated 5 Growth of 
the Middle States'? What of the M-ddle States 
previous to the French war 1 

(Questions on Map of the Southern States . — 
Boundaries of Virginia ? Descrihe the Rappahan- 
no«’k, Janies, York. Wliat Mountains in \ ir- 
glnia d How does the blue ridge cross the State d 
How dce.s the Alleghany range cro.«s the Stated 
Capital d Describe Norfolk, reteisburgh, James- 
town 


we, at the distance of every few miles, 
come to a pleasant little village. 

2. We shall remark that the houses 
are scattered, and that the land, instead 
of being divided into small farms, is 
laid out in extensive plantations of 
several hundred acres each. Instead 
of meadows, apple orchards, and small 
patches of rye, Indian corn, and flax, 
we shall see vast plains covered with 
crops of tobacco, wheat, and hemp. 
We shall see, that the whole labor of 
the field is performed on these planta- 
tions by the slaves. The planters them- 
selves have large houses, and live in 
excellent style. 

3. In travelling through the coun- 
try we shall not meet with many tav- 
erns; it may therefore be convenient 
to stop for a night at a planter’s house. 
We may be sure of a hearty welcome, 
and the liberal host will take nothing in 
payment. If it is autumn, he will proba- 
bly invite us to go. the next day in chase 
of deer. There are a great many of 
these animals still in Virginia, and the 
planters hunt them on horseback, with 
packs of hounds. We must take care 
that our travels do not take place in the 
summer, for then it is very hot and 
unhealthy in Virginia. We had better 
go in the winter, and thus, while New 
England is buried up in snow drifts, we 
may travel at our ease in the Southern 
States. 

4. Virginia may be divided into 
three parts. That which lies toward the 
sea coast is level and sandy ; that which 
lies east of the blue ridge is hilly, and 
that which lies west of it is mountain- 
ous. In the western part of the State, 

1. What of Virginia I 2. Houses and lands 
in V. "? 3. Labor I Planters "? What if wa 

stop over night at a planter’s house I What of 
Jeer 1 4. How may Virginia be divided 1 De- 

scribe these three divisions. What of the westtrB 


68 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


there are fewer slaves, and some of the 
white people labor on the farms. 

5. There are several remarkable 
curiosities in this State. One is a 
natural bridge, composed of rocks; it 
is 250 feet high, and a little river flows 
beneath it at the bottom. Wier’s Cave 
is an astonishing work of nature. It 
consists of several spacious caverns in 
the rocks, more than 2000 feet in length. 
The sides are covered over with beau- 
tiful crystals. If you enter the cave 
with a light, it is reflected by these 
crystals, and you will be astonished at 
the wonderful brilliancy of the scene. 

6. There are several other caves in 
Virginia, one of which is called the 
Blowing Cave. From this, a stream 
of air issues so powerful as to blow 
down the grass and weeds, to the dis- 
tance of sixty feet from the mouth. 

7. In the western part of the State, 
near the Ohio, is a remarkable mound 
of earth, filled with human bones. It 
is 70 feet high, and 300 feet across 
at the bottom. This wonderful hill 
must have been built long before the 
white people came to America. 

It is probable, indeed, that it was con- 
structed many ages since, even before 
tlie race of savages we are acquainted 
with, occupied the country. It was no 
doubt the work of a people, who lived, 
flourished, and passed away, leaving no 
record behind them, but these mounds, 
to tell that they ever existed. 

8. Richmond, the seat of govern- 
ment in Virginia, is a handsome place, 
and the largest town in the State. 
Norfolk has a great deal of trade, Lynch- 
burg, on James river, has some manu- 
factures, and deals extensively in the 

part of the State 1 5. Natural Bridge 1 Wier’s 

Cave’ 6. Blowing Cave 1 7. Mound of earth’ 
6 . Richmond’ Norfolk! Lynchburg’ Flour, 
hemp and tobacco 1 


produce of the country. Great quanti* 
ties of flour, hemp, and tobacco, the 
staples of Virginia, are sent down 
James river to Richmond, from this 
place. 

CHAP. XXXVI. 

VIRGINIA CONTINUED. 

1. Before we Iqave Virginia, we 
must visit Monticello, the seat of the 
late Thomas Jeflerson. . He was once 
President of the United States, as I 
shall have occasion by and by to tell 
you. He died on the 4th of July, 
1825. 

2. There is another place in this 
State, that we must not fail to visit. 
This is a pleasant hill called Mount 
Vernon. Here Gener 'Washington 
lived, and at a little dV, ice from the 
house where he diK a tomb, in 
which his body repose^ 1 shall have 
many things to tell you of this great 
and good man. He died in the year 
1799. I recollect when the event hap- 
pened, though I Avas then a child. Such 
was the sorrow of the people Avhen the 
sad news came, that the bells Avere toll- 
ed, and everybody Avent into mourn- 
ing. 

3. In the southeastern part of the 
Stale, is a place called JamestoAvn. 
It is on a little island in James rhxr, 
about thirty miles from its mouth. The 
place is now in ruins, but if you visit it 
you Avill desire to knoAV its history. An 
ancient churchyard, the crumbled spire 
of a church, a fcAv old houses, and traces 
of rude fortifications, Avill make you 
feel that there is an interesting story 
connected with them. 

4. The story is indeed interesting, 

1. Monticello ! Thomas .Tefi'erson ’ 2. 

Mount Vernon! Washington! 3. Jamestown! 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


69 


and I will now tell you a part of it; It 
am sorry that I have not room for the ' 
whole. I must commence at a period 
when as yet no white j)eople dwelt in 
America. This vast country, now oc- 
cupied by twentyfour States, and 12,- 
000,000 of inhabitants, was then a wide 
hunting-ground for the Indians. They 
alone dwelt in its valleys, roamed over 
its hills and mountains, and sailed upon 
its rivers and bays. 

5. The Spaniards had penetrated 
into South America, and found countries 
abounding in silver and gold. Stories 
of their success were circulated through- 
out Europe, and the spirit of adventure 
entered into many minds. In England, 
a com])any W'as formed for making a 
settlement in North America, and having 
Obtained a grant of land, they despatch- 
ed three ships with 105 adventurers, for 
the new world. 

6. After sailing across the Atlantic, 
a storm drove them to the mouth of 
Chesapeake Bay. On approaching the 
land, they, discovered a large and beauti- 
ful river, which they determined to as- 
cend. They had several interviews with 
tlie Indians, who received them kindly. 



Interview with the Indians on James River. 


5* The Spaniards! A company in England! 
6. What of the 105 persons who set out for 
America! Describe the picture. 7. The In- 
diaafi ! S. What took place on the 13th May. 

6 


One day, as some of them were ashore, 
an Indian chief came to them, with a 
bow and arrow in one hand, and a pipe 
in the other, and asked them for what 
purpose they came. 

7. They replied by signs, that they 
wished to settle on the lands in peace, 
and so the chief received them welL 
Another chief otlered them as much 
land as they desired, and sent them a 
deer, as a mark of good will. 

8. On the 13th of May, 1607, the 
emigrants landed and began their es- 
tablishment. It was on an island in 
the river. The river they called James 
river, and the village, they called James- 
town. This was the first permanent 
English settlement in North America; 
and «the ruins I have described, are the 
remains of the ancient town, which 
these people built. 

9. The colonists soon began to ex- 
perience difficulties, which they had not 
foreseen. The provisions they brought 
with them were at length exhausted, 
and having planted nothing, they were 
in great want of food. Beside this, the 
climate being hot and damp, many of 
them were taken sick, and in the course 
of four months, fifty of them died. 

10. They were now in great dis- 

tress, and hardly knew what to do. In 
this emergency, they consulted one of 
their number, named John Smith. He 
was certainly one of the most extraor- 
dinary men that ever lived. At tlie age 
of fifteen, he left England, and travelled 
on foot through Spain, France and 
Germany. < 

11. Here he entered the army ot 
the Emperor of Austria, and at lengtl 
obtained the command of a troop o' 

1607! James river! Jamestown! What waa 
the first permanent English settlement in North 
America! 9. What of the colonists! 10 
John Smith! Describe his adventures. 13. 


70 ^ THE child’s first 

horse. One clay, lie^ chEfllgn'^ed a Turk 
to fight with hirh’;/tl1^ was accepted, 
and, mounted on fine horses, the two 
combatants met in the fi^eld. After a des- 
perate struggle. Smith killed the Turk. 
Not satisfied with this, he challenged 
another, and finally a third, and killed 
these, as he had done the first. 

12. After this, he was in a battle 
with the Turks, and being wounded, 
was taken by the latter and sent pri- 
soner to Constantinople. Here he was 
made a slave, and w^as treated cruelly 
by his master; but his mistress took 
compassion on him, and sent him to 
her brother, who lived at a great dis- 
tance, requesting that he might be 
treated kindly. But her directions 
were not followed, and Smith received 
the same harsh treatment as before. 

13. Irritated by this, he slew his 
new master. He then travelled in va- 
rious countries, meeting with strange 
adventures wherever he went. He fi- 
nally returned to England, and joined 
the expedition to Virginia. While they 
W’ere at sea, the emigrants became jea- 
lous of him, and put him in confinement. 
In this condition he remained, until the 
distress of the colony rendered his as- 
sistance necessary. 

14. They then granted liim a trial ; 
and being acquitted, he immediately 
adopted measures for remedying tlm 
existing evils. He set about building a 
fort, to protect the people from the In- 
dians, and made long journeys into the 
wilderness to procure corn, and other 
food, of the natives. 

15. On one occasion, he obtained 
an idol, made of skins, and stuffed with 
moss. This the savages reverenced 
very much, and in order to get it back. 

What did the emigrants do with Smith'? 14. 
What did Smith do '? 16. Why did the Indians 

hate the white people 17. Tell the adventures ! 


BOOK OF HISTORY. 

they gave him as much corn as he asked i | ' 
for. i| ( 

16. Nothing could exceed the bold- ft 
ness and enterprise of this singular man; i t 
yet it must be confessed, that his con- j t 
duct was not always regulated by jus- i 
tice or truth. In his intercourse wdth ! 
the savages, he resorted to stratagem 
or violence, if he could not succeed in ^ 
his plans by* other means. It was part- 
ly on this account, that the Indians be- 
gan to hate the white people ; and Smith 
himself nearly fell a victim to the 
feelings of revenge he had excited. 

17. He went one day to explore the 
little river Chickahominy. Having as 
cended as far as he could in a boat, he 
left it in charge of his men, and pro- S 
ceeded along the bank of the river, with j 
two white men and two Indian guides. * 
But not long after he was gone, the sa- 
vages "who were lurking in the v.^oods, 
surrounded the men in the boat, and 
took them prisoners. 

18. They then pursued Smith, and 
soon coming up with him, Iiilled his 
white companions with their arrows, ' 
and wounded himself. But with an un- 
daunted spirit, he fired upon his enemies, 
and tying one of the Indian guides to 
his side, he continued to retreat towar 
tlie boat. Awed by his bravery, tl- 
savages kept aloof; but at length he 
came to a place where he sank in tin i 
mire. 

19. Being unable to extricate liim- • 
self, his enemies now seized him, and ! 
took him in triumph to Powhatan, their 
king. A council was now held, to de- 
termine wliat should be done v.dth the 
prisoner, and it was decided that he 
should die. He was accordingly brought 
forth, and being laid on the gi ouiid, his 
h ead w as placed upon a stone. 

of Smitli, as he went to explore the river 
Chickahominy. 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


71 


1 ’’ 20. Powhatan claimed the honor 
i of killing him. lie took a large club, j 
’ and raising it high in the air, was about 
; to give the fatal blow, when his daugh- 

• ter, moved by pity, rushed to the prison- 

• er, and sheltered his body by her own. 

I The astonished chief brought his club 

I I slowly to the ground, and a murmur of 
1 surprise burst from the lips of the sav- 

• ages, who stood around. 



Pocahontas saving Smith. 


21. The chief now raised his daugh- 
I ter, and seeming to be touched by that 
i pity which had affected her so much, 
j gave Smith his liberty, and sent him 
back to Jamestown. 

; CHAP. XXXVII. 

jl VIRGINIA. CONTINUED. 

h 1. On his arrival at Jamestown, 

; Smith found the number of settlers re-j 
iduced to thirtyeight. They were so j 
i disheartened, that most of them had j 

I determined to abandon the settlement, I 
end go back to England. Smith re- 1 
monstrated, but they would not Stop. | 
They entered a small vessel, and pre- 1 
|i pared to sail down the river. He de- 
I termincd that they should not go, so I 
I be pointed the guns of the fort at the i 
I vessel, and threatened to sink her, if i 

L aVlmt of Smith and the settlers on his re- i 


[ they did not return. Alarmed at this, 
I they gave up their project, and came 
ashore. 

2. The colony was now almost in a 
starving condition ; but Smith, by this 
time, had acquired such a reputation 

i for courage among the Indians, that 
they did not dare to refuse supplies. 
Pocahontas, too, the beautiful Indian girl 
who had saved his life, continued to be 
his friend, and sent him such articles 
as were most needed. Thus the colony 
was able to subsist till Captain New- 
port, who brought out the first settlers, 
returned to the colony, bringing Avith 
him a quantity of provisions, and one 
hundred and twenty persons. 

3. Now that the danger Avas over, 
the colonists Avould no longer submit 
to the government of Smith. Disorder 
and confusion among the people soon 
folloAved. About the same time, the 
passion for gold, Avhich had induced 
many of the settlers to come to the 
country, AA'as again excited. Some par- 
ticles of yelloAV shining earth Avere 
found in the bank of a little stream 
north of JamestoAvm. Captivated Avith 
the idea of getting suddenly rich, the 
colonists left their proper employments, 
and Avent to dig Avhat they supposed to 
be gold. 

4. Smith endeavored to dissuade 
them, but they would not listen to him. 
Nothing Avas thought of, or talked of, but 
gold. So they all Avent to filling the ship 
with the earth, AV'hich they supposed to 
contain particles of that precious metal. 
At length she AA^as loaded, and sailed 
for England. When she arrived there, 
the cargo Avas examined, and found to 
be nothing but common mud filled Avith 
little pieces of shining stone. 

5. There is a lesson to be draAvn 

turn I 2. State of the colony 1 Pocahontas 1 
3. What of Smith and the colonists 1 Gold I 


72 


THE child’s first book of history. 


from this point of history. ‘ All is not 
gold that glitters,’ says the proverb, 
and so the Virginians found it. I 
hope my readers, if they are ever tempt- 
ed by any shining prospect to depart 
from the path of duty, will recollect 
that what seems to be gold, often proves ij 
to be only vulgar dust. | 

0. Smith, finding that he could not I 
be useful, left the colonists digging for j 
gold, and went himself to explore the | 
coasts of the Chesapeake Bay. Hav- ! 
ing been absent some time, he returned, 
and after a while, went again to tra- 
verse the wilderness. He often met 
with Indians, and traded with some, 
fought with some, and again went back 
to the settlement, leaving with the na- 
tives an awful impression of his valor. 

7. He was now chosen President, 
and the people submitting to his author- 
ity, order was soon restored. Habits 
of industry were resumed, and peace I 
and plenty soon smiled upon the colo- j 
ny. 

8. In 1600, the London company 
sent out nine ships, with nine hundred 
emigrants to the colony. On board of 
one of these vessels there were some 
officers appointed to rule over them. 
This, unhappily, was driven by a storm 
upon the Bermudas, and detained for a 
long time. The other vessels arrived 
safely ; but the persons who came in 
them were of a vicious character, and 
refused to permit Smith to govern them. 
He determined, however, that he would 
be obeyed, and accordingly he seized 
upon several of them, and put them in 
prison. This alarmed the rest, and 
order was again restored. 

5. What lesson ‘is to be drawn from the conduct 
of the Virginians'? 6. What did Smith do*? 
7. To what office was Smith chosen on his second 
return'? What followed 1 8. What happened in 

1609 f What of one vessel '? Who were on 
board this vessel "? Character of the new emi- 


9. It w^as about this time, that the i, 
Indians, fearing that the white people i 
would become too powerful, determin- 
ed to make a sudden attack upon them, 
and kill them all. Pocahontas heard 
of this scheme, and resolved, if possible, 
to save the English. Accordingl}^ one 

I dark and stormy night, she left her i 
I father’s wigwam, and went alone through 
j the forests to Jamestown. Here she 
I found Smith, and apprised him of the 
j threatened danger. She tlien returned, 
and Smith took immediate measures to 
put the colony in a state of defence. 

10. The Indians, finding the people 
watchful and prepared, gave up their 
project. Thus again did Pocahontas 
save the life of Smith, as well as the 
lives of all the wTiite people in the 
colony. 

11. About this time. Smith received 
a dJligerous wound, which obliged him 

I to go to England, to consult a surgeon. 

I The Indians, finding the only man they 
feared was gone, attacked the colony, 
and, cutting off their supplies, reduced 
them to the greatest extremity. 

12. Such in a short time was their 
ipiserable condition, that they devour- 
ed the skins of their horses, the bodies 
of the Indians they had killed, and the 
flesh of their dead companions. In six 
months, their number w'as reduced 

j from more than five hundred to sixty. 

13. At this point of time, the per- 
j sons who had been wu'ecked at Ber- 
|muda, arrived; but they with the other 
1 settlers all agreed that it was best to 
I quit the settlement, and return to Eng- 
land; Accordingly they sailed down 
the river for that purpose. Fortunate- 

grants'? What did they do'? What did Smith 
do'? 9. What plan was formed by the Indiana 
about this time ? What did Pocahontas do'? IL 
What of Smith "? The Indians "? 12. Condition 

of the colony '? IIow was the number of the coU 
■ onists reduced “? 13. What of the persona wlro 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


73 


ly, they were met by Lord Delaware, 
who had come in a vessel from Eng- 
land, loaded with provisions. This re- 
vived their courage, and they went 
back to Jamestown. 

CHAP. XXXVHI. 

I 

( VIRGINIA. CONTINUED. 

li 

1 . The colony now began to en- 

. joy more favorable prospects. Lord 

Delaware, who was governor, restored 
order and contentment by his mild and 
gentle conduct, and the Indians were 
once more taught to respect and fear 
tlie English. In 1611, new settlers 
arrived, and other towns were founded ; 
and under a succession of wise govern- 
^' s, Virginia became a flourishing and 
extensive colony. 

2. In 1612, Captain Argal wentxon 
a trading voyage up the Potomac, and 
heard that Poctihontas was in the 
neighborhood. He invited her to come 
on board his vessel, and she came. He 
then detained her, and carried her to 
Jamestown. He knew that Pov/hatan 
‘oved his daughter, and thought, while 
flic was ill the ])Ossession of the Eng- 
lish, that he v/ould be afraid to do them 
mischief. 

3. But the noble-hearted chief, in- 
dignant at the treachery that had been 
practised, refused to listen to any terms 
of peace, till his daughter v/as restored. 

4. While Pocahontas veas at James- 
town, a respectable young Englishman, 
named Rolfe, bec ame very fond of her. 

bad been wrecked at Rermuda I Wliat did the 
colonists do I V/liat of Lord Delaware 1 What 
did the emigrants do I 

1. Condition of the colony tinder Lord Dela- 
ware I What happened in 1611 1 What of Vir- 
ginia after this 1 2. Captain Argal and Poca- 
hontas 1 3. Powhatan 1 4. Mr Rolfe and 

Pocahontas'! What followed the marriage of 

G* 


She was indeed a very interesting wo- 
man; simple, innocent and beautiful. 
Pocahontas soon became attached to 
Rolfe, and with the consent of Pow- 
hatan, they were married. This was fol- 
lowed by peace between the colony and 
all the tribes subject to Powhatan. 
Soon after, Rolfe visited England with 
his bride. She was received by the 
king and queen, with the respect due 
to her virtues as a woman, and her rank 
as a princess. When she was about to 
return to America, she died, leaving one 
child, from Avhom some of the most re- 
spectable families in Virginia have 
descended. 

5. New settlers now frequently ar- 
rived, and the colony rapidly increased. 
In 1619, a Dutch vessel came to James- 
town, bringing twenty Africans, who 
were purchased by the people. These 
were the first slaves brought into our 
country, and thus the foundation was 
unhappily laid for that system of slave- 
ry, which now pervades the Southern 
States. 

6. In 1622, in the midst of appar- 
ent peace and prosperity, the colony 
was on the point of annihilation. Pow- 
hatan, the friend of the English, was 
dead. His successor, Opecancaiiough, 
vras a chief of great talent, but he se- 
crelly liatcd the English, and formed 
a sclieme for their destruction. By 
his art and eloquence, he persuaded 
all the neighboring tribes to unite in an 
eflbrt to kill every white man, woman, 
and child throughout the colony. 

7. To conceal their purpose, the 
Indians nov/ professed the greatest 
friends]iip for the English, and the eve- 

Mr Rolfe and Pocahontas '! What did they do af 
ter their marriage '? How was Pocahontas re 
ceived by the king and queen 1 What else of 
Pocahontas 1 6. What took place in 1619 1 

6. What took place in 16221 What of Opo- 
£ 


74 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


ning before the attack, brought them 
presents of game. The next day, pre- 
cisely at 12 o’clock, the slaughter began, 
and three hundred and fortyseven men, 
women and children were killed in a 
few hours. More would have been 
destroyed, but that the plot was reveal- 
ed by a friendly Indian, in time to put 
several of the towns on their guard. 

8. This dreadful scene roused the 
English to vengeance. They pursued 
their enemies into the woods, burnt 
their wigwams, hunted them from for- 
est to forest, killed hundreds of them, 
and drove the rest back into remote re- 
treats. But although victorious, their 
numbers were very much reduced ; out 
of eighty settlements, only eight re- 
mained, and in 1624, of the 9000 that 
had come to the colony, 1800 only 
were living. 

9. It is impossible in this little book 
to tell you everything in the history of 
Virginia that is interesting. Under a 
succession of governors, some good, 
and some bad, the colony was at one 
time in prosperity, at another in adver- 
sity. When Cromwell usurped the 
government of England in 1660, the 
Virginians remained true to the king, 
but were afterwards obliged to submit 
to Cromwell’s authority. At the resto- 
ration of Charles the Second, in 1666, 
they were among the first to greet his 
return. 

10. In 1676, the colony experienced 
all the miseries of civil war. INathaniel 
Bacon, a lawyer, put himself at the head 
of a rebellion, during which James- 

canc-anough 1 7. What did the Indians do 1 

How many white people were killed 1 8. What 

did the English do 1 How had tlie numbers of the 
colonists been reduced 1 9. What of the colony 

after these events 1 Cromwell and the Virginians 1 
What did the Virginians do on the restoration of 
Charles the Second 1 10. What happened in 

1(576 1 11. What of Virghiia in 1638 1 


town was burnt, and the adjacent dis- 
tricts laid waste. At length he died, and 
Gov. Berkley resumed his authority. 

11. Notwithstanding these troubles, 
Virginia continued to flourish, and in 
16S8, contained 60,000 inhabitants. 
From that period, till about the year 
1756, nothing occurred which I think 
would amuse you. 

CHAP. XXXIX. 

NORTH CAROLINA. 

1. After leaving Virginia, we shall 
enter North Carolina. In travelling 
over the State, we shall observe that, 
like Virginia, it is divided into three 
parts ; the level, sandy region towards 
the sea, and occupying nearly one half 
of the State ; the hilly country in the 
middle ; and the mountainous districts, 
in the western portion. 

2. We shall remark that the labor 
of the field is performed by negro slaves. 
We shall see a great many plantations 
of tobacco, cotton, and rice. We shall 
meet with great forests of pine, in the 
eastern part of the State. Many of 
these trees are cut down by the people, 
made into boards, and sent to foreign 
markets. Great quantities of pitch and 
tar are also extracted from the pine 
trees, put into casks, and sent away. 

3. If we proceed to the hilly coun- 
try along the banks of the Yadkin 

Questions on the Map of the Southern States, 
— Boundaries of North Carolina 1 Describe the 
following rivers : Neuse, Cape Fear, Pamlico, 
Chowan, Roanoke. What mountains in North 
Carolina 1 How do tliey cross the State 1 Cap- 
ital of N. C. 1 Where is Pamlico Sound I De- 
scribe the following towns : Raleigh, Fayetteville, 
Edenton, Newburn. Extent (pf N. C, 1 Popubu- 
tion I What Capes in N, C. I 

1. How is North Carolina divided 7 2. 

iWhat of slaves 1 Plantations! Forests! 3. 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


75 


river, we shall meet with people in va- 1! 
rious places, hunting for gold. This is 
found in small grains mixed with sand, 
and sometimes in lumps of considerable 
size. Some persons have gone from 
New England to dig for gold in this 
State. I suppose they hope to get 
suddenly rich but they had better stay 
at home, for where one man becomes 
wealthy by digging for gold, a tho-usand 
get rich by staying at home, and quiet- 
ly cultivating their farms. 



People seeking for Gold in North Carolina. 


4. If you look on the map, you will 
see in North Carolina, three capes | 
shooting out into the Atlantic Ocean. I 
These are dangerous places for ships. I 
Often when they are sailing by, they! 
are driven by the wind upon these capes, | 
and dashed to pieces by the roiling 
waves. 

5. While in this State, we should 
visit Raleigh. We shall find a hand- 
some State House there, where the Leg- 
islature meets to enact laws. In this 
building is a beautiful statue of white 
marble, representing Washington, sit- 
ting down with a paper in his hand. 
It w^as executed in Italy by a famous , 
man called Canova, and cost several 
thousands of doMars. 


Gold 1 Describe the picture. 4. Capes in N.i 
C.l 5. What of Raleigh 1 6. Fayetteville'?' 

Wilmington 1 Newburn'l Cotton, tobacco and 1 


0. We shall not find any very large 
town in North Carolina ; but Fayetteville, 
Newburn, and Wilmington, are con- 
siderable places. A great part of the 
tobacco, rice, and cotton, raised in this 
State, are sent to Charleston in South 
Carolina, and are thence distributed to 
all parts of the world. A great deal of 
the cotton is taken in large bags to 
New England, where it is worked up 
into cloth. 

7. The tobacco is taken to various 
countries. Some of it is made into 
snuff, some into cigars, and some of it 
is chewed. If you should ever go to 
Europe, you will see a great many of 
the people constantly snuffing and puf- 
fing ; and you may be pretty sure that 
they are indebted to iNorth or South 
Carolina for the pleasure they take in 
these things. 

8. North Carolina was first settled 
about the year 1C50. The settlers of 
Virginia were not Puritans, but Church- 
men, or Episcopalians. They were, 
however, almost as intolerant as the 
New England fathers, and persecuted 
those who did not believe with them 
in matters of religion. 

9. Several persons distressed by 
these persecutions, left the colony, and 
proceeding to the north side of Albe- 
marle Sound, settled along the shore, 
about the time abovementioned. Here, 
in the w ilderness, they found peace and 
plenty. The soil was fertile, and the 
climate soft and gentle. F/te from the 
biting winters of the north, undisturbed 
by the persecutions of their fellow men, 
they lived for a time, without govern- 
ment, yet without anarchy. 

Attracted by these favorable 

ricf/l 7. What is doge with the tobacco t $. 
W''L"n was North Carc^na first settled 1 What 
af the settlors fd* Virginia ? t). When and by 

n hoin w as North Carolina first setth-.l ? Siuiatiou 


7(5 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


circumstances, other settlers came to 
them, until their number was consider- 
able. In 1663, the territory of North 
and South Carolina, was granted by 
the King of England, to Lord Claren- 
don, and others. 

11. To induce people to settle here, 
they gave public i^otice, that the inhab- 
itants should enjoy perfect religious 
freedom, and have an assembly of their 
own choosing, to make laws for them. 
Accordingly, a good many persons 
came, and Mr Drummond was made 
governor of the colony. 

12. In 1670, William Sayle made a 
settlement at a place then called Port 
Royal. The next year he removed to 
a neck of land betw'een two rivers, call- 
ed Cooper and Ashley. The settle- 
ment he called Charleston, in honor of 
the King of England, Charles the Se- 
cond, then on the throne. This place 
grew very rapidly, and being at a great 
distance from Albemarle Sound, it had 
a distinct government to superintend 
its affairs. Hence arose the two names 
of North and South Carolina. 

13. In 1707, some French people, 
forced from their homes by persecution, 
settled on the'river Trent, near Pamlico 
Sound. In 1710, some Germans, dri- 
ven by the same cause from their na- 
tive land, took refuge near the same 
spot. Here for a time these settlers 
lived happily ; but, by and by, a sud- 
den and awffil calamity fell upon them. 

14. Not far from the white people, 
two powerful tribes of Indians, named 
Tuscaroras, and Corees, inhabited the 

of file settlers 1 10 What took place in 1G63 1 

11. What inducements did the proprietors hold 
©«t to settlers 1 What of Mr Drummond’^ 12. 
Wh^t took place in 1670 1 What of Charleston 1 
Why did the colony of t>harleston have a separate 
govli'nment 1 What occasioned the tw'o names of 
N. C. and S. C. 1 13. What took place in 

1707? What in 17101 14. What tribes of In- 


forests. Irritated by some injuries they 
had received, and fearing that the white 
people would soon spread themselves 
over the whole land, they secretly plot- 
ted the entire destruction of the French 
and German settlers. 

15. The Indians were always very 
artful in war. In the present instance, 
they privately sent their families to a 
distant fort, and then twelve hundred 
warriors, armed with bows and spears, 
prepared for the attack. 

16. They wnited until it was night; 
then dividing into several parties, they 
secretly a])proached the different settle- 
ments. The inhabitants, who had gone 
to rest in peace, and without fear, were 
suddenly waked by the dreadful war- 
whoop. 

17. Men, women and children were 
killed. The Indians, furious as tigers, 
ran from house to house, slaying all 
they met. Shrieks, prajmrs, and cries 
for mercy availed not. The innocent, 
the helpless, and the unresisting, all 
perished alike. 

18. A few only of the inhabitants 
escaped. These, with the cries of their 
murdered countrymen in their ears, 
fled swiftly through the woods, to 
the settlement in South Carolina, for 
assistance. About a thousand men 
were immediately despatched, under 
Colonel Barnwell, against the Indians. 

19. They had a long and tedious 
march, but at length they met the ene- 
my. The latter fought bravely, but 
were defeated, and fled to the fortified 
tOAvn, where they had sent their women 

dians inhabited the forests near these settlers 
What plan was formed by these tribes 1 15. 

What of the Indians 1 Their families 1 Ho-w 
many warriors went to the attack 1 16. What 

did these warriors do 1 Describe the massacre. 

1 18. How were the people of South Carolina in- 
j formed of these things 1 What did they do 1 
i 19. What did Uie soldiers of S. C. do 1 Wlia» 


THE CHILD S FIRST BOOK OF HISTORY. 


77 


I and children. Here the white men 
pursued them, and were on the point 
of storming the place, when the Indians 
begged for peace. This was granted 
by Colonel Barnwell, and the white men 
returned to their homes. 

20. But this peace did not last long ; 
the Indians soon made war again, and 
Colonel Moore, with forty white men, 
and eight hundred friendly Indians, 
was sent against the enemy. The lat- 
ter again fled to one of their fortified 
towns, but after a siege of several days, 
this was taken with eight hundred 
prisoners. 

21. The Corees and Tuscaroras 
were now quite disheartened; they 
gave up their hopes of driving the Avhite 

I people from the country, and the for- 
mer continued to be peaceable ever af- 
ter. The latter, in 1713, bade adieu 
to the forests, and hills, and ri'^ers, 
which they had once called their own, 

i and, moving to the north, joined the 
Five Nations. 

I 22. From this time, these celebrated 
tribes were called the Six Nations. A 
remnant of the Tuscarora tribe may be 
still seen at Vernon, in the State of 
New York. 

j 23. In 1729, the two Carolinas, 
which till this time had been one colo- 
ny, were separated, and ever since have 
remained distinct. The interior of 
North Carolina was soon explored, 
and finding it very fertile, many settlers 
established themselves there. The 
colony increased rapidly, and, under a 
succession of good governors, it flour- 
ished, till the approach of the Revolu- 
tionary War, in 1775. 

did the Indians do'? Did Colonel Barnwoil grant 
the Indians peace I 20. Did this peace last long ? 
What of Col. Moore ? 21. What of the Corees 

and Tuscaroras ? What did t'le Tuscaroras do in 
17131 23. What took place in 17291 What 

of iV. C. from this time 1 


CHAP. XL. 

SOUTH CAROLINA. 

1. Perhaps my reader is tired of 
travelling. I therefore propose that we 
go to South Carolina by water. We 
will enter a ship at New York, and in 
a few hours we shall be upon the broad 
sea. The hills will sink behind the 
blue waves, and we shall see nothing but 
the sky above, and the ocean around us. 

2. It is a delightful thing to sail up- 
on the water with a fresh breeze ; — but 
by and by the clouds grow dark, the 
wind howls through the rigging of the 
ship, and the waves are thrown into 
the most violent agitation. The vessel 
now leans down on one side towards 
the water, the timbers creak, the ropes 
rattle, the captain shouts aloud to tJie 
men, the waves strike the ship, and she 
staggers like a drunken man. 

3. At such a time one who has 
never been at sea before is likely to be 
frightened; but the §kilful captain 
and the fearless sailors watch every 
sail and rope and spar, every wave, and 
every breath of the gale, and the gallant 
ship, like a bird on the water, rides 
safely amidst the storm. 

4. At length the clouds break away, 
the sun shines down upon the sea, and 
the troubled waters sink to repose ; a 
deep calm settles upon the ocean, and 
its bosom is as smooth as a mirror. 
By and by a breeze springs up, the 
sails are filled, and the ship, speeding 
on her way, soon reaches the port to 
wliich she is bound. In six days after 

Questions on the Map of the Southern States 
— Boundaries! Describe the following rivers: San ■ 
lee, Edisto, Great Pedee, Little Pedee. What 
Mountains in S. C. '? Capital ! Describe the 
following towns: Charleston, Greenville, Abbeville 
Extent '? Population ! 

1. Describe a vovatre from New York to 


78 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


leaving New York, we shall probably 
reach Charleston. 

5. This we shall find to be a large 
and handsome city, with more negroes 
than white people in it. It is situated, 
as I have mentioned before, on a tongue 
of land between two little rivers, one 
called Ashley, and the other Cooper. 
These unite below the city, and form a 
large harbor, covered with vessels of 
various kinds. 

Gi If we stay a few v/eeks at Charles- 
ton, we shall find that it is a very gay 
city. In winter a great many people 
from the Northern States are here, and 
in summer, multitudes from the West 
Indies, and from the interior of the 
State, make it the place of their abode. 

7. If we travel over South Carolina, 
tve shall find the eastern part sandy, 
and the western part mountainous. 
Many of the planters are very rich, 
and great quantities of tobacco, rice,' 
and cotton, are produced from the land. 
The slaves, who are more numerous 
than the white people, perform all the 
labor. 

8. There are no large towns in this 
State except Charleston. Columbia is 
a handsome place, and there the legis- 
lature meets. Charleston is the prin- 
cipal seat of trade. The cotton, rice, 
and tobacco, are sent there and sold, 
and there the people get cloths, knives, 
axes, and other articles of merchandise. 

9. I have told you something about 
the early history of this State. The 
first settlement, you will remember, 
was made near Charleston, in 1670. 
Many circumstances contributed to 

Clicirleston. What of Cl.urleston Its situ- 
ation! What if we stay nt Charleston a few 
weeks 1 7. Face of the country in S. C. ! 

The planters ! Troductions ! Slaves ! 8. 

Columbia! Charleston! 9. First settlement 
in S. C. ! 10. Who came to settle in S. C. ! 

11 . What of N. C. ! and S. C. until 1729! 


make the settlement in South Carolina 
tlourish. 

10. Puritans came from England, 
because they were disgusted with the 
wickedness which prevailed there du- 
ring the reign of Charles the Second. 
Many persons, who had lost their for- 
tunes, settled there, in the hope of once 
more becoming rich. Large numbers 
of French Protestants, driven into exile 
by the cruelty of their government, 
sought an asylum there. From all these 
sources, the population of South Caro- 
lina increased with great rapidity. 

11. I have told you, that until 1720, 

North and South Carolina were consid- 
ered one colony. They had different 
governors, indeed, but until the date 
abovementioned, they were essentially 
one. They were then separated, and 
never afterwards united. From this 
period, the history of South Carolina 
offers no.thing that would amuse my 
young readers, until the War of the 
Revolution ; then its story, of which I 
shall tell you something by and by, be- 
comes exceedingly interesting. '< 

CHAP. XLI. 

GEORGIA. 

1. This is a very large State, but 
not so thickly settled as South Carolina. 
The southern parts are bn rrenan(|^ sandy, 
the northern parts mountainous. 

2. Savannah, the chief town, is sit- 
uated on the Savannah river, about 
fourteen miles from the sea. It is reg- 
ularly laid out, and carries on a very 

Questio7:s on the Map of the Southern States. 
— Boiindarios ! Describe the following rivers : 
Ogeecbee, Oconee, Oakmulgee, Satilla, Savannah. 
What mountains extend into the northwestern 
part of the State ! Describe the following towns: 
Augusta, Savannah, Brunswick, Clarksville. Ex- 
tent ! ropulation ! 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


79 


extensive trade. When we are there, 
we shall observe several steam-boats 
going up and down the river; some of 
them from Augusta, loaded with bags 
of cotton, and others carrying up pas- 
sengers, and various articles of mer- 
chandise wanted by the people. 

3. If we get into the steam-boat, 
and go to Augusta, we shall find it a 
very flourishing place. It receives great 
quantities of cotton and tobacco from 
. the neighboring districts, which are sent 
’ down the river to Savannah. 

I 4. We shall find Milledgeville to be 
a very pleasant place; and if we travel 
into the western part of the State, we 
shall meet with two famous tribes of 
Indians, called Creeks and Cherokees. 
TJiese Indians, have tolerable houses, 
beside horses and cattle, and they live 
chiefly by cultiv^ating the land. 

> 5. While in Georgia we shall ob- 

serve some delicious fruits, that do not 
flourish in the Northern States. Oran- 
ges, lemons, limes, and figs, grow here 
in plenty. These last, when taken 
fresh from the tree, are far more de- 
licious than when dried as we get them 
at the north. The people often' eat, 
them for breakfast, and they make an 
excellent meal. 

i 6. In the southern part of Georgia 
and lying ])artly in Florida, is a famous 
swamp, called Okefonoko,. It is three 
hundred miles around it, and it is full 
of reptiles. If you should happen to 
go along the edge of this swamp in 
summer, you would see some strange 
sights, and hear some strange sounds. 

7. There are crocodiles large enough 
to swallow a man, lizards creeping along 
the trunks of the trees, and huge ser- 

1. What of Georgia 1 Face of the country 1 
2. Savannah Its trade I Steam-boats 1 3. 

Augustal 4. Milledgeville 1 Indians'? 5. Fruits 
in Georgia 1 6. What o» Okefonoko Swamp"? 


pents coiled in the thickets. If you 
stay till evening, you will have a sere- 
nade from ten thousand frogs ; and 
when it gets to be dark, a bird like a 
whippoorwill, will repeat the sound of 
‘chuck will’s widow’ so fast as to 
astonish you. 



View in Okefonoko Swamp. 


8. If you visit this place in the 
morning, you will notice cranes, herons, 
spoonbills, and bitterns, all of them 
birds of the long-legged family, and 
some as tall as a man. These you will 
see standing motionless for hours, along 
the edge of the water, looking very sad, 
as if they had no friends upon earth ; 
but if a fish, or a frog, or a snake, or a 
young crocodile, comes in their way, 
it is snapped up in an instant. 

9. As my reader knows something 
about Georgia, as it is now, I will pro- 
ceed to say something of its history. 
In 1732, one hundred and thirteen 
persons, under James Oglethorpe, came 
from England, and made tlie first settle- 
ment in this colony. They established 
themseh^cs at Yamacraw Bluff, and there 
laid the foundation of the present city 
of Savannah. 

10. The object of those persons in 
England who planned the settlement of 

Describe the picture. 9. What took place in 1732 1 
Where was the first .settlement in Georgia made 1 


80 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


Georgia, was to provide a place, where 
the poor people of Great Britain might 
go and live comfortably. They also 
desired to furnish an asylum, where 
the persecuted and oppressed of all na- 
tions might go and be at peace. 

11. Such were the noble views 
which led to the settlement of this col- 
ony. The proprietors wishing to secure 
the happiness of the people, forbade 
slavery and the use of rum. Unfortu- 
nately, these good rules were soon dis- 
regarded. 

12. In 1733, five hundred poor peo- 
ple emigrated from England to Georgia, 
and in 1735, four hundred settlers came i 
from Germany, Switzerland, and Scot- 1 
land. Thus the number of inhabitants j 
increased rapidly; but still the colony 
did not flourish. The greater part of 
the people remained poor, although 
lialf a million of dollars had been spent 
in sending them across the Atlantic, 
and in providing them with the necessa- 
ries and comforts of life. 

13. In the year 1740, there was war 
between England and Spain. Now the 
latter government possessed Florida, 
and had several settlements there. Ac- 
cordingly, Mr Oglethorpe, governor of 
Georgia, determined to make war upon 
these Spanish settlements. 

14. So he took witii him two thou- 
sand men, a part of them from Virginia 
and South Carolina, and proceeded 
against St Augustine. This place he! 
besieged, but the Spaniards defended I 
themselves bravely, and lie was oblig-j 
ed to march back again vvdth his two j 
thousand men. 

10. What motives led to llie settlement of G, '? 

11. What was forbidden in Georgia 1 Were 

these restrictions observed 1 12, What took 

place in 17331 What in 1735 1 Did the colony 
flourish 1 What of the greater part of the people 1 
How much had been spent 1 13. What took place 

in 1740 1 What of P'lorida 1 Several towns and 1 


15. Two years after this, the Span- 
iards came with thirty vessels, and three 
thousand soldiers, to punish the English 
settlers for their attack on St Augus- 
tine. Their intention was to take pos- 
session of Georgia first, and the two 
Carolinas afterwards. 

16. Gen. Oglethorpe had but seven 
hundred men and a small body of In- 
dians under his command. Accord- 
ingly he sent to South Carolina for as- 
sistance, but the people would Jtot send 
him any. So he and his little band 
were left to defend themselves, as well 
as they could, against four times their 
number. 

17. Oglethorpe knew his danger, 
and determined to scare the Spaniards 
away, if possible. He therefore contri- 
ved to make them believe that he had 
more men than he actually had, and 
that a great body of English soldiers 
were coming to help him. 

18. One day, the Spaniards saw 
three vessels of war, off the coast ; sup- 
posing that these had brought the rein- 
forcements, they became very much 
alarmed, ran aboard their ships as fast 
as possible, and sailed away. Thus 
Oglethorpe got rid of his troublesome 
visiters. 

19. In 1754, the proprietors gave 
up the colony to the king, and after that 
time it prospered very much. The 
people began to cultivate rice and indi- 
go, which they found very profitable. 
Sometimes the Florida Indians were 
troublesome, but no war of much in- 
terest occurred. 


selllemeiits llicic 1 14. What did Gen. Ogle- 
thorpe do 1 15. What did the Spaniards do two 

years after'? 16. What of Gen, Oglethorpe'? 

17. How did Oglethorpe frighten the Spaniards! 

18. What did they do ! 19. What took place 

in 1754! What did the people cultivate! The 
Indians ! 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


81 


CHAP. XLII. 

THE FOUR SOUTHERN ATLANTIC 
STATES. 

1. I have now given you some ac- 
count of Virginia, North Carolina, South 
Carolina, and Georgia. These four 
States are in many respects alike. The 
eastern portions are generally low, san- 
dy, and barren. The western portions 
arc hilly and mountainous. 

2. Their chief productions are cot- 
ton, tobacco, and rice. The climate is 
hot, and in summer it is unhealthy, in 
the low country. The land is chiefly 
divided into large plantations. The own- 
ers of these are called planters. They 
possess a multitude of black slaves, 
who perform all the labors of the field, 
and in the house 



Negro Slaves at Work in the Field. 


> Questions on the Map of the Southern States. 
— Which four of the Southern States lie on the At- 
lantic Ocean 1 What mountains cross these States 'I 
In which direction do the rivers generally run in 
these four States I Which is the largest town '1 
In which direction are the following places from 
Washington 1 Richmond, Raleigh, Columbia, 
Charleston, Milledgeville, Savannah. How many 
people in these four Southern States 1 

1. What of the four Southern Atlantic States 1 j 
Face of the country 1 2. Chief productions 1 1 

Climate 1 How is the land divided 1 Planters I i 

7 


3. The slaves are generally well 
treated ; that is, they have enough to 
eat, drink, and wear, and are not re« 
quired to labor beyond their strength. 
But yet these poor negroes have no ed- 
ucation, they have no property, no lib- 
erty, no right to consult their own 
wishes, or, like the rest of mankind, pur- 
sue happiness in their own way. They 
have little knowledge of religion, and 
sink into their graves almost as igno- 
nant of the destiny that awaits them, 
as the brutes that perish. 

4. Beside all this, when a planter 
dies, his slaves arc often sold ; some to 
one person and some to another. Per- 
chance the wife is taken by this man, 
the husband by that, and their cliildren 
by a third. Thus the family is sepa- 
rated, and very often they never see 
each other again. 

5. A gentleman who was in Georgia, 
two or three years ago, told me he once 
witnessed a public sale of negroes there. 
They were put up at auction, and many 
gentlemen came to bid for them. The 
slaves consisted of men, women, and 
children. The bidders examined them, 
turned them round, and made them walk 
back and forth, as if they had been 
cattle or horses. 

6. At length, the sale was finished 
One of the negro women had three 
children ; a daughter about fourteen 
years old, and two boys about eight or 
ten years old. It ha])pened that the 
children were bought by one person, 
and the mother by another. They 
were now to be separated, and never 
expected to see each other more. The 
gentleman who told me the story said 
the little boys did not mind the parting 
much, but the agony of the mother, and 

Slaves'? Describe the picture. 3. How are the slaves 
treated "? Condition of the slaves 1 4. What becomes 
of the slaves when a planter dies 1 5, What story of 


82 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


the distress of the daughter, were past 
description. 

7. Such are some of the evils of 
slavery. It is a bad system altogether, 
and all good people believe that it is 
wrong. I hope the time will soon 
come, when there will be no slaves in 
our country. A benevolent society has 
been formed for the purpose of setting 
these negroes free, and for sending them 
to Africa. They have already establish- 
ed a colony there, consisting entirely 
of blacks, called Liberia. Several hun- 
dred have already gone there ; and the 
colony is likely to prosper. I sincere- 
ly hope that the slaves in the United 
States may be gradually liberated, and 
that they may enjoy happiness and free- 
dom in the native land of the negro race. 

8. I have already told you that the 
first slaves brought to this country, 
arrived at Virginia in 1619. For about 
fifty years before the settlement of this 
colony, the merchants of England had 
been engaged in the slave trade. They 
used to send large ships to the western 
coast of Africa; these were then loaded 
with negroes, which were taken to the 
West Indies, to South America, and 
various other places, and sold. Some- 
times the slaves were bought in Africa, 
of those who had taken them in war, 
and sometimes the sailors went ashore, 
stole men, women, and children, and 
forced them on board their ships. 

9. These poor creatures were crowd- 
ed into the vessels, and used in the most 
barbarous manner. Many of them ex- 
pired for want of fresh air; some be- 

a sale of negroes t 7. What of Liberia ? 8. 

What of the first slaves brought to America 1 
What of the slave trade t How are the slaves pro- 
cured 1 9. How were the negroes treated on 

board the ships 1 Describe their suft’erings. 10. 
Were there once slaves in the Middle and Northern j 
States 1 11. Of what did the people become 

convinced What was done t 1 


came deranged and jumped into the 
sea. Sometimes mothers died, and their 
little children perished for want of care ; 
and sometimes the men killed them- 
selves rather than endure the torments 
they suffered. 

10. Such were some of the horrors 
attending the slave trade. Yet it con- 
tinued to be carried on, and very soon 
there were a great many slaves in all 
the colonies. There were more in the 
Southern than in the Northern States; 
but still in Pennsylvania, New York, 
and New England, there were several 
thousands. 

11. But at length, the people be- 
came convinced that slavery was wrong, 
and, in all the States north of Maryland, 
it was abolished. The Southern States 
still permit it ; but I hope they, too, 
will, ere long, prohibit it. 

CHAP. XLIII. 

ALABAMA, MISSISSIPPI, and LOUISIANA. 

1. To the west of Georgia, there are 
three large States called Alabama, Mis- 
sissippi, and Louisiana. Alabama is 
well furnished with navigable rivers, 
and the soil is remarkable fertile. The 
inhabitants are chiefly engaged in rais- 
ing cotton, and tobacco. 

Questions on the Map of the Southern States. 
— Boundaries of Alabama'? Describe the follow- 
ing rivers : Alabama, Tallapoosa, Cahawba, 
Tombigbee. What is the capital 1 

Boundaries of Mississippi 1 Describe the fol- 
lowing rivers: Pascagoula, Leaf, Pearl, Black, 
Yazoo. Capital 1 Describe Natchez, Mobile, 
Columbia. 

Boundaries of Louisiana I Describe the follow- 
ing rivers : Sabine, Wachilta, Red, Tensos. 
Capital! How is New Orleans situated! De- 
scribe (he following towns : Baton Rouge, Alex- 
andria, Franklin. 

1. What of Alabama ! Soil! Inhabitants 1 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


83 


2. This territory was a mere hunt- 
ing ground for the Indians long after 
the settlement cff other parts of our 
country. After the revolutionary war, 
it was claimed hy Georgia, and the 
United States purcliased it for 1,250,- 
000 dollars. By and by it began to 
he settled, and soon there were several 
thousand people there. In 1819, it be- 
came one of the United States. 

3. I will now tell you about the 
State of Mississippi. The land here is 
generally level, with some ranges of 
hills. A large portion of the country is 
still covered with thick pine forests, in 
which there are a great many wild deer. 
Toward the southern part there are 
swamps and marshes filled with alliga- 
tors. Natchez is the largest town in 
the State. It is situated on a high 
bluff, on the eastern bank of the Missis- 

t sippi. The planters send a great deal 
i of cotton to this place, which is taken 
. down the river, to New Orleans. 

4. As early as the year 1539, a 
- Spaniard, named Ferdinand de Soto, 
i came to this country with nine hundred 
; persons. They spent three years in 
i searching for gold, but at length de 
; Soto died, and his companions went 
i away. In 1083, a Frenchman named 
i de Salle, came down the river and 
I named the country Louisiana, in honor 
! of his king Louis XIV. 

i 5. From this the French claimed 
I the territory, and, in 1716, made asettle- 
i mcnt Avhere Natchez now stands, called 
Fort Rosalie. Other settlements were 
made by French people in the territory; 
but in 1703, it was ceded to Great 

2. Whiit of the territory of Alabama 1 By whom 
was it claimed t By whom purchased 1 When 
did Alabama become a Slate 1 3. What of Mis- 

sissippi 1 Forests'? Swamps'? Natchez'? 4. 
WHiat of Ferdinand de Soto 1 What happened in 
16031 5. Wliai in 1716'? V/hat in lies'? 


Britain. At the close of the revolution- 
ary war it belonged to the United States, 
and in 1817, it was admitted into the 
Union as a State. 

0. Louisiana is the most level of 
the twentyfour States. There are very 
extensive marshes lying along the Gull 
of Mexico, and there is much low lana 
bordering on the Mississippi. In the 
spring of the year, when this mighty 
river is swollen by rains, it sometimes 
rises above its banks, and spreads a 
vast flood of waters over the country 
in Louisiana. 

7. The people of this State are 
\!hiefly employed in raising cottom 
There are also many plantations of 
sugar-cane. This plant resembles our 
Indian corn in appearance. The stalks 
contain a sweet juice, from which su- 
gar and molasses are made. A large 
part of the sugar and molasses, which 
we use, is produced in Louisiana. 

I 8. New Orleans, the capital, is near- 
ly as large as Boston. It is situated 
100 miles from the mouth of the Mis- 
sissippi, and receives vast quantities of 
produce, which come down tliat great 
river. If you ever visit this place, you 
will see many things to surprise you. 
The people are a collection from all 
countries. A great many are French, 
some are Spanish, some Scotch, some 
Irish, and some Dutch Beside these 
there are thousands of negroes. 

9. At this place you will see many 
vessels which have come from various 
parts of Europe and America, to get 
cotton, tobacco, sugar, flour, pork, and 
furs ; all of which come down the Mis- 
sissippi in abundance. 

To whom did Mississippi belong at the close of the 
■revolutionary vvar '? When did it become a 
State'? 6. Wdiat of Louisiana? Marshes! 
What of the Mississippi ? 7. Cotton ? Sugar- 

-cane'? 8. New Orleans 1 Peonic oi New Or- 


84 


THE CHILD S FIRST BOOK OF HISTORY. 


10. You will also see many steam- 
boats, going and coming, loaded with 
passengers and freight of all kinds. 
Some of these boats are almost as large 
as ships of war. They are constantly 
going up and down the Mississippi : 
some of them ascend that river for 
more than a thousand miles. 

11. I have told you of a famous bah 
tie which took place near Baltimore in 
1814. During the same war, a still 
more famous engagement occurred at 
New Orleans. On the 8th January, 
1815, 12,000 British troops came against 
tliat city. Gen. Jackson was there 
with 3000 American soldiers. 

12. He knew that the enemy were 
coming; so he prepared to receive 
them. He had a long breast-work 
made of bags of cotton, heaped one 
upon another. Then he placed twelve 
cannon along the line, and the Ameri- 
cans got behind the breast-work. All 
things were now ready, and the British 
troops, led by Gen. Packenham, began 
to advance. 

13. It was truly a noble display, as 
they came on. The officers were richly 
dressed, in red coats, with shining 
epaulets. They had feathers of many 
colors in their hats, and they were 
armed with swords and pistols, which 
glittered in the morning light. 

14. Then came the soldiers with 
their bright guns, and sharp bayonets. 
They marched in straight lines, and 
covered the ground almost as far as the | 
eye could reach. There was a fine 
band of music, too, and the air rung 
with sounds of the drum and fife. Thus 
the British came on, marching over the 


leans'? 9. Vessels'? 10. Steam-boats'? 11. 
When was the battle of New Orleans fought ? 
Who commanded the Americans ”? How many 
British troops were there "? How many Ameri- 
cans '? 12. What did Gen. Jackson do'? Wlio 


level ground toward the American 
breast-work. 

15. For a long time the Americans 
were still, and let the British come 
close upon them. Then suddenly the 
men put their lighted matches to the 
cannon ; the balls were hurled amid the 
British ranks, and the soldiers fell by 
hundreds. Then, too, the Americans 
pointed their guns over the breast-work, 
and sent their bullets in the faces of 
the enemy. A living sheet of fire con- 
tinued to blaze along the American 
line, and the ground far and near was 
shaken with the thunder of the battle. 

10. The British were brave men, 
and they were led by a brave general ; 
but they could not withstand the deadly 
fire of the Americans. Tliey were 
driven back, leaving the ground strewed 
with hundreds of the dead and dying. 
Twice indeed they rallied, and a few of 
them, as if seeking death, rushed close 
up to the breast-work. One daring of- 
ficer, at the head of his men, ascended 
to the top of it, and shouted to his fol- 
lowers to come on. But ere the words 
had parted from his lips, he fell into 
the ditch below, pierced through and 
through by a dozen bullets. 

17. In one hour after the battle be- 
gan, it vras all over. The British were 
totally defeated, and marched sullenly 
away. Gen. Packenham was killed, 
seven hundred of his brave soldiers lay 
dead on the field, one thousand four 
hundred were wounded, and five hun- 
dred were taken prisoners. Thus the 
British lost twentysix hundred men, 
while the Americans had only seven 
killed, and six wounded. 

18. Let us now go back to a much 

commanded the^Britlsh troops'? 13. Describe 
the battle. 17. How long did the battle last 1 
Who were defeated "? What was the loss of the 
British '? Loss of the Americans ? IS. To what 


THE child’s first book of history. 


85 


j earlier date, and see what happened in 
i Louisiana. This name was originally 
I applied to that vast tract of country ly- 
j ing between the Mississippi and the 
I Pacific Ocean. It was considered as 
I belonging to the French; and in 1699, 
the first settlement was made at Iber- 
ville. Owinof to the unhealthiness of 
I the climatif^tiiany of the settlers died, 
and the colony did not flourish. In 
1712, out of 2500 who had settled there, 
only 400 Were living. 

19. In. 1717, the present city of 
New Orleans was founded, and from 
this time the French settlements along 
the Mississippi, continued to increase. 
In the year 1803, Mr Jcfierson, the 
President of the United States, bought 
the whole country west of the Missis- 
sippi of the French government, and 
gave them 15,000,000 of dollars for it. 
Since that time, it has belonged to the 
United States. 

20. In the year 1812, that portion 
now called Louisiana, was set apart and 
became one of the United States. The 
inhabitants were chiefly French, but a 
great many people have emigrated, with- 
in the last twenty years, from other 
parts of the United States, and settled 
there. 

21. Thus I have told you about the 
three great States lying along the Gulf 
of Mexico. The climate here is very 
hot, and as in the other four South- 
ern States, almost all the labor is per- 
formed by slaves. There are many 
French and Spanish among the inhabit- 

a-act was the name of Louisiana first applied 1 To 
whom did it belong 1 What took place in 1699'? 
What of this colony 1 What of the settlers in 1712 1 
19. When was New Orleans founded 1 What of the 
French settlements after this 1 What took place 
in 1803 1 20. What in 1812 1 Inhabitants 1 

21. Climate of the three Southwestern States'! 
Slaves ! French and Spanish 1 French lan- 
guage 1 


ants, who still preserve the customs of 
their original countries. There are 
many thousands of the people who speak 
no other than the French language. 

CHAP. XLIV. 

THE WESTERN STATES. 

1. To the north of the three States 
of which I have just been telling you^ 
are the six Western States. They are 
in general very fertile, and are watered 
by some of the noblest rivers in the 
world. In general they are hilly, ot 
moderately uneven. 

2. As this is a very interesting por- 
tion of our country, we must not fail to 

Questions on the Map of the IVestern States. 
— Boundaries of Ohio 1 Describe the following 
rivers : Sandusky, Ohio, Cayahoga, Maumc, 
Muskingum. Capital '? Describe the following 
towns : Columbus, Cincinnati, Lancaster, Chili- 
cothe, IMarietta, Zanesville, Steubenville. 

Boundaries of Indiana 1 Describe the following 
rivers: White, Wabash, Tippecanoe. Capital! 
Describe the following towns: Connersville, Vin- 
cennes, Madison, Croydon. 

Boundaries of Illinois ! Describe the following 
rivers : Illinois, Sangamon, Rock, Kaskaskia,. 
Capital! Describe the following towns: Peoria. 
Albion, Kaskaskia, America. 

Boundaries of Missouri ! Describe the follow 
ing rivers : Gasconade, Osage, Missouri, 
Black, Prairie, La Mine. Capital! Describe 
the following towns : St Genevieve, Louisiana, 
St Charles, Franklin. What Moiintains in M. ! 
In what direction do they run ! In what part of 
the State do they lie ! 

Boundaries of Tennessee ! Describe the follow- 
ing rivers: Duck, Tennessee, Forked Deer, Cun>- 
berland. Capital! Describe the following towns : 
Memphis, Fayetteville. What Mountains cross 
the southeastern part of Tennessee! 

Boundaries of Kentucky ! Describe the follov^ 
ing rivers: Green, Kentucky, Glasgow. Capital! 
Describe the following towns : Lexington, Moiu>t 
Vernon, Louisville, Maysville, Buirdstown. 

1. What of the Western States! Fertility t 
Rivers ! Face of tlie country ! 8. What of 


7 * 


86 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HIOTORY. 


pay it a visit. We will take the stage 
at Philadelphia, and proceed across 
the Alleghany mountains to Pittsburg. 
There we will enter a steam-boat, and 
go down the Ohio river to Cincinnati. 

3. This is a large town containing 
half as many inhabitants as Boston ; yet 
it is but about forty years since it was 
first laid out! If we travel over the^ 
State of Ohio, we shall find that it has 
been recently settled, and that lafge 
portions of it are yet covered with for- 
ests. But we shall everywhere meet 
with new villages springing up in the 
wilderness ; we shall see a great many 
good fttfrns ; and we shall/ discover that 
the inhabitants enjoy an abundance of 
the comforts of life. 

4. If we travel westward into Indi- 
ana and Illinois, we shall find the coun- 
try still more thinly peopled. Here 
and there we shall meet with a little 
village built within a few years. As 
we cross the forests, we shall see a plen- 
ty of deer and flocks of wild turkeys. 
We may sometimes see a bear crossing 
our path, or a panther couched in the 
top of a tree. 

5. If we travel in Missouri we shall 
find that State but thinly inhabited. 
We ought to visit the lead mines in 
this State; they lie about forty miles 
west of the Mississippi, and are the 
most prolific in the world. Near twen- 
ty million pounds of lead, are obtained 
from these mines every year. 

6. As we are crossing this State we 
shall occasionally meet with prairies. 
These are natural meadows covered 
with tall grass, and almost as level as 
the sea. Sometimes they are of vast 
extent, and you may travel for a Avhole 
day without crossing one of them. 

Cincinnati 1 What of the State of Ohio 1 For- 
es!.'! 1 VillaiTes 1 Farms Inhabitants '? 4. 

What of Indiana and Illinois 1 Villages 1 Deer 1 [ 


When you are in the midst of one of 
these mighty jira^ries, you may look 
around and see nothing on either sidft, 
I but the level land spread out like the 
I ocean. 

7. It is the practicp. of the Indians 
to burn these prairies' Over every year. 



Prairie on Fire. 


8. We shall find St Louis to be a 
considerable place, and rapidly increas- 
ing. Many of the inhabitants are French, 
and some of them are natives of New 
England. 

9. If you are fond of enterprise, 
you can here join a hunting expedition, 
about to proceed two thousand miles, 
up the Missouri river, for the purpose 
of killing buflaloes, bears, beavers, and 
other wild animals. These hunting 
parties frequently set out from St Louis, 
and are sometimes gone two or three 
years. They bring back many boat- 
loads of skins, taken from the animals 
they have killed. 

10. Sometimes these hunters meet 
with unfriendly Indians, who attack 

Other wild Aniinal.s'? 5. Mi^Bouril Lead 
Mines'] 6. Prairies] 7. Indians] Describe 
the picture. 8. St. Louis ] 9. Hunting ex- 


THE child’s first book or history. 


87 


them. Several linnting parties have 
been entirely destroyed in this way. 

11. After leaving Missouri, we should 
travel in Tennessee and Kentucky. 
Here w'e shall find the country more 
thickly settled, and we shall meet with 
several large and handsome towns. 
Nashville and Lexington are both de- 
lightful places. 

12. We must not leave Kentucky 
without visiting the great cave, situated 
in the southwestern part of the State. 
It is one of the most remarkable curi- 
osities in this country. It extends un- 
der ground to the distance of ten miles, 
and presents a great many avenues and 
apartments. One of these is almost half 
as large as Boston Common, with an 
arch of rock over it, as high as the 
steeple of Park Street Church. 

CHAP. XLV. 

WESTERN STATES.^continued. 

1. I will now tell you something of 
the history of the Western States. 1 
will begin first with Tennessee. This 
State derives its name from its princi- 
pal river. The Indians imagined this 
river to bend like a spoon ; so they call- 
ed it Tennessee, which, in their lan- 
guage, is the name of a spoon. 

2. This country was included with 
the two Carolinas, in the grant made 
by Charles the Second, to the Earl of 
Clarendon, in 1664. When North and 
South Carolina were separated in 1729, 
Tennessee continued to be a part of the 

pedition "? 10. What do the hunters sometimes 

meet with 1 11. What of Tennessee and Ken- 

tucky 1 Nashville and Lexingtonl 12. Where 
is the great Cave 1 Describe it. 

1. From what does Tennessee derive its name 1 

2 . In what was Tennessee included! What of 
Tennessee after 1789 ! When was it ceded to 
lIiG United States 1 When did it become a State ! 


former, and so remained till the year 
1789, wdien it was ceded to the United 
States. In 1796, it became a member 
of the Union. 

3. The first settlement in Tennes- 
see was made about the year 1754, by 
fifty families, who established them- 
selves where Nashville now stands. 
These were attacked by the Indians, 
and were soon obliged to return to 
North Carolina. In 1765, some people 
came to the eastern part of the terri- 
tory, and formed the first permanent 
white settlement in Tennessee. In 
1780, Nashville was founded, and from 
this period the population rapidly in- 
creased. 

4. Kentucky belonged to Virginia 
till the year 1786, when it became a 
separate district. It was received into 
the Union in 1792. Long after Vir- 
ginia was settled, Kentucky remained 
in the possession of the Indians. Some 
white people went there occasionally to 
trade with the natives, and they brought 
back very favorable accounts of the 
soil and climate. In 1769, Colonel 
Daniel Boone and some others, went 
•to see the country. 

5. This party w^as attacked and 
plundered by the Indians, and all of 
them were killed except Boone. He 
remained in the wilderness for near two 
years, and then returned to his family, 
who lived on the Yadkin river in North 
Carolina. 

6. He -was an eccentric man, and 
preferred the wild woods to meadows 
and wheat fields. Accordingly, he de- 
termined to return to Kentucky, and in 
1773, went there with fifty families be- 


3. When was the first settlement made in Ten- 
nessee ! What occurred in 1765 ! What in 1780 1 

4. What of Kentucky ! Wlien did it become a 

State ! What of Kantucky 1 Indian traders 1 
Colonel Boone 1 6. Character of Boone ! 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


■«9 

iide his own, and forty men. These 
penetrated into the forests, and made 
the. first settlement in Kentucky. 

7 . Other settlers continued to ar- 
Hve, and the population thus gradually 
increased. During the Kevolutionaiy 
War, the inhabitants were much dis- 
tressed by the Indians, wdio took part 
with the British, and committed ev-ery 
species of cruelty upon the defenceless 
settlers. They were severely punish- 
ed, however, in 1T78, by Gen. Clarke, 
W'ho marched against them with a body 
of soldiers, and laid their country waste. 
From this time they became less hos- 
tile, and the w'hite people lived in great- 
er security. 

8. After this, the settlements flour- 
ished ; the fruitful soil, the mild cli- 
mate, and beautiful rivers of this region, 
drew people to it from all parts of the 
country. Col. Boone himself, retain- 
ing his love for the wilderness, retired 
as civilization advanced. He spent 
much of his time alone in the woods, 
subsisting upon wild deer, which he 
killed with his sure rifle. He lived to 
a great age, and when a grey haired 
old man, was still attached to the mode 
of life which he had preferred in ear- 
lier days. 



Col. Boone shooting a Deer. 


What did he do in 1773 1 When was the first 
Mvttlcmcnt made in K. 1 7. What of other set- 


9. I Avill now tell you of Ohio. As 
late as the year 17S7, almost all this 
country w^as in the possession of the 
Indians. A few scattered inliabitants 
had established themselves within the 
territory. In 178S, Gen. Rufus Put- 
nam, with a party from New England, 
planted a little colony at the mouth of 

I the Muskingum, where Marietta now 
j stands; thus forming the first regular 
settlement in Ohio. 

10. From this time, the population in- 
creased, though it w'as considerably 
checked by an unhappy war with the 
Indians, which lasted till 1795. In 
August of that year, Gen. Vv^aync made 
a treaty of peace wdth the savages, and 
thus hostilities ceased. 

11. Emigrants now began to flock 
to Ohio from various parts of the coun- 
try ; a great many went from New Eng- 
land, and liking the country, they in- 
vited their friends to come and join 
them. At length, so numerous were 
tlie emigrations, that every day, one 
might see, in the Eastern States, wagon- 

I loads of men, women, and children, 
moving to this Wc.5tcrn Country. 

12. The summer of 181G was very 
cold; and in New England the crops 
of corn were cut off, other kinds of 
grain w^ere nearly destroyed, and there 
was not grass enough produced to sup- 
port the cattle. The winter that fol- 
lowed, was severe, and many of them 
died from hunger. There w’as a good 
deal of suffering, too, among the people. 

13. These circumstances gave a fresh 

tiers I The people of K. during the Revolution 1 
What took place in 177S 1 8. What cf K. after 

this 1 What of Col. Boone '? Descrih'e the pic- 
ture. 9. What of Ohio till 1787 1 What took 
place in 1788 1 What was the first regular setllo- 
ment in Ohio 1 10. What of war with the Irv- 

dians 1 Peace 1 11. Emigrants 1 What might 

every day be seen some years ago in the Eastern 
i States 1 12. The summer of 1816 1 The fel* 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY 


impulse to the tide of emiirration which 
was flowing to the west. Farmers, me- 
chanics, day laborers, grandfathers 
and grandmothers, husbands and wives, 
sons and daughters, sold houses and 
lands, and bidding adieu to their native 
New England, took up their long and 
tedious way to Ohio. Thousands and 
thousands thus went away from a land 
of meadows, and meeting-houses, and 
pleasant villages, to bury themselves 
in the deep forests of a new country. 

14. But they have been well reward- 
ed. Ohio was admitted into the Union 
in 1802, and is now one of the most I 
prosperous of the twentyfour States. | 
Though it has been settled scarcely! 
fifty years, it contains near a million ! 
of inhabitants. Its growth has been I 
unexampled, and we can see nothing in I 
the future which is likely to check its 
progress. 

15. Indiana and Illinois originally 
belonged to the French, and a few 
sca,tteied settlements were made there, 
by people of that nation, near a hundred 
years ago. But at the close of the war, 
in 1763, of which I am going to tell 
you soon, the territory was ceded to 
Great Britain. At the close of the rev- 


iewing winter 1 13. What effect had the cold 

seasons of 1816 1 14. When did Ohio become 

a State 1 Its present condition 1 How long has | 
O. been settled 1 Its population 1 Growth 1 15. 

What of Indiana and Illinois 1 Settlements made 
there 1 When was the territory ceded to Great 
Britain 1 When did it come into the possession 
of the United States T When did Indiana become 
a State 1 When did Illinois become a State! j 
16. What of MissoifH ! Settlement of St Louis ! jl 
When did M. become a State ! What took place i 
in Congress before its admission into the Union ! i 
Which of the Western States allow of slavery Tj| 
Which of them do not ! Repeat the names of all i j 
the twentyfour States that allow of slavery. Re-i‘ 
peat the names of those that do not. How manyj; 
are slave-holding States'! How many are non- , 
«laTe-hoiding States 1 1 


Sd 

olutionary war, it was given up to the 
United States. Indiana was admitted 
into the Union in 1816, and Iflinois 
two years after. 

16. Missouri is a part of the great 
tract of country, purchased by Mr Jef- 
ferson of the French government, in 
1803, as I have told you. A settle- 
ment was made at St Louis, by some 
French people, as early as 1764. The 
population was however small until 
within a few years. It was admitted 
into the Union in 1821, after a warm 
discussion in Congress, whether slavery 
should be allowed in the State or not. 
It was at length decided that it should 
be allowed, and Missouri, with Ten- 
nessee and Kentucky, are among the 
slave-holding States. The three other 
Western States, like New England, and 
four of the Middle States,, do not per- 
mit slavery. 


CHAP. XLVI. 

THE SIX TERRITORIES. 

1. I have now told you of the twen- 
tyfour States. But if you will look on 


Questions on the Map of the United States. 
— ^Boundaries of Florida ! Capes '! Capital '? 
Where is St Augustine 1 Boundaries of Michigan 1 
Where is Detroit! Boundaries of Northwest 
Territory! What tribes of Indians in the N. W. 
Territory! Boundaries of Missouri Territory! 
Describe the following rivers : Yellow Slone R., 
Platte, Kougas, Missouri. Where are the Falls of 
St Anthony ! Where are tho Great Falls of Mis- 
^uri ! What tribes of Indians in Missouri Terri- 
tory ! Where is Council Bluffs ! Boundaries of 
Arkansas Territory ! Describe the Arkansas R, 
Capital! Where is the town of Arkansas! 
Boundaries ©f Oregon Territory ! Deseribe the 
Columbia R. Multnomah. Where is Astoria? 
Where is Vancouver’s Island! Nootka Sound? 
What tribes of Indians in Oregon Territory 1 
What great range of mountains separates Orego.u 
from Missouri Territory ! 

F 


90 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


the map of the United States, you will 
see embraced within its limits, vast 
tracts of country, called Territories. 
These occupy a greater extent of sur- 
face, than the twentyfour States them- 
selves. They are for the most part 
unsettled, and therefore more than one 
half of the land belonging to the Uni- 
ted States, is yet in a state of nature. 

2. At the southeastern corner of 
the United States, is Florida, a broad 
strip of land shooting into the sea be- 
tween the Atlantic Ocean and the Gulf 
of Mexico. It was discovered at a very 
early period, by the Spaniards, and re- 
ceived its name from the abundance of 
wild flowers, that flourished upon its 
soil. In 1562, a little band of French 
Protestants fled from persecution, and 
settled near where the present town 
of St Augustine stands. Here it would 
seem they might have lived in peace ; 
but the cruelty which had driven them 
from home, pursued them to their lone- 
ly retreat. 

3. A Spanish oflicer, named Melen- 
dez, discovered the settlement, and 
finding that the people were not Cath- 
olics, but Protestants, he and his sol- 
diers put them to death, in the most 
cruel manner. But this wicked act did 
not go unavenged. A few years after- 
wards a Frenchman, 'named De Gour- 
guGS, visited the country with some 
soldiers, attacked the Spaniards who 
were settled near, and killed many of 
them. Some of them he hanged upon 
the same trees, from which were still 
suspended the skeletons of his country- 
men, who had been murdered by Me- 
lendez. 

1. What of the extent of the Territories'? 
What portion of the United States is still unsettled 1 
2. What of Florida'? Its discovery'? Name'? 
French Protestants ? 3. Melendez ^ De Gour- 

guos 1 4. St . Augustine 1 Other settlements '? 


4. St Augustine was founded by 
the Spaniards about the year 1570, and 
is the oldest town in the United States. 
Other settlements were made in Florida 
by the Spaniards, but the population 
increased slowly. In 1819, the Span- 
ish government relinquished their claims 
to the country, and since that time it 
has belonged to the United States. 

5. Michigan Territory was original- 
ly inhabited by a numerous and power- 
ful tribe of Indians, called Hurons. 
About the year 1748, some Catholic 
priests from Canada, went among these 
savages, and converted the greater part 
of them to the Catholic religion. About 
t\venty years after, the Six Nations, wh< 
hated the Hurons, called together their 
warriors, and sent them against the 
latter tribe. 

6. Animated by mutual dislike, the 
two parties fought desperately. For 
some time the wdlderness rang with the 
war whoop, and many a brave red man 
was killed ; but at length the Hurons 
w^ere defeated, and the whole tribe dis- 
persed. 

7. I shall tell you by and by how 
the French surrendered their Canadian 
settlements to the English in 1763. 
Michigan Territory shared the same 
fate ; Imt in 1 783 it was ceded to the 
United States. 

• 8. The Northwest Territory remains^ 
almost in its original state. There are 
no towns, and imt a few small settle- 
ments in it. The country is inhabited 
chiefly by Indians, and it is ranged by 
parties of hunters and, traders, who go 
in quest of furs. 

What happened in 1819 1 5. Original inhabit- 

ants of Micliigan Territory 1 Catholic priests and 
the Hurons 1 Six Nations "? 6. The Hurons 1 

7. What happened in' 1763 1 When was Michi- 
gan Territory ceded to the English '? When to tha 
United States '? 8. What of the N. W Tarrl- 


TUE child’s first book of history. 


91 


9. Missouri Territory is an immense 
plain, bounded by the Mississippi on 
the east, and the Rocky Mountains on 
the west. It is an extended prairie, 
occasionally broken by hills, and gen- 
erally destitute of trees, except along 
the banks of the rivers. It abounds in 
wild animals, which are hunted as well 
by parties of white men, as by the tribes 
of savages, who inhabit the country. 
There are no white settlements in the 
Territory, but there are some soldiers 
stationed at Council Blufis, and other 
places, to protect the traders, and keep 
the Indians in good order. 

10. The travellers who have been 
in this region, give wonderful accounts 
of the wild animals. The bison, or 
buffalo as it is improperly called, is 



A Herd of Bisons, or Buffaloes. 


a large beast resembling an ox. These 
creatures go in droves, and feed upon 
the grass of tlie prairies. Sometimes 
a drove of ten thousand may be seen, 
stretching over the land, as far as the 
eye can reach. The Indians shoot 
great numbers of these animals; ihey 
feed on their flesh, and sell the skins 
to the traders. These skins are called 
Buffalo Robes, and we use them in 
winter to keep our feet 'warm, when we 
re riding. 

Indians I Hunters 1 .9. Missouri Tcrri- 

vory 1 In what docs it abound I WIk? hunt 


11. Beside bisons there are elks in 



great abundance, with branching horns 
six feet high. There are cougars, gen 
erally called panthers, so strong as to 



be able t(f kill a man, and carry his 
body up a tree. Tlyjre are grisly 
bears, with terrible claws, and they are 



them '? Settlements 1 Soldiers 1 10. Trarel- 

lers 1 Bison '? Describe the picture. Herds of 
Bisons I Indians 1 Buffalo Robes '? 11. Elks I 
Describe the picture. Cougars 1 Describe the 
picture. Grisly Bear? I Describe the r»''‘Ofe 
f2 



THE child’s riRsr BaOK OF HISTORY, 





rather than run,, over the hills and val- 
leys ; and toward the Rocky Mountains 
there are sheep with horns as big as a 


man’s arm. There are also swift foot- 
ed goats on the Rocky Mountains, that 
leap like birds from cliff to cliff. 


Antelopes 1 Describe the picture. Sheep 1 De- 


Indian Warrior on Horsebapk. 

13. The Territory of Arkansas, like 
that of Missouri, abounds in wild ani- 
mals, and a great part of it is occupied 
by tribes of savages. Some French 
settlements were made there long since, 
but in 1810, the whole number of white 
inhabitants did not much exceed a thou- 
sand. But the population from that 
time increased rapidly, and in 1820, 
there were 15,000. 

- 14. I have now to tell you of Ore- 
gon Territory, which lies between the 
Rocky Mountains and the Pacihc Ocean. 
It is an immense region, being six times 
as extensive as all the New England 
States. Yet it is entirely destitute of 
white inhabitants, excepting the little 
town of Astoria, on Columbia River. 
Here are a few people occupied in col'- 
lecting furs from the Indians. 

15. About thirty years ago,, Mr Jef- 
ferson sent a party of men, under Capi. 

scribe the picture. 12. Wild horses '? Indian 
Warrior "I Describe the picture. 13-. Arkan- 
sas Territory '? French settlements '? InhabitanU 
in 1810 In 1820 '1 14. Oregon Territory 1 

ll Its extent 1 White inhabitants 1 Astoria '{ 13 


SO tough, that they can hardly be killed 12. There are a great many wild 


with mpsket balls. There are beauti 
ful little Anfelopes, that seem t,o fly 


horses in the plains. The Indians catch 
these animals, and tame them. An 
Indian warrior, mounted on a fleet horse, 
riding with his spear in his hand, against 
his enemy, has a formidable appearance. 


TKE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


93 


Lewis, and Capt. Clark, to explore this [ 
country. They ascended the river Mis- ! 
souri to its source, crossed the Rocky 
Mountains, and went down the Colum- 
bia River to the Pacific Ocean. There 
they remained through the winter, and 
tlien returned. 

1(5. They were absent two years, 
and met with many strange adventures. 
They found a great many grisly bears 
on the west side of the Rocky Moun- 
tains, and had several encounters with 
them. One day, a man named Mc- 
Neal, belonging to the party, was riding 
by some bushes, when a huge bear jump- 
ed out, and pursued him. 

1 7. His horse, being greatly frighten- 
ed, sprung aside, and threw him on the 
ground. By the time he could get up, 
the bear was close to him, with his 
mouth open, and growling terribly. 
McNeal struck him over the head with 
the breech of his gun ; though it broke 
the latter to pieces, it only stunned 
the bear for a moment. McNeal ran 
as fast as he could to a tree, and began 
to climb up; but the bear followed so 
close, as to scratch him behind when 
he was ascending ; but he got out of 
the creature’s way, and as the bear 
could not climb the -ft’ee, McNeal was 
safe. 

18. The hungry beast waited a 
long time, expecting that the man 
would come down, and let him eat him 
up. But finding that he would not do 
so, the creature walked away, and the 
poor fellow came down, glad enough 
to escape from his new acquaintance 

19. One day, Capt. Lewis was walk- 
ing along upon a prairie, when he was 
suddenly attacked by a grisly bear. 
As he had no gun, he leaped into the 


river, which was close by, and was go- 
ing to swim to one of the boats. But 
when he had got a little way into the 
water, he found that the ^creature was 



Captain Lewis chased by a Bear. 


close to him. So he turned round, and 
faced him with a spear, which he had 
in his hand. The bear did not like the 
looks of the spear, so he Avhirled about, 
and scampered away as fast as he 
could. 

20. The travellers found everywhere 
on their route, tribes of Indians, scat- 
tered over the country. Those who 
lived along the banks of the Columbia 
River, were generally poor, and mis- 
erable. Most of them were great 
thieves, and troubled the party very 
much by pilfering. 

21. As the travellers were return^ 
ing, they saw immense herds of hufla^ 
loes, on the plains, east of the Rocky 
Mountains. One day, as they were 
coming down the Missouri in some 

i boats, they found the river quite choked 
i up, by a multitude of these animals^ 
who were swimming across it. 

22. Finally, the travellers returned, 
to the great joy of their friends. They 
had been gone so long, that everybody 
tliought them dead. They published 


What did Mr Jefferson do almut thirty years ago 1 1j Story of Captain Lewisand the hear 1 20. Tribes 

What did Lewis and Clark do 1 16. Grislv 11 of Indians f 21. Herds of buffaloes 1 Buffaloed 
Bears 1 Story of McNeal and a bear f 10. crossing the Missouri * 22. Return of the irav 

8 



94 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


a book, giving' an account of their ex- 
peditions, which is full of interest, and 
affords a great deal of valuable infor- 
mation. 

23. Thus I have told you of the 
six Territories. These, you will under- 
stand, are different from States. A 
State has a governor, and a legislature, 
who meet and make laws for the 
people. The governor and members 
of the legislature, are chosen by the 
people. 

24. But the Territories have no 
legislatures, and the people have no con- 
cern in making the laws, by which they 
are governed. They are under the di- 
rection of Congress, and are ruled by 
governors appointed by the President 
and Senate of the United Slates. 

25. Thus you perceive that the Ter- 
ritories are wholly dependent upon the 
general government, while the peo- 
ple of the States govern themselves, 
and are independent, with some limita- 
tions. When a territory has 4d,000 
people, they may petition Congress to 
be admitted into the Union ; when 
their petition is granted, it becomes a 
State. It is in this way, that all the 
Western, and three of the Southern 
States, have become members of the 
Uiiion, within a little more than thirty 
years. It is probable that other States 
will soon be formed in tlie wide rejrions 
of the Western country, and become 
members of the Union. 


ellers 1 2*3. How many Teirilories are there 1 

\Vh:it has a State 1 What do the governor and 
.egislature of a State do 1 Who choose them 7 
24. lias a Territory a legislature 1 Who make 
the laws for the Territories 1 Wlio appoint the 
governors 1 2.5. Upon wliom are the Territories 

dependent 1 What of tlie people of the several 
States 1 How may a Territory become a State 1 
What of all the Western and three of the Southern 
States 1 


j CHAP. :XLVII. 

THE UNITED STATES. 

I 

I 1. We have now completed our 
survey of the individual States ; but I 
have some more things to tell you 
about our country. You perceive by 
the Map of the United States, that it is 
crossed by two great chains of moun- 
tains, and is watered by several great 

Questions on the Map of the United States. 
Neu) England, Middle States, Southe7'7i States, 
and IVestern States. — Boundaries of the United 
States 1 What five great lakes lie along the 
northern boundaries of the U. S. 1 What river 
forms the outlet to these lakes 1 Wh at great l ange 
of mountains runs from northeast to southwest 
in the eastern part of the U. S. 1 Note. The 
several ranges of mountains which extend from 
N. England to Georgia, including the Green Moun- 
tains in N. England, the Catskill in N. York, the 
Blue Ridge, Alleghanies, and Cumberland ftloun- 
tains in the Middle and Southern States, may be 
considered as one great chain, and usually pass 
under the title of the Appalachian chain. — What 
great range of mountains in the western part of 
the U. S. '? In which direction does this range 
run 1 Note. 'J’he Rocky Mountains are a part 
of the great chain that extends from the southern 
part of S. America to the northern part of N 
America. This is the longest chain of mountains 
in the world, being near 11,000 miles long. The 
tops of someof the Rocky Mountains are very loftv, 
ano are always covered with snow. — What is the 
lai,,est river in the U. S. 1 Note. The river 
Mis.sissippi, including the Missouri, which flows 
.nto it, is the longest in the world, being about 
4500 miles long. — Describe the JMississippi R., 
Missouri, Ohio, Susquehannah, Delaware, Hudson, 
Connecticut, Maryland, Kennebeck, Benobscot. 
Tell the names of those Sttites tliat touch upon tha 
Atlantic. 'I'liose that touch upon the Gulf of 
Mexico. Tell the names of those States that have 
I no sea-board. Tell the name of each capital of 
i each State, with its direction from Washington, 
I from Philadelphia, from New York, and from 
! where you are. Tell the extent of each State, 
1 beginning at the largest, and proceeding in the 
i order of their extent. Tell the number of inhabit- 
I ants of each State, beginning with that wdiich has 
i the most, and proceeding according to popnlatiou. 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORV. 


95 


rivers. You will observe that all the 
rivers east of the Appalachian chain, 
flow into the Atlantic. Those west of 
the Rocky Mountains, flow into the 
Pacific. The rivers between these two 
chains of mountains empty their waters 
into the Mississippi, which are thus 
conducted to the Gulf of Mexico. 

2. Our country may be divided into 
three parts ; that which lies east of the 
Alleglianies; that which lies westof the 
Rocky Mountains; and that which lies 
between the two. The first part is that 
v/hich was first settled, and which is 
most thickly inhabited. It abounds in 
rivers, and sea-ports, and embraces 
those ])ortions of the country which 
were settled before the American Revo- 
lution. 

3. The second division of our coun- 
try, lying west of the Rocky Mountains, 
is yet a mere wilderness, inhabited only 
by scattered bands of savages. The 
third division, wdiich usually passes un- 
der the title of the Valley of the Missis- 
sippi, is the most extensive and the 
most fertile section of the United States. 
Almost all the settlements here are of 
recent date, yet everything is flourish- 
ing. Emigrants are flocking to it from 
dll parts of the world, and towns and 
villages are springing up in every quar- 
ter. 

4. It is not easy to form an adequate 
idea of this great valley. The State 
of Ohio does not embrace more than 
one thirtieth part of it. Yet this State has 
almost a million of inhabitants. What 
a vast population, then, will, in the course 
of a few years, be spread over the great 
Valley of the Mississippi! 

1. What of mountains'? Rivers'? 2. How i 
may the U. States be divided '? Wliat of the first I 
part ? The second '? The third '? 3. Settle- j 

ments in the Valley of the Mississippi? Eini- | 
grants Towns and villages ? 5. Where is I 


5. I will now tell you of the city of 
Washington, which you will find on the 
Map, between Maryland and Virginia. 
This is the capital of the United States, 



Members of Congress going to the Capitel 
Here there is a large and splendid edifice, 
called the Capitol. In this building, peo- 
ple, sent from all the twentyfour States, 
collect together in two bodies. One of 
them, when assembled, is called the 
House of Representatives ; the other is 
called the Senate. These persons meet 
every winter to make laws for the coun- 
try, and when assembled are called Con- 
gress. 

6. The President of the United 
States lives in a large house abvUit a 
mile from the Capitol. When any law 
has been passed by Congress, it is sent 
to him. If he approves of it, then it is 
published and the people are obliged 
to obey it. 

7. The President is chosen every 
four years, by electors selected for that 
purpose. Andrew Jacksonisnow, I63U 
President of the United States. He 

the city of Washington ? W^hat splendid building 
at Washington ? Describe the picture. Who 
assemble in this building ? What are the names of 
the two bodies that assemble in the Capitol ? For 
what purpose do the Senate and House of Repre- 
sentatives meet ? What is Congress ? 6. Where 
does the President of tlie U. S. live ? When a 
law has been passed by Congress, what is done 
with it ? What if the President approve of it 1 


96 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


into office on the 4th of March, 
1829. The President that preceded 
him, was John Quincy Adams, who 
came into office in March, 1825. James 
Monroe preceded him ; he was twice 
elected President, and came first into 
the office in 1817. 

8. James Madison preceded Mon- 
roe, and was also twice elected. He 
first came into the office in 1809. It 
was during his administration, that the 
late war with England took place, dur- 
ing which the famous battle of New 
Orleans was fought, as I have told you. 

9. Thomas Jefierson preceded Mad- 
ison, and was twice chosen President. 
He first entered upon the duties of his 
office in 1801. Before him John 
Adams, father of John Quincy Adams, 
was President four years. He was 

receded by George Washington the 
rst President of the United States, 
who was twice elected, and first enter- 
ed upon the duties of the office in 1789. 

10. At that time the present gov- 
ernment was organized, and the present 
Constitution went into operation. Thus 
we have had six Presidents beside the 
present one, all of whom' were natives 
of Virginia, except the two Adamses, who 
were natives of Massachusetts. All the 
Presidents are now living, except 
Washington, Jefferson, and the elder 
Adams. General Jackson, who is now 


7. How is the President chosen 1 Who is Pre- 
sident of the U. S. now 1 When did he come 
into oflice 1 What of John Quincy Adams 1 
James Monroe 1 8. James Madison"? What 

war occurred during Madison’s administration ? 
9. What of Thomas Jefferson 1 John Adams ? 
Who was the first President of the U. S. "? When 
did Washington first enter upon the duties of his 
office as President 1 10. Wiien was the present 

government of the U. S. organized 1 When did 
the present Constitution of the U. S. go into ope- 
ration 1 How many Presidents have there been 
bolide tlie present ? How many of them were na- 


President, is a native of South Carolina. 
During the American Revolution, he 
was a soldier, and in the late war with 
England, he commanded the American 
troops, in the southern part of the Uni- 
ted States. He defeated the British at 
New Orleans with dreadful slaughter, 
and showed himself an able general. 

11. You perceive our present gov- 
ernment has been going on since the 
year 1789, a period of more than forty 
years. During this time, our country 
has enjoyed great prosperity. Our 
population has rapidly increased, our 
towns and villages have multiplied, our 
commerce, agriculture, and nanufac- 
tures have been extended, and the num- 
ber of our States, originally but thirteen, 
has been advanced to twentyfoiir. 

12. But what happened before 
the year 1789? An event of more im- 
portance than any other which has 
ever occurred in our country : I mean 
the American Revolution. This began 
in 1775, and lasted for eight years. 
Previous to this event, the settlements 
in this country were mere colonies, sub- 
ject to Great Britain : after it, these be- 
came one great nation, Avhich now con- 
sists of twentyfour separate States, all 
united, however, under one general 
government. 

13. Before the Revolution, a fa- 
mous war broke out, often called the 
‘Old French War.’ I shall now give 
you some account of it, and then I shall 
proceed to tell you of the Revolution, 

lives of Virginia 1 Which of them natives of Mas- 
sachusetts 1 Which of the Presidents are living 1 
Which are dead ? 11. How long has our present 

government l)cen in operation 1 What of our coun- 
try since 17891 Its population! Towns and 
villages! Commerce, agriculture and manufacto- 
ries! 12. What of the American Revolution'? 
What of the settlements in this country, before the 
Revolution ! What of them after the Revolution 1 
13. What of the ‘ Old French war ! * 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


97 


CHAP. XLVIII. 

THE FRENCH WAR. 

1. This war began about the year 
1755. At that period the country now 
occupied by New England, the five Mid- 
dle States, and the four Southern States 
lying along the Atlantic, embraced thir- 
teen colonies, all belonging to Great 
Britain, and all acknowledging the gov- 
ernment of that country. My reader 
will recollect that none of the country 
lying west of the States above mentioned, 
was then occupied by English settlers. 

2 . The French had settlements in 
Canada, extending from the mouth of 
the St Lawrence, to Lake Ontario. 
Along the shores of that lake, they had 
established several forts, and trading 
houses, to promote their trade with the 
Indians, which was now esteemed a 
matter of great consequence. They 
had also planted New Orleans near the 
mouth of the Mississippi, and having 
ascended that river, laid claim to the 
beautiful and fertile valley, through 
which it flows. 

3. They had also built trading hou- 
ses on the River Ohio, and finally de- 
termined to connect their northern and 
southern settlements, by a chain efforts, 
extending from Lake Ontario to their 
establishments on the Ohio, and thence 

Questions on the Map of the United States. 
— Describe the river St Lawrence, Lake Ontario, 
the Mississippi, Oliio. Where is Quebec t Mon- 
treal 1 Canada 1 In which direction is New 
Orleans from Quebec 1 In which direction is Que- 
bec from Boston and New York 1 

Questions on the Map of Neio York . — Where 
is Lake Champlain 1 Ticonderoga '? Crown 
Point 1 Fort Henry 1 Fort Edward I Lake On- 
tario 1 Niagara 1 

Questions on the Map of the Middle States. 
. — In which direction is Pittsburg from Ph* ladel- 
pUial New York 1 Lake Champlain '» Niagara 1 


down the River Mississippi to New 
Orleans. 

4. While the French Avere busy in 
carrying this project into effect, some 
English people from Virginia establish- 
ed themselves on the Ohio River not 
far from the French settlements. As 
the French now claimed the country, 
they seized some of these settlers, and 
carried them prisoners to Canada. 

5. Now the land in question was 
considered as a part of the colony of 
Virginia by tlie English, and it was sup- 
posed to belong to certain English peo^ 
pie to Avhom it had been granted. 
These persons, regardingthcconduct of 
the French as very Avrong, ap])lied to 
Gov. Dinwiddle, of Virginia, for redress. 

6. The governor thought it best in 
the first place to send a messenger to 
the commander of the French forces, on 
the Ohio, and require him to march his 
troops aAvay, and thus quit the country. 
The person chosen for this purpose was 
George Washington, then but twenty- 
one years old. At this early age, he 
began that public career which has en- 
deared his name to every American, 
and rendered it illustrious throughout 
the world. 

7. Washington Avent to the French 
commander, and delivered to him a let- 
ter from Gov. DinAviddie explaining the 
nature of his business. The French 
officer replied that he would forAvardthe 
letter to his general, Avho was then in 
Canada, and that he should strictly abide 
by his instructions. 

1. Wlien did the Frencli war begin 1 Wlial 
of the country at that period 1 2. French settlo- 

ments 1 Forts and trading houses ] New Orleans 1 
Valley of the Mississippi I 3, Other trading houses 1 
What did the French determine to do 1 4. What 

of some English settlers from Virginia 1 What 
did the French do to these settlers 1 5. What 

did Gov. Dinwiddie do 1 What of George Waslv- 
ington 1 7. What reply did the French com- 


I 

GS THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY 


8. This answer did not satisfy Gov. 
Dinwiddie ; so he raised four hundred 
troops, and sent them under the 
command of Washington against the 
French, in the spring of 1754. They 
proceeded through the woods, and over 
the mountains till they came near Fort 
Du Quesne, where Pittsburg in Penn- 
sylvania now stands. 

9. When Washington had nearly 
reached this fort, about nine hundred 
French soldiers came out to attack him. 
He had scarcely time to throw up 
some hasty works for defence, before 
the French came upon him. The num- 
ber of the French was more than dou- 
ble that of the English, but Washing- 
ton did not mind that ; he cheered his 
men, and they fought very bravely. 
By and by, the French were tired of 
the battle, and so they made an agree- 
ment with Washington, that he and his 
men should return to Virginia, which 
they did accordingly. 

10. Being informed of all these 
things, the British government perceived 
that they must either drive the French 
away by force, or relintpiish the whole 
Valley of the Mississippi. They deter- 
mined to do the former, and sent out a 
great many troops to America to accom- 
plish this object. In the spring of 1 755, 
Gen. Braddock, an English oflicer, 
began to make preparations in Virginia, 
to proceed with a large army against 
Fort Du Quesne. 

11. Now 1 must tell you that it is 
necessary for an army that is going on 
a march, to have a great number of 

mander send to Gov. Dinwiddie 1 8. What did 

the governor then do 1 When was tliis 1 What 
did Washington and the 400 soldiers do d Where 
vras Fort Du Quesne d Note. This is pronounc- ii 
ed Du Kane. — 9. Wlien Washington came near!' 
this fort, what did the French do 1 What of 


horses and wagons to carry their bag- 
gage. It was found very difficult to 
procure enough of these ; and Gen. 
Braddock, becoming impatient, deter- 
mined to set out with a part of the army 
only. Accordingly he proceeded with 
twelve hundred men, leaving Col. Dun- 
bar to come on with the rest of the 
troops, as soon as the preparations were 
ready. Gen. Braddock was a brave 
man, and knew very well how to man- 
age a battle with regular soldiers, but 
he knew nothing of the Indian method 
of skulking behind trees, and rocks, 
and thickets, and shooting down men 
like so many squirrels. 

12. So lie proceeded on through the 
woods, trusting in his own skill, and 
fearing nothing. He W'as advised to 
be on his guard, lest the sly savages 
should surprise him. But he treated 
this counsel with scorn. On the 9th of 
July, the English troops had approach- 
ed within a few miles of Fort Du Quesne. 
At length they came to a narrow valley, 
with high rocks on each side. It was 
midsummer, and the trees were cover- 
ed with a thick mantle of leaves. All 

|| was peaceful and quiet around, and the 
j troops marched on, never dreaming 
that behind every bush, and rock, and 
tree around, lay a lurking savage taking 
a sure aim, and ready to send a fatal 
bullet to the heart. 

13. At once, a wdld and hideous yell 
burst from the rocky sides of the valley, 
and at the same instant, hundreds of 

I muskets flashed from the many hiding- 
I places of the foe. Astounded at this, 

^ government 1 Wliat did they do 1 What took 

j place in the spring of 1755'? 11. What of an 

army going on a march '? Why did Gen. Brad- 
dock become impatient 1 What did he do 1 


Character of Gen. Braddock 1 12. How wag 

Gen. B. advised '? Wliere was the army on th* 
Washington 1 How did the English fight ? What 9th of July "? To what place did they at length 
n^reemeni was made 1 10. What of the British come 1 \\4iat of the season, trees, &c. 1 Describe 


99 


THE child’s first book op history. 


Ac forward ranks of the English were 
thrown into confusion. But in a few 
minutes, Gen. Braddock came up, with 
the main body of the army, and order 
was restored; but it was to no purpose. 
The enemy did not come out in regular 
platoons to be fired at, as Gen. Brad- 
dock expected; they remained in their 
coverts, and shot down the British sol- 
diers like a herd of deer. 

14. Braddock was too proud to re- 
treat. He and his officers remained on 
the ground, bravely exerting themselves 
to overcome the enemy ; but in this 
they only sacrificed their lives. One by 
one they were shot down, and Brad- 
dock at length fell. The British sbldiers 
then fied in dismay. Washington with 
his Virginia troops, sheltered the flying 
army from the French and Indians who 
pursued them. 

15. But for him, nearly all the men 
under Braddock’s command would 
have fallen a sacrifice to his rashness. 
As it was, one half of the number per- 
ished in the battle. This disastrous 
enterprise was closed by a return of 
the troops to Philadelphia, leaving the 
frontier of Pennsylvania and Virginia 
exposed to the enemy. 

16. Two other expeditions were un- 
dertaken against the French, during 
the summer of 1755. One was against 
Fort Niagara, situated near the great 
cataract, and the other against Crown 
Point, an important post on the western j 
shore of Lake Champlain. Both of 
these expeditions were unsuccessful. 

the attack of tlie Indians and French upon the i 
English army. What was the first efiect of this [ 
attacks What did Gen. Braddock do 1 What ; 
did the enemy do 1 14. What of Braddock and |j 

his oificers 1 What took place after Braddock , 
was killed 1 What of VV^ishington 1 15. What 

part of the English troops were killed 1 What 
did the remainder of the English army do 1 16. 

What other expeditions were undertaken in 17551 i 
How did these expeditions terminate 1 


CHAP. XLIX. 

FRENCH WAR ^-CONTINUED. 

1. In the spring of 1756, great pre- 
parations were made for war in Ameri- 
ca, both by the French and Englisn , 
yet it is remarkable that the two nations 
in Europe yet continued to be on terms 
of the greatest apparent friendship; 
but this did not last long. England de- 
clared war in May, and France in Juno 
following. 

2. A great many troops were as- 
sembled in America, but instead of be- 
ing placed under the command of 
American officers, who were well ac- 
quainted with the country, and who 
would of course be anxious to carry on 
the war with success, they were com- 
manded by British officers, who spent 
a great deal of time in show and parade, 
but did very little more. The whole 
season was wasted in indolence on the 
part of the English, while the French 
prosecuted the war with activity and 
vigor. 

3. The next year, 1757, was like 
that w'hich preceded it. The king and 
parliament of Great Britain were jeal- 
ous of the colonies at this early date. 
They w-ere not willing to entrust na- 
tive Americans with the direction of 
aflliirs, and therefore continued to em- 
ploy the officers who had exhibited 
nothing but indolence and weakness 
before. 

4. The principal event of this cam- 
paign, w^as the capture of Fort Wil- 

1. of tlie spring of 1756 '? What is re- 

markable t When (lid England declare war 1 
Note. This war is generally spoken of, as having 
commenced in 1756, because war was not declared 
till that time; but we have seen that hostilities com- 
menced nearly two years before. — 2. What of 
British troops 1 Under whose command were they 
placed 1 What of the British officers 1 What of 
'lie French 1 3. What of the year 1757 1 King 


100 


THE child’s first book of history. 


liam Henry. This was situated on 
Lake George, and had a garrison of 
three thousand men under the com- 
mand of Col. Munroe. Fifteen miles 
to the south of this post, was Fort Ed- 
ward, on the east side of the Hudson 
Kiver, occupied by Gen. Webb, with 
four thousand troops. 

5. The French commander, Mont- 
calm, collected near ten thousand men, 
many of them Indians, and suddenly 
appeared before Fort William Henry. 
They came sailing down the Lake, cov- 
ering its bright surface with a multi- 
tude of boats and canoes. The whole 
army landed, and immediately began 
the attack. 

6. Col. Munroe was surprised, but 
not disheartened. Though his little 
garrison was surrounded by ten thou- 
sand men, he made a bold and success- 
ful defence. The soldiers kept off the 
enemy with muskets, and with can- 
non, wdiich shook the hills around with 
their thunder, and often sent death 
among the ranks of the besiegers. 

7. Thus for six days was the fort 
defended ; but Col. Munroe knew he 
could not hold out long, unless assis- 
tance came from Gen. Webb. He sent 
to that officer repeatedly, entreating 
him for help, but none came. Thus 
deserted in the most cowardly and 
cruel manner, he Avas obliged to surren- 
der the fort to Montcalm. The Eng- 
lish marched out of the fort, and the 
French took possession of it. But the 
saddest part of this story I have yet to 
tell. Montcalm promised to protect 
the English prisoners from the savages ; 

and parliament 1 4. Principal event of 1757 1 

Fort Wm Henry 1 Fort Edward 1 Gen. WeLbl 
5. Montcalm! 6. Col. Munroe! 7. How 
was the fort defended ! Gen. Webb ! What was 
Col. Munroe obliged to do ! What did Montcalm 
|)roinise ! The savages ! S. Describe the man- 


but this he failed to do. They first fell 
upon the sick, and plundered and killed 
them ; thus they became excited, and 
surrounding the defenceless English 
soldiers, who had no means of defence, 
began to slay them. 

8. There were several thousands of 
the savages, and they noAV filled the 
air with their horrid yells. They 
struck down the English w ith their tom- 
ahaw’ks,and tore the reeking scalps from 
their heads. As the slaughter proceed- 
ed, they grew more frantic. Their 
yells became still more wdld, and these 
were now mingled wdth the shrieks of 
the wounded and the dying. At this 
awful moment, Munroe besought Mont- 
calm to protect his poor soldiers, as he 
had promised ; but that officer Avould 
not interfere. His bloody allies w^ere 
permitted to do their work of death, 
without restraint. The carnage w^ent on, 
and hundreds of the British soldiers 
were slaughtered or carried captives 
into the Avilderness. 

9. The day after this fearful trage- 
dy, Major Putnam Avas sent hy Gen. 
Webb, to Avatch the motions of the ene- 
my. They had already left the place, 
and set out for Ticonderoga. They 
had destroyed the fort, leaving the 
buildings still on fire. The ground, far 
and near, Avas covered Avith dead bodies, 
cut and mangled in the most shocking 
manner. Some Avere still broiling in 
the flames, and others Avere torn limb 
from limb. Thus ended this melancho- 
ly aflair. Although it occurred near a 
hundred years ago, Ave can hardly fail 
to shudder at the detail of such bar- 
barities. 

ner in Avliich the Indians killed the English. 
What did Munroe do ! Did Montcalm endeavor 
to restrain the savages ! What of the British sol- 
diers ! 9. Major Putnam ! What had the ene- 

my done ! Describe the scene. How long since 


THE CHILD S FlKST UOv U OF HISTORY. 


101 


10. The next year, 1758, the war 
wore a diflerent aspect. William Pitt, 
a man of great talents, was placed at 
the head of affairs in England. He 
caused new officers to be appointed to 
command the armies, and the result 
showed that he selected them wisely. 
Louisburg, a strong town on the island 

I of Cape Breton, wdiich had been be- 
fore captured from the French in 1744, 
and afterw^ards restored to them, was 
taken by Lord Amherst, and Fort Du 
Quesne was taken by Gen, Forbes. 

11. Lord Abercrombie w^as sent 
with an army of seventeen thousand 
men, against Ticonderoga, This was 
a strong French fort, on the western 
shore of Lake Champlain. The Eng- 
lish army crossed the lake in boats. It 
was truly a magnificent display, as 
they covered the blue water, seeming 
as countless as the wild fowl, that some-? 
times hover ovei: its surface. 



Abercrombie’s Army crossing Lake Champlain. 


12. But amid this proud array, there 
was many a heart bounding with youth 
and hope, destined soon to beat no 
more. When the English had landed, 
they marched; tow^ard the fort. They 
were met by a small party of the 

this event occurred '? 10. What of William 

r*itt1 Louisburg 1 Port Du Quesne “I 11. 
Lord Abercrombie 1 Ticonderoga 1 What of llif, 
Ejjglisli army crossing the lake 1 Describ.Q the. 


French, and in a skirmish that follow 
ed. Lord How^e was killed. He was a 
brave young officer, and all the soldiers 
loved him. When they saw him fall 
dead upon the field, they rushed for- 
ward, determined to avenge his death. 
They surrounded the fort, and attacked 
it with the greatest fury. They h?d 
muskets and cannon, and they kept up 
a continual fire against the w^alls of the 
fort. If a Frenchman show^ed his head 
over the ramparts, he was immediate- 
ly shot by the British soldiers. 

13. They tried every means in their 
pow er to get possession of the place. 
14iey procured ladders, and attempted 
to climb over the w^alls. For four 
hours they stormed the fort with the 
utmost boldness and bravery ; but it 
waa defended with equal courage. The 
French poured down from the walls a 
dreadful fire of cannon and musketry. 
The noise of the battle was heard to 
the distance of fifty miles. It seemed 
like continued thunder; a thick cloud 
of smoke rose up from the place, and 
stretching itself far across the sky, ap- 
peared to tell of the awful scene it had 
witnessed. 

14. Finding it impossible to take 
the Fort, Lord Abercrombie Avas forc- 
ed to abandon the enterprise. Tw'O 
thousand of his men had been killed or 
wounded ; and wdth this heavy loss he 
retreated. He hoAvever despatched 
three thousand men under Colonel 
Bradstreet, against Fort Frontenac, sit- 
uated on Lake Ontario. This place 
w^as taken, and the French wTrq thus 
deprived of a station of great impor- 
tance. 

pictui-e, 12. What occurrotl when tlie English 
had landed 1 What of Lord Ilowe 1 What fol- 
lowed his death 1 Describe the battle. 14. 
What was Lord Af)ercroinbie forced to do What 
was th« loss of the English 1 Fort Frontenac * 



102 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


15. In the next year, 1759, several 
important places were taken by the 
English. A.mong these were the forts 
of Niagara, Ticonderoga, and Crown 
Point; but the most important event 
was the capture of Quebec. 

16. This place, situated on the North- 
west side of the St Lawrence, was 
deemed one of the strongest in the 
world. It was defended by a great 
many cannon, placed in several forts, 
built upon high rocks. It was thought 
impossible for soldiers in any way to 
climb up these rocks, or to get posses- 
sion of the fortifications. 

17. But William Pitt believed that 
the place might be taken ; so he sent a 
large and powerful army against it, 
commanded by Gen. Wolfe. This ofii- 
cer was a young man, full of bold and 
daring thoughts. Three oflicers, Monc- 
ton, Townshend, and Murray, all young 
and brave like himself, were associated 
with him. 

18. It v/as toward the last of June, 
that the English army landed on the 
island of Orleans, a few miles below 
Quebec. Elere Wolfe had an opportu- 
nity to examine the difficulties he had 
to overcome. He perceived that they 
were very great, but declared to his 
friends, that he would either take the 
city, or die in the attempt. He devised 
various schemes, and made several ef- 
forts, but without success. Montcalm, 
the French commander, was exceeding- 
ly vigilant, and even the confident spirit 
of Wolfe began to be dejected. 

19. But at length a narrow path 
was discovered, by which the soldiers 

15 . What of 1759'? What forts were taken'? 
Situation of Quebec ? Its direction from Boston ■? 
From Hartford 1 From New Yorkl How was 
Quebec defended 1 What was lliought of the for- 
tifications *? 17. What of William Pitt '? What of 

Gen. Wolfe t What young offieers were asso- 
ciated with Wolfe? 18. What of tlie English 


might climb the Heights of Abraham 
and thus overlook the forts, and the 
town. Wolfe knew that if he could get 
possession of these heights, he should 
obtain a great advantage. Accordingly, 
he resolved to make the attempt. But 
it was necessary that the enterprise 
should be conducted with the greatest 
secrecy. 

20. In the stillness of night a part 
of the army landed at the foot of the 
cliff, which overhung the river. They 
were ready to climb the rocks by day 
break. Wolfe was himself among them, 
and they began their difficult task. 
Clambering uj) the steep, they canght 
hold of roots, bushes and angles of the 
rocks, and at length stood safe upon 
the plain above. Before sunrise, the 
whole army had gained the heights, 
and were all arranged under their se- 
veral leaders. 

21. When Montcalm heard of all 
this, he thought it impossible, and 
would not believe the story ; but he 
soon found it to be true. Knowing 
that he must now come to battle, he 
drew out his men upon the plain in 
front of the English army. When all 
was ready, the French advanced brisk- 
ly. The English stood still, and receiv- 
ed them with a dreadful fire. A fierce 
engagement followed, and after a long 
struggle, the French were defeated. 
Montcalm and Wolfe were both mortal- 
ly wounded. 

22. The latter died on the field of 
battle. He had received a bullet in hia 
wrist, and another in his leg, but he 
concealed these wounds, and pressed 

army? What of Wolfe? Montcalm? 19 
What was at length discovered ? 20. How did 

the British army get possession of the Heights of 
Abraham? 21. What of Montcalm ? How did 
the French army advance ? How did the English 
receive them ? What of the battle ? Montcalnt 
and Wolfe ? 22. How was Wolfe wonnded ? 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


103 


into the thickest of the fight ; but by and 
by he was shot in the body, and carried 
olf the field. When he was dying, he 
heard some one say, ‘Theyliy! they 
fiy ! ’ ‘ Who fly ? ’ said he. ‘ The French,’ 
was the answer. ‘ Then I die content- 
ed,’ said the hero, and expired. 

23. Five days after this battle, 
Quebec surrendered to the English, and 
has ever since remained in their pos- 
session. It is the capital of the British 
possessions in America, and the gover- 
nor, appointed by the king, lives there. 

24. The next year, the French made 
some feeble attempts to recover Quebec, 
blit without success. In September, 
Montreal was taken by the Englisli, and 
in 1003 the war was closed by a peace, 
made at Paris. By this treaty, France 
ceded to England all her northern col- 
onies, and these still remain subject to 
Great Britain. 

25 Thus I have told you of the 
‘Old French War.’ All the thirteen 
colonies were engaged in it, and they 
furnished a great many troops, who 
went to Canada, and assisted in the 
battles I have described. I have fre- 
quently met with old men, as I have 
told you before, who were soldiers in 
tliat lamous war. But it is now seventy 
years since these things happened, and 
nearly all those who acted a part in the 
scenes of that day, are numbered with 
the dead. Perhaps you may meet with 
some gray-haired old man, who will 
tell you that he fought with Wolfe, on 
the Heights of Abraham. If you 
should ever do so, you should ask him 
to tell you the story of that celebrated 
affair. 


Describe his death. 23. What of Quebec 'I 
What of the Frencli the next year 1 Montreal "I 
What occurred in 1663 1 To whom do the Cana- 
das now belong 1 25. What of the thirteen colo- 

nies 1 How long since the French war 1 


CHAP. L. 

THE REVOLUTION. 

1. We are now coming to events of 
great interest, and great importance. 
iSoon after the French war, the king and 
parliament of Great Britain began to 
treat the colonies in a very unjust man- 
ner. They had never conducted gen- 
erously to them ; on the contrary, their 
proceedings had generally shown a de- 
sire to make them profitable to Eng- 
land, rather than prosperous and happy 
among themselves. 

2. Yet the people in this country 
loved England so well, that they easily 
forgot these things, and it is probable 
that all might have gone on in harmo- 
ny for many years, if the British gov- 
ernment had not attempted to oppress 
and enslave the people. 

3. It is hardly necessary to tell you 
of all the difficulties which preceded 
the war; but I will endeavor to make 
you understand the principal one. The 
British government, being very much 
in debt, wanted to raise large sums of 
money, and so determined to get a part 
of it by taxing the Americans. Now 
the latter maintained that England had 
no right to tax them. They thought 
it very hard and very unjiist, that Par- 
liament, consisting of men who lived 
in England, at a distance of 3000 miles, 
should take away the money of the 
people here, just because they happen'- 
ed to want it. Yet this was what Par- 

1. What of the king and parliament soon afte* 
the French war 1 How had the colonies been 
treated by the government of England 1 2. Whal 

of the people of this country '? 3. What was tho 

principal difficulty between England and the colo- 
nies, which led to the Revolution 1 What did the 
Americans think 1 What did Parliament claim 
a right to do '1 What did Parliament do 1 W^hat 
effect had these acts I People of Boston 1 Gea- 

/ 

i 


104 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


liament claimed the right to do, and 
acted accordingly. 

4. In opposing this, the Ameri- 
cans were perfectly right; but still 
parliament passed laws, imposing du- 
ties upon various articles of mer- 
chandise, brought into the country. 
These acts produced a great ferment 
throughout the colonies. The people 
in Boston were particularly excited ; 
and fearing rebellion, Gen. Gage, the 
British commander, assembled two reg- 
iments of soldiers, to keep them in aAve. 

5. These troops took possession of 
the State-house without leave, and 
there they lived. They paraded about 
the streets, and filled the ears of the in- 
habitants with the constant din of 
their music. 

6. Now my reader will recollect 
that these were foreign soldiers, sent 
with cannon, muskets and bayonets, to 
restrain a people who considered them- 
selves free. It is easy to perceive, that 
all this was not calculated to soothe 
their jealous feelings ; on the contrary, 
it exasperated the people, and prepared 
tliern to take up arms against their op- 
pressors. 

7. Such was the state of irritation 
in Boston in the spring of 1770, that 
quarrels occurred almost every day, 
between the soldiers and the popu- 
lace. On the second of March, as 
one of the British soldiers was going 
by the shop of one Gray, a rope-maker, 
he was beaten severely. He ran off, 
but returned with some of his com- 
rades, and the soldiers and rope-ma- 
kers fell together by the ears in good 
earnest. The latter got the worst of 
it. 

8. The people were now more 

.einul Gage. 5. British troops 1 6. What ef- 

fect was produced by these things upon the feelings 
of the people in Boston t 7. What of the spring 


angry than ever. A great tumult brq 
out, between seven and eight o’cloi 
on the evening of the 5th of Mart , 
The mob, armed with clubs, ran tovvav 
King Street, now State Street, crying, 
‘ Let us drive out these rascals ! They 
have no business here ! Drive them out! 
Drive out the rairicals ! ’ About this 
time, some one cried out, that the town 
had been set on fire. Then the bells 
rang, and the crowd became greater, 
and more noisy ; they rushed furiously 
to the custom-house, and, seeing an 
English soldier stationed there, shout 
ed, ‘ Kill him ! kill him !’ The people 
attacked him with snow-balls, pieces 
of ice, and whatever they could find. 

9. The sentinel called for the guard, 
and Captain Preston sent a corporal 
with a few soldiers to defend him. 
They marched with their guns loaded, 
and the Captain followed them. They 
met a crowd of the people, led on by a 
giant of a negro, named Attucks ; they 
brandished their clubs, and pelted the 
soldiers with snow-balls, abused them 



People attacking tke Soldiers. 


with all manner of harsh words, shout- 
ed in their faces, surrounded them, and 
challenged them to fire. 

10. They even rushed upon th® 
points of the bayonets. The soldiers 

of 1770 1 What occurred on the 2d of March 1 
What occurred OB the evecing of the 5Ui of March 1 



THE CHILD S FIRST BOOK OF HISTORY. 


105 


^lood like statues, the bells ringing, 
ind the mob pressing upon Ihem. At 
last, Attucks, with twelve of his men, 
began to strike upon their muskets 
with clubs, and cried out to the multi- 
tude, ‘ Do n’t be afraid ! They dare not 
fire — the miserable cowards ! Kill the 
rascals! Crush them under foot ! ’ At- 
tucks lifted his arm against Captain 
Preston, and seized up' a a bayonet. 
‘They dare not fire!’ shouted tke 
rnob again. At this instant, the firing 
began. The negro dropped ^fead up- 
on the ground. The soldiers fired 
twice more. Three men were killed, 
and others were wounded. The mob 
dispersed, but soon returned to carry 
oil' the bodies. 

11. The whole town was now in 
an uproar. Thousands of men, wo- 
men and children, rushed through the 
streets. The sound of drums, and cries 
of ‘ To arms ! to arms ! ’ were heard 
from all quarters. The soldiers who 
had fired on the people, were arrested, 
and the governor, at last, persuaded the 
multitude to go home quietly. The 
troops were ordered off to Castle Wil- 
liam the next morning. The three 
slain citizens were buried with great 
ceremony, on the 8th ; the shops were 
all closed ; while the bells in Boston, 
and the towns around, were all tolling. 

12. The bodies were followed to 
the churchyard, from King Street, 
through the city, by a long file of 
coaches, and an immense crowd of peo- 
ple on foot. The soldiers were soon 
after tried. Two were condemned and 
imprisoned ; six of them were acquitted, 
much to the honor of the jury, and of 
John Adams and Josiah Quincy, who 

11. What was (lone witli the soldiers who tired 
upon the people 1 What of the British troops'? 
I'he burial of the slain citizens '? 12. Trial of 

the .soldiers 1 


pleaded for them. The irritated and 
unreasonable populace Avould have 
torn the soldiers in pieces, if they could 
have had their wav. 

CHAP. LI. 

REVOLUTION. — continued. 

1. In March, 1771, the English Par- 
! liament concluded to repeal tlie duties 
jupon glass, paint, &.C., but retained a 
! tax of threejtence a pound upon tea. 
jT'his was a sad mistake. If Parlia- 
! ment had reppuled all, and said no more 
about taxes, the Americans might still 
have been satisfied. As it was, they 
began to buv the goods of the English 
merchants again, tea alone excepted ; 
this they would have nothing to do 
with. 

2. So matters went on, during the 
year 1771. The ofllcers of the revenue 
were everywhere despised. In Boston, 
one of them undertook to seize upon a 
vessel, for some violation of the law. 
He was seized upon himself by the peo- 
ple, for what they thought a violation 
of the law, stripped, carted through the 
town, besmeared with tar, and plastered 
over with a coat of feathers, so that he 
looked more like an ostrich than a 
pnan. 

3. In 1772, the English government, 
intending to put down the rebellious 
spirit of the Americans, made several 
new laws, which only served to in- 
crease the difficulty. I'lie Americans 
now began to think of doing something 
for themselves in earnest. Committees 
were chosen in every part of the coun- 

1. What was clone in March, 17711 What 
did the Americans do ? Why would ihev not buv 
tea of the English 1 2. The year 1771 1 Offi- 

jeers of the revenue 1 What did the people dc 
I with one of these officers “? 3. What wjis dona 


9 


o 


106 


THE child’s first book of history. 


try, to attend to public aJfiairs, and to 
write to each other. 

4. In 1773, large ships, loaded with 
immerse cargoes of tea, were sent out 
to America, by some merchants in Eng- 
land. But the colonists had made up 
their minds what to do. In Philadel- 
phia and New York, not a man could 
be found to receive the English tea, 
or have anything to do with it. A few 
chests, which one Captain Chambers 
had brought to Philadelphia, were let 
down very quietly to the bottom of the 
river, by some people, who went slyly 
on board the ship. Iiir Charleston, it 
was landed and lodged in cellars so 
damp, that it was soon spoiled. 

5. The people of Boston took a keen 
interest in this business. The English 
agents there, when the tea was lirst 
known to be coming, were required by 
the people to give up all concern with 
it. They made no answer, but with- 
drew as fast as convenient into the for- j 
tress. Captain Hall soon arrived in 
port with one hundred chests of tea. 
The people collected in great fury, or- 
dered him to keep it on board, as he 
valued his life, and placed a guard, and 
<t strict watch close by the vessel, upon 
GrilFin’s Wharf. 

6. Two other vessels having arriv- 
ed, they were obliged to anchor by the 
side of Hall’s ship. A town meeting, 
meanwhile, was summoned ; and the 
people agreed to call upon the governor, 
and request him to have the ships sent 
off. But the governor would do no 
such tiling. A great uproar now began. 

in 1772 1 What of the Americans 1 4, What 

was done in 1773 1 New York and Philadelphia 1 
Cantain Chambers and his tea 1 What was done 
in Charleston! 5. English agents in Boston! 
Capt. Hall ! What did the people do ! 6. Town [i 

meeting! 7. How were .340 chests of tea de- 
stroyed! 8. What occurred in 1774! Boston 
Port Bill ! 9. Othe>’ laws ! What did the peo- 


A person in the gallery of the hall, 
dressed like an Indian, shouted the cry 
of war. 

7. The meeting was dissolved in the 
twinkling of an eye, and the multitude 
rushed to Griffin’s Wharf. Here were 
seventeen sea captains, carpenters, and 
others, disguised as Indians. It was 
night, and these persons went on board 
the three vessels, and, in less than two 
hours, three hundred and forty chests 
were staved and emptied into the sea. 

I This done, they went quietly home ; 

' and the crowd dispersed, very well sat- 
isfied. 

S. Early in 1774, an account of these 
disturbances having reached England,, 
tlie government then determined, by way 
of punishing the people of Boston, to 
destroy the trade of that town, by for- 
bidding all manner of goods to be land- 
ed there. Accordingly, the Boston 
Port Bill was passed in Parliament, 
March 14th, and the news was received 
in Boston, May 10th. Like other unjust 
laws, tills also did more hurt than good. 

9. In a few days after the Port Bill 
was passed, other laws were made, 
still more severe. They were opposed 
in England, by some persons, but a 
large part, both of the parliament and 
people, supposed, if the Americans 
were punished and frightened pretty 
well, tliey would, by and by, be more 
submissive to the mother country. This 
was anotlier sad mistake. 

10. Not only the people of Boston, 
blit the whole people of America, 
North, South, East, and West, were more 
indignant than ever. Town meetings 
were held, days of fastings appointed, 
and news of the Port Bill spread over 
the wliole country. An agreement to 
.stop all trade with England, called the 

pie and parliament of England think ! 10 

What of Uie people of America ! League and cov- 


/ 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


107 


league and covenant,’ was signed by 
immense numbers. 

11. Those who refused to sign it, 
were hooted at, as enemies of the coun- 
try. General Gage, at Boston, issued 
a proclamation against the league, and 
declared it treasonable. But these 
were mere words; and the Bostonians 
published in return, that the General’s 
proclamation was treason. 

12. On the first of June, the Port 
Bill was put in force. At .midday, all 
business ceased in the custom hoifee ; no 
vessel was sufiered to enter the harbor. 
Very little was now done, for the rich 
had no money to spare, and the poor 
liad no employment. The soldiers 
paraded the streets in triumph. 

13. But the Bostonians were not 
forgotten. The country was awake 
on all sides. The first of June ivas 
kept as a fast day, in many places. In 
Philadelphia, the shops were shut, and 
the bells tolled. The people of Mar- 
blehead and Salem, offered the Boston 
merchants their harbors, wharves, and 
warehouses, free of all cost ; and large 
sums of money, and other things, col- 
lected in all parts of the country, were 
sent into Boston. 

14. Serious preparations began to 
be made for war. People provided 
themselves with arms, formed compa- 
nies, and learned, as fast as possible, 
the business of soldiers. Being most 
of them used to hunting, they were 
good marksmen. In all places, nothing 
was heard but the noise of drums and 
fifes. Fathers and sons, young and old, 
became soldiers ; and even women and 
girls set about casting balls and making 
cartridges. 

15. Meanwhile, the jealousy of the 

eimnt '? 11. Gen. Gage f Bostonians'? 12. 

Port Bill? 13. Bostonians? First of June? 
I’iiiladelpUia ? People of Marblehead and Salem ? 


people toward the soldiers continued 
to increase. Even the children caught 
the general feeling, as a story will show 
you. During the winter, before the 
Port Bill passed, the boys were in the 
habit of building hills of snow on the 
Common, and sliding down upon them to 
the Pond. The English troops beat down 
these hills, merely to provoke them. 
The boys complained of the injury, and 
set about repairing it. However, when 
they returned from school, they found 
the snow hills beat down again. 

16. Several of the boys now waited 
upon the British captain, and informed 
him of the conduct of his soldiers ; but 
he would have nothing to say to them, 
and the soldiers were more impudent 
than ever. At last, they called a meet- 
ing of the largest boys, and sent them 
to General Gage, Commander in Chief. 

1 7. He asked why so many children 
had called upon him. ‘We came, sir,’ 
said the tallest boy, ‘ to demand satis- 
faction.’ ‘ What,’ said the General, ‘ have 
your fathers been teaching you rebel- 
lion, and sent you to show it here?’ 
‘ Nobody sent us, sir,’ answered the boy, 
while his cheek reddened, and his eye 
flashed; ‘we have never injured, nor 
insulted your troops; but they have 
trodden down our snow hills, and broken 
the ice on our skating ground. We 
complained, and they called us young 
rebels, and told us to help ourselves if 
we could. We told the captain of thre, 
and he laughed at us. Yesterday our 
works were destroyed for a third time; 
and, sir, we will bear it no longer.’ 

18. The General looked at them 
with admiration, and said to an officer 
at his side, ‘ The very children draw 
in a love of liberty with the air they 

Money and other things 1 14. What prepara- 

tions were made for war? 15. Jealon-sy of the 
people ? Story of boys in Boston 1 
g2 • 


108 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


breathe. — You may go, my brave boys ; 
and be assured, if my troops trouble 
you again, they shall be punished.’ 

CHAP. LII. 

REVOLUTION. — contindkd. 

1. I have now told you something 
which preceded the Revolutionary War. 
You see by what I have told you, that 
the people in all parts of the country 
were resolved to resist the oppression 
of the British government. Slowly 
and reluctantly had they come to the 
decision ; but now that the spirit of the 
nation was roused, they were ready to 
go into the field, and shed their blood 
in the sacred cause of liberty. 

2. In this state of things, nothing 
was wanting but some occasion which 
might call the feelings of the people 
into action; and this was not long de- 
layed. There were some military 
stores at Concord, about 18 miles from 
Boston, belonffincf to the Americans. 
These Gen. Gage Mushed to destroy ; 
and for this purpose he sent about 800 
grenadiers and light infantry from Bos- 
ton, at eleven o’clock in the evening of 
the 18th of April, 1775. 

3. Notice of this was immediately 
carried into the country. By two 
o’clock in the morning, 130 of the Lex- 
ington militia had assembled on the 
green, at the meeting-house, to oppose 
them. They were dismissed, but col- 
lected again between four and five, at 
the beat of the drum. By and by the 
800 British troops come marching up 
the road. Major Pitcairn at their head. 

1. What had the people of the countr}' resolved 
to do 1 2 . Military stores at Concord 'I What 

#lid Gen. Gage do 1 3. Lexington militia 1 In 

vriHicn direction is Lexington from Boston 1 
tJraish troops 1 Major Pitcairn '? What did the 


‘ Disperse, you rebels ! ’ cried the ma- 
jor, addressing the militia; ‘throw 
down your arms and disperse! ’ They 
did not disperse, however. He now 
rode forward, discharged his pistol, 
brandished his sword, and ordered his 
soldiers to fire. They did so, and three 
or four of the Americans were killed. 
The soldiers shouted, fired again, and 
then proceeded toward Concord. 

4. At Concord, they disabled two 
cannon, threw 500 pounds of ball into 
the wells, and staved about 60 barrels 
of flour. They fired upon the Concord 
militia, under Major Batterick’s com- 
mand. Two men were killed; a skir- 
mish followed ; and the English retreat- 
ed, as fast as possible, to Lexington. 
By this time, the people Avere coming 
upon them from all parts of the country. 
The British were fired upon on all sides, 
from sheds, houses, and fences. 

5. At Lexington, where they halted 
to rest, they were joined by 900 more 
troops, sent out from Boston, under 
Lord Percy. These brought two can- 
non Avith them ; and the country peo- 
ple were kept back. They still fired 
upon the troops, however, and being 
generally good marksmen, made terri- 
ble havoc. The Regulars, as the Eng- 
lish troops Avere called, reached Charles- 
toAA'n at sunset, and returned the next 
day into Boston. Sixtyfive of their 
number had been killed, one hundred 
and eighty Avounded, and tAventy eight 
made prisoners. 

6. Of the Provincials, fifty Avere 
killed, and thirtyeight Avounded, and 
missing. There Avere never more than 

srfidiers do 1 4. What was done at Concord I 

Wiiat took place when the British had returned 
to Lexington I 5. Lord Percy 1 What did the 
Americans do '? What were the English Iroopa 
called 1 What of their return to Boston 1 How 
many were killed and wounded, and made prisotk- 


THE CHILD S FIRST BOOK OF HISTORY. 


109 


three or four hundred of the latter 
fighting at one time, and these fought 
as they pleased, without order. The 
Regulars were obliged to keep in the 
main road ; but the Militia, knowing 
every inch of the country, flanked them, 
and fired upon them at all the corners. 

7. The news of this first battle 
produced a tremendous excitement 
throughout the country. The dead 
were buried with great ceremony. 
Great bodies of militia marched towards 
Boston, and agreements were entered 
into by thousands of people, to defend 
the Bostonians to the last gasp. 

8. Everybody was armed and ready 
to fight. When the news of the Lex- 
ington battle reached Barnstable, a 
company of militia started off’ for Cam- 
bridge at once. In the front was a 
young man, the only child of an old 
farmer. As they came to the old gen- 
tleman’s house, they halted a moment. 
The drum and fife ceased. The farmer 
came out with his gray head bare. 
‘ God be with you all ! ’ said he ; ‘ and you, 
John, if you must fight, fight like a 
man, or never let me see you again.’ 
The old' man gave him his blessing. 
The poor fellow brushed a tear from 
his eye, and the company marched on. 

9. I will tell you one or two more 
stories, which will make you under- 
stand the excitement produced by the 
battle of Lexington. The news reach- 
ed a small town in Connecticut, on the 
morning of the sabbath. It was near- 
ly time to go to meeting, when the 
beating of a drum, and the ringing of 
the bell, attracted the attention of the 
people. 

10. In expectation that some great 
event was about to happen, every un- 

era 1 6. How many of tlie Provincials 1 How 

many Provincials were engaged in the battle 1 
The Regulars 1 Militia 1 On what day did the 


usual signal had a startling effect. 
When the drum and the bell were 
heard, therefore, the men came running 
to the meeting-house green, in breath- 
less haste. Soon the clergyman was 
among them, and they were all told, 
that some of their countrymen had 
been shot by the British soldiers, at 
Lexington. The faces of the men, as 
they heard it, were pale, but not from 
fear; it was immediately resolved, that 
thirty persons should be equipped, and 
set out for Boston. Those who could 
best go, were selected, and went home 
to make preparations. 

11. At noon, they had all returned 
to the little lawn in front of the meet- 
ing-house. There was a crowd of peo- 
ple around. There were friends, and 
acquaintances, and wives and children. 
Such as were not well supplied with 
clothes, and equipments, were immedi- 
ately furnished by their neighbors. 
Among the crowd, there was one re- 
markable individual. This was a rich 
old miser, who was never known to 
part with his money, but with extreme 
reluctance. On the present occasion, 
his nature seemed changed. He took 
several of the soldiers apart, whom he 
supposed likely to be destitute, and put 
into their hands, about thirty dollars of 
hard cash ; at the same time saying, in 
a low voice, ‘Beat the rascals! beat 
them ! If you come back, perhaps you 
will pay me; if not, God bless you!’ 

12. After all the arrangements were 
made, the soldiers entered the broad 
aisle of the church. An affecting and 
fervent prayer was then ofl’ered by the 
clergyman, in behalf of the country, 
and in behalf of these brave men, that 
were about to enter upon the danger- 

battle of Lexington occur 1 7. What effect had 

the news of this battle 1 8. Story of an old maq 

at Barnstable 1 9. Story of a small town in Con- 


no 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


ous chances of war. After the prayer, i 
he made a short but animated address, * 
encouraging the men to do their duty. 1 
He pronounced a blessing, and then| 
they departed. i 

13. I will now tell you about General 
Putnam. He was a brave man, and 
lived at Brooklyn, in Connecticut. He 
was a farmer, and was ploughing in the 
field, when the tidings from Lexington 
were brought to him. He did not stay 
even to unharness his cattle ; but 
leaving the plough in the unfinished 
furrow, he went to his house, gave 
some hasty directions respecting his 
affairs, mounted his horse, and with a 
rapid pace proceeded to Boston. 

14. In the course of a few weeks, 
30,000 men had arrived from various 
parts of the country. They were indeed 
poorly armed, but they were full of 
resolution. Most of them were farmers 
and mechanics, who had spent their 
lives in peace, and knew nothing of war. 
But the blood of their countrymen had 
been spilled, and they had come to 
avenge their death. They had no can- 
non, no leaders, but little ammunition, 
and many of them had no guns. But 
in spite of these deficiences, they were 
full of courage, and ready, as soon as an 
opportunity offered, to meet the British 
troops in open battle. 

CHAP. LHI. 

REVOLUTION. — continued. 

1. I must beg my readers to pause 
here a moment, and consider the state 
of the country at this point of our story. | 
It was not then, as now, full of wealth, 1 
and covered with large towns and cities, j 

necticut 1 13. Gen. Putnam 1 14. How many 

people had assembled at Boston in the course of a 
(•w weeks 1 What of them 


Boston, which now has 60,000 inhabit- 
ants, had then but 10,000. New York, 
Philadelphia, and other large places, 
were then comparatively small. The 
country was poor, and the whole num- 
ber of inhabitants, throughout the thir- 
teen colonies was scarcely 3,000,000 ; 
yet they were about to engage in a 
strife with Great Britain, the most pow- 
erful nation on the earth. 

2. She had nearly one thousand 
ships of war, and the Americans had 
none. She had powerful armies, skil- 
ful generals, and an abundance of all 
the materials for making war. Such 
was indeed the poverty and apparent 
weakness of America, such the mighty 
power of England, that in Europe, it 
was generally believed that the Ameri- 
cans must be crushed in the struggle. 

3. But our brave fathers thought 
not so. They knew the power of Eng- 
land, but they knew also that the race 
is not always to the swift, nor the bat- 
tle to the strong. Placing their confi- 
dence in Heaven and the justice of 
their cause, they entered boldly into 
the contest, and, as we shall see in the 
end, triumphed over their oppressors. 

4. The war having been opened 
by the battle of Lexington, the Ameri- 
cans determined to prosecute it on their 
part with vigor. They sent some sol- 
diers against two British forts, Ticon- 
deroga and Crown Point, both of which 
were easily captured. The militia in- 
vested Boston, and pretty soon the 
British troops, of which there were se- 
veral thousands 'in that town, began to 


1. State of the country at the commencement 
of the war 1 Boston 1 New York and Philadel- 
phia! Population of the thirteen colonies'? 
Great Britain ! 2. Her navy ! Armies 1 Gen- 

erals, &c. 1 What was generally believed in Eu- 
rope "I 3. What of our forefathers! 4. The 
Americans! Ticonderoga and Crown Point! ML 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY# 


111 


feel a little uncomfortable. The Amer- 
icans had two or three old rusty cannon, 
with which they blazed away upon the 
enemy, making a good deal of noise, 
and doing some execution. 

5. Gen. Gage did not like to be 
cooped up in Boston, with his men, so 
he determined to cut through the militia 
with his troops, and take up some sta- 
tion in the country. To prevent this 
the Americans sent a thousand men by 
night to occupy Bunker Hill. By mis- 
take they went to Breed’s Hill, situated 
in Charlestown, and very near to Bos- 
ton. At midnight they began to erect 
entrenchments, and working with all 
their might, they had thrown up a small 
redoubt eight rods square, by the dawn 
of day. The British were utterly aston- 
ished, when they saw what was going 
on. Knowing that the Americans could 
throw their cannon balls down upon 
them from the hill, they saw the neces- 
sity of immediately driving them away 
if possible. 

6. It was now the 17th of June, 
and the British troops were soon put in 
motion. I'he whole town of Boston 
resounded with the noise of drums and 
fifes. Heavy columns of soldiers march- 
ed along the streets, and entered the 
boats to cross over to Breed’s Hill. 
A great many cannon, from the British 
ships, and other places, opened their fire 
upon the Americans, and the balls went 
howling through the air, and ploughing 
up the ground, but doing little damage. 

7. The Americans knew what was 
Cuming, and like men not to be turned 
from their purpose, labored steadily at 
their works. There were General Put- 
nam, and Gen. Warren, and other brave] 
leaders among them. There were noj 

litial RjitisU troops 1 Cannon'? 5. Gen. Ga^e'?; 
What did the Americans do '? Breed’s Hill '? The j 
British 1 6. Wliat day was this "? What took 1 


idle hands, there were no coward hearts 
there: every man entered with his whole 
soul into the business of the awful crisis. 

8# At length the British landed : 
some of them entered Charlestown, and 
set it on fire. The flames ran from 
house to house, until the whole town 
was involved in one vast blaze. Pretty 
soon the troops began to advance up 
the hill towards the Americans. The 
latter were now ready, and having 
placed themselves behind their breast- 
works, lay waiting for the enemy. There 
were gray-haired old men, with their 
sons and grandsons near them ; there 
were neighbors, friends, and brothers, 
side by side. 

9. The British advanced bravely. 
They were led by General Howe, and 
other gallant officers. With steady 
confidence they marched towards the 
American lines. It was now an awful 
moment. Thousands and thousands of 
people covered the lulls, and houses, 
and steeples of Boston, that they might 
see the fight. The cannon, for a few 
minutes, ceased their roar; everything 
around seemed to pause and look with 
breathless interest upon the scene. 

10. The British came on. The 
stillness of death rested upon the 
American lines. At length, the enemy 
had approached within a few rods, Mdien 
at ^a given signal, a thousand bullets 
were suddenly hurled amid their ranks. 
For a few seconds, ihe Americans kept 
up a deadly fire, and the British were 
obliged to retreat. But they soon ral- 
lied, and came again upon the Ameri- 
cans. They were again driven back. 
Still a third time they rallied, and the 
Americans, having used up all their 
powder and ball, fought for some time 

place in Boston t Wliat of tlie British cannon t 
The .Americans 1 What leaders amorK^r tlie Amer- 
icans '? 8. The British 1 Charlestown 1 Describti 


112 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


with the butt ends of their muskets, and j 
then reluctantly retreated. | 

11. In this battle, 1054 of the I 
British were killed and wounded; of 
the Americans, 453. The British offi- 
cers were astonished at the result : they 
had despised tlie Americans before, and 
never iinairined that a collection of peo- 
ple, who had not learnt the art of war, 
commanded by no experienced officers, 
and but poorly provided with arms and 
ammunition, could make such havoc 
among disciplined troops. 

12. This battle, though it was fought 
on Breed’s Hill, is called the^ battle of 
Bunker Hill. The Americans were 
driven back, indeed ; but this happened 
only because their ammunition was ex- 
pended. It gave the people great 
courage, for it showed that they could 
beat the British Regulars in a fair fight. 

13. Act the Americans, though 
they rejoiced at their partial success, 
had much occasion for sorrow. Many 
of their friends and neighbors had been 
killed, and among these was Gen. War- 
ren, who was greatly beloved by all the 
people. He was fighting in the midst 
of the battle, when a British officer, 
wlio knew him, took a gun from a sol- 
dier, and shot him through the head. 



Death of General Warren. 


file battle. 11. Loss of the British 1 Ofthe Aineri- 
eansl Britieh otlicers 1 12. Where \va« the battle 


CHAP. LIV. 

REVOLUTION. — continued. 

1. Tlie people of the colonies, find- 
ing it necessary to have some general 
government, had sent some of their 
wisest men to Philadelphia, to manage 
public affairs. These were called the 
Continental Congress. They appointed 
George Washington of Virginia, Com- 
mander in Chief of the American Armies, 
and in about a fortnight after the battle 
of Bunker Hill, he reached Cambridge, 
three miles from Boston. He found 
about 14,000 militia in the neighbor- 
hood, and immediately began to exert 
himself to teach them the art of war. 

2. I shall not be able to tell you of 
all the interesting events that occurred 
during the Revolution. The story of 
them would fill a large book. I shall 
only give you a few details, and leave 
you to read the whole history in some 
larger work. The war soon spread 
over the country, and many skirmishes 
took place between the provincials, 
and the British soldiers. 

.3. During the latter part of the year 
1775, two expeditions were sent against 
Canada ; one, consisting of 3000 men, 
was put under the command of Gen. 
Schuyler, and went by the way of Lake 
Champlain ; the other, consisting of 
1100 men, and commanded by Gen. 
Arnold, went up the Kennebec river, 
and crossed the wilderness to Quebec. 

4. The soldiers, under the command 
of Arnold, suficred incredible hardships. 
For several days, they were almost en- 

of Bunker Hill fought '? Why were the Americams 
driven Ivack 1 Why ditl the battle of Bunker Hil! 
encourage the Americans! 13. Gen. Warren t 
Describe the picture. 

1. Continental Congress! Washlngtani 1 
Militia! 2. What of the war! 3. General 
Schuyler! Gen. Arnold! 4. What of his exr 


THE child's first BOoR OF HISTORY. 


irs 


tirely destitute of food, and many of I 
them were nearly starved to death. 
Yet these privations were borne with 
fortitude, and the men at length reached 
Quebec. 

5. An attack was finally made upon 
that place; but Gen. Arnold being 
wounded, and Gen. Montgomery killed, 
it failed of success. After many vicis- 
situdes, the American troops were oblig- 
ed to return, without having accom- 
plished the objects of the two expedi- 
tions in which they had been engaged. 

6. The spring of 1771) opened 
with favorable prospects for the Ameri- 
cans. Gen. Washington manaored so 
well, that in March, Gen. Howe, with 
all the British troops, was forced to quit 
Boston. On the 17th, the fleet set sail 
for Halifax, and the American troops 
entered the town. 

7. On the 4th of July of this year, 

Congress made a solemn declaration 
that the people of America would sub- 
mit to the government of England no 
more, but that they would be a free 
and independent nation. This is call- 
ed the Declaration of Independence. 
It was hailed by the inhabitants with 
the greatest joy, and the day is still 
celebrated every 4th of July. From 
this time each of the colonies became 
a State, and, joined together under the 
general government of Congress, they 
became a free nation under the name 
of the United States. j 

8. At this time, the hopes and the | 

courage of the country were very liigh ; 
but these were soon depressed by great 
misfortunes. In August, a powerful 
British army came in ships against 
New York." Washington was there 
with many troops; but after a great deal ji 
_ — 1 1 

pedition 1 5. Attack on Quebec T\voexpe-|| 

ditions against Canada 1 6. Gen. Ilowe t 7. ij 

Fourtli of Julyf What of the colonies'! 8. H 


of fighting, they Avere forced to quit the 
place, and give it up to the British. 
Several American forts Avere also taken, 
and the provincial army, now very 
much reduced, retreated to New Jersey. 

9. The Britisli oflicers thought the 
Avar nearly finished, and large numbers 
of the American people feared that the 
jmwer of England Avas about to tri- 
umph over the liberties of the country. 
One event, hoAvever, revived a little 
their sinking courage. In December, 
Gen. Washington, being on the Penn- 
sylvania side of the Delaware Avith the 
American troops, suddenly crossed that 



American Troops crossing the Delaware. 


river to Trenton. At this place there 
Avere about 1000 soldiers, Avho came 
from Hesse in Gertnany, and Avere call- 
ed Hessians. They had been hired by 
the British, and came to this country 
to fiif-ht for them against the Americans. 
Washington came suddenly uj)on them, 
and took 900 prisoners. 

10. In Jantiary, 1777, Washington 
attacked some British troops at Prince- 
ton, killed 100 men, and took 300 
prisoners. In this battle, James Mon- 
roe, Avho Avas aftcrAvards President of 
the United States, Avas Avoimded. 


New York ! Provincial army ! 9. British of- 

ficers ! Describe the capture of tlie Hessians. 
Describe the picture. 10. Wliat took place in 
Jan. 1777 ! James Monroe ! Washington ! Tho 


114 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


Washington himself, whose bravery 
led him into the midst of the fight, was 
placed in great danger, but escaped un- 
liurt. The British were so much as- 
tonished at these bold and sudden en- 
terprises, that they retreated to New 
Brunswick, and left the American ar- 
my to take up their winter-quarters qui- 
etly at Morristown. 

11. In the spring of 1777, La Fay- 
ette, a young French nobleman, left 
his country, and came to assist the 
Americans. He became the bosom 
friend of Washington, and was ap- 
pointed a general in the army. He 
fought bravely and successfully for our 
eountry ; and now, while I am writing, 
he still lives in France, and is striving 
to secure for his native land the bless- 
ings of that liberty which he assisted 
our fathers to establish here. 

12. In September of this year, Gen. 
Howe left New York with a strong 
British force in a great many ships. 
These entered Chesapeake Bay, and the 
troops proceeded toward Philadelphia. 
Washington met them at every point, 
and fought several battles. But the 
Americans were obliged to retreat, and 
the British entered Philadelphia on the 
26ith. 

13- About the time that the events 
occurred that I have just related, others 
of great iinportance were taking place 
in the north. Gen. Burgoyne, a fa- 
mous British officer, set out from Cana- 
da with cue of the finest armies that 
was ever known, intending to proceed 
to New York across the country, by 
way of Lake Champlain. Gen. Gates 
assembled a considerable force to op- 
pose him. The brave inhabitants left 

British 1 11. La Fayette 1 12. Gen. Howe 1 

Washingtom 1 When did the British enter Phila- 
delphia? 13- Gen. Biu-goyne 1 Gen. Gates'?; 
iiattJc of BeDiiJffigton \ 14. Eighteenth of Sep- ' 


their farms, and came in hundreds to 
assist him. Several skirmishes took 
place, and on the Kith of August a de- 
tachment, sent by Burgoyne to destroy 
some stores at Bennington, was de- 
feated, as I have told you in the histo- 
ry of Vermont. 

14. On the 18th of September, a 
fierce battle was fought at Stillwater, 
near Saratoga. On the 7th of October, 
another battle was fought. The great- 
est bravery was displayed on both sides, 
and night only terminated the conflict. 
Burgoyne retreated to the heights of 
Saratoga, and the Americans pursued. 
The situation of the British troops 
was now distressing. Many ©f their 
officers had been killed ; they were sur- 
rounded by active enemies, and they 
had only food enough left for threo 
days. Having no hope of escape, they 
were obliged to surrender, and on the 
1 7th of October the whole army, con- 
sisting of six thousand men, laid down 
their arms. This was a great event, 
and amid many losses, and reverses, 
sustained the hopes of the American 
people. 

CHAP. LV. 

REVOLUTION.— CONTINUED. 

1. The year 1778 opened with an 
event, which occasioned great joy in 
America. In February, the govern- 
ment of France acknowledged the in- 
dependence of the colonies, and promis- 
ed to send ships, troops, cannon, guns, 
and ammunition to assist them. The 
government of Great Britain, hearing 
of this, and being alarmed by the defeat 
and capture of their favorite general, 

teinber I Seventh of October'? Burgoyne 1 
British troops 1 Tlieir surrender 1 

1. Government of Fruncel Government 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


115 


Burgoyne, and his army, determined, if 
possible, to make up the quarrel with 
America. Accordingly, they sent some 
men to Philadelphia, to arrange the 
business with Congress. 

2. They offered to grant all that 
the Americans had claimed, to lay no 
more taxes, and to repeal all their un- 
just and offensive laws. But now that 
the people had suffered so much. Con- 
gress would not listen to these terms. 
The English agents, finding that they 
could not succeed in this way, attempt- 
ed to bribe Joseph Reed, one of the 
members. They offered him a great 
deal of money, and a rich office, if he 
would bring about a reconciliation be- 
tween the two countries. 

3. But Mr Reed was an honest 
man : he loved his country, and would 
not sell his conscience for gold or 
power. He replied, to the unworthy 
offer : — ‘ I am not worth purchasing ; 
but, poor as I am, your king has not 
money enough to buy me.’ Such no- 
ble conduct as this, was not uncommon 
among the true-hearted patriots of our 
glorious Revolution. The brave fight- 
ing, the daring courage, the bold enter- 
prize of our soldiers, did not more con- 
tribute to the salvation of our country 
in that day of trial, than the ste^uiast 
truth and sincerity of cur puoli.^ men. 

4. I must add one word ? .yore on 
this subject. My little r--^ders should 
understand, that when they grow up, it 
will be the duty of many of them to as- 
sist in choosing officers to rule over 
the country. Now, let them remember 
that the country is safe only in the 
hands of honest men. Let them there- 
fore never assist, directly or indirectly, 
in bringing any other than honest men 

Great Britain 1 2. What offer did the agents of 

tlio government make 1 Congress 1 Joseph Reed 1 
5. What took place in June, 17781 Washing- 


! into office. If they do so, they sell 
their country, and are not worthy of 
those blessings which our forefathers 
fought and bled to secure. 

5. In June, that part of the British 
army which was in Philadelphia, left 
that city, and marched across the coun- 
try to New York. Washington, with 
his troops, forsook his log huts in the 
woods, and pursued them. At Mon- 
mouth, a fierce battle was fought, of 
which I have told you in the history of 
New Jersey. The British had the 
worst of the battle, 500 of their men 
being killed and wounded. Sir Hen- 
ry Clinton, the British commander, 
stole away with his troops by night, 
and escaped to New York. 

6. In July, Count d’Estaing came 
with a large ifrench fleet to assist the 
Americans ; but he effected nothing, and 
at the close of the season, sailed for the 
West Indies. 

7. I will now tell you about Wyo- 
ming. This was a beautiful little dis- 
trict in Pennsylvania, situated in what 
is the present county of Luzerne. 
Here were a few small villages, the 
people of which were almost wholly 
occi.])i‘"d in agriculture. They were 
surroundea with charming forests, and 
bright meadows, and green hills, and 
sparkling rivulets ; all around was hap- 
piness, peace and plenty. But this 

j lovely spot was destined to become the 
I scene of cruelties scarcely equalled in 
the history of human warfare. 

8. The British officers and soldiers 
had become very bitter in their feel- 
ings tow’ard the Americans. The cap- 
ture of Burgoyne had wounded their 
pride, and their general bad success ir- 
ritated and exasperated them. Above 
all, the French, wliom they hated most 

i ■ - - ■ ‘ -r 

I ton f Battle of Monmouth 7 Sir Henry Clinton 1 
: 6. Count d’Estaing 1 7 What of Wyoming I 


THK CHILD S FIRST BOOK OF HISTORY. 


no 


cordially,, had now taken part with the 
Americans. Acting under the influ- 
ence of their -^embittered feelings, they 
conducted the \^r, in many instances, 
rather as if they\ were flghting with 
savages, than with civilized men. 

9. The people 6f Wyoming had 
sent some of their men to tight against 
the British, and for tliis they were to 
be scourged. A band of 490 Indians, 
and about as many fories^^vere sent 
against them. The inhabitants heard of 
their danger, but too late for etfectual 
defence. They however thi^w tip 
some hastv breastworks, and ^athe^ed 
their famines into them. The enemy 
nt length appeared before one of the 
forts, and pretended that they wished 
to make peace. They invited the con 
mander to come out, for this purpose; 
so he and the soldiers went to meet 
them at a place appointed in the woods ; 
but when they reached the spot, not an 
Indian nor a tory was there : they 
pressed on through the dark paths of 
the forest, but found no one. 

10. At last, they saw themselves 
surrounded by the enemy. The sava- 
ges were in every bush. They sprung 
out upon them, uttering terrible yells. 
All but sixty of four hundred men, were 
murdered with the most horrible cru- 
elty. 

11. The enemy then went back to 
the fort, and, to frighten the people 
within, hurled over the gates the scalps 
of their husbands, brothers, and fathers. 
They now inquired of the leader of the 
lories, what terms he would give them. 
He answered only ‘the hatchet: ’ they 
fought as long as possible, but the ene- 
my soon enclosed the fort with dry 
wood, and then set it on fire. The un- 
happy people within were involved in 


the flames, and they all perished, men, 
women and children, in the awful blaze. 

12. The whole Wyoming country 
was now ravaged. The people were 
scalped ; the harvests, houses, and or- 
chards, were burned; even the tongues 
of the horses and cattle were cut out, 
and the poor creatures left to perish. 

CHAP. LVI. 

REVOLUTION. — concluded. ^ 

1. The year 1779 was distinguish- 
ed by no remarkable occurrences. The 
English took Savannah, and repulsed 
the French and Americans, who at- 
tempted to recapture the city, with se- 

^j^Vefe loss. Gen. Trybti went to Con- 
^neeticut with several hundred men, 
plundered New Haven, and burnt the 
town^ of Fairfield and Norwalk. In 
August, Gen. Sullivan marched against 
the Indians in the western part of the 
State of New York. These had taken 
part with the British, and bad commit- 
ted many acts of cruelty and violence 
upon the inhabitants of the coiintry. 
The American troops went to chastise 
them for this conduct. 

2. At this time, the whole country, 
from Utica westward, was inhabited 
only by savages. Yet Gen. Sullivan 
found that these had very comfortable 
houses, a great many peach and apple 
trees, and very fine fields of corn. But 
it was his duty to destroy them. He 
set the villages on fire, and laid the 
whole country waste. He then returnr 
ed with his men to his quarters in Penn- 
sylvania. 

3. On the 12th of May, 1780, 
Charleston, in South Carolina, surrea- 


British officers and soldiers 1 How did they con- 
duct the war 1 9. Tell the story of Wyoniing. 


1. The yaar 1779 1 What occurred at Savan 
nah 1 General Tryan 1 Gen. Sullivan 1 2 

Country west of Utica 1 What of the India 


THE CHILD'S FIRST BOOR OF HISTORY. 


117 


dered to the British, after a gallant de- 
fence by Gen. Lincoln. Several battles 
took place during the season in North 
and South Carolina, in most of which 
the Americans were defeated. 

4 In July, Count Rochambeau, with 
six thousand French troops, arrived at 
Rhode Island, and marched across the 
country, to join Washington near New 
York. These troops were welcomed 
by the inhabitants 'with great joy. 
When they encamped at night, though 
most of them were weary, there were 
many of them still ready to spend an 
hour in amusement. Some green spot 
was selected, a violin was brought, and 
the village maidens joined gaily in the 
dance with the polite Frenchmen. 



The French Camp at Night. 

5. Washington liad hoped, with the as- 
sistance of the French troops, to retake 
New York; but the British assembled 
so great a force there, that it was 
thought imprudent to undertake it. 
Thus the season passed, the Americans 
having gained nothing and lost much. 
The hopes of the country were indeed 
very much depressed : nor did it re- 
vive them to learn that one of their 


ouscs, <kc. 1 What did Gen. Sullivan do ^ t*. 
;^har!eston 1 North and South Carolina I 4. 
"ount Rochambeau 1 Describe the picture. 5. 
Vashington 1 Dopes of the country at the end of 
he year'll 7S0 1 6. Character of Arnold 1 Dow 


generals had become a traitor to hi* 
country. 

6. This w^as Benedict Arnold, the 
same man who led an army into Cana- 
da, in 1775. He was a very bold and 
intrepid man, but he was seliish and 
unprincipled. He held the command 

[ of a very important fort at West Point. 
He signified to the British his willing- 
ness to give up the fort, and Major An- 
dre, a fine young officer was sent pri- 
vately to make a bargain with him. It 
was agreed that Arnold should put the 
British in possession of the fort, and 
that they should give him 50,000 dol- 
lars and a general’s command in the 
British army. 

7. When all things were arranged, 
Andre secretly set out to return, but 
he was detected, and the whole plot 
was discovered. Arnold escaped to tlie 
British at New York, and his name has 
ever since been covered with infamy^ 
Andre was tried as a spy, and hung on 
a gallows. 

8. During the spring of 1781, a 
great many battles and skirmishes were 
fought in North and South Carolina. 
The British were commanded by Lord 
Cornwallis, and the Americans by Geru 
Greene. The latter were frequently 
defeated, yet they were never discour- 
aged, and the result of the whole cam- 
paign was highly advantageous to tho 
American cause. 

9. In the summer of 1781, Lord 
Cornwallis was stationed at Yorktown, 
in V irginia, with 10,000 British troops. 
Washington was near New York, rnew 
king preparations to attack tliat city, 
wliere Sir Henry Clinton held the com- 


(lid he propose to give up the fort at West Point!? 
What of Andre 1 7. What did Arnold do after 

the discovery of the plot? Fate of Andre? 8. 
The year 1781? The British? Americans 1 
Result of the whole campaign ? 9. Lord Curtt- 


118 


THE child's first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


mand. But his army being too small, 
he determined to march to the South, 
against Cornwallis. Accordingly, he 
set out with the army ; and before Sir 
Henry Clinton suspected his design, 
he had already crossed the Delaware. 

10. About this time, Arnold, the 
traitor, was sent with some British 
troops against New London. They 
took Fort Griswold by assault, and after 
the garrison had surrendered, murder- 
ed nearly the whole ofUhem in cold 
blood. They then burnt New London 
to the ground, and returned to New 
York. But the period of British tri- 
umph was fast drawing to a close. 
Washington. marched on, and was join- 
ed by a large number of French troops, 
who had just arrived in the Chesapeake, 
under Count de Grasse. 

11. The combined army amounted to 
16,000 men. Cornwallis was sheltered 
by strong fortifications, but the Ameri- 
cans and French drew near, planted 
their cannon, and on the 9th of October 
began to pour in their shot upon him. 
A tremendous cannonade was now 
kept up, night and day. The walls of 
the British fort were battered down, 
their cannon were silenced, and their 
men slaughtered by hundreds. Corn- 
wallis attempted to escape, but did not 
succeed. At length, finding all resist- 
ance vain, he offered to capitulate, and 
on the 19th, the whole army surrender- 
ed. 

12. This splendid victory, in effect, 
closed the war. The British govern- 
ment saw that America could not be 
conquered. Accordingly they abandon- 
ed the attempt, acknowledged the in- 

irallis Washington'? What did Washington 
determine to do'? 10. Arnold'? Fort Gris- 
wold'? Washington'? "N How many Ameri- 
can and French soldiers f Descrihe the attack 
oa Cornwallis. What occurred on the 19th of 


dependence of the United States, and^ 
in 1783, a treaty of peace between the 
two nations was signed. The British 
troops now took their departure, and 
our country, thenceforward, assumed 
her station among the independent na- 
tions of the earth. 

CHAP. LVII. 

UNITED STATES AFTER THE REVOLIN 
TION. 

1. I have now told you of the Revt>^ 
lulionary War. It is scarcely possible 
for us to conceive of the sufferings of 
the country during this struggle of 
eight years. Thousands of people 
were killed ; towns were burnt down ; 
the lands lay uncultivated ; many of 
the churches had ceased to be places 
of worship, and become barracks for 
soldiers. Hundreds of families had 
been broken up ; thousands had been 
reduced from wealth to poverty ; widows 
v/ere mourning for their husbands who 
were slain ; children were thrown upon 
the world without protection ; and so^ 
ciety, having lost its character for pure 
morality, was stained with profliga- 
cy and vice. 

2. Beside all this, though our coun> 
try had gained peace and independence, 
it was still without a regular govern- 
ment. Happily, we had wise and good 
men at this time, as well as brave ones 
during the war. These, seeing the ne- 
cessities of the country, devised an ex- 
cellent government, which went into 
operation in the year 1789, as I have 
told you. The rules and principles of 
this government are called the Consti- 

October ”? 12. The British government "? What 

took place in 17S3 ? What of our country 1 

1. Sufferings of tlie Americans by the war 1 
2. What of our country'? What d i the wijp 


THE ClllLI) U FIRST BOOK OF HISTORY. 


119 


tution of the United States. Washington 
was cliosen President by the people, and 
Congress assembled at Philadelphia, to 
make laws for the country. All things 
now began to go on well. The people 
returned to their habits of industry, and 
the meadows and wheat fields began to 
bloom once more. Poverty and mourn- 
ing fled away, the ministers of the gos- 
pel returned to their churches, and 
peace and plenty were spread over the 
land. 

3. After Washington had been Presi- 
dent four years, the people chose liim 
again, and he held the office four years 
longer. He then declined a re-election, 
and, retiring to his country-seat at 
Mount Vernon, spent the remainder of 
hft days in attending to his farm. He 
died in 1799, as I have before told you. 
j He was one of the greatest and best 
I men that ever lived : his memory is 
cherished by the American people as 
that of a father, and venerated throughout 
the world. He not only saved his coun- 
try by his bravery, skill, and prudence, 
but he has done, and will do more good 
to mankind by his example, than any 
other man that ever existed. Other 
generals, and other statesmen, by look- 
ing to him, will feel their selfishness 
rebuked, their ambition chastened, their 
patriotism warmed and elevated, and 
their good will to mankind expanded 
and strengthened. The holy influence 
which Washington’s name and charac- 
ter will exert upon the world, is doubt- 
less incalculable : while human society 
lasts, they will never cease to shed 
their blessings upon mankind. 

4. I will endeavor to illustrate the 
influence of Washington’s example. 

men of otir country do '? What is the Constitution 1 
Washington 1 Congress 1 What consequences 
followed the establishment of our government 1 3. 
Washington 'I Mow did he spend the remainder 


I have told you of La Fayette, who left 
ease and luxury at home, and came to 
help the Americans in their struggle 
for liberty. He became the intimate 
friend of Washington, and his noble 
heart was deeply imbued with th* 
lofty and pure sentiments of that great 
man. 

5. After our war was done, he re- 
turned to his own country. The spirit of 
liberty was soon after kindled in France. 
True to his principles. La Fayette stood 
forth as the friend of freedom, justice 
and humanity. But ambitious men 
arose, and a horrible scene of strife, 
bloodshed, and anarchy spread over the 
land. Then Bonaparte came. In his 
attempts to conquer the world, millions 
of human beings v/ere slain. 

6. During all this time. La Fayette 
was banished or in prison. But at 
length, Bonaparte was dead. The self- 
ish and the bloodthirsty had perished, 
and their schemes had perished with 
them. Again the spirit of liberty visit- 
ed France, and now again La Fayette 
appears as the friend of his country 
and mankind. 

7. Though he is old, yet his heart is 
warm and true. Amidst the turmoil of 
angry passions, he is calm and stead- 
fast. The example of Washington is 
ever before him. His countrymen have 
discovered his sincerity, and they have 
placed their destiny in his hands. At 
the age of near eighty years, he is the 
admiration of the world. Thus La 
Fayette, by studying the character of 
Washington, has become what he is; 
and other patriots, hereafter, will glory 
in following the example of La Fayette. 

8. There is another point of view, 

of hie life after being President 1 Character of 
j Washington t His memory 1 What of his ex- 
I ample 1 4, How docs the life of Fayette illus- 

j tratc the influence of Washington’s example'? S. 


120 


THE CHILE 5 FIRST BOOK OF HISTORY. 


in which it is delightful to think of 
Washington. He had many enemies, 
and during his life time, by intrigue I 
and falsehood, they made many people I 
believ'e that he was a bad man. But 
their voices are now hushed, and their 
names have passed into contempt ; while 
his name, like the ascending sun, gathers 
additional brightness with the advance of 
time. This may teach us that virtue 
and vice have, ultimately, their reward. 
One brincTs disgrace, the other honora- 
ble fame. Mankind will, soon or late, 
pass a just sentence upon the actions of 
their fellow beings. Though an in- 
triguer may flourish for a time, yet 
the stamp of ignominy will inevitably 
be impressed upon him. The falsehood, 
the sellishness, and the meanness, which 
he thinks to hide in his own breast for- 
ever, will, sometime or other, be brought 
out. He cannot escape. 

9. In 1797, John Adams, of Massa- 
chusetts, was chosen President. He 
was a member of the old Congress, 
who sat at Philadeljdha during the war, 
and brought the country safely through 
that trying period. He was a man of 
great elocjuence. His heart was full 
of patriotic feelings, and he had the art 
of uttering them with such force, as to 
awaken similar feelings in the breasts of 
others. He lifted his voice against the 
tyranny of Britain, and pleaded earnest- 
ly for the cause of liberty. In this 
way he produced great effect; and, in 
gratitude for these things, the people 
chose him President. 

10. During his administration, the 
city of Washington became the seat of 
government. In 1800, Congress, which 
before had sat at Philadelphia, removed 
to this place, and have ever since held 


their sessions there. It has now grown 
up to be quite a large city. It is situ- 
ated in the district of Columbia, which 
is a tract of land ten miles s(juarc, and 
the people are under the government 
of Congress. It was ceded to the Uni- 
ted States in 1790, and has now 39,870 
inhabitants. 

11. In 1801, Thomas Jefferson, of 
Virginia, was elected President of the 
United States. He too was an ardent 
friend of liberty, and exerted himself 
during the Revolution to save the coun- 
try. in 1803, he purchased Louisiana 
of the French for the United States, 
an immense tract of land, lying be- 

1 tween the Mississippi and the Pacific 
Ocean. Of this I have told you in the 
history of Louisiana. 

12. in 1805, Mr Jefferson was elect- 
ed President a second time. In 1809, 
James Madison, of Virginia, was elected 
President. In 1812, our country de- 
clared war against Great Britain. The 
principal cause of this was, that the 
ships of that nation frequently met our 
vessels upon the sea, and their officers 
behaved in a very improper manner. 
They took the liberty to search our 
vessels, and if they found any English 
sailors on board, they took them forci- 
bly av/ay. Sometimes they mistook 
American for English sailors, and thus 
many of our countrymen were forced 
into the British navy, and there obli- 
ged to fight the battles of the English. 

13. After the war was declared, the 
government of England sent a great 
many vessels with soldiers to fight 
against our country. In the history of 

j Maryland, I have told you how they 
burnt the public buildings at Washing- 
ton, and how the British were roughly 


What lesson is taught us by the life of Washing-] 
ton I 9. John Adams'! llis character! 10.1 
City of Washington ! Congress ! District of ] 


Columbia! 11. Thomas Jefferson ! Louisiana! 
12. What took place in 1805 ! James Madi- 
son ! What occurred in 1812! Occasion of the 


THE CHILD S FIRST BOOK OF HISTORY. 




handled at North Point. In tlie histo- 
ry of Louisiana, I have told you how 
they were slaughtered by the Ameri- 
cans under General Jackson. Many 
other battles and skirmishes took place, 
particularly along the boundary be- 
tween Canada and the United States. 

14. But the most interesting occur- 
rences happened upon the sea. We 
had but a few ships of war, but these 
were commanded by Decatur, Hull, 
and other gallant officers. Occasion- 
ally they fell in with the British ships, 
and dreadful battles followed. The 
English seamen, like their soldiers, 
were brave and skilful. They had 
great renown, and being accustomed 
to beat all other ships, expected to beat 
ours also. But in this they were mis- 
taken. In the very first encounter, the 
Americans beat the British, and brought 
one of their large ships in triumph to 
America. Several other ships, and two 
whole fleets on the lakes, were taken 
by the Americans. 

15. I cannot tell you of all the gal- 
lant achievements that took place du- 
ring the war. These things happened 
less than twenty years ago, and you 
Avill easily find some person who 
knows all about them, and who will 

wart 13. Government of England! When 
was the battle at North Pointfonglit t When was 
rrhinglon taken and burnt by the British '? 

<11 was tlie battle of New Orleans fought t 
. What of our navy 1 English seamen! First 
raval battle ! 16. Madison? James Monroe ! 

Tour of jMonroe ! In 1821 ! John Quincy Adams ! 
General Jackson ! 

Note. The punil should now review his pre- 
vious studies in tins work. I would suggest that 
he be recpiired to answer the following {[ueslions : — 
What was the first settlement in the United ^ 
States! When v, is Viiglnia first settled! By j 
whom! What was the object of the settlers? 
What are some of the principal events that occur- 
red in Virginia, previous to tlie French war! 

10 ^ 


I take pleasure in telling you the whole 
1 story. You must ask particularly 
I about Commodore Macdonough, who 
captured a great number of vessels on 
Lake Champlain, and about Commodore 
Perry, who took as many more on Lake 
Erie. A"ou must ask about the brave 
Captain Lawrence, who was killed, and 
his ship, the Chesapeake, taken by the 
British. 

16. In 181.3, Madison was elected 
a second time, and in 1817, James 
Monroe, of Virginia, became President. 
He made a tour through the United 
States, and everywhere the people paid 
him the greatest respect. He was 
elected a second time, in 1821 ; and 
jin 1825, John Quincy Adams, of Mas- 
sachusetts, was chosen to succeed him. 
He was President for four years, and 
then Gen. Jackson became President. 

17. I must not forget to tell you of 
La Fayette’s visit to this country in 

jl825. I suppose many of my little 
I readers saw him. He was welcomed 
j by all the people, for they remembered 
how he came in his youth and fought 
for the country. He went back in a 
short time to France, and although a 
very old man, he is yet living. 

[ Note. Let similar (juostions be put in respect to 
each of the States, and each of the Territories. 
They wall need to be varied according to circum- 
stances. Now' let the pupil tell the bouiularies, 
principal rivers, and capital, with the distance and 
I direction of the same from Washington, population 
1 and extent of each of the States. When did Bliil- 
! ip’s war begin ! What are some of the events that 
I occurred during tiiis war ! When did king Wil- 
liam’s war begin ! Queen Anne’s ! King George’s ! 
The old French war! 'I’he Revolutionary war! 
The late w'ar with England ! When was the bat- 
tle of Lexington fought! When were Cornwallis 
and his army c:iptured ! When w as the Declara- 
tion of Intlependence made ! When was the battle 
at New' Orleans fuuglit ! When was John Adams 
1 first made I’resident ! Wtishinglon ! Jefferson ! 
I Madison ! IMonroe ! J. Q. Adam Jackson T 


122 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


CHAP. LVIll. I 

BRITISH POSSESSIONS IN NORTH ! 

A31ER1CA. 

1. The British possessions com- 
prise all that part of North America 
lying north of the United States, with 
the exception of the Russian posses- 
sions on the northwest, and Greenland i 
on the northeast. It is a vast extent of 
country, but all the northern portion 
is cold, barren, and uninhabited, ex- 
cept by scattered tribes of Indians. 
The settled portions of the country 
are divided into four provinces: — Up- 
per Canada, Lower Canada, New 
Brunswick, and Nova Scotia. Beside i 
these, the islands of Newfoundland, 
St John’s, and Cape Breton, are occu- 
pied by English settlers. 

2. Quebec, the capital of Lower 
Canada, is a large city, containing twen- 
ty thousand inhabitants. Montreal, 
situated on an island in the St Law- 
rence, is a large town in Upper Canada, 
and has 24,000 inhabitants. Frederick- 
town is the capital of New Brunswick, 
and Halifax of Nova Scotia. 

3. We must take a trip to these 
British settlements, for there are many 
remarkable things to be seen there. 
We shall find steam-boats on Lake On- 
tario and Lake Erie, which will carry 
us across those great waters. If we 
visit the upper lakes, Huron and Supe- 

Questions on the Map of the United States 
and j\Iap of North America . — Tell the direc- 
tion of the following places from Washington : Que- 
Uec, JMontreal, Frcdericktown, Halifax, Newfound- 
Umd, Island of Cape Breton. Describe the river St 
Lawrence. What five great lakes between Cana- 
da and the United States 1 Where are the fol- 
lowing lakes'? Winnepeg, Athapescaw, Slave, 
Wallastan, Great Bear, Deer. Where is Hudson’s 
Bay *? BaHin’s Bay "? Where are the Russian 
possess ioik> '? 


rior, we must go in boats. Along the 
I shores of these great inland seas we 
' shall find no white inhabitants, unless 
we meet with parties, who are going 
to hunt wild animals, or trade with the 
Indians. When we are upon Lake 
Superior, we shall be astonished at its 
magnitude. We may form some idea 
of it by considering that its extent 
! is about five times as great as the whole 
State of Massachusetts. 

4. At Montreal, we can go on board 
a fine large steam-boat, and proceed 
down the St Lawrence to Quebec. We 
shall greatly admire this majestic river. 
It is spotted with thousands of beauti- 
ful green islands, and along the banks, 

i there are multitudes of pleasant little 
villages. 

5. Quebec will strike us with aston- 
ishment. A part of the town is built 
upon a vast rock, so high as to over- 
look the whole country to a great dis- 
tance. If we ascend one of the steeples 
of the city, we shall have one of the 
most splendid prospects in the world. 
We shall see the country around, deco- 
rated with towns and villages : we shall 
see many little streams pouring their 
waters into the St Lawrence ; and we 
shall see that king of rivers rolling its 
broad waves down to the sea. 

6. If we visit the islands of New- 
foundland we shall see the people en- 
gaged in the cod-fisheries ; at Halifax, 
we shall see a great many English ships 
of war; and in New Brunswick, we 
•sh;?dl find some of the inhabitants occu- 
pied in building ships; some in cutting 
down lumber, and others in carrying it 

1. What do the British possessions comprise '! 
Tlie northern portion 1 'J’he settled portions 1 2. 

Quebec '? Montreal 1 Fredericktown 1 Hali- 
fax! 3. Steam-boats! Huron and Superior*! 
Extent of Lake Superior ! 4. St Lawrence 1 

5. Quebec ! C. Newfoundland ! Halifax 1 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


123 


away; and others still we shall see 
engaged in catching herring, salmon, and 
other fish, at the mouths of the rivers. 

7 . We must take care, that our jour- 

ney through these countries is perform- 
ed in the summer; for in the winter it is 
extremely cold there, and the snow is 
sometimes so deep, as almost to bury 
up the houses of the inhabitants. When 
the people go out in winter, they#are 
obliged to wrap up their noses and fin- 
gers in fur, to prevent their being 
frozen. / 

8. We shall find in the Canadas 
that a great many of the inhabitants are 
F rench, and talk no other than the F rench 
language. We shall often meet with 
churches built in a singular fashion, 
and if we make inquiry, we shall learn, 
that these French inhabitants are almost 
all Catholics. 

9. We shall also see many Scotch 
and English people, and in all the large 
towns we shall find a great many sol- 
diers. These soldiers are sent by the 
government of England, to keep the 
people in a state of obedience. In our 
country, the government belongs to the 
people, and they therefore do not need 
any soldiers, except to drive away 
foreign enemies. But in these British 
possessions, the government belongs 
chiefly to the king ; and kings always 
govern by means of soldiers. 

10. I will now tell you something 
of the history of these British posses- 
sions. The coasts were discovered by 

• ^ ^ ^ TT^ ' 

New Brunswick t 7. Winter in the British 

Provinces 1 8. Inhabitants 1 Churches 1 Re- 

ligion of the Frencli inliabitants I 9. Scotch 
and English 1 Soldiers 1 Why are there so 
many soldiers in Canada 1 Government of 
Canada 1 10. What of S. Cabot I About j 

what time did the French settlements in New- 
foundland begi^i I 11. Principal .objects of the 
settlers 1 ^V' hen was Quebec founded 1 Montreal 1 

12. Nova Scotia 1 Halifax 1 New Brunswick 1 


Sebastian Cabot, a celebrated navigator, 
in 1497. After this, the French used to 
visit the island of Newfoundland, for 
the purpose of fishing along the shores. 
About the year 1600, they began to 
make settlements there, and soon after, 
at various places along the banks of 
the St Law'rence. 

11. The principal object of the set- 
tlers were the fisheries, and the fur 
trade with the Indians. In 1608, Que- 
bec was founded, and Montreal not long 
after. The settlements increased, and 
gradually extended along the St Law 
rence, and the Lakes, to Detroit. 

12. Nova Scotia was not originall) 
settled by the French, but by the Eng- 
lish. The first establishment was made 
at Halifax, in 1749. New Brunswick 
was a part of Nova Scotia till 1784, 
when it was separated, and became a 
distinct province. 

13. In the history of the United 
States, I have told you of the most in- 
teresting events in the history of the 
Canadas. England and France have 
been engaged in war with each other, 
during a great part of the last twm cen- 
turies. Whenever a war broke out 
between them, it extended of course to 
their colonies. In America the French 
and English colonies lay side by side, 
and therefore became scenes of blood- 
shed and violence. I have told you of 
King William’s w'^ar, which began in 
1690; Queen Anne’s war, which began 
in 1702; King George’s war, which be- 

13. England and France Frencli and English 
colonies in America 1 When did King William’s 
war begin Give an account of some event that 
happened during this war. See chapter 18 
When did Queen Ann’s war begin 1 Relate some 
event that happened during the war. When did 
King George’s war begin 1 Give an account of 
some event that took place during this war. When 
did the Old French war begin 1 Give an account 
of some of the principal events of tins war. 14. 


124 


THE CHILD’S FIRST 

gan in 1744, and the Old French war, 
which began in 1755. 

14. During these various struggles, 
the inhabitants on both sides were ex- 
posed to the most bitter sufferings. 
The Indians were called in to assist, 
and thus to the ordinary evils of war 
were added the brutality and violence 
of the savages. It is not necessary to 
repeat these painful stories. My read- !' 
ers will remember those which have^ 
been related, and will also recollect, 
that in 1663, all the Canadian posses- 
sions of the French came into the hands 
of the English. During the revolution- 
ary war, the Americans made several 
attempts to take the Canadas, but with- 
out success. Since that time, they have 
continued to flourish. Many persons 
have emigrated to the country from 
Scotland and Ireland, and some from 
the United States. The people are 
generally happy, and contented, and are 
very much attaoned to their king. 

CHAP. LIX. 

THE ESQUIMAUX. 

1. If you will look on the Map of 
North America, you will see a vast 
tract of country, lying between Labra- 
dor and Baffin’s Bay on the east, and 
the Russian possessions on the west. 

Why did the wars between the French and English 
colonies occasion the inhabitants great suffering 1 
Give an account of some of the attempts of the 
Americans to take Canada. What American 
General was killed at Quebec 1 What other 
American officer was wounded there 1 

Questions on the Map of North America . — 
Where is the coast of Labrador 1 Where is 
Hudson’s Bay 1 Where are Davis’ Straits 1 
Where are the following Islands 1 Melville, Sa- 
bine, Bathurst, Cornwallis, N. Devon, James, Ra- 
leigh, Barren, N. Hampton, S. Hampton. Where 


BuOK OF HISTORY. 

Nothing can be more dreary, than the 
aspect of these remote^ regions. The 
climate is so severe, that' few plants 
can flourish. The tr^s are sma]l„^nd. 
stinted, and nothing if presented to the 
eye but barren plains 
hills. / ^ 

2. TJjiese regio^ls are inhabited by a 
singuls!^ race of ^^eople, callecl Esqui- 
^au^'*^hey a^ very , short, not be- 
ii^taller than^ white man’s shoulder. 
They have blatek eyes, a tawny skin, 
and black Jiair hanging down upon 
their shoulders. 



/ Winter Village of the Esquimaux. 


^ In Slimmer, they live in huts, 
made of sticks set upright in the ground, 
and covered with skins. In winter, 
they build huts of snow, using pieces 
of ice for their windows, instead of 
glass. They live chiefly along the sea 
shore, and subsist by fishing. They 

are the following lakes "I GreatBear L., Slave, 
Athapescow, Deer, Winnepeg, Wollaston. De- 
scribe the following rivers : Athapescow, Mac- 
kenzie’s, Chinchill, Nelson, Severn, Saskatchewan. 
Where are the following bays ? Repulse Bay, 
James’, Baffin’s. Where are the Russian posses- 
sions 1 

1. What of the tract of country between Baf- 
fin’s Ray and the Russian possessions 1 Climate 1 
2. People 1 Describe the Esquimaux. De- 
scribe the picture. 3. What of the Esquimaux 
in summer 7 In winter 1 How do they live 1 


THE CHILD S FIRST BOOK OF HISTORY. 


125 


catch seals, walruses, and whales. 
They are very filthy in their habits, and 
seem to relish their food best when it 
is nearly putrid. They have a breed 
of very active dogs, which they train 
to the harness. Five or six of these, 
when attached to a sledge, will draw 
as many men sixty miles in a day, 
over the snow. They are exceeding- 
ly ravenous, and when a bird is given 
to one of them, he will swallow it down, 
feathers and all. The young ones have 
such good appetites, that they would 
kill themselves with eating if they could 
get food enough. Some people suppose 
these dogs to be tame wolves. During 
the summer they are employed in hunt- 
ing bears, seals, and reindeer. 

4. This latter animal is very com- 
mon in all these northern regions of 
America. The people do not use them 
as in Lapland, for drawing sledges and 
carrying burdens. They live in a wild 
state, and subsist in the winter by 
browzing the shrubs, and upon moss 
which they dig from beneath the snow. 
They are hunted by the people, and 
furnish them with a considerable por- 
tion of their food. 

5. These people have no king and 
no regular government. They live in 
small detached villages, and frequently 
remove from one place to another. 
They are evidently a distinct race from 
the other savages of America, but closely 
resemble the inhabitants of Lapland in 
Europe. When these people first came 
to America, or from whence they came, 
it is impossible to tell. They Imve no 
books, possess no history of their race, 
and remain in the same condition as 
when the country was first discovered. 

Habits 1 Dogs t What do they hunt in summer 1 
4. Reindeer 1 5. Government of the Esqui- 

maux t How do they live 1 What of the Esqui- 
maux race 1 History f 


CHAP. LX. 

GREENLAND. 

1. Let us now suppose that we en- 
ter a ship at New London or Nantucket, 
and go on a whaling voyage to the 
northern seas. We will set out in May, 
and in four or five weeks, shall reach 
Baffin’s Bay. But although it is now 
summer, we shall find ourselves sur- 
rounded by vast islands of ice, floating 
in the water. We must be very care- 
ful, for if the ship should strike upon 
one of these, she will go to pieces, and 
we shall all be drowned. 

2. We shall soon meet with whales, 
and see them spouting up columns of 
water into the air. Some of the men 
will go in a boat, and carefully approach 
one of these monsters. A sailor will 
then take a harpoon in his hand, "with 
a long rope fastened to it, and plunge 
it swiftly into the body of the whale. 
When he feels the wound, he will plunge 
deep into the water, drawing the rope 
after him. By and by he will come up 
to breathe, and the water that he spouts 
forth will be tinged with blood. Again 
he descends into the sea; but at length, 
he is dead, and floats on the surface. 
Then he is taken along side the ship, 
and the sailors cut off* the blubber, or 
fat. This is made into oil, which is 
used for lamps. 

3. After we have taken a great 
many whales, and filled our ships with 
oil and whalebone, we will return to 
our homes. But we must not come 
back without visiting Greenland. This 

Questions on the Map of North America . — . 
Where is Greenland ! Cape Farewell 1 Where 
are the following towns ! Upernavick, Umanak, 
Holsteinborg, Suckerstoppen. 

1. What of Baffin’s Bay in summer ! 2. 

Whales ! Manner of harpooning a whale 1 


126 


THB CHILD S FIRST BOOK OF HISTORIC 


is even more dreary than the country 
of the Esquimaux. As we approach 
the shores, we shall probably see some 
white bears, feeding upon the carcasses 
of the whales that have drifted to the 
land. Some of these bears are very 
large, and weigh nearly as much as an 
ox. 

4. We shall find the Greenlanders, 
like the Esquimaux, very short, with 
dark skins, black eyes, and long black 
hair. Their dress is made of seal skins, 
and they subsist almost entirely upon 
seals which they catch in the water. 
The men go upon the rough waves, 
and take these creatures amid masses of 
ice. They show amazing courage and 
skill in this dangerous pursuit. 

5. In summer, the Greenlanders 
live near the sea, and dwell in tents 
made of skins. In winter, they remove 
to a little distance, and spend their 
time in repairing their canoes and fish- 
ing tackle. Their houses at this sea- 
son are made of wood, and covered 
with skins. The people are far from 
being neat, and everything is imbued 
with a strong smell of rancid fish: the 
sailors who go there, are made sick 
wdth the disagreeable odor of their tents 
and houses. 

6. Although Greenland is destitute 
of trees, and incapable of cultivation, 
yet the people are very much attached 
to their country. They have nothing 
but bleak and barren hills and valleys, 
and distant mountains covered with 
everlasting ice; yet they cannot ima- 
gine that any part of the world is so 
delightful as that which they inhabit. 

7. Greenland was formerly suppos- 

What is done after the whale is dead 1 3. What 

ofGreenland 1 White bears'? 4. Greenlanders'? 
How do they subsist '? Catching seals '? 5. 

The people in summer '? In winter '? Houses '? 
6. What of Greenland '? What do the people 
think of their country '? 7. What is Greenland 


ed to be a part of the American conti- 
nent, but it is now believed to be a 
great island. Some late English navi- 
gators have ascended Baffin’s Bay, and 
found the sea to extend as far west as 
Melville Island. These men suffered 
a great deal from cold and fatigue, and 
were often in danger of losing their 
lives by the floating islands of ice. 

8. They saw a great many whit''^ 
bears and reindeer, and herds of a 
very singular animal, called musk ox 
This creature has long hair, short legs, 
and flat crooked horns. It feeds upon 
grass, moss, and the branches of trees. 
It is about as large as a small cow, yet 
it is very nimble, and climbs the rocks 
like a goat. 



The Musk Ox. 


9. From the discoveries of these 
voyagers. Parry, Franklin, and others, 
it is probable that the ocean extends 
quite across from Baffin’s Bay to Bher- 
ing’s Straits, and that Greenland is 
therefore entirely separated from the 
continent. The northern part of it is 
always covered with snow' and ice, and 
still farther north, there is a vast region, 
w'hich is never visited by summer, and 

supposed to be '? English navigators 1 How far 
west does the sea extend '? Suflerings and danger 
of the navigators '? 8. What animals did they 

I see ? Describe the Musk Ox. Describe the 
I picture. 9. What is probable "? What of the 
I northern part of Greenland '? 10. What of Green- 


THE CHILD S FIRST BOOK OF HISTORY. 


127 


where no hinnan being has ever ventur- 
ed to go. In that dreary land there is 
perpetual winter. No trees grow there, 
no plants put forth their green leaves, 
no flowers blossom. All around it is 
still, cold, and desolate. 

10. Greenland has been longer known 
to Europeans, than any other part of 
America, except Iceland. More than 
eight hundred years ago, some white 
people went from Iceland, and settled 
on the eastern coast. They found the 
country inhabited by the same race of 
short swarthy seal-catchers who inhabit 
Greenland now. A few years after, a 
good many people went from Norway, 
and joined the settlers, and in 1023 
they all became subject to^enmark. 

11. In 1350, a dreadful pestilence, 
called the Black Deatl^Aprevailed in 
Europe, and extended « ravages to 
Iceland and Greenland. This not only 
destroyed the lives of many of the peo- 
ple, but the plants perished, and the 
whole land was left blasted and desolate. 
About a hundred years after this, vast 
masses of ice accumulated along the 
eastern shore of Greenland, and ships 
from Europe could never afterwards 
visit these settlements. 

12. Thus cut off from all intercourse 
with the rest of the world, the whole 
colony perished. In 1 721 , some people 
from Denmark went to Greenland and 
settled there. From year to year, oth- 
er settlers came, and, intermarrying with 
the natives, established a permanent 
colony there. They are still subject 
to Denmark, and the whole number of 
the people is supposed to be 20,000. 

land 1 What took place more than 800 years ago 1 
What did the settlers find '? What took p'ace a few 
years after 1 What in 1023 1 11. What happened in 
1350 1 What took place about 100 years after 1 
What took place in 1721 1 Other settlers 1 To 
whom is Greenland subject 1 Population 1 


CHAP. LXI. 

ICELAND. 

1. I will now tell you of Iceland. 
This is a large island, upon the eastern 
coast of Greenland, and but little more 
than one hundred miles distant from it 
In extent, it is nearly equal to the State 
of New York. It is covered with moun 
tains, and is a wild, desolate region, 
yet the inhabitants have a proverb which 
says, that ‘ Iceland is the best land on 
which the sun shines.’ These people 
came originally from Norway, and are 
a pious, contented and happy race. 
They are very intelligent, and, being 
deprived of almost all intercourse with 
the rest of mankind, they spend a great 
part of their leisure in reading, telling 
stories, and reciting poetry to each 
oth^. 

2. In February, these people flock to 
the southern and western shores of the 
island, and spend three months in fish- 
ing. At this time, their dresses are 
made of skins. Their food is butter 
and fish, which they eat early in the 
morning and late at night, the day 
being spent at sea. Nine or ten men 
go in a boat, and fearlessly venture out 
to a great distance upon the water. 
The fish they catch are principally 
cod. 

.3. When the snow leaves the ground, 
they return to their villages, and the 
men collect trees for fuel, and to cover 
the roofs of their houses. The young 
cattle are then driven to the mountains, 
and the women take care of the cows 
and tlie dairy. About the middle of 

1. Where is Iceland'? Extent 1 What of 
Iceland '? Proverb 1 People ? 2. What of 

the people in February "? Dress ? Food ? Men 1 
Fish 1 3. What do the people do in spring I 

The men '? The women ? What do the women 


128 


THE CHILD S FIRST BOOK OF HISTORY. 


summer, they repair to the rocky hills, j 
to collect moss, which the people cook 
and eat. 

4. About the middle of July, the in- 
habitants gather in tjaeir hay, the women 
often mowing the grass, as well as the 
men. In winter, the men are occupied 
in making implements of iron and cop- 
per, in preparing leather for shoes, and 
in making ropes and other things. The 
women busy themselves in spinning, 
and in taking care of household mat- 
ters. The people are all industrious, 
and are therefore more comfortable in 
their cold and barren country, than the 
lazy inhabitants of some warm and fruit- 
ful climates. The popuiatioiijofTcehrtid-1 
is about 50,000. The people are subject i 
to Denmark, and carry on some trade 
with that country. 

5. But I have not told you the 
most rp,rnar]nahl-fvFhii>gs> 4iiiout^ ]^n4ajiri* 
There is a talDmountain'‘^t!f€^^y^*r!rlT^^ 
Ilecla. This is a volcano, and often 
sends forth smoke, fire, red hot stones, 
melted lava, and clouds of ashes. But 
there are other volcanic mountains 
there, and one of them is called Skap- 
tarYokul. 1 will describe an eruption 
of this volcano, which took place in 
1783. 

6. In May, a light blue smoke or 
fog was seen lioating along the surface 
of the earth ; but the inhabitants were 
not alarmed till June, when several 
shocks of an earthquake gave warning 
of what was to follow. These contin- 
ued to increase in violence, till one 
evening, a black cloud of smoke arose 
in the north, and extended itself over! 
a whole district. On its near approach, 
this district was involved in darkness, j 
and when the cloud hovered directly | 

do in summer 1 4. July'? Winter occupations '! 

Industry 1 Population'? To whom are the peo- 
ple subject '? Trade 1 5. Heclal Skaptar Yo- 


over it, a shower o-f sand and ashes 
was discharged, which covered the 
ground an inch deep. Earthquakes, 
with incessant peals of thunder, and 
frightful noises under ground, contin- 
ued the whole day. The next day, 
several fire spouts were seen in the 
north, while the thunder and the com- 
motions of the earth increased in vio- 
lence. 

7. The Skaptar was formerly a 
large river, and took its rise in Skaptar 
Yokul. On this day, it totally disap- 
peared, and was so dried up, that men 
crossed its bed on foot, where the pas- 
sage had been difticult in boats. The 
cause of this was apparent a few days 
afterwards^ terrific stream of lava had 
come pouring down, and filled the 
channel of ^e river. The cliffs, be- 
tween whi^Jthe Skaptar ran, were 

>1 1 iufjtCTght ; yet the lava not on- 
ly “^RHed' "up this immense chasm, but 
overflowed a considerable tract on 
both sides. It is now only in a few 
places, that the tops of the highest hills, 
between which the river flowed, can be 
seen above the lava that was poured 
from the volcano. 

8. No language can describe the 
horrors of this awful eruption. A 
black cloud incessantly showered down 
sand, ashes, sulphur, and other sub- 
stances. The fetid smoke covered the 
face of the sun ; and when it did ap- 
pear, its color was a bloody red. Con- 
stant earthquakes threatened the foun- 
dations of the island; innumerable fire 
spouts burst from the mountains ; 
strange sounds and constant thunder 
filled the air, and muttered in the bow- 
els of the earth, and one incessant sheet 
of lightning played over the island. 

I kill 1 Describe the eruption ot‘ 1783. Note. 
1 The pupil may either commit this passage to mem- 
I ory, or the teacher may put such questions as he 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


i29 


The frightened inhabitants were in the 
greatest distress, and believed that the 
fearful day of judgment had come. 

9. A stream of lava now proceeded 
from the mountain, bearing houses, en- 
closures, and everything else before it. 
The rocks were torn in pieces with a 
dreadful noise ; villages and churches 
were overwhelmed, cultivated lands 
were buried, and rivers dried up. 
Hundreds of cattle and sheep were de- 
stroyed; multitudes of birds were fright- 
ened away and never returned ; and ' 
large tracts of fertile land were forever 
laid waste. 

10. Such was the dreadful eruption 
of Skaptar Yokul in 1783. Hecla and 
other mountains have had frequent 
eruptions, but none so frightful as this. 

11. But I have not told you all the 
wonders of Iceland. There are hot 
springs there called Geysers. There 
are many of them in difierent parts of 
the island. The Great Geyser sends 
forth a constant stream of boiling water, 
and sometimes it throws columns eighty 
feet into the air. 

12. I must not omit to tell you of 
the Aurora Borealis, or northern lights. 
These are often seen at night by the 
people, and are far more brilliant than 
any ever witnessed by us in the United 
States. Strange images of light are 
often seen dancing in the sky, and 
sometimes the whole heavens seem 
sheeted with silver. 

13. These are some of the wonders 
of nature in Iceland. They are calcu- 
lated to fill our minds with awe, and 
inspire us with lofty ideas of that Al- 
mighty Being, who can make one lit- 

thinks proper. 11. What of the Geysers'?! 
Great Geyser 1 12. Aurora Borealis'? 14. i 

First discovery of Iceland 1 Firsi settlement 1 
What took place in 928 ■? In 1261 1 Govern- 
ment 1 


tie island the scene of such wonderful 
works. I must now tell you some- 
thing more about the history of Ice* 
land. 

14. It was first discovered by a fa- 
mous Norwegian pirate, about the year 
860. In the year 874, it was first set- 
tled by two Norwegians ; and in 928, 
the people established a republican 
government. In 1261, king Haco, of 
Norway, subjugated the island, but the 
})eople retained their ancient laws. 
Iceland at length became subject to the 
Danish government, and the people are 
now ruled by a governor, appointed 
by the King of Denmark. 

CHAP. LXII. 

MEXICO. 

1. 1 have now given you some ac- 
count of die cold and barren regions of 
America, which lie far to the north. 
There winter reigns for eight or nine 
months in the year, and the summer is 
so brief, that only a few stinted shrubs 
and some hardy plants are produced 
by the soil. My little reader will now 
accompany me to a warm climate, and 
a more fruitful land. 

2. Let us suppose that we enter a 
ship at New York, and sail to the south. 

Questions on the Map of Mexico. — Bounda- 
ries 1 What chain of mountains runs through the 
country '? Direction of this chain ? Where is 
the Gulf of Mexico '? Of California ”? Where is 
the Peninsula of California ? Describe the follow- 
ing rivers : Rio del Norte, Rio Colorado, Rio 
Hiatpii, Sabine, St Felippe, Tiinpanogos, 
Buonaventura. Where are the following Lakes "? 
Guadalaxara, Zacatula, Chapala, and Salt. 
Where is the city of Mexico '? Its direction from 
New York'? Philadelphia'? Washington? De- 
scribe the following towns : Vera Cru/,, Chiapa, 
Conception, Buonaventura, S. Carlos de Montery, 
St Domingo, St Miguttl, Zacatecas, Sinaloa Sac« 
ta Fe, S. L Potosi. 


130 


THE CHILD S FIRST BOOK OF HISTORY. 


along the eastern coast of the United 
States. After passing between Florida 
and Cuba, we shall enter the Gulf of 
Mexico, and after a voyage of about 
five weeks, shall reach Vera Cruz in 
Mexico. As we made our passage to 
Greenland in summer, lest it should be 
too cold, we must go to Mexico in win- 
ter, or we shall find it too hot. 

3. We shall see nothing very in- 
teresting at Vera Cruz; so we will set 
out irnmedialely for the city of Mexico. 
We shall find no stages in this country, 
and the roads being very bad, we must 
ridv upon mules. We must not go 
alone, for fear of robbers, who some- 
times attack travellers here. In our 
journey we shall ascend several moun- 
tains, and, after having travelled about 
200 miles in a westerly direction, we 
shall reach Mexico, one of the most re- 
nowned cities in America. 

4. We shall find it situated on a 
vast plain, spreading to the north for 
many hundred miles, and elevated six 
or seven thousand feet above the level 
of the sea. It occupies a delightful 
valley, surrounded by mountains, whose 
tops are ever covered with snow, and 
some of which occasionally send forth 
rolumes of fire and smoke. 

5. We shall be delighted with the 
city of Mexico at first; for in many re- 
spects, it is one of the most charming 
places in the world. Being so high, it 
is visited at all seasons of the year with 
fresh breezes, like those of spring. 
The gardens are full of delicious fruits 
and fragrant flowers. There are groves 
of lemon and orange trees ; melons of 
every kind abound ; and the whole face 
of nature is covered with the most lux- 

2. How can you go from New York to Vera 
Cruz'? Why should we go to Mexico in winter'? 
8. Stages 1 Roads '? How must we travel '? Rob- ! 
bers '? Mountains ”? Distance of Mexico from | 


uriant vegetation. The forests are 
thronged with birds of bright plumage ; 
the hills are adorned wdth wild flowers 
of surpassing beauty ; and the very aii 
is filled with fragrance, which come? 
from the meadows and groves. 

6. Many of the buildings in Mexico 
are lofty and spacious, and being built 
of stone, have a magnificent appearance. 
There are many splendid palaces, sur- 
rounded wdth fountains, fragrant groves, 
and beautiful gardens. We shall ob- 
serve that the people have a sallow 
complexion, with black hair and black 
eyes. We shall notice a great many 
Roman Catholic priests, many of whom 
receive a great deal of money, and 
spend much of their time in gambling 



Cathedral in the City of Mexico 


church, you wdll be amazed at the spier 
dor of its interior. The altar is sui 
rounded by a railing of solid silver ; and 
there is a lamp of the same metal, so 
large that three men get into it, when 
it is to be cleaned. It is enriched 
with lion’s heads, and other ornaments 
of pure gold. There are many statues 

Vura Cruz ? 4. Situation of the city of Mexico '? 

5. Climate'? Gardens? Groves? Melons? 
Vegetation? Forests? Hills? Air? 6. Build 
ings ? People ? Priests ? 7. Cathedral ? De- 


THE CHILD S FIRST BOOK OF HISTORY. 


131 


of saints made of silver, and ornament- 
ed with precious stones. Such is the 
pomp of a Catholic Church; but who 
would exchange the humble little meet- 
ing houses of our own country, for 
these gorgeous edifices ? Who would 
exchange our simple religion, for the 
hollow ceremonies that may be witness- 
ed in a Mexican Cathedral ? 

8. The country of Mexico is divided 
into fifteen provinces^ resembling our 
separate States. They are united un- 
der a general government, and have a 
national constitution, similar to ours. 
But there are frequent disturbances in 
the country, and everything- seems to 
be in rather an unsettled state. The 
people have been for several years at 
war among themselves', and many lives 
have been lost in these unhappy broils. 

9. Before we leave Mexico, we 
should, if possible, go and see the silver 
mines. These are among the richest 
in the world, and yield several millions 
of dollars every year. As they lie 
among the mountains at a considerable 
distance, we must again hire some 
mules, and obtain a guide. As we pro- 
ceed on our journey, we shall meet with 
a great many of the native Indians, 



Indians and white Man of Mexico. 


ccribe the picture. 8. Divisions of Mexico 1 
Government! State of the country 1 9. Silver 

Hiinoi 1 How must we travel to the mines 1 In- 


who bear a strong resemblance to the 
savages of our country. Most of them 
are partly civilized, and some of them 
live in villages, quietly pursuing the 
various occupations of life. 

10. When we reach the mines, we 
shall perhaps hardly have the courage 
to go into them. They are vast pits 
dug in the earth, some of them having 
a depth of more than a thousand feet. 
In these deep and dark caverns, the 
miners are constantly occupied in dig- 
ging the ore, which is taken from the 
mines, and the pure silver separated 
from the dross. 

11. The present population of Mex- 
co is about 8,000,000. The city of Mex- 
ico has 137,000 inhabitants, and Puebla 
70,000. There are other large towns 
in the country. In the northeastern 
part, is the town of Santa Fe. It is 
about 1100 miles from the city of Mexi- 
co, in a northerly direction. It is situ- 
ated in one of the finest regions in North 
America. 

12. If any of my little readers are 
tired of the sea, they may return to the 
United States by way of Santa Fe. 
They must travel on mules, or on foot, 
from the city of Mexico, have trusty 
guides, and be well armed. They will 
sometimes proceed, for days together, 
over vast plains, and then they will 
climb steep mountains, and pass through 
dark and dismal valleys. They will 
often meet with Indians, some of them 
living in villages, and some roving 
through the wilderness. They will oc- 
casionally see cougars, and fierce ani- 
mals, called jaguars. They will also 
meet with many wild animals, and 

dlans ! Describe tlie picture. 10. Describ* 
the mines. 11. Population of M. 1 Popula- 
tion of the city of M. 1 Puebla ! Santa Pel 12. 
Describe a journey from the city of M. to Santa 
Fe. What will be met with on th« way 1 Peo- 


132 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


strange birds, and towns filled with 
people; some of whom are white, some 
black, and some red. After meeting 
with many adventures, my little friends 
will reach Santa Fe. 

13. It is very probable that the 
first man they meet there will be a per- 
son from Connecticut, or Massachusetts, 
who has come to this distant place to 
sell tin ware, clocks, calicoes, ginghams, 
and other ‘ notions.’ They will find in 
the town a good many traders from the 
United States, who come loaded with 
goods, and go back loaded with Pdexican 
dollars. These cross the country from 
Arkansas to Santa Fe; and for greater 
security, they travel in large companies 
called caravans. With one of these, our 
travellers can go to Arkansas, ascend 
the Mississippi in a steam boat, take 
the stage at Pittsburg, and return to 
New York. 



Santa Fe Traders crossing the Desert. 


14. Those of my little readers, who 
are not homesick, will stay with me a 
little longer in Mexico; and after 1 
have told them its history, we shall pay 
a visit to some other countries. Hav- 
ing done this, we will return to the 
United State’s. 

pie 1 13. Who will the travellers probably first 

meet at Santa Fe 1 Caravans 1 How may the 
traTcllers return to New Yorkl Describe the 
picture. 


CHAP. LXHI. 

MEXICO. CONTINUED 

1. I have told you that Mexico is a 
vast country, containing 8,000,000 of 
inhabitants. Some of these are nearly 
white, like the people of the United 
States, and are descended from Spanish 
emigrants, who settled in the country 

I many years ago. There are many ne- 
i groes also, who are slaves brought 
originally from Africa. A large part 
of the population are Indians, whose 
falthers once possessed the country, as 
the Indians possessed the land in the 
United States, before the Europeans 
came, and took it from them. 

2. I know of no history more inter- 
esting than that of Mexico. I have 
not room to tell the whole story, but 1 
Avill relate a part of it. A little more 
than three hundred years ago, Mexico 
was inhabited only by Indians. But 
they were not savages, living in the 
woods, and subsisting upon wild beasts, 

! as those I have told you of in the his- 
' tory of our own country. On the con- 
trary, they had large towns, splendid 
buildings, and an established govern- 
i ihent. 

I 3. The king resided at the city of 
1 Mexico, then called Tenuchtitlan. It 
i was a magnificent city, filled with tern- 
I pies, towers, and palaces. It surpassed 
j everything else in richness and gran- 
deur that then existed in America. It 
was in the year 1518, that the Span- 
iards first heard of this great kingdom. 
Expecting to get a great deal of gold 
and silver, they determined to send 
some men to conquer it. Accordingly, 

1. Descrit^e the inhabitants of Mexico. 2. 

! What of Mexico more timn three humlred years 
I ago The inhabitants'? Stats of the country*? 
i3. The king*? Tenuchtitlan'? What happen- 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORV. 


133 


six hundred soldiers, commanded by 
Fernando Cortez, set out for Mexico. 
They were well supplied with guns, 
swords, pistols, and horses. They went 
in eleven small vessels, and soon reach- 
ed the coast of Mexico. 

4, They entered the mouth of a 
river, but the Indians came in multi- 
tudes to the shore, to oppojsfe^., their 
landing. Cortez tried to make p0?^ce 
with them, but they refused to listei^ 
and hurled a shower of stones and ar- 
rows upon the fleet. The vessels were 
soon ranged in a circle, and the can- 
non being loaded, they were discharg-<^ 
ed among the crowd. The Indians 
were utterly astonished at the thunder 
and the smoke, and frightened by the 
havoc, which the cannon made among 
the people. They therefore ran away,- 
and shut themselves up in a fortified 
town, called Tabasco. 

5. Cortez landed his men, and pro- 
ceeded to the town. This was sur- 
rounded with stakes, and the Indians 
defended it as well as they could. But 
they were soon overcome, airl, flying 
to the forests, the Spaniards entered 
the place in triumph. But the next 
day, Cortez was informed that about 
40,000 natives were coming against 
him. He therefore left the town, 
placed his men in a good situation, and 
waited for the attack. 

0. At length they came, seeming 
almost as countless as the trees of the 
forest. The greater part of them were 
quite naked. Some were armed with 
bows and arrows; some with spears; 
some with clubs ; some with wooden 
swords ; and others with slings, by 
means of which they could hurl large 

td in 15181 Spaniards 1 Cortez 1 4. Cortez 

*tid his soldiers on arriving at Mexico 1 The In- 
dians 1 Describe the attack. Tabasco 1 5. 

What did Cortez and his troops do 1 What hap- 

IP 


stones with great force. They had 
martial music, produced by flutes made 
of reeds, and by large shells, and 
drums formed of the trunks of trees. 

7. On they came, the little band of 
Spaniards waiting for them in silence. 
With a terrible cry, the Indians rush- 
ed upon them. Then the cannon 
opened their mouths, and poured their 
deadly shot upon the multitude. Many 
qf them were slain ; but the Indians 
^h^vely stood their ground, and show- 

upqn the Spaniards such a cloud 
or^r^ws- as to darken the air. The 
rani^ of the latter were at length bro-^, 
ken, \|id they were on the point of be- 
ing tieiekted. 

8. AClhis critical moment, Cortez, 
who was stationed in the woods near 
by, sallied oNit upon the Indians with 
a small troophf horse, ^ow', the In- 
dians had never s^en a horse before, 
and believing each trooper with his 
horse to be some horrible monster, 
they were struck with superstitious 
dread, and turning from the fight, ran 
away like a flock of sheep. Eight hun- 
dred of their number lay dead on the 
field of battle, while the Spaniards lost 
only two men. 

9. Cortez had taken some prisoners, 
but he treated them kindly, and dis- 
missed them, having given them some 
presents. They went away very much 
pleased, and told their countrymen 
what had passed. The Indians now 
dismissed their fears, and some of them 
brought the Spaniards provisions. Af- 
ter this, the chief sent to Cortez re- 
questing pcdce, and a treaty was ac- 
cordingly entered into, between him 
and the Spanish leader. 

pened the next day 1 6. Describe the Indian 

army. 7. The battle I 8. What did the In- 
dians think of the horsemen 1 By what means did 
Cortez gain the victory I Loss of the Indiana 1 


134 


THE CHILD S FIRST BOOK OF HISTORY. 


10. Then the chief came with some 
of his principal men to see Cortezj^ 
who received them graciously. While 
they were talking together, one of the 
horses neighed. The Mexicans were in 
great fear, and asked what those terri- 
ble people with long necks and long 
tails, would have. Cortez told them 
they were angry, because the Mexicans 
had fought the Spaniards. They then 
ran, and got some quilts for the horses 
to lie upon, and some chickens for 
them to eat, and promised to behave 
better in future. 

11. After this, Cortez entered his 
vessels and sailed to a place nearer the 
city of Mexico. Here he landed his 
troops, and the people, not being sus- 
picious, cheerfully assisted him. By and 
by, some of the Mexican warriors paid 
him a visit. They were magnificently 
dressed, and gave the Spaniards a high 
idea of the riches of the country. After 
a while, messengers came from Monte- 
zuma, the king, inquiring why Cortez 
and his soldiers came. 

12. Cortez replied, that he could 
cmly deliver his answer to the king 
himself, and requested permission to go 
to his capital. The king would not 
consent to this, but he sent to Cor- 
tez some very magnificent presents. 
Among these were bracelets, necklaces, 
and other trinkets, wrought in solid 
gold, with the utmost skill and ele- 
gance ; boxes filled with precious stones, 
pearls, and gold dust ; and two large 
orbs, one of massy gold, representing 
the sun ; and the other of silver, re^>re- 
eenting the moon. 

13. Cortez received the presents, 
but still insisted upon going to see the 

9 . Prisoners 1 Treaty'? 10. What followed '? 
The Indians and the horses '? 11. What did 

Cortez next do '? Mexican warriors '? Messen- 
jfers from the king 1 12. Presents "? Another 


king. But another messenger cattle 
from Montezuma, forbidding him to 
come. Cortez treated him in a haugh* 
ty manner, and he was offended ; he 
therefore, with all the Mexican people, 
immediately left the Spaniards. Cor- 
tez was astonished at this, but after a 
while, he was invited with his men to 
go and see a Cacique or Chief, who 
lived at no great distance. According- 
ly they set out, and after marching a 
few days, came in sight of the town 
where the Cacique lived. At first the 
soldiers thought the walls of the city 
were made of silver, for they had a 
white and shining appearance. Bui 
when they came near them, it appear- 
ed that they were only plastered with 
lime. 

14. At length the Spaniards enter- 
ed the town, and were graciously re- 
ceived by the Cacique. But what was 
their surprise to find him so fat and 
bulky, that he could neither stand up, 
nor walk alone. They could hardly 
help laughing aloud in his presence 
They soon discovered, however, that 
he was a very intelligent man. He 
treated them kindly, and the peo- 
ple of the town supplied them abun- 
dantly with all sorts of delicious fruits. 

CHAP. LXIV. 

MEXICO.-^continued, 

1. Cortez now found, th<»t several 
powerful Caciques hated Montezumaj 
and were anxious to throw off his yoke.. 
Accordingly he encouraged them to rev 
bel, and promised to assist them. Ai 

messenger? A Cacique? Walla of the city 1 
14. What of the Cacique? How were tlM 
Spaniards received ? 

1. Wliat did Cortez now find? Did he en- 
courage the Caciques to rebel ? What did he so- 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


135 


the same time, he secretly sent word 
to Montezuma, professing to be his 
friend, and declaring his intentions to 
be devoted to his interests. Thus, 
false and treacherous to both parties, 
he pursued his own selfish schemes. 
His determination was to dethrone the 
king, overturn the government, and 
become master of the empire. With 
this view, he began to found a Spanish 
colony at Vera Cruz, the place at 
which you will recollect we landed, 
in our imaginary voyage to Mexico. 

2. But Montezuma was still afraid 
of Cortez ; and therefore he sent two 
of his princes to him, with presents of 
immense value, and a message, begging 
him to depart from the country. To 
this, the Spanish leader replied, that 
he had been commanded by his king 
to march to the capital, and deliver to 
the emperor liimself a message of the 
utmost importance ; and that no dan- 
ger whatever could deter him, or his 
men, from executing this high commis- 
sion. The princes, struck with admi- 
ration of tlie bold character of Cortez, 
returned to Montezuma, and gave an 
account of what they had seen. 

.3. About (his time, some of the 
Spanish soldiers had become weary of 
their toils, and foreseeing the dangers 
to which they would be exposed, deter- 
mined to seize the ships, and return to 
Cuba. Cortez discovered the plot, and 
by his artful management, diverted the 
men from their purpose. He was very 
eloquent, and he addressed the soldiers, 
setting before them in glowing colors 
hi» splendid schemes, and the immense 
Wtfalth they would all realize, should 
they be successful. Excited by this 

crelly do at the same time'? Why was Cortez 
false to both parties "? What was his determina- 
tion ? S|)anisli colony ? 8 Montezuma'? Re- 
ply of Cortez ? The > ? The j 


speech, the soldiers ran to the vessels, 
and destroyed them ; thus putting it 
out of their power to leave the country. 
This was exactly what Cortez desired, 
for he knew that the soldiers, having 
no means of retreat, would fight des- 
perately. 

4. Cortez now set out with his 
troops, accompanied by six hundred In- 
dian allies, for the purpose of proceed- 
ing to Tenuchtitlan. After having march- 
ed two or three days, they reached the 
Cordilleras. Here was a district lying 
among the mountains, called Tlascala. 
It was inhabited by a nation of brave 
Indians, who had thrown ofi’ the author- 
ity of Montezuma, and lived in inde- 
pendence. Cortez sent messengers to 
make peace with them, but the bold 
mountaineers would not make peace. 
They gathered their warriors together, 
and six thousand ot them went against 
the Spaniards. A dreadful battle fol- 
lowed, but the Indians were defeated. 
Three more battles were fought; thou- 
sands of the Indians were killed ; and 
finally, the Tlascalans sued for peace. 

5. Peace was accordingly made, 
and Cortez being invited to the city of 
j Tlascala, the capital, went there with 
his army. I'lie people received them 
joyfully. The streets were thronged 
wilh men, women, and children, who 
rent the air with shouts and acclama- 
tions, intermingled with the noise of 
drums, fifes, and oilier instruments. 
Young girls strewed the path with (low- 
ers, and the priests walked before the 
soldiers with burning incense. At length 
the Spaniards, whom the people called 
Gods, were conducted to a large build- 
ing, vherc everytliing was provided for 
their comfort and pleasure. 

j vessels ■? 4. What did Cortez now do ? Tlasca- 

la ? What took place between Cortez and tlm 
Tlascalans ? 5. Ilow were tho Spaniards rc- 


136 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


6. After a little while, Cortez set 
out, with six thousand Tlascalan war- 
riors, to pursue his march toward the 
capital of Mexico. He was soon met I 
by messengers from Montezuma, re- 
questing him to come by the way of Cho- 
lula. Accordingly the army marched to 
that city. But it was soon discovered, 
that a plot had been formed to destroy 
Cortez and his army ; the chiefs of Cho- 
lula were therefore seized, and the 
town given up to plunder. For two 
whole days the six hundred Spanish 
soldiers, and the six tho'usand Tlasca- 
lans went through the city, slaughter- 
ing men, women, and children. Tears 
and cries obtained no mercy. The houses 
and streets were everywhere stained 
with blood; and finally a large temple, 
to which hundreds of the people had 
fled for safety, was set on fire, and all 
the miserable people in it were con- 
sumed. Such was the awful vengeance 
of Cortez toward his enemies ! 

7. Strange as it may seem, Cortez | 

had the address to make friends of the i 
people of Cholula who had ’escaped the 
massacre. They became his allies, 
and he marched on toward Tenuchtit- 
lan. After proceeding several days, he 
reached a large city called Tezcuco. 
The Cacique received him kindly, and 
everywhere the people manifested a 
desire to be released from the harsh 
government of Montezuma. Leaving 
this place, the army proceeded, and after 
crossing some mountains, a beautiful 
valley of great extent was presented to 
their viev/. In the midst was a vast i 
lake, resembling a sea, and villages, i 
cities, and hamlets seemed to rise outj 
of its very bosom. 1 

1 

ceived at the city of Tlascala 1 6. What did ; 

Cortez do after a while 1 Messeng-ers from ! 
Montezuma t What took place at Cholula 1 7. i 

Tezcuco 1 Describe the first view of the valley 1 


8. Among these, Tenuchtitlan the 
capital, could be distinguished by the 
prodigious number of its temples, and 
towers. When the Spaniards first look- 
ed upon this scene, they could scarcely 
believe their senses. I'he fertile valley 
encircled by mountains, whose tops 
were covered with snow; the rich 
groves of fruit trees ; the blue lake, and 
the cities glittering with gold and silver, 
seemed more like a beautiful dream 
than a reality. 

9. At length, the army descended into 
the valley, approached the lake, and, 
crossing one of the bridges, were about 
to enter the town. Here they Avere met 
by about a thousand people of distinc- 
tion, dressed in mantles of cotton cloth, 
with bunches of feathers in their heads. 
They advanced in silence, each salut- 
ing Cortez as they passed, Avith the most 
profound respect. Then came two hun- 
dred of the king’s attendants, richly 
dressed, and finally, Montezuma him- 
self a])pearcd, in a car of gold, borne 
on the shoulders of four men. Some 
other men hehl a canopy of green feath- 
ers over him, and three chiefs, bearing 
golden Avands, Avalkcd at the head of 
the company. Vv'hen these raised their 
Avands, the people covered their faces, 
as if they Averc not Avorthy of beholding 
the Jiugust person of their king. 

10. ('ortez and the king now ap- 
proached each other, the ground being 
covered Avith carpets, so that Montezu- 
ma’s feet might not be soiled by touch- 
ing the earth. They met and saluted 
each other Avith profound respect. Mon- 
tezuma AA’as about forty years old, and 
vas dressed in a fine cotton robe, pro- 
fusely ornamented Avith gold and sil- 

wliere Tenuchtitlan stood. What did the avmy 
do 1 Describe the scene on their entrance into 
the city. Montezuma t Meeting of the king and 
Cortez'? Age and dress of tho king'? 11. 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


137 


vcr. On his head, he wore a crown of 
gold. 

11. After some ceremonies, the king 
entered the city and the army followed. 
The city consisted of about 20,000 
houses, with many magnificent temples 
and palaces, far surpassing in grandeur 
anything that was supposed to exist in 
America. A large palace was assigned 
to Cortez and his troops, and they were 
abundantly furnished with all the pro- 
vision they wanted. Here Montezuma 
visited Cortez, and treated him in a 
most gracious manner. 

CHAP. LXV. 

MEXICO. CONTINUED. 

1 . I must now tell my readers that 
the Mexicans knew nothing of tlie Bib.le, 
and had never heard of Jesus Christ. 
They had many absurd notions of re- 
ligion, and paid their worship to a multi- 
tude of idols. They erected splendid 
temples in honor of these gods, and en- 
tertained for them the most profound 
reverence. Multitudes of priests at- 
tended the temples, and sacrificed 
thousands of human beings to their dei- 
ties. These consisted chiefly of prison- 
ers taken in war. The lives of their 
captives were generally preserved, that 
their blood might be shed by the priests 
in honor of the gods. 

2. Now Cortez was a Catholic, and 
these things shocked him very much. 
He could make war upon a defenceless 
people, slay .tliem by thousands, plot 
the destruction of their governmenl, 
and pursim his schemes by falsehood, 

city T What place was assigned to Cortez and his 
U-oops I 

1. The Mexicans 1 Their religion 1 Priests'? 
Sacrifices ? 2. Cortez ? What was consistent 

witli the religion of Cortez ? What aj)peared ab- 


I treachery, and violence. All these 
things were consistent witli his notions 
of relitrion, but the sacrifice of human 
victims to idols, appeared to liim very 
wicked and absurd. It may seem to us 
very strange, that the Mexicans could 
imagine the horrid practices of their 
religion were right, but it is still more 
strange, that Cortez could believe his 
conduct was agreeable to the peaceful 
doctrines of Christianity. We can only 
account for it on the supposition, that 
he had never read the scriptures, and 
knew nothing of the religion he pro- 
fessed, but its rites, and ceremonies. 

3. Montezuma supposed that the 
strangers would be very much gratified 
to see the Ptlexican temples. So he 
went with them, showed them the idols, 
and explained everything. After Cor- 
tez had seen it all, he told the king, 
that the Mexican religion was false and 
wicked. He also told him something 
about the Christian religion. Monte- 
zuma was very much shocked, and he 
told Cortez, that he must not speak ir- 
reverently of the Mexican Gods. 

4. The king was evidently angry, 
and he began secretly to take measures 
for killing the Spaniards. But nothing 
escaped the vigilance of Cortez. He 
(piickly discovered the plot, and resort- 
ed to a very bold measure for defeating 
it. He went, with about thirty of his 
bravest men, to the palace of the king. 
They were admitted, and received by 
Montezuma with apparent friendship. 
After some conversation, Cortez told 
the king he must go with him to his 
quarters. The monarch was enraged, 
blit Cortez was firm, and finding it in 

surd to him ? What seems strange ? What is inore 
I strange ? Conduct and feelings of Cortez ? 3. Wliat 
I did Montezuinado ? What did Cortez tell >tontezu- 
ma ? What of Montezuma ? 4. Wliat did lie s&. 
jj cretly do ? What did Cortez discover ^ 'Pell liov 


13S 


THE CHILD’S flRST BOOK OF HISTORY 


ill 


vain to resist, the king yielded, and 
was carried a prisoner to the palace 
which the Spanish soldiers occupied. 

5. Thus the sovereign of this vast 
empire was placed in the power of the 
bold and artful Cortez. The latter 
now began to take measures to humble 
the spirit of Montezuma, by assuming 
a haughty air; and in one instance he 
went so for as to put chains upon him. 
A^t length the subdued captive sum- 
moned his chiefs, and while the tears 
flowed from his eyes, acknowledged 
himself a vassal of the king of Spain, 
and promised to pay him a vast sum of 
money every year. 

6. Cortez now became very arro- 

gant, and resolved to destroy the im- 
ages in the Mexican temples. He 
therefore went to one of for-'-tliis 

purpose, but he found the priesTs 
the people determined t 9 ..-resis’r^’ hat 
they deemed a very fr^ious design. 
Cortez perceived that it would be im- 
prudent to proceed farther, and gave up 
his intention. 

7. He was now called to encounter 
new and unexpected difficulties. Mon- 
tezuma had messengers in all parts of 
the kingdom, who immediately came, 
and informed him if anything remarka- 
ble happened. One day, some of these 
arrived from the coast, with pictures 
of eighteen European vessels, that had 
just come there. Cortez soon learnt, 
that the governor of Cuba, having be- 
come jealous of him, had sent a thou- 
sand men in these ships, to make him 
a prisoner, or kill him. 

8. Cortez did not hesitate as to 
what he should do; he left a hundred 
and fifty men at the city of Tenuchtitlan, 

Montezuma avas taken prisoner 1 5. How did 

(^rtez treat the king 1 What did Montezuma do 1 
f5. What did Cortez resolve to do 1 What did 
he do 1 7 Montezuma’s messengers 1 8. What 


to preserve order, and set out witll 
about two hundred and $fty to meet 
the Spaniards, who were commanded 
by Narvaez. He attacked them by night, 
and after a desperate struggle, obtain- 
ed a complete victory. Narvaez was 
wounded, and he, with 800 of his men, 
fell into the hands of Cortez. 

9. He now proposed to the prison- 
ers to become, his soldiers ; and to this 
they agreed. Thus an event which 

I seemed to threaten his destruction, re- 
i suited in adding 800 Spanish soldiers 
I to his little army. " . r " 

10. But now messengers c.auie in 
I liaste from the capital; and informed 
I Cortez that the inhal^tants hath risen, 

I and made an attack itpon the soldiers. 
j.hc' had leity^'and that if jie did not 
ha^e»d5ack, they would all be slain. 
'Tg therefore lost no time, but marched 
with the greatest expedition, and at 
length reentered the city. He imme- 
| dialely look possession of his former 
quarters, where he found Montezuma 
still remaining in the care of his troops. 
They had been fiercely assaulted by 
the people, who were now greatly ex- 
cited against the Spaniards. 

11. A few days after this, 400 of 
the soldiers were surrounded in the 
streets, and a violent attack was made 
upon them by thousands of the inliab- 
itants. Stones were hurled from the 
roofs of the houses, and innumerable 
arrows and javelins filled the air like a 
storm of hail. The Spaniards hewed 
their way through crowds of the enemy, 
and regained their quarters, leaving 
heaps of the slain Indians in the 
streets. 


did Cortez soon learn 1 What did lie do 1 Nar- 
vaez and his troops 1 9. How was the army of 

Cortez increased ’ 10 . What news now came 

from Mexico 1 Vv'hat of Cortez’s returji 1 What 
did he find 1 11 . What happened a few dava 


THE CHILD S FIRST BOOK OF HISTORY. 


139 


12. But the spirit of vengeance was 
now thoroughly roused in the bosom 
of the Mexicans, and heedless of the 
dreadful slaughter made by the cannon 
and muskets, they gathered in immense 
numbers, and came like a rolling tor- 
rent against the castle of the enemy. 
Cortez and his troops, who were never 
unprepared, received the shock v/ith 
the utmost firmness. They had plant- 
ed their cannon in such a manner, that 
at every discharge many of the natives 
were cut down. But they were not 
intimidated. 

13. They rushed to the very gates 
of the castle, and climbed on each oth- 
ers shoulders, in the attempt to scale 
the walls. They came up to the very 
mouths of the cannon, and points of 
the muskets. As the foremost were 
shot down, others filled their places. 
The air rang with their terrible shouts, 
and the thunder of the cannon was 
drowned by the uproar of their drums, 
fifes, and horns. 

14. Thus, for a whole day, the as- 
sault continued. At night, the Mexi- 
cans withdrew, for their religion did 
not allow them to continue the battle 
after sun down. But the next morn- 
ing the fight was renewed, and through- 
out the whole day, it did not cease for : 
a moment. Thus for several days the| 
siege continued, during which thousands i 
of the Mexicans Avere killed, and one , 
third part of the city laid in ruins. | 

15. At length, Montezuma, Avho! 
was still with Cortez, appeared upon! 
the Avails, dressed in a robe sparkling | 
Avith jeAvels. When the people saAVi 
him, they Avere all silent, and boAved; 
to the earth in the deepest reverence. 

after 1 12. Mexicans 1 Cortez and his troops 1 

Describe the attack of the Mexicans. 14. What 
happened at night 1 The next morning 1 The i 
seige l 15. Montezuma 1 The people ? What 


Then Montezuma spoke to them. He 
told them the Spaniards Averehis friends, 
and begged them to throAV doAvn their 
arms, and go home in peace. The 
people heard this Avith indignation. At 
first a gentle murmur Avas heard among 
the multitude like a breeze sAveeping 
over a forest. But it greAV deeper and 
louder, and at length, the angry shout 
of the people burst forth like a rushing 
tempest. Then a thousand arroAvs 
fleAV from the boAV-strings of the Mexi- 
cans, and tlie Avounded monarch fell 
senseless to the ground. 

16. He Avas now taken into the cas- 
tle, and by and by his senses returned. 
But oppressed Avith shame and indigna- 
tion, he grew .frantic ; tore open his 
Avoiiiids, upbraided Cortez for his per- 
fidy, rejected Avith scorn and loathing 
the attempts that Avere made to convert 
him to the Catholic religion, and a* 
length found a release from his suffer- 
ings in death. 

17. When the Mexicans saAV their 
monarch fall, they Avere struck Avith 
amazement, and fearing the immediate 
vengeance of Heaven, abandoned the 
siege, and returned home. But after 
his death, a new king Avas elected, and 
the attack rencAved. On the top of the 
liigh temple Avhich overlooked the 
Spanish castle, they collected a great 
many stones and beams, to hurl doAvn 
upon their enemies. Cortez Avent to 
this temple, Avith some of his bravest 
men, to drive aAvay the Mexicans. 

18. An awful strinxgle folloAvecl. 
The tAvo parties met in the upper part 
of the building, and the Mexicans, con- 
sisting of cliiefsand menofrank, fought 
like tigers. Tliey Avould not fly nor 

(lid Montezuma say ? What effect had tills speech 
on the 3Iexican.s ? What did they do? 
Montezuma? 17. Tlie Mexicans? Did they 
elect a new king ? What of a high temple ? IS, 
i2 


140 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


surrender; preferring death to submis- 
sion, some of them leaped from the lofty 
pinnacle of the temple to the earth, and 
were crushed in the fall. Two noble 
youths approached Cortez, and seizing 
him, dragged him to the edge of the 
pinnacle. Then holding fast to his 
limbs, they leaped over the railing, in- 
tending to drag him after tliem. But 
Cortez was a strong man, and knowing 
his great danger, held fast to the rail- 
ing, while tlie two Mexicans, forced to 
quit their hold, swung from the pin- 
nacle, and were dashed in pieces upon 
♦die earth below. 

19. Cortez now returned to his 
quarters, and finding it dangerous for 
him to remain in the city, secretly de- 
termined to retreat. In a dark and 
rainy night he set out with his army, 
hoping to escape unperceived. They 
were crossing the lake, when being on 
a narrow part of the causeway, they 
were suddenly attacked by thousands 
of the Mexicans, who covered the water 
with their boats. A dreadful scene fol- 
lowed ; fighting in the thick darkness, 
they could not distinguish friends from 
foes. Multitudes of the Indians were 
slain, and forming a bridge of their 
bodies, Cortez and a part of his army 
escaped to the shore. But two hundred 
of the Spanish troops were killed, with 
two thousand of their Tlascalan allies. 
Some prisoners and all the cannon and 
baggage fell into the hands of the Mex- 
icans. 

20. This dreadful event is still re- 
membered in Mexico, and the night, on 
which it occurred, is called the ‘ night 

Describe the struggle in the temple. How did 
Cortez narrowly escape death '? 19. What did 

he secretly determine upon 1 What hapj)ened as 
tile Spaniards were retreating from the city 1 How 
many Spaniards were killed 1 How many Tlasca- 
lans 1 Trisoners and baggage 1 20. What is 


of desolation.’ Cortez and his littlil 
band now retreated to the city of Tlas- 
cala, cutting their way with desperate 
bravery through the thousands of ene- 
mies that opposed them. Here they 
remained some time, when having re- 
ceived a reinforcement of several hun- 
dred Spanish soldiers, Cortez marched 
back to Tezcuco, resolved if possible 
to take the capital. With immense 
labor, timber was brought from a dis 
j tance ; several vessels were built, and 
launched on the lake; and the siege 
began. 

CHAP. LXVI. 

MEXICO. CONCLUDED. 

1. I must now tell my reader, that 
Quetlevaca, the brother of Montezuma, 
who had been made king at his death, 
was not now living. He died of the 
small pox, which the Spaniards brought 

! into the country^ and Guatimozin, a 
young man of high courage, was now 
king in his stead. He had put the city 
in the best state of defence ; although 
the Spaniards attacked it bravely, they 
were, day after day, and week after 
i week, repulsed by the Mexicans. 

2. Weary of the protracted siege, 
Cortez and his troops one day made a 
fierce assault, and with incredible valor, 
burst into the city, cutting down those 
who opposed them, and tram])ling the 
dead and dying beneath their feet, they 
rushed on to the centre of the city. 
But there they were opposed with such 
bravery, that after a while, they gave 

! the night, on which this event occurred, still called '? 

■ What did Cortez now do 1 What did he do after 
j staying awhile at Tlascala 1 Vessels '? 

I 1. Guatimozin '1 What liad he done '1 Span- 
iards 'I 2. "What did Cortez and his troops one 
I day do 1 What of their being driven back 1 


TUB child’s first book of history. 


141 


way, and were driven back. Cortez 
himself was seized by three Mexicans, 
who were dragging him away, when 
two of his officers came to his relief. 
These were both killed in the struggle 
which followed, but Cortez escaped. 

3. At length, night came, and the 
Spaniards, being unable to retreat 
across the lake, were obliged to stay in 
the city. In the night, the great tem- 
ple was lighted up, and by the glare 
they could see their companions, who 
had been taken prisoners, sacrificed to 
the God of War. They could see them 
obliged to dance before the hideous Idol, 
and could hear their screams, when the 
torture was inflicted upon them. 

4. The next day, Cortez left the 
city, and soon being reinforced by 
more than 100,000 Indians, he made an 
attack at three points. After the most 
obstinate fighting and great slaughter, 
the town was captured, and Guatirnozin 
himself, in an attempt to escape, was 
taken, and carried a prisoner to Cortez. 
He besought the Spaniards to treat his 
wife and children with kindness, but 
for himself he betrayed neither fear 
nor anxiety. With an air of dignity, 
he addressed Cortez, and said, ‘ I have 
done what I could to save my country, 
but my eflbrts have 'been unsuccessful. 
I have now no desire to live; for my 
life is worthless to me and my people. 
I pray you to take that weapon by your 
eide, plunge it in my breast, and release 
me from an existence that is now a 
burthen.’ 

5. At this speech, the wife of Guati- 
mozin burst into an agony of tears, and 
Cortez, who was very much affected by 

What happened to Cortez 1 3. What took 

place during the night '1 4. What did Cortez do 

the next day 1 How was he reinforced T What 
did he next do 1 Guatirnozin 1 6. Mexicans 

aAor the capture of their king 1 What of Mexico, 


the scene, retired, that the unhappy 
captives might indulge their grief with- 
out restraint. 

6. The Mexicans, now that their 
king was taken, made no further resist- 
ance. Not only the capital, but the 
whole country fell into the hands of the 
conquerors. But the soldiers of Cor- 
tez did not find a great deal of gold and 
silver in the city ; and being greatly dis- 
ap})ointed, they became very angry. 
They suspected that Guatirnozin had 
caused his treasures to be concealed, 
and therefore required of Cortez, that 
he and his first minister should be tor- 
tured, in order to make them tell 
where they had secreted their gold, sil- 
ver, and precious stones. 

7. Cortez consented, and Guatimo- 
zin and his minister were stretched on 
live coals, by the infernal Spaniards. 
Unable longer to endure his dreadful 
agony, the minister uttered a shriek, 
and turned his eye upon Guatirnozin, 
as if asking permission to disclose the 
secret desired by the Spaniards. To 
this the king replied calmly^, ‘Am I on 
a bed of roses? ’ This rebuke silenced 
the minister, and he said no more, pa- 
tiently enduring his anguish till he 
was released by death. Finding that 
the resolution of Guatirnozin could not 
be shaken by torture, the Spaniards 
ceased from their cruel endeavours. 

8. Cortez now sent his officers to 
various parts of the kingdom, and the 
inhabitants throughout the country 
were soon forced to submit. The 
empire w^as divided into provinces, 
and placed under Spanish governors. 
These being destitute of humanity, 

with its capital 1 Spanish soldiers 1 7. Did 

Cortez consent to the torture of Guatirnozin and 
his minister '1 Describe the torture. 8. Whal 
did Cortez do 1 How was the empire divide4 
1 and governed 1 Character and conduct of ibfi 


142 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


conducted with a degree of cruelty too 
shocking to relate. The blood of the 
poor Mexicans flowed like water, to 
satisfy the avarice of their invaders. 
Hundreds of them were burnt alive, and 
wives and children were often com- 
pelled to witness the burning of their 
husbands and fathers at the stake. 
There is not on the record of human 
actions, a page of history more blotted 
with crime, than that which relates the 
conduct of Cortez and his generals, af- 
ter the conquest of Mexico. 

9. Cortez was soon appointed gov- 
ernor of Mexico, which was called New 
Spain. He began to rebuild the capi- 
tal, which now received the appellation 
of Mexico. But his enemies sent home 
to Spain unfavorable reports of his 
conduct ; he therefore went back to his 
native country, where he was received 
by the king with great respect. But 
he was deprived of his government, 
and from this time fortune seemed to 
desert him. He went again to Ameri- 
ca, and made some discoveries on the 
western coast. Finally he returned to 
Spain, w'here, bfiing treated with total 
neglect, he died in obscurity, at the age 
of sixtytwo. 

10. Such was the fate of Cortez, 
one of the most extraordinary men the 
world has ever produced. The story 
of his deeds seems like a romantic 
dream. We cannot fail to admire his 
talents; but his cruelty, injustice, and 
treachery entitle him to everlasting in- 
famy. 

Spanish governors 1 What cruelties were prac- 
tised upon the Indians 1 History of Cortez and 
his generals 9. To what office was Cortez ap- 
pointed 1 What did he do '? What has since 
been the name of Tenuchtitlan 1 Enemies of Cor- j 
tez 1 His return to Spain '? How was he re- 
ceived by the king 1 What discoveries did Cor- 
tez make '? At what age, and in what condition 
Jill he diet 10. History of Cortez'? His 


11. I have but little more to tell 
you of Mexico. From this time, it 
continued to be a dependency of Spain. 
The government was arbitrary and 
oppressive. The Indians, of which 
there were many millions when the 
country was conquered, rapidly dimin- 
ished, and in the course of time, became 
the mere slaves and tools of the Span- 
iards, who settled in the country. 

12. Thus centuries passed by, till 
at length the oppression of the Spanish 
government became intolerable. In 
1808, the people rebelled, and after a 
struggle of twelve years, they gained 
their independence. In 1823, their pre- 
sent constitution was formed, and al- 
though there have been many disturb'- 
ances, yet the government appears to be 
gradually acquiring stability. 

CHAP. LXVH. 

GUATIMALA. 

1. Guatimala occupies the most 
southern point of North America. It 
is a narrow isthm~:s, connecting the two 
parts of the continent, and varies from 
two to live hundred miles in width. A 
great chain of mountains passes through 
this country from north to south; many 

talents'? His cruelty, injustice, &c. 11. What 

of Mexico after its conquest ? Indians 1 12. 

What took place in 1808 1 What did the people 
gain after twelve years 1 What took place ia 
1823 ? Government? 

(Questions on the Map of Guatimala. — Boun- 
daries ? What mountains run through Guatima- 
la ? Where is the Bay of Honduras ? Describo 
the river St Juan. Lake Leon. Nicaragua. Where 
is the city of Guatimala ? Its direction from the 
city of Mexico ? New Orleans ? New York I 
Cuba ? Trinidad ? W^here is Truxillo ? Vera 
Paz? Leon? London? Extent? Ans. 330,- 
000 square miles. Population ? Ans. About 2*- 
000 . 000 . 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


143 


of the peaks are volcanic, and have 
tlieir tops always covered with snow. 
Near twenty of these volcanoes are in 
constant activity. 

2. If we travel in Guatimala, we 
shall find the weather excessively hot, 
at all seasons of the year, in the low 
countries. But if we go to the inte- 
rior, we shall find some high plains and 
valleys, where the air is cool and de- 
lightful. The country is very much 
like Mexico, but even more fruitful. It 
produces corn, cochineal, honey, wax, 
cotton, the sugar-cane, indigo, maize, 
pimento, and chocolate in abundance, 
besides all kinds of fruit. The farming 
districts produce cattle and sheep. The 
mines yield but little gold and silver, 
and the inhabitants are therefore more 
industrious in cultivating the land, than 
in the neighboring countries. The 
people consist of the descendants of 
Spanish settlers, negroes, native In- | 
dians, and mixed races. 

3. If we go into the low country, | 
Hear the Bay of Honduras, we shall see 
a good many people cutting down 
mahogany and logwood trees, which 
are sawed into boards, and brought to 
New York, Philadelphia, Boston, and 
other places. 

4. The city of Guatimala is situated 
on the western side of the country, 
close to the Pacific Ocean. It is near- 
ly half as large as Boston, and has a 
great many splendid edifices. Some 
of the churches are decorated in the in- 
terior with immense quantities of gold 
and silver. The catholic priests have 
great influence here, as well as in Mex- 
ico. There are several other large 
towns in this country. 

1. Guatimaic. 'I IMoiintuins t 2. Climate'? 
Country? People? 3. iMahog-any and logwood ? jj 
4. City of Guatimala ? Catholic priests ? Otii- jj 
Ci,’ towns ? 5 Divisions? Government? 't'i- 


5. Guatimala is divided into provin- 
ces like Mexico, and has a similar gov- 
ernment. It is called the Central Re- 
public of America. The people followed 
the example of Mexico, and freed them- 
selves from the Spanish yoke about 
the same time. In 1821, they declared 
themselves independent, and afterwards 
formed their present constitution of 
government. Guatimala was originally 
inhabited by tribes of Indians, who 
were conquered, and the country taken 
possession of by the Spaniards, soon 
after the conquest of Mexico. 

G. The city of Guatimala was founded 
in the year 1524, and gradually rose 
to be a rich and beautiful place. The 
Spanish governor resided there, and 
many wealthy families lived there in 
very splendid houses. But it was built 
on the slope of a mountain whose top 
was a volcano. In the year 1751, a 
dreadful earthquake shook down many 
of the houses, and the volcano sent 
forth a torrent of lava, which rolled 
down upon the town. In this way, a 
great part of the city was destroyed; 
but the people rebuilt it, and again it 
was a flourishing and beautiful place. 

7. In the year 1775, it was again 
agitated by the shocks of an earthquake. 
Tlie houses trembled, and some of them 
were thrown down. The steeples of 
the churches tottered, and fell prostrate 
to the ground. The earth and air were 
filled with terrible noises, and the in- 
habitants ran through the streets in 
despair. For five days and five nights, 
tliis awful scene continued. Some of 
tlie people escaped from the city, but 
there were still thousands remaining 
behind. Suddenly the earth opened, 
forming a deep and horrid chasm, from 

tie ? What occurred in 1821 ? Original inhab- 
itants ? (Jon(|uest ? 6. City of Guatimala ? 

Where was it built? What occurred in 1671? 


144 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


wliicli issued the noise of roaring 
waters, and agitated rocks. The eartli 
was violently shaken, and the whole 
city, houses, churches, and inhabitants, 
were plunged into the abyss. Then 
the earth closed up, and covered them 
all from the view. Thus the city was 
totally destroyed The people who 
escaped, removed to the distance of 
about twentylive miles, and there built 
the present town of Guatimala. 

8. The country of Guatimala- re- 
mained subject to Spain, from its con- 
quest tO" about the year 1810, when the 
inhabitants began to rebel. In about 
ten years, the country became inde- 
pendent, as I have told you. The peo- 
ple obtained their freedom without 
much lighting, and are in a more quiet 
state than those of Mexico. 

9. I must not omit to tell you of 
the Mosquito Indians, who inhabit the 
mountains on the coast south of Trux- 
illo. These are totally unlike the oth- 
er natives ; they are, indeed, exceed- 
ingly like negroes. Their history is 
very curious and interesting. Two or 
three hundred years ago, a ship full of 
slaves was coming from Africa to some 
part of South America. They were 
cruelly treated, and finally rose upon 
their oppressors, killing the captain, 
and all the*sailors. 

10. But they were now in a terrible 
situation, for they did not know how 
to manage the ship. But Providence 
seems to have taken care of them ; for 
the wind blew them to the shore, and 
they landed in safety. Here they lived, 
and at length were numerous and pow- 
erful. They spread over the mountains, 
and although the Spaniards tried to sub- 
due them, they have to this day main- 

la 1775 1 Describe the earthquake. 8. Gua- 
timaia 1 What took place in 18101 Wlien did 
Ute people gain their freedom 1 9. Moscjuito 


tained their independence. The Eng- 
lish carry on some trade with these 
people. 



Mosquito Indians. 


CHAP. LXVHI. 

COLOMBIA. 

1. I must now ask my reader to 
accompany me to South America ; a 
vast country attached to the continent 
by the narrow isthmus of Panama. 
The first division we shall meet with, 
is Colombia, which occupies the north- 
western part. It is nearly half as ex- 
tensive as the United States. 

2. In our travels, we shall find many 
wonderful things in Colombia. Along 
the coast, the country is low, and there 

j Indians 1 Tell their history. 10. Describe tire 
picture. Trade 1 

Questio7is on the Map of South America 

Boundaries 1 Ilow do the Andes cross Colombia 1 
Where are the Itiababa mountains ! Where is 
I Chimborazo 1 Cotapaxi 1 Where is Lake 
I Maracaybo 1 Where is the bay of Panama ! 

! Describe the Orinoco R., Amazon, Potomac, 
j Japura, Napo, Caqueta, Negro. Capital! Di- 
I rection of Santa Fe de Bogota from Mexico! 
j Washington ! New Orleans ! Cuba ! Describe 
I the following towns : Popayan, Quito, Carracas, 
j Cuinana, St Martha, Guayaciuil, Carthagena, 
I Panama. 

j 1 . South America! Colombia! Extent 1 


THE CHILD S FIRST BOOK OF HISTORY. 


14B 


We shall find it always hot. There is 
never any snow or winter there ; at all 
times the trees arc covered with leaves, 
blossoms and fruit. But we must not 
stay in these hot regions, for the cli- 
mate is very unhealthy to strangers. 
We must proceed as soon as })ossible 
to Santa Fe, or Quito, which are situ- 
ated at an elevation of 8, or 9000 feet 
above the level of the sea. At these 
places, the air is always cool and refresh- 
ing. There is neither winter nor sum- 
mer here; the climate the whole year 
round resembles that of New England, 
in the month of May. 

3. When we arc at Quito, we shall 
be near some of the loftiest peaks of 
the Andes. These rise above the clouds, 
and their tops are always covered with 
a mantle of snow. Here winter reigns 
from year to year; no leaves, no flow- 
ers, no living thing is seen on these 
cold and desolate peaks. Thus you 
perceive that in Colombia, there are 
three distinct climates ; one of perpetu- 
al summer in the low countries ; one 
of constant spring in the elevated plains ; 
and one of everlasting winter upon the 
dizzy tops of the mountains. 

4. The mountains of the Andes, 
while we travel among them, will fill 
our minds with wonder. Sometimes 
we shall descend into deep and dark 
valleys, where our cars will be stunned 
with the roar of ialling waters. Some- 
times we shall travel on the brink of 
precipices, and wind along the edges of 
cliffs, with vast rocks hanging above 
our heads, ami fearful chasms yawning 
beneath our feet. We must ride upon 
mules in these wild countries, and we 
may be sure these trusty creatures will 
carry us safely on our journey. 


2. Low countries 1 Santa Fe and Quito 1 Cli- 
mate 1 3. Peaksof the Andes'! Three climates 

of Colombia 1 The Andes ! Mules ! . 5. Chim- 

V2* 


5. Chimborazo is the loftiest peak 
of the Andes, and is more tlian four 
miles high. Humboldt, a famous trav^- 
eller, went nearly to the top of it a few 
years ago. He ascended to the height 
of 19,300 feet, which is higlter than any- 
body else has ever been. Cotopaxi is 
a terrible volcano. If an explosion 
happens while we are in the country, it 
will afford us a splendid sight. Noth- 
ing can be more truly sublime than the 
eruptions of this mountain. Its roar- 
ings are heard at the distance of 600 
miles, and a column of fire rises from 
the crater to the height of 3000 feet. 



View of Cotopaxi during an Eruption, 


6. While we are among the moun- 
tains, we should visit a little village on 
the side of Antisani, a volcanic moun- 
tain, not far from Cotopaxi. This vil- 
lage is 13,5C0 feet above the level of 
the sea, and is the highest inhabited 
spot on the globe. Here the people 
live in quietness, and seem not to feas 
the volcano, which is close to them. 

7. After leaving the mountains, we 
must visit the plains. These plains lie 
on tlie eastern part of Colombia, and 
resemble the prairies of our western 
countries. They are covered with 
coarse grass, and spread out to an im- 

borazo 1 Humboldt 1 Cotopaxi 1 Describe th« 
picture. 6. Antiiani ! 7. Plains ] Tb® 


146 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


mense extent. They are called Pam- 
f)as^ which is the Spanish name for 
plains. We shall see them inhabited 
by vast herds of wild cattle. 

8. Among the mountains in Colom- 
bia, there are very rich mines of gold, 
silver, platina, and emeralds. The in- 
habitants of the country resemble those 
of Mexico, but they appear to be more in- 
dustrious and happy. The whole popu- 
lation of the country is about 3,000,000. 

CHAP. LXIX. 

COLOMBIA. CONTINUED. 

1 . I will now tell you the history 
of Colombia. While the Spaniards were 
employed in conquering Mexico, they 
heard of a great Indian empire In South 
America, called Peru. Accordingly Pi- 
zarro set out, in the year 1631, to con- 
quer that country. While he w^as en- 
gaged in this great enterprise, he sent 
some generals to subdue the Indians at 
the north. They consisted chiefly of 
small tribes living in a savage state, and 
ofiered little resistance to the Spanish 
arms. 

2. But there were two or three na- 
tions which had made some advances 
in civilization, and which were formi- 
dable from their numbers and warlike 
character. The chief of these were 
called Moscas, and inhabited the coun- 
try in the vicinity of Santa Fe: their 
capital was built where that city now 
stands. The king was both priest, and 
monarch, and the people had such a 
reverence for him, that whenever he 
went abroad they strewed flowers in his 
path, and turned their eyes away, lest 

Pampas 1 8. Mines I Inhabitants 1 Popula- 

tion 1 

1. Peru I Pizarro I His generals 1 In- 
flians 1 2. Moscas I Capital I King 1 3. 


they should commit sin by looking upon 
him. 

3. When the Spanish general, Gon* 
zala de Ximenes, came to this country, 
in 1536, the reigning king was called 
Bogota. He was a famous chief, and 
he drew out his men to flght with the 
Spaniards. A great battle was fought, 
but the Indians were defeated, and the 
Spaniards were soon able to get pos- 
session of the country, on both sides 
of the mountains. 

4. This whole region thus fell into 
their hands, and was erected into a 
province, under the name of New Gre- 
nada. It occupied nearly all the Ter- 
ritory within the present limiis of Co- 
lombia, excepting the province of Ve- 
nezuela. It was rapidly settled by Span- 
iards, who married Indian women, and 
devoted themselves to the cultivation 
of the soil. For 250 years, the people 
lived in peace, no war having taken 
place during this long period. 

5. The coast of Venezuela was dis- 
covered by Columbus, in 1498. Some 
other Spanish navigators followed him, 
and on their return, gave very favora- 
ble accounts of the country. This led 
a good many people from Spain to come 
and settle there. They came under the 
direction of priests, who exerted them- 
selves to convert the Indians, but with- 
out success. The settlements did not 
flourish, and it was thought best to sub- 
due the Indians by force. Seme troops 

, were sent ajjainst them, and after a 
great deal of bloodshed, the savages 
were partly subdued. 

6. About this time, the king of 
Spain sold the country to some Ger- 

j Ximenes t Bogota t Concpiesl of tlie country "I 
j 4. New Grenada I Settlement 1 State of the 
I country for 250 years'? 5. Wliat occurred in 
I 1498 1 Otlier pavigators '? Settlement of the 
j country '? Priests 1 How were the Indians sub- 


147 


THE CUILI>\'< FIRST ZOOK OF KI»TORT, 


mans, who oppressed the inhabitants 
in the most grievous manner. In 1550, 
the province came again under the 
Spanish government, and thyS it con- 
tinued in a quiet state till the year 
1806. At that time, the people made 
a gallant attempt under General Miran- 
da, to throw off the Spanish yoke; 
but he and his troops were defeated; 
many were taken prisoners, and several 
were executed for rebellion. 

7. But about the year 1810, Buona- 
parte had made war upon Spain, and 
Madrid, the capital, was actually in pos- 
session of the French. The whole 
country was thrown into confusion, and 
the American colonies, finding them- 
selves neglected, thought it necessary 
to take care of themselves. The in- 
habitants of Venezuela, then called 
Caraccas, declared themselves inde- 
pendent, in 1811; and the first Con- 
gress assembled under the new Consti- 
tution, in 1812. 

8. In New Grenada many of the 
people were in favor of independence, 
while others adhered to the govern- 
ment of Spain. These two parties 
became very much excited, and dread- 
ful conflicts ensued. The Catholic 
priests joined the royal cause, and many 
of them became soldiers and officers in 
the army. The most dreadful outrages 
were committed upon the inhabitants, 
tinder the sanction of these priests. In 
1812, one fifth of the inhabitants of 
Quito were murdered by troops, who 
were commanded by a Catholic bishop. 

9. The country was now overrun 
by the royalist forces, and the efi’orts 
of the inhabitants to oppose them, prov- 

duedl 6. Germans'? What happened in 1 550 '? 
State of the country till 1806? What oceiined 
in 1806 ? 7. What of Spain about the year 

1810? American colonies? Inhabitants of 
Curaccas ? First Congress ? 8. New Grenada ? 


ed abortive. About this time, singu- 
lar events occurred in Venezuela. The 
new government had gone into opera- 
tion, and the prospects of the country 
were very fair. But suddenly the city 
of Caraccas, then the capital, was over- 
whelmed by an earthquake. A great 
part of the houses were shaken down, 
and 12,000 of the people perished. 
Other towns also felt the shock, and 
thousands of the inhabitants were killed. 

10. ’ The priests now declared this 
to be a visitation from Heaven, for the 
sins of the nation in deserting the cause 
of their king. The superstitious peo- 
ple were filled witli terror, and desert- 
ing the cause of their country, flocked 
by thousands to the royal standard. 
The few patriots who remained true to 
their principles, fought bravely, but 
they were defeated, and the cause of 
tyranny again triumphed. 

11. Soon after this, a very extraor- 
dinary man appeared on the side of the 
patriots. This was Simon Bolivar, a 
native of Caraccas. He perceived the 
necessity of freedom, for the happiness 
of his country, and he resolved if pos- 
sible to achieve it. He was very rich, 
and had a thousand slaves. But these 
he set free, and used his fortune in 
raising troops to fight the enemies of 
freedom. I cannot tell you the whole 
story of this remarkable man. He 
fought a great many battles; sometimes 
with success, and sometimes experi- 
encing defeat. But never disheartened, 
he rose superior to misfortune, and fi- 
nally triumphed over the enemies of 
liberty. 

12. In 1819, having finally defeated 
the royalists, he was hailed by the peo- 

Calholic jH’iests ? Ravages? What occun-ed in 
1812? 9. What events followed? What oc- 
curred at Caraccas ? 10. Priests ? People 1 

Patriots? 11. Simon Bolivar ? What of Boli? 


148 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


pie as their Liberator. During the 
€ame year, New Grenada and Yeiiezue- 
ia were united under one government, 
called the Republic of Colombia. The 
first Congress met in 1821, and the 
new government was then organized. 

13. Tlie war was now prosecuted 
\yith vigor; and, led by Bolivar, the 
patriots triumphed in all quarters. In 
December, 1823, it was announced that 
no enemy was left in the country to 
contend with. 

14. Thus Colombia was set free, 
and soon other nations acknowledged 
her independence. Since that time, 
there have been some disturbances in 
the country, and Bolivar himself was 
at length suspected of an intention to 
become kino; of Colombia. But while 
the world was in doubt as to his real 
designs, he suddenly died, in Dec. 7830. 
On his death bed, he declared a sincere 
attachment to the liberties of his coun- 
try, and there can be little doubt that 
these words were uttered in truth and 
sincerity. 

CHAP. LXX. 

PERU. 

1 . This country is divided into Low 
end High Peru. The first consists of 
n narrow plain, lying between the 
Andes and the Pacific Ocean. This is 

var in 1819 1 • Union of New Grenada and Venezu- 
ela 1 Wliat occurred in 18211 13. Tlie war 1 

Wliat was announced in 18231 11 . Colombia 1 

Holivarl His death 1 

Questions on the Map of South America . — 
Boundaries! Mountains 1 Where is Siticaca 
Lake 1 Describe the Huallapa. Ucayale. Capi- 
tal 1 Direction of Lima from Santa Fe 1 Mexi- 
co 1 Cuba 1 Describe the following towns : 
Cusco, Truxillo, Callao, Arequipa. Extent 1 
Ans, 500,000 sciuarc miles Population 1 
^Kci. About 2,000,000. 


about 100 miles wide, and 1500 miles 
long. Rain seldom or never falls here, 
and the soil is therefore barren, except 
along the banks of the rivers. High 
Peru consists of lofty plains crossed by 
ranges of mountains. 

2. In our journey through this coun' 
try, we shall find it necessary to trav- 
el with mules or lamas, for the roads 
are bad, and there are no bridges. We 
shall be delighted with the lamas, for 
they are gentle creatures, and will car- 
ry our baggage day after day over the 
mountains and through the valleys, with 
the greatest care and patience. 



Lamas of Peru. 


3. We shall find Lima to be a splen- 
did city, and at Callao we shall meet 
with ships from various parts of Eu- 
rope and America. In the mountains, 
we shall find rich mines of gold and 
silver, and at Guanca Velica, at an ele- 
vation of 12,000 feet above the level of 
the sea, we shall meet with mines of 
quicksilver. 

4. We must not fail to visit Cusco, 
It is a considerable place, being about 
as large as Providence. It has a great 
many splendid houses, built in the Eu- 
ropean fashion. We shall observe in 

1. Division of Peru 1 Low Peru 1 High 
Peru 1 2. Mode of travelling! Lamas! De- 

scribe the picture. 3. Lima ! Callao ! Mines J 


THE CHILD S FIRST BOOK OF HISTORY. 


149 


this city, that three fourths of the peo- 
ple are Indians, and we shall notice in 
various parts of the town, the ruins of 
ancient walls, temples, and palaces, 
which have a strange appearance. If 
we inquire of some person about these 
ruins, he will tell us a very interesting 
story of the ancient city of Cusco, and 
the country of which it was the capital. 
1 have not room to -repeat the whole of 
this story here, but I will give a sketch 
of it. 

5. About three hundred and fifty 
years ago, there' lived in Spain an ob- 
scure boy, named Francis Pizarro. Ilis 
occupation was feeding hogs; but having 
a bold spirit, he forsook this emplo5^- 
ment, and became a soldier. He came 
to America with other adventurers, and 
was at length so famous, as to be en- 
trusted with the command of an expe- 
dition, for the discovery and conquest 
of Peru. While Cortez was employed 
in subduing Mexico, the fame of this 
great ‘empire of South America had 
reached the ears of the Spaniards. 

6. Dreaming now only of conquest, 
and amassing heaps of silver and gold, 
they resolved immediately to send an 
expedition against it. This, as I have 
said, was entrusted to Pizarro, who set 
out in a leaky vessel with one hundred 
and twenty men, in the year 1525. He 
sailed from the Bay of -Panama, and 
after various adventures,* and having 
received a small addition to his forces, 
he reached the coast of Peru. 

7. The gentle and unsuspecting in- 
habitants came down to the water, and 
looked with strange wonder upon the 
vessels and the white men who had 
come to visit them. They then went 

Guanca Velica '? 4. Cusco 1 People 1 Ruins ! 

6. Francis Pizarro 1 What expedition was he 
entrusted with 1 Peruvian empire t 6. Span- 
iards'? When and how did Pizarro set out? 


away, and brought provisions, which 
they gave to Pizarro. He and his men 
now landed, and the Cacique treated 
them with great kindness. Such was 
the friendly reception, given by the 
Peruvians to the white men, whose 
purpose was to rob and murder them! 

8. Pizarro found the people to be 
of a copper color, like other Indians. 
They were clothed in garments of cot- 
ton and woollen cloth ; the latter being 
made from the wool of the lama. Their 
persons were all decorated with gold 
and silver ornaments, and he noticed 
about the houses various utensils made 
of these precious metals. He therefore 
formed a high idea of the riches of the 
country, and became more eager in his 
desire to conquer it. 

9. But I must tell you a little more 
about these Peruvians. Pizarro had 
with him a negro man, whose black 
skin and woolly head excited their won- 
der. They supposed he was painted, 
and therefore gave him a good scrubbing, 
but finding the color would not come ofii 
their amazement was unbounded. 

10. One day, the Cacique saw a 
Spaniard have a gun, and so he asked 
him the use of it. The Spaniard raised 
the piece to his eye, and fired the bullet 
through a board which was near. The 
Peruvians all around fell on their faces 
in fear, and the Cacique himself trem- 
bled very rnucli. He then gave the 
man some strange drink, saying, ‘ Drink, 
my friend, of this, for truly thou makest 
a big noise, and scemest to me like the 
thunder r of the heavens.’ 

11. After a while, the adventurers 
left this spot, and touched at several 
other places along the coast. They 
were exceedingly pleased with the gen- 

What did he do? 7. Inhabitants? Tlie Ca- 
cicine ? 8. Inhabitants ? Gold and silver? What 

eflcct had these things on Pizarro’ii mind ? 9. 


150 


THE child’s TIRST BOOK OF HISTORY. 


tie manners and kindness of the Indians. 
• One of the men was so delighted with 
, them, that he resolved to stay among 
them, nor could the persuasions of his 
companions induce him to come away. 
' They left him surrounded by the people, 
who caressed him, and seemed delighted 
with his intention of remaining among 
them. 

CHAP. LXXI. 

PERU. CONTINUED. 

1. Having examined the coast, and 
gained some information about the in- 
terior, Pizarro returned to Panama, and 
from thence to Spain. He gave an 
account of what he had seen to the 
king, who provided him with one hun- 
dred and twenty five men. With these 
he returned to America, and, in 1531, 
set sail from Panama, in three vessels, 
with one hundred and eighty soldiers. 
He soon reached the coast of Peru, 
landed, and marched into the country, 
plundering and murdering the inhabit- 
ants without mercy. 

2. I must now tell you something of 
the history of Peru, before the time I am 
speaking of. About four hundred years 
previous to the arrival of Pizarro, the 
empire is supposed to have been found- 
ed by Manco Kapac and his wife Mama 
Ozello. 7’hese two persons were said 
to be white, and came from some un- 
known country. They suddenly ap- 
peared among the people, who were 
then in a savage state, saying that 

negro'? 10. Spaniard and his gun? 11. The 
adventurers ? One of the Spaniards ? 

1. Return of the expedition ? Wliat did the 
king of Spain do ? How and when did Pizarro 
«et sail for Panama ? What did P. do af.cr reach- 
ing the coast ? 2. Vv^lien and by whom was tl;e 

^empire of Peru fou«ded ? What of Tnanco Ka- 
pac and his wife 1 How did ihs Peruvians treat 


they were children of the sun, sent 
to teach the Peruvians how to be 
happy. The inhabitants submitted to 
their direction. Manco taught them to 
cultivate the land, to manufacture cloth- 
ing, and to erect huts. Ozello taught 
the women to spin, and gave them a 
taste for domestic duties. 

3. These persons also persuaded 
the Indians to abolish the custom of 
sacrificing human victims to their idols, 
and taught them to worship one God, 
whose image or emblem was the sun 
Under the influence of these sovereigns 
the Peruvinns ceased to be savages, 
and became at length a great nation. 
The descendants of Manco continued 
to reign over the country, and for near 
four hundred years, it enjoyed peace 
and prosperity. The inhabitants increas- 
ed, and many towns were built. These 
Avere filled Avith temples, Avhere the 
Avorship of the sun Avas conducted Avith 
great pomp. The kings and princes 
Avere called Incas, or children«^f the 
sun, and they received from the people 
profound homage and veneration. 

4. Thus all Avent on happily till a 
short time before Pizarro came. The 
kingdom AA^as then divided betAveen tAVO 
Incas, AA^ho Avere brothers. One of 
these, called Huascar, resided at Cusco ; 
the other, called Atahualpa, resided at 
Quito. Theydiad become enemies, and 
in a recent battle the former had been 
defeated. 

5. Atahualpa heard of Pizarro’s ar- 
riA^al, and sent a messenger requesting 
him to come and see him. Pizarro 

them? What did Manco teach ? Mama Ozello ? 

1 3. V/hat did they persuade the Peruvians to do ? 
What did they teach ? What effect had the gov- 
ernment of Manco ? His descendants ? The 
country? Inhabitants? Towns? Temples? 
Kings ? Princes ? 4. What had happened a 

short time before Pizarro came ? Huascar ? Ata- 

J hualpa ? Which had been defeated? 6. Mes- 


TUB CHILD S FIBST BOOK OF IIISTOIIY. 


i61 


accepted this with pleasure, and went 
to the Inca’s residence, where lie was 
received with the greatest respect. The 
soldiers were treated with hospitality, 
and even the horses were attended with 
care. The Peruvians, who had never 
seen horses before, observed that they 
chewed their bits, and imagined that 
they fed upon metal ; they accordingly 
brought them large pieces of gold and 
silver to eat. The soldiers encouraged 
the people to bring more gold and silver 
to the horses, which however they tools, 
care privately to put into their pockets. 

6. Pizarro found great difficulty in 
making the Inca understand what he 
had to say. He commanded the interpre- 
ter to make the following speech ;-^‘My 
master, a powerful king of countries 
lying far to the east, and his holiness, 
the Pope, the great head of the Chris- 
tian church, have sent me and my sol- 
diers to deliver the Inca and his peo- 
ple from the power of the devil.’ This 
was repeated by the interpreter to Ata- 
hualpa ; but he could not comprehend 
one word of it. 

7. After mutual civilities, Pizarro 
and the Inca parted ; the former remov- 
ing with his troops to a palace at the 
distance of a mile, which the latter had 
provided. 

8. It was agreed, that Atahualpa 
should visit the Spaniards the next day. 
Accordingly, the Peruvians began their 
preparations at sunrise, and were occu- 
pied till near night, in arranging them- 
selves for the ceremony. At length, 
all things being ready, they set forward, 
and proceeded toward the place which 
the Spaniards occupied. 

9. The Inca suspected no harm, 

sage to Pizarro '? What did he do 1 How was 
he treated'? Soldiers'? Horses'? 6. What speech 
did Pizarro have made to the Inca 1 Did the i 
Inca umlerstand this sjieech 1 7. ttemovalof Pi- | 


but he did not know Pizarro. That 
cruel man had arranged his troops, and 
placed his cannon in such a manner, 
that he could easily make a captive of 
the king, and kill those who should be 
disposed to defend him. 

10. At length Atahualpa came in 
I great pomp ; he was attended by his 

chief men, and an escort of thirty thou- 
sand warriors. He was carried by 
some of the men upon a litter, shining 
with gold and silver. The chiefs and 
principal men were borne along in the 
same manner. The litters were sur- 
rounded by many singers and dancers. 

11. At length, the Inca approached 
the Spaniards, and Valverde, a Catholic 
priest, then came forward, holding a 
cross in his hand. This he held up be- 
fore the Inca, and made a long address. 
He told him of the crea.tion, the fall of 
Adam, and the death and resurrection of 
Christ. He then spoke of the Pope, and 
told the Inca, that he, the Pope, being 
Christ’s vicar on earth, had made a pre- 
sent of all South America to the king of 
Spain. He then advised him to renounce 
his false religion, speedily become a 
Christian, and acknowledge himself a 
vassal of the king of Spain. On these 
conditions Valverde told the Inca, that 
he and his people should be treated 
kindly. If they refused, they must ex- 
j)ect to be treated with the utmost se- 
verity. 

IS. Atahualpa listened with pa- 
tience. He said he was willing to be- 
come the friend of the king of Spain, 
but never his slave. He said he could 
not imagine how the Pope could give 


zari'o and his tt-ops 1 8. What was agreed to 

be done the next day '? The Peruvians '? 9. The 

Tnra 1 V^hat arrangements had Pizarro made 'I 

10. How was Atalaialpa attended '? How was 
he carried '? The cliiefs '? Singers and dancers f 

11. Valverde'? What address did he make to 


THH child’* first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


m 


a^vay wliat never was his; and as to 
his faith, it was the religion of his fa- 
thers, and he should never change 
it. After this, the Inca asked \ai- 
verde where he learned all the things 
he had told him about the creation. 
‘From this book,’ replied the priest, 
handing him a breviary, containing ex- 
tracts from the Bible. Atahiialpa took 
it, and examined it carefully: he held 
it to his ear, and replied, ‘ it does not 
say a wmrd to me.’ He then threw it 
Gway Avith disdain. 

13. Valverde now turned to the 
Spaniards, and exclaimed, ‘Revenge! 
Ciiristians, revenge! Behold how the 
word of God is spurned ! To arms, 
and extirpate these dogs, who trample 
the wmrd of God beneath their feet ! ’ 
At these words, Pizarro gave the signal 
of attack. In a. moment the beating of 
drums, and the noise of military instru- 
ments resounded through the air, while 
the cannons and musquetry carried 
death and slaughter into the midst of 
the Peruvian army. The horsemen 
rushed from their ambuscade, and Pizar- 
ro at the head of his inlantry, attacked 
the guard, that surrounded the Inca. 

14. The chiefs of the nation encir- 
cled their prince, forming a bulwark 
Avith their bodies to screen him from 
danger ; the rest, dismayed, had fled ; 
a great number fell by the swords 
of the cavalry, or Avere trampled to 
death by tlie horses. Pizarro at length 
reached the litter that contained the In- 
ca; Avhen, seizing him by the arm, he 
dragged the unhappy prince to the 
earth, and ordered him to be conducted 
to his quarters. 

the Inca 1 What reply did the Inca make 7 What 
id ILtahualpa «isk 1 Hov did Valverde rcj)ly 7 
\ liat did the Isca do with the breviary 7 13. 

What exclafiation did Valverde make 7 What 

Pi«au'ro now do 7 Describe the scene tbtit fol- 


15. Four thousand Peruvians, among 
Avhom were several children, Avomen, 
and old people, Avere left dead upon the 
field ; Avhile none of the Spaniards re- 
ceived the smallest Avound, exce})t Pi- 
zarro, Avhose hand Avas bruised by one 
of his oAvn people, at the moment he 
Avas seizing the Inca. During the 
whole of this carnage, Valverde did not 
cease to excite and encourage tho 
Spanish soldiers in their Avork of deatli. 

. CHAP. LXXII. 

PERU CONCLUDED. 

1. The night after this event, Avaa 
spent ^y the Spaniards in revelry and 
mirth. The next day, they took pos- 
session of the Peruvian camp, Avhere 
they found immense treasures of gold, 
silver and precious stones. Atahualpa, 
being noAV a prisoner, offered. Pizarro 
a large room full of gold and silver, if 
he Avould give him his liberty. To 
this Pizarro agreed, and accordingly 
messengers Avere sent throughout the 
kingdom, to collect the ransom. After 
a while, the Avhole amount was receiv- 
ed, and delivered to Pizarro. The In- 
ca then demanded to be released, but 
the faithless Spaniard Avould not let 
him go. He Avas still kept a prisoner, 
and treated very cruelly. 

2. At length, on .some slight pre- 
tence, Pizarro caused him to undergo 
a mock trial, after Avhich he Avas con- 
demned to death. The poor king fell 
upon his knees, and begged Pizarro to 


lowed. 15. Conduct of Valverde during th« 
slaughter 7 

1. The Spaniards on the following night 7 Th® 
next day 7 Atahualpa 7 To what did Pizarro 
agree 7 How much gold and silver was brought 7 
Did Pizarro release the Inca, when the ransom 
was pai4 7 liow was Atahuaba treated 7 2. 


TUB child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


153 


spare his life ; but in vain. The cruel 
Spaniard had no pity in liis heart. He 
commanded some negroes to execute 
the sentence, and Atahualpa was ac- 
cordingly strangled. 

3. I am sorry to tell my little read- 
er these horrid stories ; but alas ! they 
are true, and we can never efface them 
from the record of human actions. 
We may draw wisdom from these sad 
passages of history. They show us 
what frightful acts of wickedness man- 
kind may be led to commit through av- 
arice. We must recollect also, that all 
i these things were done by Pizarro 
j and his men, by the sanction of the 
i catholic religion, and under the pre- 
tence of serving the cause of Christian- 
; ity. We may learn from this, that re- 
j ligious pretences are vain, and that 
the true character of men is to be known 
I by their actions, not by their profes- 
t sions. 

1 4. I will not distress my little read- 

j ers by detailing the farther history of 
the conquest of Peru. It will be suffi- 
cient to say, that Paula, a brother of 
Atahualpa, succeeded him as Inca ; he 
was defeated however by Pizarro, who 
soon after entered the city of Cusco 
ivith his army. Quito was next taken, 
and soon the conquest of the whole 
country was completed. The story ot 
the awful cruelties committed by the 
Spaniards in subduing the country, 
would till a book. In 1533, Pizarro, who 
had amassed immense wealth, found- 
ed the city of Lima, where he built him- 
self a magnificent palace, and lived in 
great splendor. He was governor of 
the country, but his cruelty raised up 

His trial and execution 1 .3. What may we 

learn from the history of the conquest of Peru 1 4. 
Paula 1 Pizarro and his army 1 Quito 1 Cru- 
elties of the Spaniards 1 What was done inl533 1 
Wdiat office did he hold 1 When and why was he 

13 


enemies, who entered his palace, and 
slew him, in the year 1541. 

5. From this time, the whole of 
Peru, then including Bolivia, continued 
to be a Spanish province, ruled by a 
viceroy, appointed by the king of Spain. 
In 1747, Lima was destroyed by a ter- 
rible earthquake. It began about ten 
o’clock at night with a sudden noise, and 
a frightful shaking of the earth. In 
three minutes the whole city was a 
heap of ruins. Houses, churches, pal- 
aces, were all tumbled to the ground, 
and 1300 persons were crushed to death 
beneath them. Callao experienced a 
still more dreadful fate. Of 4000 peo- 
ple in the town, 200 only escaped, and 
of twentythree vessels in the harbor, 
nineteen were swallowed up. 

6. While Colombia and Mexico 
were agitated by a revolution, Peru re- 
mained quiet. But in 1S21, Gen. San 
Martin raised an army of 6000 men, 
drove the royalist forces from Lima, 
and took possession of that city. The 
country was then declared independent. 

7. But after this, the people became 
dissatisfied with the change, and every- 
thing was thrown into confusion. The 
royalist forces returned to Lima, and 
for a time the spirit of liberty was put 
down. Soon after this, Bolivar march- 
ed into the interior from Colombia, 
with a considerable army, and drove 
the S])anish troops back into the coun- 
try. They were finally defeated by 
the patriots, under General "Sucre, and 
from this time all resistance ceased. A 
constitution was now formed similar to 
that of Colombia, and in 1825 the new 
government went into operation. 

slain 1 5. What of Peru after Pizarro’s death '? 

Describe the earthquake at Lima in 1747. At 
Callao 1 6. Peru 1 San Martin 1 The country 1 

7. What after this 1 Bolivar 1 Gen. Sucre 1 
Constitution 1 What happened in 1825 1 


154 


THE CHILD S FIRST BOOK OF HISTORV. 


CHAP. LXXIII. 

BOLIVIA. 

1. If we continue our travels to the 
south, from Peru, we shall soon reach 
Bolivia ; a coimtry remarkable for its 
great elevation, and for its fertile val- 
leys and plains. The great chain of 
the Andes passes through it from north 
to south, and here, as in other parts of 
South America, their peaks are cover- 
ed with perpetual snow. The country 
has rich mines of silver, though they 
are less productive than formerly. 

2. Every new place presents some- 
thing interesting to a traveller, and in 
these regions, we shall constantly find 
objects to excite our attention. The 
lofty mountains, with peaks glittering 
in the sun, the deep valleys, the roaring 
waterfalls, the strange wild animals, and 
the singular people, will not fail to 
atibrd constant themes of amusement. 

3. We must be particular to visit j 
Potosi. It is now a decayed to^vn, but 
once contained 160,000 inhabitants. 
Tlie mines were then the richest in 
South America, and are said to have 
been discovered in a very singular 
manner. Soon after the country was 
conquered by the Spaniards, an Indian 
who was climbing the mountain in pur- 
suit of a deer, laid hold of a shrub 
which came up by the roots. To his 
great surprise, he saw a large mass of 
silver beneath where it grew. He told 
the secret to a friend of his, who dis- 
closed it to otliers. The mine was first 

^ opened in 1545. The quantity of sil- 
ver that has been taken from these 

\ ^ ^ — 

Questions on the Map of South America . — 
Boundaries 1 Mountains 1 Describe tlie Lake 
Titicaca. Describe the Vermejo R. Pilcom- 
ajo ? Capital '? Direction of Cbnqnisica from 
Lima 1 Santa Fe T Where is Potosi I 


mines is prodigious, but it is now near- 
ly exhausted. 

4. Some of the principal towns are 
La Plata or Chuquisica, the capital, 
Oropesa, situated in a district of remark- 
able fertility, and La Paz. The greater 
part of the country, which is now em- 
braced within the limits of Bolivia, was 
originally a division of Peru, and came 
into the hands of the Spaniards, at the 
conquest of that country. It remained 
attached to Peru, until the year 1824. 
At that time, a patriot army under 
General Sucre defeated the royalists, 
and on the 6th of July, 1825, the coun- 
try was declared independent. 

5. In August of the same year, the 
Congress met, and adopted a constitu- 
tion, the plan of which was furnished 
by Bolivar. The republic thus estab- 
lished embraced not only a section of 
Peru, but some fertile districts, which 
had before been attached to Buenos 
Ayres. The name Bolivia was adopt- 
ed in Jionor of Bolivar. 

CHAP. LXXIV. 

^ CHILI. 

1. We shall find Chili to be a long 

1. For wbat is Bolivia remarkable 1 The 
Andes 1 Mines'? 3. Potosi'? How were the 
mines of Potosi discovered ■? 4. Principal 

towns'? Country of Bolivia '? AVhat took place 
in 1824'? What on the 6th of .July, 1825'? 5. 

What in August 1 What did the Republic em- 
brace '? What of the name Bolivia 1 

Questions on the Map of South America . — . 
Boundaries of Chili 1 Shape of Chili'? Moun- 
tains ■? Capital '? Direction of Santiago from 
Quito '? Lima 1 Chuquisica '? Describe the 
following towns : Copiapo, La Serena, Valparai- 
so, Valdivia, Conception. Where is the island of 
.Tuan Fernandez 1 Chiloe island"? Extent 1 Ans 
About one tenth part that of the United States 
Population'? Ans. 1,200,000. 


THE child S5 first book of history. 


155 


narrow strip of land, lying between 
the Andes and the Pacific Ocean. As 
we pursue our journey to the south, 
we shall cross a great many rapid 
streams, which rush down from the 
mountains and plunge into the sea. 
We shall notice that the climate of 
Chili is delightful, and the soil very 
fertile. We shall observe vast meadows 
covered with grass so high, as to con- 
ceal the cattle that are grazing in them. 

2. We shall find on the hills, rich 
vineyards, from which the people make 
a great deal of wine. If we turn our 
attention to the Andes, we shall ob- 
serve that many of the peaks are volca- 
nic. At night, when all around us is 
still, we shall hear them muttering in 
the distance, and we shall often see 
smoke and flames streaming from their 
lops. If we turn our eyes to the west, 
we shall see the mighty Pacific, the 
largest of all oceans, reaching far be- 
yond our sight, and wrapping one third 
of our globe in its immense sheet. 

3. Santiago, or St Jago, the capital, 
is situated on a beautiful plain, ninety 
miles from Valparaiso. At the latter 
place, we shall find vessels from New 
York, Philadelphia, and Boston; and 
we shall probably see there, some per- 
sons we are acquainted with. After 
having been so long from home, we 
shall be delighted lo meet with some 
of our own countrymen, and hear news 
from our friends. 

4. If we are not tired of visiting 
mines, we can go and see those of 
Chili, which are very prolific. If we 
are in search of adventures, we may 
visit the Araucanians, a tribe of In- 


dians, who inhabit the mountains in 
the southern part of Chili. They are 
a bold race of men, Avho love to be 
free, and the Spaniards have attempted 
in vain to conquer them. 

5. About the year 1538, while Pi- 
zarro was engaged in the conquest of 
Peru, he sent one of his generals, and 
a small body of men, to subdue the In- 
dian tribes then living in Chili. This 
general, whose name was Almagro, was 
at first well received by the natives. 
But perceiving that the Spaniards only 
came to enslave them, they fought Al- 
magro and his army, and obliged them 
to quit the country. 

0. In 1540, another army was sent 
to Chili, under Valdivia. He overcame 
all resistance, and founded a number of 
cities both at the north and south. In 
the year 1543, the chief of the Arauca- 
nians collected his warriors, and went 
against Valdivia, who was then at San- 
tiago. A fierce engagement followed, 
and the Spaniards were cut to pieces. 
Valdivia himself was taken and after- 
wards killed. 

7. For more than a century after 
this, the Araucanians continued at in- 
tervals to annoy the Spanish settlements, 
and to this day they entertain a strong 
aversion to the wh4e people. From 
the conquest of Chili by Valdivia, to 
the year 1810, it was a Spanish province. 
At that date, revolutionary movements 
began. — After many vicissitudes, the 
independence of the country was secur- 
ed, by the decisive victory gained by 
San Martin over the royalists, in 1817. 

8. Some attempts were afterwards 
made by the royalists to recover their 


1 . ChiW't Rivers'? Climate "I Soil 1 
Meadows'? 2. Vineyards'? Andes'? The Pa- 
cific '? 3. Santiago'? Valparaiso'? 4. Mines 1 

Araucanians'? 5. What took place about the 
year ’ What did the Indians do '? 6. 


Valdivia ? What occurred in 1543 ? State of 
Valdivia"? 7. Aravicanians 1 Chili? What oc- 
curred in 1810 ? What took place in 1817 ? 8. 

! Royalists ? Note. The reader will understand 
[that die Royalists were the friends of Spain, and 
k2 


156 


TUB child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


power, but their troops were defeated, 
and finally expelled from the country. 
The government remains in an unset- 
tled state; but the people will, no doubt, 
soon establish a free constitution. 

9. You will observe on the map, a 
small island near the coast of Chili, 
called Juan Fernandez. A Scotch sai- 
lor, by the name of Alexander Selkirk, 
was* left upon this island in the year 
1705, and here he remained four years. 
He had no other com])anions than cats 
and goats. He built himself a house, 
read his bible, and sometimes danced 
with the kids and kittens in front of his 
dw^elling. At length, he was taken off, 
and carried to England. His adven- 
tures gave rise to the interesting story 

of Robinson Crusoe. 

• 

CHAP. LXXV. 

PATAGONIA. 

t 

1. To the south of Chili, is a large 
country called Patagonia. But it will 
not do for us to travel there, for seve- 
ral reasons. In the first place, we 
should have to pass through the coun- 
try of the Araucanians, and these fierce 
people might kill us. In the second 
place, Patagonia is a dreary, desolate 
and barren region; the western part 
consisting of high mountains, and the 
eastern of sterile plains. The inhabit- 
ants are some of them fierce and sav- 
age; and it is said that there are men 
among them almost as large as giants. 

2. The peo])le have no towns, but 

wished the country to reniuin a Spanish province. 
Government! 9. Juan Fernandez ! 

Questions on the Map of South America . — 
Boundaries of Patagonia ! Mountains ! Where 

TTcira del Fuego! Where are the Falkland 
i Where is Aurora Island ! Georgia ! 
(Ifladre de Dios ! Campana ! Archipelago of 


wander from place to place, dwelling 
in huts made of trees and bushes. Their 
dress is made of the’ skins of wild 
beasts; they have a great many horses, 
and the men, wmmen and children ride 
extremely well. They sometimes en- 
gage in pursuing a species of Ostrich, 
which is common in the country. These 
birds cannot fly, but they run very 
swiftly. The Patagonians chase them. 

I on horseback, and when they get near, 
throw clubs at them, and kill them. 



A Patagonian chasing Ostriches. 

O O 


3. At the extreme point of South 
America is a large island, separated 
from the continent by the Straits of 
Magellan, called Terra del Fuego, or 
the Land of Fire. It is a cold, wild re- 
gion, covered with mountains, whose 
tops are always buried in snow. Seve- 
ral of these are volcanic, and the sailors, 
in passing round Cape Horn, often see 

: them blazing at night in the sky. 

4. The shores of this island are 
rocky, and the restless ocean beats 
upon them with an incessant roar. 
The inhabitants are short, and live 
chiefly upon fish. They are a misera- 

Chonos ! East I. ! West I. ! Staten ! Where 
is Cape Horn 1 Cape St Lucas ! Cape Blanco 1 

1. Why should we not travel in Patagonia 
2. Inhabitants ! Dress ! Horses ! The Oa* 
trich ! Describe the picture. 3. Terra 


THE CHILD'S FIRST BOOK OF HISTORY. 


157 


ble race, bearing some resemblance to 
the Esquimaux. 

5. Patagonia was first discovered 
about the year 1519, by a famous Span- 
ish navigator, called Magellan. He 
anchored on the eastern coast, and 
there he saw a race of wild gigantic 
people, who made a noise like bulls. 
One of them came on board the ship, 
and when an officer placed a looking- 
glass before him, he started back at the 
sight of his own hideous face, and knock- 
ed down two of the sailors. Some 
others came on board, and were so 
much astonislied at what they saw, 
that they pointed to the skies, seeming 
to ask the Spaniards if they came down 
from heaven. 

6. Macrellan discovered the straits 

o 

which are called by his name, and for 
! many years, vessels going to the Paci- 
[ fic, used to pass through them. But the 
passage was very difficult, and danger- 
I ous ; and Cape Horn being soon after 
discovered, vessels, since that time, 
j have been accustomed to pass round it, 
j in going from the Atlantic to the Pa- 
[ cific. But the voyage is still consider- 
j ed a dangerous one. 

I 7. A great many ships have occa- 
j sionally touched upon the coast of Pat- 
agonia, but no traveller has ever pene- 
trated into the interior. We have there- 
fore no very exact account either of 
the inhabitants or the country. The 
former are divided into various tribes; 
some of which are savage, and some 
gentle and harmless. They appear to 
remain in the same state of ignorance, 
degradation, and barbarism, as when 
first discovered. 

Fuego'? Volcanoes'? 4. Sliores ”? Inlialtifanis ? 
f). Discovery of Patagonia 1 Describe tlie peo- 
. ^le Magellan saw. 6. Straits of Magellan 'I 
f,ape Horn? 7. Inhabitants of Patagonia? 
fheir condition ? 


CHAP. LXXVI. 

UNITED PROVINCES. 

1 . There are two ways by which 
we may go from Chili to the United 
Provinces. We may either travel across 
the Andes, or go on board a ship at 
Valparaiso, pass around Cape Horn, 
enter the mouth of the great River La 
Plata, and land near Buenos Ayres, the 
capital of the country. If we were to 
adopt this course, I should have time to 
tell you of several islands, which you 
will see on the Map, to the east of 
Terra del Fuego. 

2. These are cold, frozen places, 
where we may meet with vessels from 
New Entfland, which visit these islands 
for the purpose of catching seals. But 
the voyage round Cape Horn is always 
tempestuous, and as I love to wander 
among mountains, I think I shall take 
you to Buenos Ayres, by the route first 
mentioned. 

3. Well ! having provided ourselves 
with mules, we must mount their backs, 
and travel in an easterly direction : we 
shall soon be among the mountains, 
and for several days, shall be climbing 

Questions on the Map of South America . — 
Boundaries of the United Provinces ? Note. This 
' country is sometimes called Buenos Ayres, or the 
j United Provinces of Buenos Ayies. JMountains? 
j Describe the following rivers : Rio de la Plata, 
Salado, Salladillo, Cf)lorado, Negro, Willows 
I Vermejo, Pilcomajo, Willows. Where is Ane- 
1 gada Bay ? Capital ? Direction of Buenos Ayres 
j from Santiago ? Rio Janeiro ? Quito ? New 
1 York ? Washington ? Describe the following 
! towns : Santa Fe, Cordova, Tucuman, Monte- 
j Video, Assumption. 

j 1. How may we go from Chili to the United 
.Provinces? 2. What of the islands southeast 
'of 'J’erra del Fuego? What of a voyage round 
j Cape Horn ? 3. In what manner must we trav^ 

j el from Santiago to Buenos Ayres ? What mounf 


13^ 


158 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. ^ 


over rocks and ridges, descending into 
dark ravines, and creeping with a trem- 
bling step along the edges of high, and 
dangerous precipices. 

4. Captain Head, an Englishman, 
crossed these mountains a few years 
ago, in company with some other trav- 
ellers. One day a horse, belonging to 
the party, fell partly over a precipice. 
The poor animal was aware of his dan- 
ger, and hung on to the edge of the 
rock with his nose and fore legs. One 
of the men then came up, slipped a 
noose round his tail, and thus pulled 
him back into the path. 

5. On another occasion, a terrible 
accident happened to a mule. The 
creature was loaded with a portman- 
teau, two large sacks of provisions, and 
many other things. As he was walk- 
ing along upon a tremendous clifl’, the 
baggage struck the point of a rock, and 
threw his hind legs over the precipice. 
He held on for a time with his nose, 
but the next mule that came along, gave 
it a kno'ck, and down went the poor 
animal, whirling and bounding like a 



Travelling among the Andes 
ball. He fell with a tremendous plash 
into a torrent beneath, and the party 
supposed he was lost. But by and 

tains do we cross 'i Describe our passage through 
the mountains. 4. What of Capt. Head 1 One 
vf the horses 1 5 . One of the mules I Describe 


by, he came marching up to them, tlie 
baggage still lashed to his body. He 
had a very sad countenance, which 
seemed to say, that he was very much 
ashamed of what had happened. 

6. It is very probable that we shall 
meet with some jaguars, cougars and 
other wild animals on our journey. 
We shall also frequently see some la- 
zy, hateful looking birds called con- 
dors. These feed chiefly upon dead 
animals. We shall have no difficulty 
in killing one, though they are larger 
than turkeys. But I advise you not to 
touch one of them, for they are filthy 
creatures, and have a most uncomfort- 
able smell. 

7. After leaving the mountains, we 
shall pass through some fertile districts, 
and at length reach the Pampas. These 
are of immense extent, and are cover- 
ed with wild horses and wild cattle. 
We shall see the people occupied in 
catching them with a rope called a 
lasso. This is wound round the arm 
of a man on horseback, who approach- ' 
es the creature he wishes to take, throws 
the rope with unerring skill, and fastens 
the noose at the end of it, around the 
neck or leg of the animal. In this w^ay, 
the people supply themselves wdtli 
abundance of cattle and horses. 

8. We shall finally arrive at Buenos 
Ayres, which is larger than Boston, 
and beautifully situated on the south 
side of the La Plata. The town is reg- 
ularly built, but not more than one 
fourth of the inhabitants are white; 
the rest are Indians, negroes, and mix- 
ed races. 

9. The United Provinces are a very 
extensive country, being one half as 
large as the United States. The popu- 

the picture. 6. Wild animals 1 Condors'? 7. 
Pampas '? Lasso ”? 8. Size of Buenos Ayres % 

Situation 1 Inhabitants 1 9. Extent of the 


THE CHILD S FIRST BOOK OF HISTORY. 


159 


lation is probably a million and a half. 
The land consists of a great plain, trav- 
ersed by several large rivers. The soil 
is exceedingly fertile, and produces 
abundance of grain, though it is badly 
cultivated. 

10. Monte Video and Assumption 
are both considerable places. But we 
shall not be disposed to stay long in 
this country, for they have terrible 
storms of thunder and lightning there. 
Beside, the people are for the most part 
ignorant and indolent, and except in the 
large towns, they generally live in mis- 
erable huts. 

11. This part of America was first 
discovered by Juan Dios de Solis, in 
1510. He entered the river La Plata, 
and sailed along the northern coast in 
a boat. Here he saw some Indians, I 
who seemed by their gestures to invite j 
him to land. Taking a part of his men! 
with him, he accordingly went ashore; 
but in a little while, the savages sur- 
rounded them, and killed and devoured 
them in sight of their companions in 
the boat, who found it impossible to 
render them any assistance. 

12. In 1520, Sebastian Cabot ex- 
plored the La Plata, and gave it its ! 
name, which signifies the river of silver. I 
In the year 1535, Don Pedro de Men-j 
doza, came to the country with 2500 
Spaniards, and founded the city of Bue- 
nos Ayres. They found the country 
inhabited by many tribes of Indians, 
who brought them provisions, and at 
first treated them kindly. But they 
soon became hostile, attacked the city, | 
killed thirty of the settlers, and burnt 
almost all the houses. 

13. After this, the colonists were 


distressed by famine, and most of them 
died. The remainder left Buenos 
Ayres, and went to Assumption, which 
had already been founded. In a short 
time, more adventurers came from 
Spain. But the colony did not flourish 
till about the year 1540, when Don Al- 
varez became governor. He secured 
the friendship of the Indians, and con- 
j verted many of them to the Christian 
! faith. Under his auspices, the colony 
flourished, and several towns were 
founded. 

14. The story of the immense 
wealth found by Pizarro in Peru, had 
now been spread over all Europe, and 
everybody was inflamed with a desire 
to share in the golden harvest. Alva- 
rez determined to cross the country to 
Peru, though the distance was very 
great, and the wilderness filled with 
savages. 

15. Accordingly, he set out with 
300 men, and after meeting with strange 
adventures, he finally came to an In- 
dian town, consisting of 8000 houses. 
In the centre of it was a lofty tower of 
wood, containing a monstrous serpent, 
which the people worshipped. Alva- 
rez attacked this town, which he cap- 
tured ; destroyed the tower, and being 
unable to proceed farther; returned to 
the settlements on the La Plata. 

1(). In the year 1586, some Jesuits 
came to the country, and undertook to 
convert the Indians. These men went 
fearlessly among the savages, followed 
them into the wilderness, and conducted 
with such a mixture of mildness and 
courage, as to gain their favor. They 
at lengh listened to these ministers of 
the Gospel, and thus many of the tribes 


United Provinces 
country 1 Soil 1 
ticn '? Storms '? 
Fate of Solis 1 


1 Po|>ulation 1 Face of the j doza "I The Indians 1 13 . Famine's Assump- 

10 . Monte Video 1 Assmiij)- tion “f What took place in 1540 1 What did 
People 1 11 . Discovery 1 j Alvarez do 1 14 . Why did Alvarez determine 

12 . Sebastian Cabot 1 Men- | to cross the country to Peru 1 15 . Describe the 

ii 


160 


THE CHILD S FIRST BOOK OP HISTORiT. 


were eventually converted to Cliristian- 
ity. There appears to be no instance, 
either in the history of North or South 
America, in which missionary labors 
among the natives have proved so suc- 
cessful as here. 

17. For many years after the set- 
tlement of the country, gold and silver 
were the principal objects of pursuit. 
But these not being found, the attention 
of the people was gradually turned 
to agriculture. The colony continued 
to increase ; the hostility of the Indians 
abated; and many of them became 
mingled with the white inhabitants. 
Thus under the dominion of Spain, the 
affairs of the country went on, till the 
vear 1806. At that time, a British 
force captured the city of Buenos 
Ayres, but in a few months, they were 
driven out by an army collected from 
the neighboring country. 

18. In the year 1810, the people, 
finding that Spain, the mother country, 
was overrun by the French armies, 
formed a government for themselves, 
and this is now considered by the peo- 
ple, as the date of their independence. 
But from that time to the present, the 
government has been in a very unset- 
tled state. After a long struggle, the 
royalists were expelled from the coiin- 
trv, and peace was made with Spain in 
182.3. 

19. Since that time, a war has taken 
place with Brazil, but its results were 
not important. The country still con- 
tinues to be agitated Avith internal di- 
visions, but these will probably cease 


expedition of Alvarez. 16. Jesuits 1 17. Gold 

and silver? Agriculture? Wluit of the country 
till 1806 ? What occurred during that year ? I 
18. What occurred in 1810 ? State of the coun- 
try since that time? Royalists? What took 
place in 182.3 ? 19. War with Brazil ? State 

of the country ? 


in a short time, and the government, 
which is republican, will no doubt be-, 
come established. 

CHAP. LXXVII. 

BRAZIL. 

1. How shall we go from Buenos 
Ayres to Brazil? We may enter a ves- 
sel sail down the La Plata, and pro- 
ceed to Rio Janeiro, the capital. But 
I tnink it would be pleasanter to as- 
cend the Parana, visit Assumption, and 
then cross the mountains to Rio Janei 
ro. We shall find the country along 
the Parana in the highest degree fer- 
tile and beautiful. We shall pass 
through some forests, where the trees 
and shrubs are so thick and tangled, as 
to render our progress slow and diffi- 
cult. At night Ave shall be obliged to 
sleep in the Avoods, and our ears AAdll 
be filled Avith the hoA\d of the jaguar and 
cougar. By day Ave shall be saluted 
by the chattering of hundreds of mon- 
keys upon the trees, and Ave shall see 
parrots, parroquets, and other bright 
winged birds Avithout number. 

2. At length, Ave shall reach the 
mountains, and here Ave shall find a 
great many people engaged in Avashing 


Questions on the Map of South America . — 
Boundaries of Brazil ? Where are the Itial)aba 
Mts? Great Mts ? Where is tlie Bay of All 
Saints ? Where is Lake de los Palos ? Describe 
the following rivers : Amazon, St Francisco, 
Tocantins, Araguay, Parana, Tapajos, Madeira, 
Parnaibo, Xingu. Capital ? Direction of Rio 
Janeiro from Buenos Ayres ? Santiago ? Cpiito ? 
Describe the following towns: Villa Boa, Olinda, 
Paracuta, Cuiaba, Villa Rica, Spirito Santo, St 
Francisco, Para, Pernambuco, St Salvador, Ma- 
capa, Santos. 

1. How may you go by water from Buenos 
Ayres to Brazil ? How by land 1 Country along 


THK CHILD S FIRST BOOK OF HISTORY. 


161 


gold dust, and diamonds from the sand. 
We shall observe that the trade be- 
tween these districts and the capital, is 
carried on by innumerable troops of 
mules. The common burthen of a 
mule is three hundred pounds, and he 
often carries it to the distance of 1000 
miles. At length, after a tedious jour- 
ney, we shall reach Rio Janeiro, which 
is one of the finest cities in South 
America. The harbor is excellent, 
and here we shall find ships from all 
parts of the world. Among the cap- 
tains of the vessels, we shall no doubt 
be able to find some of our acquaint- 
ances, and again hear news from our 
own country. 

3. The streets of Rio Janeiro are 
dirty, but there are several pleasant 
walks, and handsome squares. The 
churches are very splendid, and the 
people, who are Catholics, are exceed- 
ingly fond of religious shows and pro- 
cessions. Every day, the priests may 
be seen marching about in strange 
dresses, and the people look upon them 
with great reverence. 

4. We shall here have a chance of 
seeing an emperor. He is a man who 
lives in a great palace, has fine horses, 
rides in a spendid coach, and makes all 
the people obey him. When he goes 
abroad, he is attended by a guard of 
armed men, so as to protect him from 
mischief. 

5. Brazil is a country of vast extent, 
being somewhat larger than the Uni- 
ted States, and embracing about one 
third part of all South America. The 
population is about 4,000,000. The 
interior is almost entirely inhabited by 
tribes of Indians, who live in a savage 

the Parana 1 Forests 1 2. Mountains 1 Trade 1 

Rio Janeiro'? Harbor "I Ships 1 3. Streets'? 

Churches 1 People ? Priests '? 4. Emperor "? 

Extent of Brazil '? Population '? Ind.'ans '? 


state. The country generally is ex- 
ceedingly fertile, and large portions of 
it are covered by thick forests filled 
with serpents, monkeys, jaguars, and 
other wild animals. There is no part 
of the globe so loaded with vegetation 
as this. Where the land is cultivated, 
it yields an abundant harvest. Delicious 
fruits are produced in abundance, and the 
very air is perfumed with the fragrance 
of spices, that grow in the forests. 

6. It would be a very pleasant thing 
to trav^el into the interior of this wild 
country, were it not for the hideous al- 
ligators, that throng the rivers, the ter- 
rible serpents that lie coiled in the 
thickets, and the sly jaguars that infest 
the woods and plains. 

7. Brazil was first discovered in the 
year 1503, by Pedro Alvarez Cabral, a 
Portuguese navigator. He landed on 
the coast, erected a cross under a spread- 
ing tree, and there performed the cath- 
olic ceremony of mass, amid bursts of 
music, and peals of cannon. The In- 
dians flocked to the spot in crowds to 

I witness this strange celebration, and 
the catholic writers say, that multitudes 
of them were miraculously conve’-ted 
to the Christian faith. 

8. Cabral having thus taken posses- 
sion of the country, called it Santa Cruz, 
or the holy cross. The name was af- 
terwards altered to Brazil, from a pecu- 
liar tree found in the country, called 
Brasas. He sent an account of his dis 
covery to the king of Portugal. But as 
no gold and silver were discovered in 
the country, the Portuguese only thought 
it a fit place for condemned criminals. 
Accordingly they sent there two ships a 
year, loaded with thieves, robbers, and 

Country'? Forests 1 Vegetation? 6. Alliga- 
tors? Serpents? Jaguars? 7. Discovery of 
Brazil ? 8. Name .f Brazil ? What did the 

Portuguese think of Brazil ? Who were sent there 1 


162 


TUB child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


other scoundrels, who ^vere left to 
take care of themselves. The vessels 
then took in a cargo of parrots and 
dye woods, and returned to Portugal. 

9. In the year 1548, the Jews in 
Portugal were persecuted, by some 
Catholics, called Inquisitors, and many 
of them were consequently banished to 
Brazil. These industrious people began 
to cultivate the land, which was found 
very prolific ; and in a short time, the col- 
ony was deemed of such importance, 
that the king sent out Thomas de Sousa 
to govern it. 

10. St Salvador was founded in the 
year 1549, and is the oldest town in 
Brazil. From this period the colony 
continued to flourish, and soon attract- 
ed the attention of the various govern- 
ments of Europe. The Dutch became 
eager to possess a part of the country, 
and made various attempts to eflect that! 
object. Butin 16(31, they relinquished 
their design, for eight tons of gold, 
which the king of Portugal gave them. 

11. From this date, till the year 
1806, the country remained in quiet 
possession of the king of Portugal. 
But at that time, Portugal being invaded 
by the French, the royal flimily left 
their country, and embarked for Brazil. 
In 1821, the King, John VI., returned 
to Lisbon, leaving the government in 
the charge of his son, Don Pedro. In 
1823, Brazil became independent, and 
since that time has remained under 
the government of Don Pedro, who is 
still emperor. Beside him, there is no 
other king, or emperor, on the whole! 
continent of America, and it is to be! 
hoped there may never be any more. 


What cargoes did the vessels take in 1 9. Jews 1 ^ 

Thomas de Sousa'? ]0. St Salvador 1 The' 
Dutch'? What occurred in 16611 11. Wliat 

in 18061 In 18211 In 18231 Who is the 
only king or emperor 1 \ 


CHAP. LXXVIII 

GUIANA. 

1. Guiana is situated in the north- 
eastern part of South America, and con- 
sists of three colonies ; one belonging to 
the English; one to the Dutch; and 
one to the French. Stabroek is the 
capital of the first, Paramaribo of the 
second, and Cayenne of the last. 

2. The country along the coast i 
so low and flat, as to appear, when ap- 
proached from the water, like a forest 
growing out of the sea. Yet these low 
lands are exceedingly fertile, abound- 
ing with every variety of delicious fruit. 
The air is always mild and balmy, and 
at all seasons, the trees are adorned 
with the open blossom and the ripe 
fruit. The climate seems to present a 
delightful union of spring and summer. 

3. The European settlers principal- 
ly live along the coast. The interior 
is inhabited by Indians, and has not 
been much explored. It api)ears to 
consist of hills and mountains, with 
valleys between, through which rivers 
flow to the sea. The country is cov- 
ered with woods ; and in some places 
the trees are so thick, and so woven 
together by creeping plants, as to form 
an impenetrable shade. These dusky 
thickets are the favorite haunts of the 
jaguar, cougar, and other wild ani- 
mals. 

4. As we shall not find it pleasant 
to travel here, I will tell you the story 
of Captain Waterton, an eccentric 

Questions on the Map of South America.-^ 
Boundaries "? Where is Lake 7'umucuraque 1 
Describe Essequibo River. Where is Stabroek 1 
Cayenne “? Paramaribo 1 

1. Situation of Guiana'? Division “I 2 
Country along tlie coast'? Soil'? Climated 8 . 
European '•ettlers '? Indians '? The interior 'I 


THB CHILD 6 FlRin BOOK OF HISTORY. 


163 


Englishman, who traveried the wilds 
of Guiana some years ago. He left the 
town of Stabroek in 1812, and proceed- 
ed up the river Demarara in a boat, in 
a southerly direction. 

5. He soon passed the limits of the 
white population, and entered the coun- 
try of the Indians. The weather here 
is always hot, and these people go al- 
most naked. They live in small huts, and 
€ubsist chiefly upon birds and animals, 
which they kill in a very singular man- 
ner. They have a long tube, made of 
a reed ; into this they put an arrow, 
the sharp point of which is dipped in 
wourali poison. They then blow the 
arrow out with great force ; it flies 
through the air, and being well aimed, 
strikes the animal toward which it is 
directed. The poison is very active, 
and in a few minutes, the creature struck 
with the arrow, is dead. It is then 
taken and eaten, the flesh not being at 
all injured by the poison. 

6. I must tell you something now 
about this strange poison. It is made 
by these Indians from a vine found in 
the woods, called wourali. They mix 



Indian ehooling a poisoned Arrow at a Peccary. 

with this vine some other plants, the 
fangs of serpents, two kinds of poison- 
ous ants, and a good deal of pepper. 
These are all boiled together in water, 


and the liquor thus obtained, is the fa- 
mous wourali poison. The Indians 
prepare the mixture with magical cere- 
monies and solemn incantations. They 
appear to have a great deal of supersti- 
tion about it. 

7. Mr Watcrton met with abun- 
dance of peccaries, which are a kind of 
pig. He saw droves of two or three 
hundred. The Indians shoot a great 
many of them with their arrows, and 
find them excellent eating. He saw 
animals resembling tigers, whole troops 
of monkeys, armadillos, ant-bears, poi 
cupines, and a very singular animal 
called the sloth. This creature is only 
at home on the trees. If he happens 
to get upon the ground, he cries in a 
piteous manner, and appears to be as 
unhappy as a fish upon the land. 

8. Mr Waterton also saw alligators 
in the river, and flocks of parrots, par- 
roquets, and other birds among the 
trees. He also saw serpents called 
camoudies^ which are of monstrous size, 
and crush animals to death, by coiling 
around tlieir bodies. He met with 
many other serpents, some harmless, 
and some poisonous. 

9. Our traveller went a great many 
miles into the wilderness, and often 
slept at night upon the banks of the 
river. But myriads of fire-flies illu- 
mined the darkness, and birds and beasts 
filled the solitude with their strange 
voices. A multitude of owls screeched 
and hooted in the most doleful manner; 
whippoorwills repeated their songs ; 
and other birds kept chanting ‘ \V'’iily- 
come-go, \Yilly-come-go ’ for hours to- 
gether. 

10. Mr Waterton was at length 
taken sick, and finally returned to 
Stabroek, and then went to England. 
But in 1816, he came again to Guiana, 

Capt. Waterton’s first expedition. 10 Whoa did 


Woods 1 Animals 1 4. Repeat the story of 


164 


TUB child’* first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


ftlid again began his wanderings. He j 
made several expeditions, and on one 
occasion had a very remarkable adven- 
ture with an alligator, or cayman. 
This hideous reptile was first caught in 
the river by a hook with a rope attach- 
ed to it. The Indians then pulled him 
to the shore, and Water ton, who was a 
fearless man, leaped upon his back, 
twisted his fore legs over his neck, and 
rode him safely to the land, amid the 
shouts of the savages. 



Capt. Waterton on the Alligator’s Back. 


11. I cannot tell you of all the I 
strange things which Mr Waterton did 
and saw. He once caught a camoudi 
snake, which he carried home alive; 
and he saw a great many strange bats, 
called vampires, which come down si- 
lently at night and suck the blood from 
people’s feet, when they are asleep. 

12. Guiana is said to have been dis- 
covered by Columbus, in the year 1498. 
In 1504, Vasco Nunes landed on the 
coast, and gave it the name of Terra 
Firma. But the country was not ex- 
plored till about the year 159*5, when 
Sir Walter Raleigh came from Eng- 
land in search of an imaginary king- 
dom, called El Dorado. 

13. I must tell my reader, that atj 

Mr Waterton come a second time to Guiana'?'! 
Relate his adventure with an alligator. Describe '! 
lh« picture. 11. What of the camoudi snake '?!| 


i this period, the interior of South Amer- 
ica had not been explored. Along the 
sea-board, as well on the eastern as 
the western side, the inhabitants gen- 
erally believed in the existence of a 
vast empire, situated near the heart of 
the continent. The most remarkable 
stories were told about this country. 
It was said to surpass Mexico and Pe- 
ru, in riches. The capital city, called 
Manoah, was reported to have 3000 
persons in one street employed in 
working silver. The columns of the 
palace were said to be of porphyry and 
alabaster ; the galleries of ebony and 
cedar; the throne of ivory, and the as- 
cent to it by steps of gold. In the 
country it was affirmed that there wero 
hills of silver, gold and salt. 

14. The king of this realm, called 
the Great Moxos, Avas represented as 
living in the utmost splendor. It was 
said that he Avas anointed with costly 
gums and spices, and that Avhen he Avenl 
abroad, he Avas covered Avith gold. 
On this account, he was called El Do- 
rado, or the gilded; and this name Avas 
afterwards transferred to the empire 
itself. 

15. Such Avere the gorgeous de- 
scriptions of this imaginary realm ; and 
as feAV persons doubled its real exist- 
ence, a great many adventurers came to 
America in search of it. The Spanish 
government spent millions of dollars, 
and hundreds of brave men perished 
in these idle enterprizes. 

16. Sir Walter Raleigh heard ol 
this famous kingdom, and at the time 
before mentioned, came to South 
America, determined to penetrate into 
the country in search of this Avonderful 
place. He first visited Guiana, ex- 

I Vampires 'I 12. Discovery of Guiana 1 Vasco 
I Nunes landed '? Sir Walter Raleiglj ? El Dora., 

I do 1 16. What of Raleigh’s expedition ? 17 


THE child » FIRST BOOK OF HISTORY. 


161 


plored the coast, and finally sailed up 
the Orinoco to the distance of 600 
miles ; but not being able to discover 
the kingdom he sought, he returned to 
England. 

17. About the year 1634, sixty 
English and French people had settled 
in Surinam, now called Dutch Guiana. 
In 1650, the inhabitants having increas- 
ed, they were taken under the protec- 
tion of Great Britain. In 1667, this 
colony was taken by the Dutch, and 
was finally relinquished to them by the 
British in 1674, in exchange for the 
province of New York. 

18. Similar settlements were made 
by other European powers, on differ- 
ent parts of the coast. The Spanish 
and Portuguese, as well as the English, 
French and Dutch, had each a colony 
here. But Spanish Guiana is now in- 
corporated with Colombia, and Portu- 
guese Guiana now constitutes a part of 
Brazil. 

CHAP. LXXIX. 

WEST INDIES. 

1 . In returning from Rio Janeiro, 
we shall pass between the West In- 
dia islands. These are very numerous, 
and lie scattered in the sea between 
Florida and the northern coast of South 
America. We shall meet with a great 
many vessels from all parts of Europe 

What of the year 1634 1 What of 1650 1 
16671 16741 18. Spanish colony in Guiana 1 

Portuguese 1 

questions on the Map of West Indies . — 
Direction of Cuba from New York 1 New Or- 
leans 1 City of Guatiinalal City of Mexico 1 
Direction of the following islands from Culia 1 
Hayti, Porto Rico, Jamaica, Santa Cruz, An- 
ngua, Gautlaloupe, Dominica, Martinico, Trini- 
4ad, Tobago, Barbacloes. 


! and America, going to these islands t® 
get sugar, coffee, rum, tobacco, oranges, 
lemons, pine-apples and other fruit. 

2. We must stop awhile at Havang 
in Cuba. In that noble harbor, we 
shall see a multitude of ships, and we 
shall easily find in the city, persons from 
Boston, New London, New York, Phil- 
adelphia, Charleston, and other towns 
in the United States. These people 
bring horses, cattle, hogs, lumber, fur- 
niture, potatoes, onions, and many oth- 
er articles, which they -exchange for 
the produce of the islands. We must 
be sure and eat some of the oranges, 
pine-apples, and other delicious fruit, 
which we shall find here, as cheap as 
apples and pears in our own country. 

3. We must not stay long in the 
West Indies, for the weather is hot at 
all seasons of the year, and there is 
great danger of the yellow fever. We 
must also beware of the dreadful hur- 
ricanes, which sometimes prostrate the 
houses, and dash the vessels to pieces 
upon the shore. 

4. Cuba is the largest of the West 
India islands, and is nearly as extensive 
as all New England. It belongs to 
Spain, and contains about 700,000 in- 
habitants. Most of these are negro 
slaves who raise tobacco, sugar, and 
coffee on the plantations. Havana is 
the capital, and contains about as many 
inhabitants as Boston. Its harbor is 
one of the best in the world. 

5. This . island was d’iscovered by 
Columbus in 1492. The Indians at 
first ffed away, but after awhile they 
came back, and kissed the feet of the 
Spaniards, supposing them to be a su- 
perior order of beings. Columbus sent 

1. Situation of tlie West Indies 1 Vessels 1 
2. Havana 1 Trade 1 Fruit 1 3. Climate 1 

4. Cuba 1 Extent 1 To whom does Cuba be- 
long 1 Population 1 Slaves 1 Havana 1 6. Dig- 


Id 


166 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


some of his men sixty miles into the j} 
interior. They saw many scattered 
huts, and one village, containing more 
than 1000 people. 

6. In 1511, the Indians were con- 
quered by a Spanish general, named 
Don Jago de Velasquez. The chief 
Cacique endeavored to oppose the 
Spaniards, but his warriors all fled 
away at the noise of their muskets and 
cannon. The Cacique was taken, and 
cruelly burnt alive. This alarmed the 
other Indians ‘so much, that they ceas- 
ed all farther opposition, and submitted 
to Velasquez. But this did not save 
them, for the whole race was gradual- 
ly exterminated. The island was rapid- 
ly settled by the Spaniards, who re- 
mained in quiet possession of it for 
more than 200 years. 

7. In the year 1762, it was cap- 
tured by a British armament, but the 
next year, it was relinquished to Spain 
by treaty, and has since remained in 
her possession. 

§. Hayti is a little more than half 
as large as Cuba. It is diversified with 
hills, valleys, and mountains, and is ex- 
ceedingly fertile. St Domingo, the 
capital, is about as large as Providence, 
and is the oldest town in America, hav- 
ing been founded by Columbus, in the 
year 1496. He first came to this island 
in 1492, immediately after discovering 
Cuba. He reached it in Dec. and call- 
ed it Hispaniola, a name which it re- 
tained for many years. It afterwards 
received the appellation of St Domin- 
go, but is now generally called Hayti, 
which was the original Indian name. 

9. The inhabitants of this island 

«overy of Cuba 1 Indians'? The interior'? 6. 
What took place in 1511 1 Cacique 1 The other 
Indians? Settlement of Cuba ? 7. What hap- 
pened in 1762 ? 1763? To whom has it since 

btilonged ? 8. Extent of Hayti ? Face of the 


flocked to see Columbus and his men, 
and gazed intently upon them, and their 
ship. They were ignorant, simple, 
and timid, but they treated the stran- 
gers with the greatest kindness and re- 
spect. One day, as Columbus ^vas 
sailing along the coast, his vessel struck 
upon a rock, and began to go to pieces. 
The natives put off from the shore in 
their canoes, and carried all the Span- 
iards safely to the land. They then 
took out everything that was valuable 
from the ship, and carried it ashore. 
These articles were carefully guarded 
by the Cacique, who restored them to 
Columbus, and kindly endeavored to 
console him for his^ misfortune. Some 
of the Indians pitied the Spaniards so 
much, as to shed tears for them. 

10. When Columbus was about to 
sail for Spain, some of his men, being 
greatly delighted with the country and 
the inhabitants, requested leave to stay. 
Accordingly he left thirtyeight of them, 
and these formed the first colony ever 
planted in America by the Europeans. 
The Spaniards afterwards made other 
settlements in the island. Butin 1722, 
it was divided between France and 
Spain ; the western part being taken 
by the former, and the eastern by the 
latter. 

11. In 1789, France being in a state 
of revolution, disturbances commenced 
in the French colony of Hayti. At 
length, the negro slaves, united with 
the free blacks, rose against the white 
inhabitants, put many of them to death, 
and obliged others to save themselves 
by flight. The Spaniards gave up the 
island, but the French continued the 

country? Soil? St Domingo? Columbus'? 
Names of Hayti ? 9. Natives? Shipwreck of 

Columbus ? 10. First European colony in Amer- 

ica ? Division in 1722 ? 11. What occurred in 

11789? Negroes? Spaniards? French? Chris- 


THE CHILD S FIRST BOOK OF HISTORY. 


167 


struggle for several years. The ne- 
groes displayed much courage and en- 
ergy, and Christophe, whoni they final- 
ly proclaimed king, evinced a great 
deal of military talent. 

12. In 1801, the country was de- 
clared independent, and in 1803, the 
French evacuated the island. They 
have since had war among themselves, 
but for several years, they have gone 
on prosperously. Their government 
is now republican. 

13. Porto Rico is about as large as 
Connecticut. It is diversified with hills, 
and valleys, and is very fertile. It was 
discovered by Columbus in 1493, and 
is supposed at that time to have con- 
tained 600,000 inhabitants; but the 
whole race is now extinct. The island 
belongs to the Spanish, and contains 

150.000 people. 

14. Jamaica belongs to England, 
and is somewhat larger than the State 
of Massachusetts. Tlie interior is oc- 
cupied by mountains, whose loftiest 
peaks are TOGO feet high. A large por- 
tion of the island is covered with rocks, 
clifis, and precipices, but it abounds in 
rivers, and parts of it are exceedingly 
fertile. The productions are nearly 
the same as in the other islands. 

15. It was discovered by Columbus 
in 1404, and was soon after settled by 
the Spaniards. It originally contained 

100.000 native Indians ; but in a short 
period, the whole race had ceased to 
exist. The greater part of them were 
killed, by their bloody invaders. The 
island was several times plundered by 
the English, and in 1655 it was taken 
by them. In 1795, the slaves who 
were called maroons, revolted, and a 

tophe t 12. What happened in 1801 1 In 18031 
What has happened since 1 Government! 13. 
Porto Rico 1 Discovery! Natives! To whom 
does the island belong! Popidation ! 14. Ja- 


war with them commenced. They re- 
treated to the rocks and mountains, 
where they were hunted by blood- 
hounds, and many of them were shoi 
like wolves and tigers ; the rest were 
compelled to submit. 

16. The West Indies have some- 
times been visited by earthquakes ; in 
tlie year 1692, a terrible earthquake 
happened in Jamaica. Distant hills 
were driven together ; mountains were 
divided, and failing into the valleys, 
overwhelmed the inhabitants. Whole 
settlements sunk into the earth, and 
were 'covered with water; plantations 
were removed from their situations, and 
all the sugar works in the island were 
shaken down. 

17. The fiourishing city of Port 
Royal was overwhelmed, and nearly all 
the houses were covered with water, in 
the space of two minutes. Only the 
chimneys of the tallest houses could be 
seen above the flood. No less than 
two thousand of the inhabitants perish- 
ed. 

18. As hurricanes are frequent 
among the West India Islands, I must 
tell you of one that happened in Jamai- 
ca in 1722. The wind blew from the 
south, and soon the heavy swell of the 
sea came rushing and thundering against 
the shore, with a tremendous noise. 
Then the negro huts, which were slight- 
ly made, were all blown down. By 
and by, the tempest burst in the doors 
and windows of the stronger houses, 
tore ofl’the roofs, and tumbled the whole 
down upon the heads of the inhabitanU 
in a heap of ruins. 

19. The air was filled with a thou- 
sand fragments of stones and sticks, 

maica ! Face of the country ! Productions 
I 15. Discovery! Indians! English! Maroons' 
I 16. Earth(|uake.s ! Describe the eartluiuake in 
1692. Hurricanes! Describe the hurricane of 1722 


168 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


some of which were carried to the dis- 
Staiice of many miles. Whole towns 
were prostrated, many of the cattle 
were forced into the sea and drowned ; 
the crops were crushed, trees twisted 
off', many of the inhabitants killed, and 
thousands left without shelter. The 
awful storm continued through the 
night; and nothing was heard but the 
howling voice of the tempest, the crush- 
ing of houses, the overthrow of church- 
es and steeples, and sometimes, the 
piercing screams of the wounded and 
the dying inhabitants. 

CHAP. LXXX. 

WEST INDIES.— CONTINUED. 

1. I have now told you of the four 
principal islands, Cuba, Hayti, Porto 
Rico, and .Jamaica. When they .were 
discovered, the inhabitants were numer- 1 
ous ‘as ants upon anthills.’ It is supposed j 
that the whole number exceeded 3,000 ,- 1 
000. They were a cheerful and happy 
people ; the fertile soil afforded them 
abundance of food, with very little labor ; 
and the climate was so mild, that 
houses covered with palm leaves we e 
a sufficient shelter. 

2. Thus placed beyond the reach of 
want and care, they spent much of 
their time in amusement. They often ! 
g’lided forth in their canoes upon the 
waters that surrounded their green j 
islands, and at night, in the breath of I 
the cool sea breezes, they collected upon I 
the lawns, and slopes, and spent their; 
time in dancing. Sometimes 50,000 ; 
were assembled, the greater part of 
whom, were engaged in this pastime. 

3. The peoj)le were governed by 

1. Four principal islands of the West Indies I | 
Qriginal inhabitants 1 Their situation '? 2. Amuse- [ 
nicnts 1 3. Government I Body of a king 1 Reli- ^ 


kings or caciques, who generally ruled 
with mildness and equity. When one 
of these died, it was the custom of the 
people to preserve the body by baking 
it in an oven. They believed in a fu- 
ture state of rewards and punishments ; 
and it is said, that an old man of Cuba 
addressed Columbus, on his arrival 
there, in the following words : ‘We 
know not whether you are men, or 
beings of a superior order. You have 
come with a force that we cannot re- 
sist, and have therefore only to submit. 
But if you are men, you must be aware 
that after this life, there is another, in 
which good and bad men are rewarded 
according to their works.’ 

4. These people supposed that after 
death, the spirits of the good were con- 
veyed to a pleasant valley, called Coya- 
ba, a place of ease and tranquillity, 
abounding in delicious fruits, cool 
shades, and murmuring rivulets; a coun- 
try where thirst never raged, and the 
hurricane was unknown. Here they 
believed they should enjoy the com- 
pany of their friends and forefathers, 
and thus live in eternal bliss. 

5. Such Mmre the inhabitants ot 
these four islands, whom the Spaniards 
thought fit to exterminate by fire and 
sword. I should be glad to spare my 
young readers the pain of listening to 
the cruelties practised on these gentle 
islanders. But the facts are before the 
world, and they cannot be disguised. 
After they got possession of the islands, 
they made slaves of many of the natives, 
and compelled them to work in the 
mines. Others were hunted in the 
woods, and shot down like wild beasts. 
Thousands were killed, merely to give 
employment to the Spanish soldiers. 

gious belief 1 What did an old man say to Co- 
liimbns I 4. Fulm'e state of t)ie good I 5. How 
did the Spaniards treat the native Indians I 7. 


THE child’s FIKbr BOOK OF HISTORY. 


169 


6. They were sometimes taken into 
the water, and baptized by the priests, 
and then immediately slain. These 
Catholics were far from believing such 
things contrary to their religion ; ma- 
ny of them took vows to destroy a cer- 
tain number every day, in honor of 
Christ, and the twelve apostles. So 
thoroughly was this work of destruction 
executed, that in a few years after their 
discovery, all the natives of these islands 
were swept away, and for many years 
not a vestige of them has remained. 

7. So far indeed as this portion of 
the West Indies is concerned, it would 
have been better if the discovery of 
Columbus had never been made. The 
3,0d0,0J0 of native Indians undoubtedly 
enjoyed a greater amount of happi- 
ness, than the much smaller number of 
individuals who at present inhabit it, 
the greater part of whom are slaves. 
Beside, these islands have been, since 
their discovery, the constant theatres 
of wickedness and crime. Thousands 
of innocent people have been murdered 
by the Spaniards, as I have just related; 
millions of negroes have here spent 
their lives in hopeless slavery ; and here 
loo, pirates and buccaneers have com- 
mi'ted their most cruel and desperate 
a<-ti«)ns. 

8. I will now tell you of the Baha- 
ma Islands. These are about 100 in 
nmnber; but the greater part of them 
are small, barren, and uninhabited. 
I'hose of most importance are Bahama, 
Abaco and Providence. The Bahamas 
belong to the English, and contain 
about 14,000 people, 1 1,000 of whom are 
negroes. The exports are dye w’oods, 
cotton, salt, and liv^e turtles. 

9. One of these islands, now called Cat i 


Island, was the first land discovered by 
Columbus. It was inhabited by Indians, 
vyho called it Guanahani ; but he called 
it St Salvador. The Spaniards made 
some settlements upon the Bahamas, 
but in 1672, they were entirely unin- 
habited. At that time Providence was 
taken possession of by the British, and 
a regular settlement made by them in 
1720. Since that time, they have re- 
mained in their possession. 

10. The group of islands, lying to the 
south east of Cuba, are called the Carib- 
bee Islands. The most important are 
Antigua, Dominica, Trinidad, Tobago, 
and Barbadoes, belonging to Great 
Britain ; and Guadaloupe, and Martini- 
co belonging to France. These are in 
general level and very fertile; they 
produce a great deal of sugar, coffee, rum, 
indigo, and cotton. A multitude of ves- 
sels are constantly employed in carry- 
ing on the trade between these islands, 
and the rest of the world. 

11. Several of these islands were 
discovered by Columbus on his second 
voyage, in 1494. Some of them were 
settled by the Spanish, some by the 
French, and some by the English. They 
have frequently changed masters, hav- 
ing been sometimes subject to one gov- 
ernment, and sometimes to another. It 
would be tedious to tell you of all these 
things ; but I must give you some ac- 
count of the Caribs, the native Indians, 
found here on the discovery of the 
islands. 

12. They umre very different from 
tlie gentle natives of Cuba. They were 
restless, enterprizing, and ardent, and 
considered war the great business of 
life. They did not hesitate to attack, 
plunder, and destroy any whom they 


Why would it have been better for these islands if | 16721 In 1720 1 10. Caribbee Islands 1 11. 

they had never been discovered 1 8. 'I’he Balia- i Discovery 1 Settlement 1 Government 1 12. D« 

ma Isles 1 9 . Cat Island 1 What happened in,i scribe the Caribs or Caribbees. 

14 * 


L 


170 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


could conquer, and they greedily de- 
voured the bodies of their enemies. 
Among themselves they were peacea- 
ble, friendly, and affectionate. They 
deemed all strangers to be foes, and 
treated them as such. They were fond 
of liberty, and would not submit to the 
least restraint. Those which the Span- 
iards captured, killed themselves rather 
than become slaves. 

13. These people had the art of 
manufacturing cotton cloth, earthen 
ware, and many other things. They 
lived in villages ; their houses being 
made of poles, covered with palm leaves. 
In the centre of each village was a large 
building, which was a kind of state- 
house. Such were the Caribs ; but 
they have long since disappeared from 
their native islands, and nothing remains 
of the race but their history. 

GHAP. LXXXI. 

THE BUCCANEERS. 

1. The history of the West Indies 
would be incomplete if it did not in- 
clude an account of a very extraordina- 
ry set of men, called Buccaneers, who 
lived by robbery upon the land and 
sea, between the year 1630 and 1700. 
They at first inhabited the island of 
Tortuga and a part of Hispaniola. 
Some remained at home to cultivate the 
land, and hunt wild animals; while the 
rest put to sea, and captured such ves- 
sels as they fell in with. 

2. The origin of this strange society 
was this. When the other nations of 
Europe found that the Spaniards were 
getting immense quantities of gold and 
silver in America, they all became 
anxious to sliare in the rich harvest. 

1. Buccaneers'? What islands did the Bucca- 
neers at first inhabit "I What did they do"? 2. 


The English, French, Dutch, and Por- 
tuguese sent out expeditions to the 
New World, as it was called, for the 
purpose of making discoveries, founding 
colonies, and getting quantities of the 
precious metals. 

3. The Spaniards thought that all 
America belonged to them, because 
Columbus had first discovered and 
taken possession of it, in the name of 
their king. Accordingly, they looked 
with an evil eye upon all the expedi- 
tions sent by other nations : they cap- 
tured their vessels, murdered tlie set- 
tlers, and visited with fire and slaugh- 
ter, all who sought to share in the 
spoil. 

4. Well! Some French people had 
settled in the little island of St Chris- 
tophers, and the colony was advancing 
rapidly, when the Spaniards came up- 
on them, killed a great many of the 
men, and drove the rest away. Burn- 
ing with revenge, those who escaped 
entered some Dutch vessels which 
were cruising against the Spaniards. 
These were very successful, and loaded 
their ships with gold and silver, which 
they took from Spanish ships. 

5. Some merchants in France heard 
of all this, and determined to make a 
regular business of cruising against 
‘he Spaniards. Accordingly, they sent 
out a number of people for this pur- 
pose, who established themselves at 
Tortuga and Hispaniola, as I have 
mentioned before. This took place 
about the year 1632. They were call- 
ed Buccaneers, because they roasted 
animals for food in the same manner 
that the Indians of the Caribbee Islands 
roasted their prisoners ; a process which 
the latter called houcaner. 

6 For near fifty years, these Bur. 
cane(‘rs continued to live upon the 

Origin of the buccaneers 1 5. Why were they 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


171 


Islands ; some scouring the seas for 
plunder, and some subsisting by the 
chase. But they were often attacked 
by the Spaniards, and their hatred to- 
ward that nation was thus increased. 
At length, the success of Pierre Le 
Grand, a famous French pirate, reached 
their ears. With twentyeight despe- 
rate men, in an open boat, he attacked 
a large Spanish ship which lay at an- 
chor near the Bahv.ma Islands, and af- 
ter a short struggle, captured her. He 
then kept a part of the Spanish sailors, 
sunk his own boat, and sailed off to 
France with his magnificent prize. 

7. Excited by this adventure, and 
animated by hostility to the Spaniards, 
the Buccaneers determined to live by 
plundering them by land and sea. 
They did not wait till they could build 
large vessels, but entering their canoes, 
they went to the port of Havana, and 
in the most daring manner, captured 
and carried off boats, laden with tobac- 
co, and other articles of value. 



The Buccaneers making an Attack. 


8. These spoils enabled them to 
build large vessels, and to undertake 
voyages of greater length. In their 
next expedition, they took several large 
vessels laden with gold and silver. 

railed buccaneers 1 6. What of them for near 

fifty years 1 rierre Le Gran(n Why did the 
biiccaneers now determine to live oy j;lundering the 


I'heir success attracted crowds of ad- 
venturers from all parts of Europe ; 
and they became so formidable, that 
the Spaniards found it necessary t 
send out large ships of war, for the 
protection of their trade. These pi- 
rates still retained the name of Bucca- 
neers, and continued to be, for more 
than twenty years, the terror of every 
regular trader to the American shores. 

9. They generally divided them- 
selves into companies of about thirty 
men ; they had certain rules by which 
they shared their spoils, and which 
they observed with great exactness. 
They were led by the bravest man of 
their number, whose orders in the hour 
of battle, were strictly obeyed. Some 
of these leaders displayed extraordinary 
skill and courage, and several of them 
became very famous. The most cele- 
brated of them all was a Welshman, 
by the name of Morgan. He ran away 
from home, when a boy, and went tc 
sea. He was sold into bondage in the 
West Indies, where he lieard of the 
Buccaneers. He soon joined them, and 
at length became their leader ; and un- 
der him, they y)erformed many wonder- 
ful achievements. 

10. They captured the island of 
St Catherines, took tlie city of Hava- 
na, pillaged Port ai Prince, and look 
Porto Bello by storm. They also took 
several other towns, and carried off im- 
mense plunder. 

11. The story of Bartholomew, a 
Portuguese adventurer, is very singular. 
He fitted out a vessel at Jamaica, at 
his own expense, carrying four cannon, 
and thirty men. He fell in with a 
large Sj)auisJi vessel of twenty guns, 

I near the island of Cuba, and after an 

S[>;n)!;ir(Is '! tt;«i ditl ilieywlo? iSexlexpedition 1 
W ii;n •)!' the lucr. neers fur more than twenty 
9. Coitonis of llif buccanoera ] Mor- 


173 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


obstinate struggle, he took it. The] 
cargo was of immense value. Wliile ! 
ihe pirates were rejoicing, three large j 
Spanish vessels hove in sight, and gave 
tliem chase. They were soon over- 1 
taken, and finding it in vain to resist, 
surrendered to the Spaniards. 

13. Two days after this, the vessels 
were separated by a storm, and the pi- 
rates were driven upon the shore. 
Bartholomew being recognized, was 
immediately taken by the inhabitants, 
and condemned to death. But for the 
purpose of keeping him safely, they 
put him in irons, and had him taken on 
board a ship, while they could prepare 
a gallows for his execution. He how- 
ever freed himself from his fetters, kill- 
ed the sentinel, and fastening two jugs 
tightly corked to his sides, let himself 
down into the water, and swam ashore. 

13. He then secreted himself in a 
thick forest, and there he remained for 
three days, subsisting upon roots. He 
chose for his retreat the hollow of an 
old tree, from which he could see his 
enemies looking for him in the woods. 
After awhile he sallied forth, and pro- 
ceeded by land to a town, about 100 
miles distant, where there were some 
pirates. They supplied him with a 
boat and twenty men, with which he 
vvent back, and captured the same ship 
in which he had been kept prisoner. 
He met Avith many other adventures, 
but I have not room to detail them 
here. 

14. Thus I have told you something 
of the Buccaneers. They displayed 
great courage, and gained immense 
sums of money, but it is remarkable, 
that their lives generally ended in mis- 
ery and misfortune. They Avere indeed 
guilty of every vice, and conducted 


AAdth the utmost cruelty to those Avho 
fell into their hands. They Avere a 
scourge to the age in Avhich they lived, 
and their memory can only excite ab- 
horrence, 

CHAP. LXXXH. 

STORY OF COLUMBUS. 

1. We have now finished our sur- 
vey of the West Indies, and are there- 
fore prepared to return to our OAvn 
country. We must be on the look out 
for pirates, till Ave have passed the Ba- 
hamas ; for a great many of these fierce 
people infest the seas in this neighbor- 
hood. They generally cruise about in 
small vessels, carrying a black flag, 
and seize upon such merchant ships as 
they meet Avith. They often kill the 
creAvs, and after robbing the vessels, cut 
holes in them and sink them. 

2. The pirates have taken a great 
many vessels belonging to the United 
States, within a feAV years. Not long 
since, the government of our country 
sent some armed vessels against them. 
After cruising about a great Avhile, one 
of the ships came across some of the 
pirates. The latter fled to one of the 
islands ; here they Averc attacked by 
some sailors under the command of 
Captain Allen, a brave young oflicer, 
who had distinguished himself in the late 
war Avith England. He Avas killed in 
the skirmish, and the pirates, leaving 
their boats behind, escaped to the inte- 
rior of the island. 

3. While Ave are on our Avay to the 
United States, I Avill tell you the 
story of Christopher Columbus. I have 
mentioned his name frequently, and 
you Avill no doubt be curious to knovr 


gan 1 11. Story of Barthoiooiew 1 14. Char- 
acter of tlie buccaneers 1 


1. Pirates 1 Captain Allen 1 3. Birth of 

Columbus'! Give an account of his early life* 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


173 


y 

something more about him. This cel-j 
ebrated man was born at Genoa, in It- 
aly, in the year 1435. He was brought 
up a sailor, and was very expert in 
managing boats and vessels upon the 
water. He made a great many short 
voyages in the Mediterranean Sea, and 
sailed to the northern seas of Europe, 
which was then deemed a remarkable 
enterprize. 

4. Aften this, he returned to Italy, 
and engaged in the war against the 
Venetians and Turks. One day he 
was cruising in a vessel off the coast of 
Portugal, when he met with a Venetian 
ship; an engagement immediately fol- 
lowed, in which the sailors on both sides 
fought with the greatest spirit. At 
hmgth Columbus was on the point of 
boarding the Venetian vessel, when his 
own took lire. In a moment, both 
ships were in flames. The blaze ran 
from sail to sail till the whole rigging, 
masts, spars, and ropes were involved 
in one sheet of flame. 

5. The hulls of the vessels were 
soon on fire, and were now on the point 
of sinking. The sailors leapt into the 
sea, and Columbus among the rest. 
They Avere near six miles from land, 
and all were drowned except Columbus. 
He, with the greatest presence of mind, 
seized upon an oar, and resolved to ex- 
ert himself to reach the land. He was 
a good swimmer, and partly supported 
by the oar, he kept himself afloat, and 
at length, on the point of fainting, came 
to the shore. 

0. He was now in Portugal, and 
after recovering from his fatigue, he 
went to Lisbon the capital. Here he 
became acquainted with several Portu- 
guese sailors, who were then the best 

4 . Describe the engagement wiih a Venetian 
ship. 5. How (lid Columbus save himself'? 6. | 
Wlier« did he go 1 Wliat of the people of Europe i 


navigators in the world. You must 
know that at this time there were no 
large ships, and people were not accus- 
tomed to sail out fearlessly upon the 
broad ocean as now;, nobody had ever 
crossed the great Atlantic, and the peo- 
ple of Europe, who had only sailed 
timidly along the shores, did not know 
that such a country as America existed, 

7. The shape of the earth was at this 
time unknown ; some persons supposed 
it flat, but nobody knew that it was 
round. But the art of navigation was 
rapidly advancing; the seamen were 
venturing farther into the deep, and an 
ardent desire to explore the unknown 
ocean was kindled. This curiosity had 
been greatly stimulated by the discove- 
ry, by the Portuguese, of Madeira and 
Porto Santa, lying to the northwest of 
Africa. It was at this point of time, 
that Columbus reached Lisbon, where 
he soon after married the daughter of a 
celebrated navigator, who was one of 
the discoverers of the islands above 
mentioned. 

8. His imagination was captivated 
with the idea of seeing these places, and 
accordingly he went there. For seve- 
ral years, after this, he was engaged in 
carrying on a profitable trade from Ma- 
deira to the coast of Africa, the Azores, 
and Canaries. But during all this time, 
his mind was active and increasing in 
knowledge. Whatever he learnt, he 
always remembered, and never satisfied 
with the information he had gained, he 
constantly desired to know more. 

9. At this time, the people of Europe 
had considerable trade with India, but 
no vessels ever having passed around 
the Cape of Good Hope, the people did 
not know the shape of Africa, nor did 

at this time ”? 7. What (fiscoveries had excited 

their curiosity '? Who did Columbus marry f S. 
Vniere did he go"? What did he do for several 


174 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORF. 


they know that they could go from]l 
Europe to India by water. They there- 1 
fore sent their goods across the Medi-I 
terranean to Egypt, whence they were i 
taken by land to the Red Sea. Here j 
they were transported on board vessels, 
which sailed through the straits of Ba- 
belmandel, and across the Indian ocean, 
to India. By the same route goods were 
returned to Europe. 

10. This method of conducting com- 
merce, was expensive and tedious ; the 
people therefore were very anxious to 
find some way of going to India by sea. 
This great subject occupied the atten- 
tion of all Europe, and Columbus, in 
particular, dwelt upon it with the most 
intense interest. He studied books, he 
consulted maps, and often while his 
little vessel was ploughing the sea, he 
would revolve in his mind all the facts 
which he had collected, relating to it. 

11. At night, when the stars shone 
down upon his ship, floating like a 
speck on the bosom of the mighty 
ocean, he looked up, and mused with 
curious wonder upon the heavenly 
bodies. From these contemplations, 
his mind descended to the earth, and 
strove to solve the mysteries that invol- 
ved it. Was it a vast plain, stretching 
out to a boundless extent ? Or was it a 
globe, swung in the heavens, and re- 
volving like a planet around the sun? 

12. After a great deal of reflection, 
Columbus adopted this latter idea, and 
applying it to the question of reaching 
India by water, he concluded, that if he 
sailed across the Atlantic in a westerly 
direction, he should at length come to 

years 1 9. What of the trade with India 1 10. 

How was it carried on 1 Why was it desirable 
to find a sea passage to India 1 Had anybody 
e^er sailed around Africa 1 What subject inte- 
rested Columbus very much 1 What did he do in 
regard to it 1 12 At what conclusion did he fi- 


that country. Full of this notion, he 
went to a learned physician in Florence, 
and consulted him upon the subject. 
This man perceived the force of his 
reasoning, and believing his views to 
be right, exhorted him to make a voyage 
for the purpose of ascertaining the fact. 
Strengthened by this counsel, Colum- 
bus resolved to enter upon his grand 
scheme, of sailing westward upon the 
Atlantic, to discover what might lie be- 
yond it. 

13. He immediately offered his plan 
to the government of Genoa, with a re- 
quest that they would fit out a small 
fleet, in which he might make the desir- 
ed voyage. But these men happened 
to be ignorant and stupid, and rejected 
the ofier with contempt. He then ap- 
plied to the court of Lisbon, who listen- 
ed carefully to his scheme, and then 
meanly fitted out a vessel and sent it in 
a private manner with a view of antici- 
pating Columbus in his great project. 
But the commander of the vessel w'as a 
cowardly fellow, and soon came back, 
having made no discovery. 

14. Disgusted with this trick, Co- 
lumbus set out for Madrid, the capital 
of Spain. The king who then reigned, 
was named Ferdinand, and his Queen, 
Isabella. Here he w’as favorably re 
ceived, and his project was listened to 
with attention. But the counsellors 
of the king ’were narrow-minded men, 
and made very absurd objections to the 
project. One said it would take too 
long a time; another that Columbus 
could not be wiser than every bodywho 
had lived before him ; and a third con- 
cluded that if the world was round, 

nally arrive 1 Whom did he consult'? 13. To 
wliom did he first ofier his project ? How did 
they receive it"? To whom did he next apply' 
Hovv was he treated'? 14. Whose assistance 
did he uow’ solicit ? What objections were made * 


THE CHILD 8 FIRST BOOK OF HISTORY. 


175 


Columbus would find a constant descent 
on the other side of it, and either slip 
off, or at any rate, never get back. 

15. Such shallow objections were 
made to the forcible arguments of Co- 
lumbus ; and as the most ignorant are 
usually the most obstinate, he found it 
impossible to change their opinion. 
Having spent five years in tedious en- 
deavors, he at length received a positive 
refusal, and was about to leave the 
country and offer his project to Eng- 
land, when an unexpected change took 
place in his favor. Two of his friends 
made a final effort with the King and 
Queen, and representing his views with 
great force of reasoning, they at length 
consented to give him the desired assist- 
ance. Accordingly three small vessels, 
with ninety men, were fitted out, and 
on the 3d of August, 1493, Columbus, 
with his little fleet, set sail from Palos 
in Spain. 

CHAP. LXXXIH. 

STORY OF COLUMBUS.— CONTINUED. 

1. The adventurers proceeded in 
the first place to the Canary Isles ; these 
they left on the 6th of September, and 
sailing in a westerly direction, stretch- 
ed forth upon the bosom of the un- 
known deep. They soon lost sight of 
land, and nothing could be seen but the 
skies above, and the level water spread 
out around them. Th./ were going 
where no human being had ever been; 
they knew not what was before them. 
A solemn mystery hung over the sea, 
and as they advanced in their voyage, 
they could not tell what dangers they 
might meet with. 

15. What was the result of his application 1 
When, and from what place did he sail 1 What 
of h'lM fleet 1 j 


2. To a bold man, like Columbus, 
these things rendered the voyage in 
the highest degree interesting. But 
most of the sailors were ignorant and 
superstitious, and they began soon to 
be very much afraid. But Columbus 
reasoned with them, and persuaded them 
to continue the voyage. 

3. Thus they proceeded for several 
weeks, constantly sailing in a westerly 
direction ; but Columbus had great dif- 
ficulty with his men. They were ex- 
ceedingly alarmed at the idea of being 
at such a vast distance from home, 
upon the bosom of the sea ; and he was 
obliged to use various arts to prevent 
their setting out to return. At length, 
their fears were so much excited, that 
both officers and men, on board the three 
vessels, positively refused to go any 
farther. They even thought of throw- 
ing Columbus overboard, and perhaps 
they would have executed this design, 
if he had not found means to pacify 
them. He proposed that they should go 
on for three days more, and if, by that 
time, they did not discover land, he 
promised to return. This was deemed 
a reasonable proposition, and they all 
agreed to it. 

4. Accordingly they proceeded, and 
very soon they met with floating sea- 
weed, and saw birds in the air. Some 
of these appeared to be weary, and set- 
tled upon the masts of the vessels. 
Here they remained all night, but in 
the morning they departed, and flew to 
the west. All these things made the 
sailors believe that land was near; and 
their hopes and expectations were soon 
raised to the highest pitch. 

5. One night, as Columbus was 
standing upon the deck of his vessel, 
looking out upon the sea, he thought 


1. Describe the voyage across the Atlantic 


176 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


he discovered a light. He mentioned 
it to some of the men, and they too 
thought they could see it. There was 
now no sleep on board the vessels ; both 
sailors and officers were gathered upon 
the decks, or distributed among the rig- 
ging, straining their eyes to discover 
land. At length, it was two o’clock in 
the morning, when a man, stationed on 
the top of the mast in the forward ves- 
sel, exclaimed, ‘ Land ! Land ! ’ This 
was soon communicated to the others, 
and the most lively joy hlled the breasts 
of all the seamen. 

6. The morning came, and assured 
them that their hopes were realized. 
The shore lay before them in the dis’- 
tance, and the sun shone down upon it, 
seeming in their eyes to give it an as- 
pect of peculiar beauty. Deeply aflect- 
ed with gratitude to that Being who had 
borne them safely over the waves, and 
crowned their bold adventure with suc- 
cess, they knelt down, and offered to 
Heaven their warmest expressions of 
thanksgiving. 

7. Having approached pretty near 
the shore, Columbus and some of his 
officers entered a boat, and went to- 
ward the land. They perceived that it 
was covered with woods, diversified by 
hills and valleys, and watered by rivers. 
As they came near, they saw a multi- 
tude of people almost naked and of a 
red color, collected upon the shore. 
These were attracted by the strange 
spectacle before them. They had nev- 
er seen vessels or white men before ; 
and when the Spaniards approached 
the island with colors flying, and amid 
bursts of martial music, their astonish- 
ment knew no bounds. 

8. At length, the boat reached the 
shore. Columbus, richly dressed, and 

5. Describe the discovery of land. 8. De- 
tril>»; tlie landing of the Spaniards. Describe 


having a drawn sword in his hand, first 
sprang from the boat, and set his foot 
upon the earth. His companions fol- 
lowed, and, kneeling down, kissed the 



Columbus taking Possession of tlie Island. 


ground, to express their joy and grati- 
tude. The Spaniards now erected a 
cross, before which they performed re- 
ligious worship, and Columbus then 
took possession of the country, in the 
name of the King and Queen of Spain. 
These events took place on the 11th of 
October, 1492. The island they discov- 
ered, was one of the Bahamas, now 
called Cat Island, as I have before told 
you. It was called Guanahani by the 
natives, but Columbus gave it the ap- 
pellation of St Salvador. 

9. The Spaniards now began to ex- 
amine the place they had discovered. 
They found it to be quite fertile, but the 
animals, trees, and plants were such as 
they had never seen in Europe. The 
people attracted their chief attention. 
These were of a copper color, nearly 
naked, and the men had no beards. 
Their hair was decorated with feathers, 
and shells, and gold plates were sus- 
pended from their ears and noses. 
They received the Spaniards with the 
greatest respect, and seemed to consid- 
er them a superior race of beings. 

the picture. Names of the island first discovered 
by Columbus 1 When did this discovery lake 


THE child’s first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


177 


They looked with amazement upon 
the ships, and when they saw a cannon 
fired, they were struck with fear and 
wonder. 

10. At night, some of the Indians 
went to the vessels, and in the morn- 
ing, Columbus returned with them to 
the island. He now asked the people 
where they obtained the gold, which 
they used for ornaments. In reply, 
they pointed to the south, and intimated 
that there was a large island there, 
where there was a great deal of gold. 
Columbus immediately determined to 
go there, and taking seven of the In- 
dians as guides, he set off with the fleet. 

11. After touching at two or three 
islands, he at length reached Cuba, as 
I have told you at page 165. Having re- 
mained here some time, and having had 
several interviews with the natives, he 
proceeded to Hayti, as related at page 
166. I need not repeat what happened 
to him there, for I have already told 
you about it. Leaving thirtyeight of 
his men on the island, he set out on his 
return; and after many dangers he 
reached Palos, on the 15th of May, 
1493, after an absence of seven months, 
and eleven days. 

12. He was received with the great- 
est honor b 3 ^the people; and as he travel- 
led across the country to visit the King 
and Queen, and tell them of his discovery, 
the inhabitants flocked to see him with 
the most eager curiosity. When he 
came to the city of Barcelona, where 
the king resided, a great ceremony 

place 1 9. What of the country 1 The people 1 

11. Where di.l Columbus now go 1 

N. B. The pupil will find answers to the fol- 
lowing questions at pages 165, 168. When did Co- 
lumbus discover Cuba 1 What of the natives 1 
Their manner of living 1 Religious opinions 1 
What did an old man say to Columbus 1 11. 

Where did C. go after leaving Cuba 1 

N. B. The pupil will find answers to the fol- 


took place. A granu procession was 
formed in the following manner. 

13. First came the Indians that 
Columbus had brought with him, dress- 
ed in the manner of their country ; af- 
ter them was carriet all the gold that 
had been procured by the expedition; 
next followed some persons bearing 
chests of pepper, bales of cotton, par- 
roquets, stufled birds, and quadrupeds, 
indian corn, cane poles twentyfive feet 
long, and many other curious things, 
which had been brought from the new 
world. Lastly came Columbus. 

14. The whole procession moved 
•through the city to a public square, 
where the King and Queen were seat- 
ed on a splendid throne. Here they 
received Columbus with the greatest 
marks of honor. He then gave an ac- 
count of his voyage to the King and 
Queen, and those around him. They 
listened with breathless attention, for 
Columbus was an eloquent man, and 
his story was one of the deepest inte- 
rest. 

15. The king was so much delight- 
ed that he ordered a new expedition to 
be immediately fitted out, and gave the 
command of it to Columbus. But to 
make sure of the discoveries that might 
be made, he sent to the Pope of Rome, 
requesting a grant of all the land west 
of the Atlantic Ocean. With this re- 
quest the Pope complied, and on the 
25th of September, the fleet, consisting 
of .seventeen vessels, and 1500 men, 
set sail from the port of Cadiz. 

lowing questions at page 166 When did C. dis- 
cover Hayti 1 What accident liappened to him 
there 1 What of the people 1 11. How many 

of his men did Columbus leave in Hayti 1 When 
did he arrive in Spain 1 12. How was he treat- 

ed by the people 1 What took place at Barcelo- 
na 1 15. What of a new expedition! What 

of the Pope ! Of how many men and ships did the 
new fleet consist ! When did it sail ! 16 IIov 


.-73 


THE child's first BOOK OF HISTORY. 


16u I !rave not room to tell yon the whoje history of 
Colunabiis, It is enougli to say that he uiade tbnr voy 
ages to Awierica, iiicindini; the tirst. lie discovered 
many <xf tJie West India isi inds, ajid diuinghis last voy- 
age., toucht^ upon the contiuent. 

17. Many adveritnreis runv came to America, and 
among the rest, there was an Italian, called Americus 
Vespncius, Having sailed along the coast and ascei talli- 
ed the existence of the continent, he returned to Spain 
a.nd gave anaceonntof his discoveries, in consequence 
liiis^ his muiie was given to Uie new woiid. 


CHAP. LXXXIV. 

GENERAL VIEW OF AMERICA. 

1. It is now time for us to return to our native coun- 
try. We have taken a survey of Uie several nations of 
America, yet we have seen no place so aiireeahle as our 
own Inune. In Uie United ii^tates, the peope are certain- 
ly happier than in any oti.er part of this V\ estern Hem- 
isphere. Tliey are nioie iMteIli,etit, have more liberty, 
possess more oftiie comforts of life, and are more virtu- 
ous than in any of the conni lies we have seen. 

2. liefore we part, I wish to direct your attention to a 

few interesting topics. If you wKl look at tlie frontis- 
piece of this hook, y* u will see a picture which repre- 
sents one half of the glohe. The greater part of its .sur- 
face iscovere * >v A ater, upv*' vessels are sa ling 

in various directions. In the middle you will ohserve 
tlie Continent of Ameiica. Its lenglh from Melville 
Inland to Cape Horn, is near OuGO milei, and if contains 
About 15.,000,U00 of square milei=!. 1 he tinited States i c- 
cupy more tiian one eighth part ilie whole America 
occufiies one tentJi p^d ' f Min ? if f y’obe, and 
nearly one third i a. 1 all iUo .ivod on tne globe. 

3 M'his C4.^nrine2Ui3 reniaikable for its lakes, ifsrivei-s 
and ils nioiintains. Lake Supeii.*r is the large-t lake of 
fresh water in the world. The St, Lawrence, the Mis- 
nssippijthe Orinoco, ihe Ania/,on, and tlie Ua Plata, are 
ill of them mighty rivers, and several of them surpass 
ill the rivers of the Eastern Continent. I’he Amazmi 
ilone, with its brandies, spreads over a country equal to 
Euroiie in extent. . 

4. The Andes, with the Cordillei-as and Rocky 
Mountains, constitute tlie longest chain of mountains in 
he universe^ being neaily 11,0)0 miles in length, incln- 
ling its windings. Many of tlieir tops are gl ttering 
.vith mantles of snow; s une of them pour forth torrents 
if fire and melted lava ; and d ep in their bowels are 
hunense treasures of Id, silver an I other metals. Ihe 
lopulaiion of America is small, Compared wi h its exli-nt; 
[ suppose it is not more ih ni '10,000, 00. 'i'hese are but 
about onetvventieth p irt <»f the inhabitants on tlieg’obe; 
the empire of Hus ia aime, conta n-as muiy people; 
and Great Britain has more than half as many. 

5. It is not 350 ^eiirs since the pe pie of Europe, 
Asia and Africa, were totally ignorant of the existence 
of tiiis vast Continent, Vet Hie lakes, the mountains, 
the rivers, and the plains had existed for ages. O'lie sun 
had shone upon them by day, and the moon by niiiht; 
summer bail visited the land witji dowers and fruits, and 
winter had covered it with siunv. The earthquake had 
shaken the hills, and tlie whirlwind had rent the forest; 
and all the great works of natnie had gone on from the 
Creation, tliongli man was not there to witness them. 

6. At what lime, or from wiiat quarter, the Indians 
came to America it is impossible to tell. It is ireneraliy 
supposed, that two or thrive thousand years atm, .some 
small tribes came from the nortli of Asia across Biierinii’s 
Straits, and thus gradually peopled the whole continent. 


But this is mere conjecture; and their entire history from 
their first arrival in the country, down to the dii^very 
of America is involved in mystery. 

7. In various parts of the country, there are mounds 
evidently raised by men many bundled years ago. It 

I is certain they were not constructed by the wandering 
tribes who inhabited the country wdien onr forefathers 
came here; but who raised tliem, how long they have 
existed, and what is their story, we cannot tell. It is 
proliable that great events have hajipened — that empires 
have risen, fioun>hed and gone to decay, — during the 
many ages over whicJi time has thrown an everlastmg 
oblivion, * 

8. It appears that whole races of animals have 
lived in America, of wliicli nothing remains but their 
bones. The gigantic Mastodon whicii was four times as 
large as an Elephant, once roamed in great numbers, 
through tlie forests, and other animals, as well as trees 
and plants now unknown, were common in the country. 
VVe must recollect, that from the creation, to the year 
1492, a period of inoie iJian 5090 years, all that took 
place upon th s vast continent is hidden from the view, 
and only known to that Being who made it. 

9. Vi*u will recollect from the. account I have given 
you, that tl:e Spaniards were not only the first discover- 
ers of America, Imt that they first planted colonies here. 
The Pope grantv d to tfem all lands they might discover 
in the new cemtinent, and liy virtue cT this grant, they 
loc k possession of whatever they wanted. Either dis- 
regarding the rights of the Indians, or supposing they 
had none, they made war upon them, slew' them by 
millions, reduced the survivors to slaveiy, took posses- 
sion of their lands, sell led upon them, and claimed them 
as their own. In this way Mexico, Guatiniala, Colom- 
bia, Peru, Bc.livia, ( hili, the United Provinces and sev- 
eral of the IVest India islands were subdued and peo- 
pled by tlie Spaniards; in all these cemutries, the Spanish 
language is now' chiefly spt.ken, and the manners anti 
customs efthe people resemble those of Spain. 

10. Brazil, you will recollect, was settled by the Por- 

tuguese, who conducted toward the natives nearly in 
the same way, as the Spaniards had done. The com- 
mon language in Brazil, is Portuguese, ami the customs 
of the people are sitndar to those of Portugal. The 
Catliolic religion prevails througliout all the countries 
settled by the Spaniaids and Pmtuiuese, and here there 
aie mnltitmles of negro slaves heloi.ging to the white 
peojile, and many Indians, who cuU^aje the land and 
submit to the government. # 

11. It was about lUO years after the Spaniards had 

estaiilished colonies in Ameiira’ that the Englisli began 
to make settlements In re. These weie made by pri- 
vate adventurers on their own account, and not hy the 
aid or authority of the government, as was the case Wiili 
the Spanish colonies, English (adonists did not 

proceed to conquer the savages; on the contrary, they 
bought their lands, made treaties with them, and never 
presumed to make war upm tfem, hut for the jiurpose 
of self defence. It is remarkable however, that the na 
lives always disappeared as the English settlements ad- 
vanced ; uliile in the Spanish and Poitugnese colonies, 
tlie white people intemiairied witli tl cm and tlie two 
races thus became mixed. Many of the Indians too, re- 
mained, and adtipied the habits of civilised life. 

12. The Frem h were less enterprising, than either 

the English, Poitugnese, or Spanisli. 'J'lieir settlements 
were begun at a late date, and were chiefly confined to 
tJie b rdets of the 8t. Lawrence, the Gieat Lakes, and 
the Mississippi. Mo<t of tiiese th^ were com|ielIed to 
relinquish to the English, in 1763. Britain lost the 

best of her American cohuiies twent^ears after; and 
?pain and Portugal within the last twentv years, have 
parted with all their territories on this Continent. 


many voyages did CoIuii»bu« make ? W'liat of his discoveries ? 
\1r Mkvis lUiscoatlueut •caUed Aoierica. ? iL LtuigUi 'of America? 


Extern.^ 3. Lakes? Rivers? 4. Mountains? Pojuilatioii ? 6. In 

(Jiaus? 9, Spajiiaj tk? 10, PortNfiucse ? U. Euglisb? 12, FreiuLi? 


CHRONOLOGICAL TABLE AND INDEX. . 


•Vote. — The author would recommend that the pupil be examined in this table somewhat in the following man- 
ner. What remarkable events occurred from 1830 to 1820 ? From 1820 to 1810? 6n:, 


1830 Death of Bolivar, 148 

1830 Centenriial celebration at Boston, 19 

1829 Andrew Jackson becomes President of the 

United States, 93 

*h 26 La Fayette visits America, 121 

S25 John Q. Adams hec nnes President, 93 

Bolivia becomes in lepeiident, 154 

1825 Constitution of Bolivia firmed, 154 

18^5 Constitution of Pern formed, 153 

1823 Peace between Spain and the United Provinces, 160 

1823 Brazil becomes independent, 162 

1823 Constitution of Mex .co formed, 142 

1821 John VI. leaves Brazil, arnl returns to Lisbon, 162 

1821 Gen. San Martin takes possession of Lima, 153 

1821 First Congress ineers in Colombia, 148 

1821 Guatirnala becomes independent, 143 

1821 Missouri becomes a state, 89 

1820 Mexico becomes independent, , 142 

1321 Maine becomes a state, 12 

1819 Florida relitu]uished to the U. States, 90 

V 1819 Bolivar dechred the Liberator of Colombia, 148 

^1819 xS"ew Granada and Venezuela are united and 

called the Republic of Colombia, 148 

1819 Alabama heroines a state, 83 

1818 Illinois l)ecomes a state, 89 

1817 James Munroe becomes President, 93 

Mississippi becomes a state, 83 

1817 Ciiili becomes independent, 155 

1817 Mnnroe makes a tour through the U. States, 121 

1816 Indiana becomes a state, 89 

1816 Snfferiugsin New Enuland from the cold season, 8*^ 
1815 Battle of New Orleans, 84 

1814 Battle on Lake ( 'h implain, 16 

1814 Battle at North Point, 64 

1814 City of WasliiniTton burnt, 65 

1812 Constitution founded in Venezuela, 147 

1812 Murder of the people of Q-uito by troops under 

a catholic bishop, 147 

1812 Louisiana becomes a state, 85 

1812 The United States declare war against Great 

Britain, 120 

1811 Venezuela declared independent, 147 

1810 United Provinces beco ne independent, 130 

1809 Madison becomes President, 93 

1806 The people of Colombia attempt to throw off 

the Spanish yoke, 1 16 

1806 Royal family of Portugal remove to Brazil, 162 

1806 City of Buenos Ayves taken hy the British, 160 

1803 Jefferson purchases Louisiana, 85 

1803 The French evacuate llayti, 167 

*802 Ohio becomes a state, 89 

1801 Thomas Jefferson becomes President, 93 

1801 Hayti declared independent, 167 

1800 Congress removes to the city of Washington, 120 

1799 Deatii of Washington, 68 

1797 John Adams becomes President, 93 

1796 Tennessee heroines a state, 87 

1795 Treaty of peace with the Indians in Oliio, 88 

1795 War with tlie maroons in Jamaica, 167 

1792 Kentucky becomes a state, 87 

1791 Vermont joins the Union, 17 

1790 District of Columbia ceded to the U. States, 120 

1790 Rhode Island joins tlie Union, 22 

1784 New Brunswick becomes a distinct province, 123 

.1789 Disturbances in llayti, 166 

1789 Wasliington becomes President, 93 

1789 The Federal Constitution goes into operation, 96 

1789 Tennessee ceded to the U. States, 87 

1788 First settlement in Ohio, 88 

1783 Michigan Terr, ceded to the U. States. 90 

1783 Eruption of Skaptur Yokul In Iceland 128 


1783 Close of the revolutionary war, 118 

1783 Treaty of [leace between England and the U. S. 118 
1781 Engagements in North and South Candina, 117 
1781 The British under Am Id take Fort Griswold, 

and burn New London, . 118 

1781 Surrender of Lord Cornwallis, 118 

1784 Charleston surrendered to the British, 117 

1780 Count Rochamheau joins Washington with 

6000 French troops, 117 

1730 Treaciiery of Arnold, 117 

178) Execution of Andre, 117 

J780 Na'^hville founded, 87 

17S0 Battle of Camden, 62 

1779 Savannah taken by the English, 116 

1779 Gen. Tryon burns Fairfield and Norwalk in 

Connecticut, and plmiders New Haven, 116 

1779 Gen. Sullivan destroys the Indian villages in 

the State of New York, 116 

1778 Battle of Monmouth, 57 

1778 The French acknowledge the independence of 

the colonies, 114 

1773 Massacre at Wyoming, 116 

1778 Gen. Clarke lays the Indian country waste in 

Kentucky, 88 

1777 Surrender of Burgoyne, 114 

1777 I..a Fayette comes to America, 114 

1777 Battle of Princeton, 113 

1777 Battle of Bennington, 16 

1776 Wa-hingmu crosses the Delaware and takes 

900 Hesdans, 113 

1776 New York taken hy the British, 113 

1776 Declaration Oi independence, 113 

1776 The Hritisli troops evacuate Boston, 113 

1775 Two expeditions sent against (Canada, 112 

1775 Washington a[>[K>inted Commander in Chief, 112 
1775 Battle of Bunker Hill, 111 

1775 "J'iconderoga and Crown Point taken by the 

Americans, 110 

1775 Fat’Ie of Lexington, 109 

1771 Boston Fort Kill passed, 106 

1773 ('argoes of tea destroyed at Boston, 106 

1773 Fir'jf settlenient in Kentucky, 88 

1770 Disturbances in Boston, 104 

1769 Daniel Hoone goes to Kentucky, 87 

1765 First peninnent setUement in Tennessee, 87 

1764 Missouri settled by the French, 89 

1763 Mic higan Ter’ . ceded to the^English, 90 

1763 Indiana and Illinois ceded to (»'reat Britain, B9 
1763 Cuba relmqiMshed by the British to »8pain, lo6 
1763 Mississippi ceded to Creat Britain, 83 

1762 Cuba tiken by the British, 166 

1760 Montreal taken by the English, 103 

1759 Capin e of (ineber, 103 

1759 Ticonden^ga, Niagara, and Crown Point taken 

by the English, 102 

1753 Fort Frontenac taken, 101 

1758 Fort Du Oiuesne taken by Gen. Forbes, 101 

1758 Loui-hurg taken by Lord Amherst, 101 

1757 Capture of Fort William Henry by the French, 100 

1755 Expedilion against Crown Point, 99 

1755 Expediti m against Niagara, 99 

1755 Biaddock’s defeat, 99 

1755 Old French war begins, 97 

1754 Wasliington attacks the French near Fort Du 

Ouesne, 93 

1754 First settlement in Tennessee, .87 

1754 The c dony of Georgia given up to the king, 80 

1749 Hal fax founded, 123 

1748 Catholic priests convert the Hurons in Michigan 

Territory, 90 

1748 Peace between England and France, 40 


180 


CHRONOLOGICAL TABLE AND INDEX 


i747 Lima and Callao dc'stroyed by an earthquake, 153 
1745 Saratojra burnt by the Indians, 55 

1744 King George’s war begins, 39 

1744 Lonisburir taken, 40 

1743 George Clinton Governor of New York, 55 

173G Persecution of Negroes in New York, 55 

1735 Settlers come to Georgia, 80 

1733 Em grants come to Georgia, 80 

1732 Savannah founded, 79 

1729 3'iie two Carolinas are separated, 77 

1724 Fort Dumnier built, 17 

1722 Indian war witli tlie colonies in Maine, New 

Hampshire, nnd Massacliusetls, 39 

1722 Havti is divided between France and Spain, 166 

1722 Dreadful hurricane at Jamaica, 167 

1721 Some Danes settle in Greenland, 127 

1720 BritisI) settlement in the Bahamas, 169 

1718 Death of Penn, 61 

1717 New Orleans founded, 85 

1716 Delaware restored to Lord Baltimore, 66 

1716 Settlement of iNatclies, 83 

1713 Peace between England and France, 39 

1713 Tusraroras join tiie Five Nations, 77 

1710 German s ttlements in North Carolina, 76 

1707 Settlements at Pamlico Sound, 76 

1705 Selkirk left on the island of Juan Fernandez, 156 
1704 Attack on Deerfield, 38 

1702 New Jersey surrendered to Q-ueen Anne, 57 

1702 Oiieen Anne’s wa** begins, 38 

1701 New charter of Pennsylvania, 61 

1699 Penn’s second visit to America, 61 

1699 Settlement at Iberville, 85 

1698 Earl of Bellainonl tlovernor of New York, 54 

;*696 Indi in attack on Haverhill, 37 

692 Supposed witchcraft at Salem, 36 

C92 Jamaica and Port Royal overwhelmed by an 

eartlnpiake, • 167 

1691 Deatli of Governor Slaughter, 54 

1691 Peter Schuyler attacks the French, 51 

1690 Schenectady burnt, 53 

1689 Imli in attack'on Dover, 14 

1689 William III. governs Delaware, 66 

1686 Sir Edward AndrossGovernor of New England, 35 
1684 Penn leUiriis to EntI tnd, 60 

1683 De Salle names tlie country on both sides'^f 

the Mississippi, fjoni'iana, 83 

1682 William Penn purchases Delaware 63 

1682 Penn’s first visit to America, 60 

1681 Settlement ('f Pennsylvania, 60 

1678 Close of Philip’s war, 34 

1676 Deatli of Lord Baltimore, 66 

1676 Division of New Jersey, 57 

1675 Beginning of Philip’s war, 31 

1675 Attack on Swanzey, 32 

1674 llritisli give up Guiana to tlie Dutch, 165 

1674 Colony of x\ew York restored to the English, 50 
1673 New Vork taken by the Dutch, 50 

1670 Settlement of Chariest, m, 76 

1667 Guiana taken liy the Dutch, 165 

1665 Elizah'-tlitovvn settled, 57 

1664 Tennessee granted to Lord Clarendon, 87 

1664 Delaware comes into the hands of the English, 57 
1664 New York surrenders ^to tiie d. of York, 50 

1664 New Jersey comes into' the hands of the British, 57 
1663 North Carolina granted to Lord Clarendon, 76 

1656 First (Ituakers in Atnerica, 42 

1655 Peter Sruyvesanl captures the Swedish settle- 62 
ment in Delnware, 62 

1655 Tile English take Jamaica, 167 

1650 Persecution (tf the Baptists in New England, 42 
1650 North Carolina settled, 75 

1650 Guiana taken under the protection of Great 

Britain, 165 

*646 Battle of Horseneck 50 


!l 


1645 Rebellion in Maryland, 

1643 The Dutch make war on the Canadians, 

1637 Indians attack Saybrook and Wethei’sheld 

1635 Hartfud settled, 

1636 Settlement of Rhode Island, 

1635 Ann Hutchinson preaclies in Massachusetts, 
1635 Windsor and Wetliersfield settled, 

1634 English and French settle at Guiana, 

1634 Settlement of Maryland, 

1633 Settlement of Connecticut 
1631 Settlement of Portsmouth,. 

1630 Buccaneers established at Tortuga and Hispan- 
iola, 

1630 Settlement of Boston, Charlestown, and Dor- 
chester, 

1628 First permanent settlement in Maine, 

1627 Settlement of l.lelaware, 

1624 Settlement of New Jersey, 

1623 Settlement of New Hampshire, 

1622 Slaughter of the colonists in Virginia, 

1620 Settlement of Plymouth, 

1619 Slaves brought to Jamestown, 

1614 Settlement of Albany and New York, 

1611 New set lers arrive at Virginia, 

1609 Hudson’s discovery of the North River, 

1609 Emigtaiits go from London to Virginia 
1608 Clucbec founded, 

1607 Settlement in iMaine, 

1607 Settlement of Jamestown, 

1600 Settlement on the island of Newfoundland, 
1595 Sir Walter Raleigh visits Guiana, 

1586 Jesuits convert the Indians in Buenos Ayres, 
1570 St. Auiiustine founded by tlie Spaniards, 

1562 Florida settled by French Protestants, 

1553 Battle between Valdivia and the Indians in 
Chili, 

1549 St Salvador founded, 

1548 Jews settle in Brazil, 

1515 Silver mine discovered in Potosi, 

1541 Death of Pizarro, 

1540 Don Alvarez Governorof the United Provinces, 
1^40 Valdivia goes with an amiy into Chili, 

1539 Ferdinand De Soto goes to Mississippi, 

1538 Almagro attacks the Indians in Chili, 

1535 City of Buenos Ayres founded, 

1533 Lima founded by Pizarro, 

1531 Ptzarro’s second expedition to Peru, 

1526 Sebastian Cabot exp'ores ihe La Plata, 

1525 Pizarro’s first expedition to Peru, 

1524 City of Gnaiimala founded, 

15i9 Patagonia discovered by Magellan, 

1518 The Spaniards first hear of Mexico, 

1518 Cortez sets out for the conquest of Mexico, 

1516 United Provinces discovered, 

1511 Velasquez conquers the Indians in Cuba, 

1501 Vasco Nunes lands in Guiana, 

1500 Discovery of Brazil, 

H98 Venezuela discovered by Columbus, 

1498 Guiana discovered by Columbus, 

1497 Sebastian Cabot discovers the coast of Labra- 
dor, 

1496 St. Domingo founded by Columbus, 

1494 Jama’cn discovered by Columbus, 

1493 Porto Rico discovered by Columbus, 

1492 Havti discovered by Columbus, 

1492 Cuba discovered by Columbus, 

1435 Birth of Columbus, 

1350 A pestilence called the Black Death destroys 
the colony in Greenland, 

1023 Greenland becomes subject to Denmark, 

982 Discovery and settlement of Greenland, 

874 Iceland settled by Norwegians, 

860 Iceland discovered by a Norwegian pirate, 


60 

54 

31 

25 

21 

30 

25 

’65 

65 

25 

14 

170 

20 

12 

63 

57 

14 

74 

20 

73 

49 

7.3 

49 

72 

123 

11 

69 

123 

164 

159 

90 

90 

155 

162 

162 

154 
153 
159 

155 
83 

155 

159 

153 

146 

159 

149 

143 

157 

132 

132 

159 

166 

164 

161 

146 

164 

123 

166 

167 

167 

166 

165 
173 

127 

127 

127 

129 

129 


♦ 



L/*i 1 otht/felEtist t from 


tsrounln 


ijitnn 0ffh 


(fnn/7 


S<pi^rrhpWi k 


i^^amhfrJh 


0*initwkl 


Grtmrl 


H SeJffrL. 


^hx^inarni^ 


i\L*vsetofnia<tttnHt 


fSaTiitomf^ 




}Cftt7telf€e 


Fi‘t7tik/ht;t oW^ 


► ithn/o 


ViiBriC ] 
ft7r/rn^t/l4 
Aipv.sr.w 
^Ltih'u fH O^ 


heth^i 


V//*6r O 
^ TZf^/vv/ 




^ruhu^' 


i or 1 19. 


MUhserf I(* 


\JTonh 




^U9/ otjf*crcA 7n/ tY. O.GoorIrir/t eGJ/TtJsa^ittsefix, 


•;:,.'0V V,- 

. '.- .vh .''A , 


■v<? v V 


■• ... 


, ' "• V . ^ » ,| 'Tr - tf ',• • I 

j, '/ V. ' 


' < s • 

» 


C ^ m 


ir< 





.' I * ■ 

t 

I ' « 

* 

* 


« • 

f 


i 




. I , 







■\; - J 


. I 




*v 






fc- ' 


l '? ,9 






■A.- 


’, \ 

^ t • 


r V 


'» . \-r* ' 


'J.,'.- 




> 

t 


t ' < 


••% • 


■> 




./ • ' /T 


* • '^ 


* • I 


»:'■ . ^;' 

; ‘V* 

» 


•;«•. v‘r 


r 




*' ^ 


•i. 


• . » 




■ h 


■ r. 

f . 


■ 0 


\ ■ 



I y.. * * .'.'%j 

'• ' .. ^ • V - 


iv: '. 

H 


•• , . f 

'’V '- 
« « •- 


V 


L \, 


^ • 




' . 

f * ■ 


. • : 0 • • 
f > • 'V 


r“ ■ 


^ ,. 


i' 


4^'./ 


/r- 

■ .V 


I 

s 


•\ » 


• > 


» •«! ' <“■ 

>V’’ 


. f 




If y 


* » 

^ 1 

V 


■' ; *. 


•i* , 

< 


<* t. 


» .V 


I «• • i 




:- • •• I / 


V 


i 


"r. 


► 


• ' ' *^4 

-' ■ f • '' • * . ■ 

^ i r , .'v # 

.. ^^.... 

. . ■ I ’.'V '-' 

.."v -''ak':-'^ 


\ »! 




/-V .f. 

-4 


' V 

t • 

■ , V - ■'. 

- 1^' . f\ 


fi 

r* 


'V 


I 


• -t ’• 

X 


•t 




y 


■ - ■.■■• • •f^i.i'’ ■' 

'• •' -.Xt--' 


«. ‘ 


'V... 






''''^ 

?V/ ■ 

f ’ ^ 


1 •' ■,%'*> I 

V. 


■*' ) . 1. ’. ‘ ‘ t •'• '-4 

;■ y^- X . . *; 




’\^« -.v 

••’ .n-.’ 

t i 

i\ ,. ■ ^' 

0f 


V I _ 

• » 




A ■ 

« I 
.v-' 


Jr 




» * 


A 




e/.',V, ... 

>' 

^ - 


■:\ 


» I 

lY. 


it 


\ 


■'*' 


' -V 


■ N 

• 

^ » 




> 


I. / '*»' 




•>? 


. < 




' • t 


r ' 


t.'w 




'C 


r 

Y‘ 


“•'” • > V 

4 J 




» ^ \ 

t 





I 

X 

ite :f V i 


-.4 I 


• •. 


•n'' 


I 

it 


t>r 






-.«. * 
A 

• 9^ ' 


' t 

U- , 


\ 




J 


'■ l' ■ 




..v‘ 


» \ 


U ' ■ '<^1- 


\- 


■ j.‘/ 


4;-. .:v-V^ 




4 ^ A 

., r^. 


■ ; 
"i • * !<• 


V 


i » ' ' 

'• ' « ■ .• 


. ^ 


f. 


I 

TS 






4«1> 




f* 


’,»a ', ' 

- i ■ ,■• 



..\ 

y V. 

■*f>> 




»•• » 


«.-. ' 


•• 


" 4 I 


-J 




V • 




. 1 


f ’ * 



■ f.': ■ 


• i 


i 

> i, 


-i » 


t V 




. ' f i 

V' ' '■ .V -/ 

■'cr. '/ • > 


f 


';• *t 

' I 

:; c 

* r- • . I V ' 

v^' ^ 


/ •' * 

■ * . y y 


' 4 , * 

I ' . 

• ^ 

y 1 ' / •, 


A • 

w n.' 


,- . 






# • 




> > 


. % 


' 44 -w 'v‘ ^^T• 




T . 


. t > 


.-. ' . v» 


» I 


/ 

i- 

,.- K 


\ 

4 

A 


V 


"*•?/ » 


,4 


• I 




< <r ■*’Vt'*ilir ' ' *• 

'Nfc' ^ 

yfK,' •■ j /■,'• 

■ it • 



' 'i 

m' 

;:. / ■ ;. 


K 


. '•.. * 


V 


I ■ 




*1 


.*5-' 

. ». 


I 

f 


t ■ 


' 4 


. 




. t. “y 


i. * 

' '4. 


s 




•■ I 


>.'■ 


• / ’N 




.'to" 

.-■> /iov;- 
• *- >■ . 


. • . >. .-■• ^ aV; ' ^- 

Vi*^**l " ‘ ’.f. . * '1 


.-«-\ )niLxr- . - 1 ’VV^ ■''■ {■' 4 ' ■ 

y; -1-' '■ -^./N v>' ' . 


. .* 



» * • ■% 

kf 


s.v ' 


. iV 


• > * •,» 


i i 

. % 
V . 


1 


*M t 


1 .. r .5 *■■ , , .' -■ V ■ : , ' . . _.' ■ 

.’■?'• ■■ '--'A;' • . .'- ■ 

. .':, r»'’\ '.' ■ :r '■ vS ' 

• . - *.• ' • ■' ' . . 

;■ ' ■. -' ■*-' ■ ^' ' ^■ 

'■ •: ‘ , V. ’Ji 


C> ' . *■ ■ ■ 

» **V' ; -- 

- ,»■ 

• ^ I ' . 



V.‘ 

r- * 

• \ 


‘ i’^ • Vi' V 


f : 


I 

\ ' ^ 


• -f* \‘ • ,- , 


« 


' 4 

J- ’f/.'.' 




- n<.., ’ ■% N. - «.• 








f ^ 


* j ^ I 


d 









/ 




:i’ 




r' 


v?^>iV'V'' ‘i’; ' ■ - is -3 




• * 


* ♦ 




. • 


» l< 


K .tA V'' ■ ■ 
- ■. 




y. 

» 


> 


■■• (' 'i; : ', 

» , ) A / • > , ' 

/ ' s 




V .» > 

» .f 


I 


V.': J 




f 



f 




• k. ^ 


‘ ' ■■ ‘ -'Jkc; .' 

•' ■*. 's *» * 

1 ♦ 

i^* 

5 




s . 


. ■■ • * 


jT 


. '■^'' '-vC’aj;* ■'V'A . , A.. . v-#' ■ '- i' . 

* . : V ., '• .<»“ , < <«■'•’ ; \ 


. ' « 


»u 




jST 

« I 


/! 


f 

■#-■■- ■ ■ •►■ ■■•.V • •• .y- ift' - '■ •t' 

- \- > ^ . ‘y . . 0. .»] « '‘•■^•'^. '' ‘'^£1' v' '-, . 

•»*, ’•»' ■ •• ■»' ^ 'JS- ^ “ 


‘if 

• J k 

< 

, 

. * i 

t 







.■{» 


* « 


>■ 


/ . ■"'■ .*Vl , >' <'* ■ 

• ' i> -F ^ I f . ' ’ »’ 

;■ A^' '.-‘iv /i 


• I” t* * 1 K! 

■:‘ 'X v'"- 




• I V . '. ••* Nv 




■ • , -: NV 

'/ • r'*. ..^ ’: -u'* 



f . ••. 'p 


. • V 


, .V .‘J-kS'' ^V’ •> ^• 
j I ' i • ' ■/' . ii'* • 

"vi 

: l '< •■■■■»■ tiV 


*■ \ 



'■■■'^/;v: - w 



TlnttrrJ accnvTiti^ tc- ,irf rr lenjriYsj- on t7,g^'.\:7ni/ of' Jlhrch />i/ S.O.r;<>t>.1r;r7i or 



//' /I ? /'mn C.Bq>-niiiii s 


/•tntfr-fd ijecirr^lin<r\v act €rr\f'c<n<rreJ.t an tfiit,' ft at/ of Jlarc/tf^t/ i?,tktrt>ofJrifh of Stojs a etnUfUs 



f » 


s .V 







, 5w- ' 

rtf , /• V 

J‘ . 


i. 


i'>: -•^^- '■£* ^ 

r -,.fj.h/7. .^T 


*•> ', 

<M • - 

# 


■')■ :- 


.' i 


■ \ 


• I — O' - 

.'-'C'V '-'tv.' 




< ■< 


'.} 


-J : f i ' 






' , f ■ 


1; 


, . y < • ■ ,. 

1 ' . ' ^ ► 

i.A-, - 


k **- ',• t' 


i.‘ 


« tn ■' ' * 


■'>•■■-' 'tf .'■ > V ■.•■'' .<il ^%Vi»' ^ 


j . 


. ... 


^iC: 


X: . 


.*, ♦ I 

‘"‘ V. 


• V 








•'v'" 


, 1 


'.r 

I ' f‘ •' I V * - ■ 




•f 






, T 

. l' •■ 


7\\9r 



' '►V ■' 

( 


• f ..' 

1 1 

k w* ' . 

4 

■ ■ 'CT7! 


•^ \ ,. ^ 1 

• •'. ’■• ‘■‘A 


.> 

• * 

< 


t • 


- ■ 

■A'l*- 

■T-“ 




•\, 

1 

■ "T 

\ 

ir^ 

*3 

‘ i-' 



i 

1 


• 

IH 


fa 


rv .■: 


-f 




». .• 


V • 


jv ‘ ) : 4'"‘ .■'!«•• 

■ '• ii" ^ * • *^4 V 

■ *■ S «< i ' i »*‘‘V 


5 ». 




• 'f'^- ' 




• » \ . 


r 

v* 




J 

■ ^ 




« » 

. e ‘ 




y-*- /r ’ 




>t . '.‘^ 

’ ' • t 










/ I 


,t 

0 


• ■ .' 

A f 


* • 


*• • 



« 

4 


* 


)•' 


74-4 

er 

&.• ->• 


./ *♦? *' 

> 




*» I 


u ' 


4 ' 





■c-rs, yXy- 

< :• . >• ‘ 


•\ 


. n 

> 


> . 




/ ' - 


j 


W»' 


* 


J 




V ^ >* 


♦. ■ 

% 


t 


.1. ■ 


I . 


‘:? ‘ , 


( 

xm 


j 


\yX 


■\ 




« » 


•t 


■fi 


• i 


% I 


• ■/ 




r; 

, ^ 


f. 


' I . 


M i'. 


>■■ t 


n-* ' 

4 

I • m- 

>' 


A 


r. 


\ ■ 

\ 


/ ' ' 


f ? 

0- 


' '\ 

. ♦ 


■t- .: 

« ' .• 

■>. ),. 


,'. * 


i,- 


V 


«. A 

../. -.'f 




« > y 


* vM 


• . 


i. 


* < 




r; 


V 


V*’ 


'k= 


•7* 




..'r, ' 


./ 


Xi' 


• ' « 


• !» 


r* 


^ • . 


' c 

.^ •■' y -■ 


• . 


-■ '•) 


r , / .• s • 


■r •••:■ ' r \X''- 


)■ 

.,1 . 


t ' 


t . 


^ '' 1] • 
‘ .i Z- \ 




’ (, 


(i^■ • 


« 


•r-v 


. ^ - .k * 

.. ? 


• . » 

;/* 


'v/'., ’c''. '. R 

i -.V/' . ;) 


/ 


\- 


i. 


' u’ 


f 


I • f 






> 


«. • 




, ' i ■’• ';' / . ' ■ 


■ y 


: .i4' r/^ 

4 'h 

, .♦ il- 


I 




1 •.*** 


'. r • , 


■» ‘ V ♦ . '. 


* ( 


r 1 ‘ ' * ' ’ -/ 

fV ■ . .V ■ ■'■'■ 


i » 




. i 
.*« • 


V 


tie 


<• 

1 / 
V • 


. r 


J . *• 
• •• / 


; ■ 


. y-; 
> 


yy 


7 . .• 


» ^ 

. .R- 


■'_» 


•i 


'aW .. 

' ^4 * 


' ; ■ /: * ' 

• f 


I 


I 




t 

I 

I' 


.. •' •^'* .••4* 

f • .V 


y» ^ V 


> • 


i • 

V *• 






• . 


S' 


.■ A 






( 


./ s’ 


t I 


'.S! •.-.Uj- j> 



f 

*. 


4 


,r 


,» > 


I / 










. '. - ’♦f'' 


I 

1/ 


1' ‘ 


• ’-|i . .y' ,• ^, 


■*. ’ 




• •!»•• -fTi 

-ill ■ 
. 11 ' • 

/ I’ V , K 


'i ’■ 


; • 


<■ 

»* 

f^t. 


\.i 


I. *' 






* •■. 




c * 

■\ 


r 


4 S 


«• 




. I 

* '• 


> 




I' 



fM 


I ^ 

r.-.'.-'i..' 




i{i' .• ' 


f I I » 

• I, 


'y- 

■.■ -At- ' -.r. J ‘ 

♦ w ' 

J • ■ 

t,{. , ' 

• J 


7JV .... ■ 


V » 

r • 


e ■' y • 

•• t ,' .7 ■ ,’• 

,.>.^">.V w; , . 


#• 




ffy- 



, t 




V ' V 


r 


1 ,r ' ‘ 




, i; •: 


v! • 


« ’ . . . ; I * • - • 

■ « 'iA • ••!' ’ I r • 

;, ■ •■ '.O^- * »-: .A' •..*:> ‘ 


- 


• . • r 

• I , 


(. 


. V 


. T 


I:' 


,' ;.. -p - 

. * . ' - .W, 


>a6.. ' tpk 


,4? 


'j - V ■*■'«■ ' 


, s 

•» .■ • 


<■. 


,,M . 


• '# 


I ■. 

r 


. ■»• ■ 


t % 

'■' •/ , 

f •>'. f*. . 

-*- V' 

0 

*■ ^<n' 

• ‘ ' _ '-. . •■•, 




♦ ' A-* 


, ■ r . . 


. 1 , 




4 ' 


■ * 

I 

.> / 






t 


/ • 




'1 




J . . . s 

- 5 * 


fimiAxa 




■' ’/''if' 

■J. f •\ ■••/ 


A 

I 


J • ■ 

iS 


\ 


t 

. y 


















«i 


\ 


'• \ 





JSntfred acctfrtiin^ tf/" ^t>/tyre^s t^n t/iif !’'^dai/ iff Jletrfhi’if S. fJ.(itft’drt/-/t tff Jfiusiif/iusftts 




I 


wia> 

rH (/ 

‘ y 


-i ••• -♦ 


' 4 •' ’ 


iT • ■ 


A 




> V V 




i 

4 

? 


1 




tJ 




J I 


^ • V.: ;' ‘ • .' ■'•a- ■- 


> 






u 


, I 


* ' 

- 'a<' 


- 4 ' V''" • -‘'r .■' ■•; ■■■ . • 

■. ^ * 




V .‘ ;. • '*.• ' 


A 


kTi * - ♦ J • r^fw ^ * 

^/••- ** X' 'Af '= '. *• .., . ■. V 




m 





t 


r 7^7'.' 


i 

4 . 


:•- ' A 


S ' -i ’ *r' 

. W • * - V 




’t;:. " '^• 



'■V A - ■ 'v' 

X. A' . 




V 


/» 




V, • 1 

" ' I / 


•' 1 . 




♦ • 



.;i 


'V- ' 


.» • • 




& 'ti/ ' ' ^'4 

i "’■ ■ :i ? 

■' ISi. ' ' • w 


f . • • : ■ ■• . 

^ '-4 , . “' »•.•■• •- ' 


‘JSF y .•■ 

' V 151 -j • 







■. .4 '. 7-' V.5?2;, 

^ ^ - '7 V. ^ 

f .‘4' i- •', 


M ^ ' 


. ‘ . 


■tf;- 


v> -* M »'• ».<n'\<'." J> <,V-J 

'-■ ' 7 ■% V . -:^ 

.i'.'nA ' . 


.'‘4 


7:^;- 





% # 

^:i' > ■ 


I 


> 
' > 


<•€ 


*■ *‘ 




^ t 

■ ■ V 


♦ 

7 . 


•r* 


■»» 




'■ ♦ i ’ 


■ '■'■*' -'i- ."fi- ■ 

••v;‘ ' B.. . - - 




-TJ 


Vr 

•kf 


^4 ' 


' ' f-'. 


4 


<'s «v^'/ . . :, ■ 4 .. ' ■>S 

.^^ * •,• , v ' • -. , ', •. ^ .' 


•7>7 


aW'O' h- 






M 


' •A.-' 

- . ‘\ 

V - -4. 

^1 ' ' 

s 


■r. 


■C V 




\ 

> 


•n* 












>L ft* ■' 
<-• ^ . -v 


'V*- 


>. ■ ■ 7 ' 

•»- -■ •* • v,.k : V . 

• j ■-••'•' ■^v*.'* ' ’.» « 

: - : f - 


• . 'o 

' ' ' “ sf'; 


T/' 


\ 


y 


^ r?** S* r •• v»v ’ 


' ** 

'i 
* 


.» . 




* .' * 

I 




y. ‘ ... iT 






•f 






■ 


I 

♦ 




"V v.' 
, ; ; « ; 


■■'. N»' 


• '*• lk‘« 


1; ;. 


o 

4 


• 1 . 




. k '• 
«1 


■'V 


.‘fl 


« . 


• a r 


• 1 . 


^ *4^ ^ ■ ’ ■*V'^ ‘ ■ • ■ •• *-‘*> * 

^ -' . .W. t - .V- 



>W' 


f 




: '^:-A •- 


A - 


,t- ' 


i 

y 




■f 


V ‘. ;■• /,. 






' '• . 7 'T.- i'- - ' ' 


r S 


V4 


r ^ 






-I 


.V 

* ■ ' »•' » 




V ■ 

» V * ■ 





;4''y ivv-, , 

j ■' ■ • . ’- ^ ,• ' 

.. . ■■^>. ' '■ ' 

. .. .. .M 

■t- /V ♦ -. '^v 

K' 


\ , f' 

. J \ r '- *■ 

. ' 4 < « • * 





.n ' 

* I 


t 






» 

t 

X 
w 


t 4 . 


A.: 


/,' V .- i' ' ■ ■ 


< t 


^ »• 


t 




, \ 

i 


k 


^ r 


, ,. -*• ■ ' V'". V' 1*,j^'^''''•t'*'^ 

' ^ ,/ t'“ 

*■» « . • 



■ .> 
■f 
r >' 


■',t 


- 1 / 


•• i '. 


'• « 






' ■' ..>vW 




V 

s 

\ 


tu 


• I . 


\ > 


. 1 , 

« • 

k\. 


t 




' x>' f • 

« M -■ , 


A -y.k - ... 




■'a. %<. 






A 

. X 


•li k- 


r \ ^ 


V 



Vlt^trh^y /( 


^ A 




t 



East from, o 


H\9l{l<ih^s 

9qu cq(ut f wk 


•ft rtf €i/rt'tve 

(Ttrtti4Hth JL 




'*h>u. T-S/Jhifti 








IIastf*0k 


^ ft r f*/t </V</ jr<^ 


hrrlinqt^r^ 


Yjijnmt^_ 


ftjsrr 


*nnm 


uti.<wtrt 


urttf f'ti 


fanr^k^r 


Wrtand 


7 /^//-r 


j’ojvttt'Arj 

Pr/rrr 

N)rl«uioui 


i Salei 
nftr7Aft/>t»ff. 


'latr^tifu 


Worcest/r 


Xantr/t A'/t 






C,i 3 o/a[ou.Sc. 


ZSf TeUr 


\ j ; ; 

> r Dirttaiiiv i'roiii ItoHton. 


h>ri/*titJ Ul* MlUf 

Jtrt//f,y'/tf /77 

//////■vw/ J'//. //// 

lo(* 

/ ‘nn if /r/fr^ . 






OZ: 


\ 

^ivktfrtff V v/ 
W'lhitr ^ 


X/>r//tftNffftr»H P‘A 

/L.irtrpnl _ 7 / v ^ 


o2 


OSTO^ 




S< * a le . 

n* y* ft* 


W:Mt7,t/u,r Ji; _S>/rALo.:,.W. 


Efifrreii ncct^r^inq A? €ii^ g^t /.f:nt47r^ss /f/r /kr.r/'!*g/r/i/ Jftfrch Atf MnssacAn^ftt^r 


V 


1 


/ 

/ 



'! ■ ■ 



• ^ F ’ 


. .» 

*«-> ;. V. 


'!• 

, ', 


1 

’ F 


I; 

\ 

t 

4' 

•l ' 


>) a 



K 




0 


\ ’ 


* 

* 

. .Vf 

’a 

« 

.> ’ 

T* 

• 

* , 


} 

• 


« 

•' > 

- ■ ■ 


■' *.*■ 

' ’ M '.. 



<'/. . • .• '• 
-•:>,. .y-' 

r -■ ^ 


1 ...A 

Vi 


•V 


'A * 




*■ t 


\ 

V 


I . 
• * 

• • »* 


, > / 


V 

'■» ♦ 



■A it ■ 'J*"" * 

t*. w •^• 

• •. 


* 



.' - j 


4 


V* 


'» ’■ ■ . -S';:;,, ■ 

i . ie' ^ , S . • . ■ . 


' \ 


t \ 


• \ 



••i 


I 


• « ■ 




t 

."0 


✓ 


k‘ 



• f 



•I 


!■ / 


•1'. 


^ - 
h 


• ■ \ 


•' .» 



• ■ ». 


•''v' 

’ \ 


*.1 


t ' 


I 







s . 


, 1 — . 


/ • 


u * 


f 


If : 


. M. vV*',y- 


i. • 


,> 


t- 


I 

•% , 



, 1 1 


V 



• t 


'I 


r 


' J ■ ‘ 

■,>^ f I 

•. . F' ' 

. . » 




• • 

) • 




I . i 


¥ 


\ 


. r 


• ^ . 


> * 




» f 






* <« 


i- 


t 

i' < 


•• > 




« S 


tit ^ . a 

* * • • <• . 


i \ 



. I 


► V- 






• < . * 
. *v/ .- 




F' ♦ • 


. » 


I • 


N 



4 


’ i 


-r . -i ' 

■X 


‘t* ’'If 


4* N 


-•1 '. ^ . ■^: ■* 

\ •' ■ » 


«> I 


■X I* S’" 


» / • , 


>/ 




- 'I 




,;.ir’:;.^: 


n' 


• *> 


> 


“ /r I 

• 





> 


I 4 


•io 

4?- t' . 


»’ 


• i- ' ^ 

t?l ■' 




• , -V ’ 


^ >. •' I* . 


. . <*• 


/ Vr 

. ^* 

t •* 


.^’ * , '.'T' .' •..' „ ■>«->• 

-'*. ■■ ' 'l.v -* ' ‘ 

.•!-^ ii. ’■■ 

-X '.^■‘, i> * V ij-/ 

*<. ’ ^ :v.» ‘ . ' 

4 ' ■ ’ .■ Tf. 4»* ’ 






n 






y / , 

A^‘ • ' 


.1 - 




^:r/- 

I « * • 




*. 

r. 




#♦ 


^ *'• ' • 


f.: 




B 


f . 



_ A ■ / 




(« 






'•>^- • 

I ■'•■ :■':' ‘^i’ 

4, ‘ i ,' 

>, ■'»V ■. 

. f .'i?' ■ ' • • 


' ' ^■•..■, 'sa-' 

f ‘s'. '^ •'• 




.' tl. *»' 


• 1 ’ 


/ 4 


/',• 

i». . f 


«' ' c 


.■ ■ i- 


i 

) 


S 


I 9 


"si • *' 

h ' 

rV'-' • 


4 




S • 


•> 


'• 'c:. . 

-,4 

■ ■ .y ^ 


> . ; - ;i . ■'.• '-U' “ ^ 


• . I • ' 




i 

<1 


— y ^ 


>; V-’ 

■ ^ 'C 


■ ■■r: 

• ^ 




. 

‘.I 


l)r 

4 

n 




K 


'I. •?: 


f'l 


. .V ,, 


I 'f- 


'> ^.r ' 


- -I 


,fe 



k 


'V.. 


'* » 

. ■»-*.'**. 

. L 




' . %- .- fj 

;.' /2i? • ^7 > 

' ' 9^' * .’•’i 

■ '*•' -^#1 ■>" - * 
» j 


. V 



T 


• \ 



■ ' .v- 

. 'i 


» [,-!.•? *• ^ 


I -• :. ■ 


■ 

\ ' ., 





^' 1 . 


' • •• V ^ j[4 <- ' ,) ' ' • .' • • 


■i.w. 

4 
'T: ' 


. a'' 


1 




•i 

\ 


/ 

r 






. ^^• 
v» ^ 






► * r 


rV « ' * J' ' 


. V 


.4 

,> 


^ ‘ 


*■ . i, ■ - 


X' 

V 


J 


•i' 




Vk: 


•y"' «-. . ■ ;*c 

• f 4 : 

' ■ l*f r 

... >.^ 


4 


i ■■%:,■ ■ 

1 






'4’ ' 

■•«. ■; '■ -iT 'V ’■ ' 4 •’. ■ ‘ . '. •‘ ’ 

. »r •••^• » w 




1 


•» 




,_i< • ■ 


•iri 


. rv: 


f'' 


f 


.«A‘ 


/ ' 


4 • ' 

‘ • '» 

r ' ■*^ - . 

■. 

S’ \. 


, . • 
'4-.' " ■ •^' • 












p^f 


1 • 


' 


* .. 


^ .. 


.i 


. f 


• 01 


- ^■'V- 

, w*. ■? 

> . ’’r^. w, - 


’, VI.'. 

■ .. .' "■ .‘' 

V w 

I • • t 


4 

«• ' ^ 

■• * * 


I 


/ ' 




V ^ 


' f ■'- 

■I , 4 • • ■» ‘ > 

:. *: 




- ► , 


.V 


V. 


« 0 

'■* 


: 




i • • 3<* < 

. , .-A . •'*> 




i \ •:•'■ 


. ^ ■ . r f 
* , 

. --' •<»» 


'1 1 




r' 

4 

I j” 


' in •'.* 




V 

■ « 


Yv 

I 





y-'' « 


\ 

> 

/A 


i a 


V 

»# • , A- •* 




.V /• 


.<>■- 


' 


' ^ ^ 




f 


/ 

'; \ 


.V . 


.*> . 


'If 'y.^' . 

«r* 


-k " 


'■ Y ■ ; "T ' ," 

' y ''y * T'^<^ 

• . 'Al 'K 






' -'- » '• ''At' 'K 
• • ■*•• ' W 


>. .< . ,v 


■> 

*. 

. ^ 


' .4 'I I. 

0 





— ' 


•'-t 


.iS .- v • 

. . V .• <. - 


P: 


«r 


K ■ 


■<■ • •■ ; - '■•i ■" • .*,■ c.-‘ f , 




. I 


• i 


/ 


I • 


V . 


I. 


^.i<» ■•* 

»\ 


4 

'•kt 


* ;..; ■' 

Va • ' 



* V 


J I • 

I 




. ' » 
i 


V 


:> V 


I* ^ 


I ’ '<► >.•'? 

• • • - » 


k.?v *■ f •^• 

•' . .w> 


<,w,.- 




I 

r ' 


t ' • •■ AJ ;•* v. -ym: 




‘ -.V ^ 

\ •■- ' '.p 


. I 


> . 


I . 


I 

i t 


'.A 


» V' 




^ .'.’.V 


M •. 


’ ■J'. 


4 " 


.4 V 


A 


A , • - • ' 

. I ■■ *4^^* A^- 


f ‘I 

t 4..4.V/ 


4 


i 











N 

r\iii;oiT 
>: r r^Koi, 




j.sv j-jsr 

:uiuii^ 




A\ 

✓. 

, • . 

< ^ 
B" 

V^ i. i. - ViV 

\*'**«t * \ “ '/^ 

rv»^ a i-^ K r 

H -V^ 

t ■“ • 
m W . 

w 

>^y 

■ ^•. 
r^. 


1 2 

i y 





t ' > • . » » . - *• 


'■ • 


■ ** 

^ *. . 

ilk!; -- 


i k 


’ t, '> r 

‘ . .1 ’s •■ ', ' 'j 


'•■I? ' 




« • V 


T* 

'w 

. V 




»• ■ 


, , .• .,s Jikr:':;-. a, » 

i -. ■»! • ■ . • • .'*■ ‘ ■' ' ■ •■ A ' • - 




i-T 

^ 


,\ . 




'• »' 


A 




% 








« 


• /■ 


■ V 

f '■'. ' 


•fc t 


V '♦ 


,, * ^ < 


I 

‘'t 


'■ - ' *y ■■“ 

'. <*. /►■IT., . 

1 . ' ViW; ; ' 

* -I 


. y 


*• < 




*< • ■ • r> 


% 

i 






•«k 


A. 


y. A 

/■ 


*• ,'w i i.* » » <*• • 


- 


A* * f 




\ . 



't 


*:V^ik 



M. 





' 1i‘ ‘ ' 

■ ■ 





.%A ?, ,/•/> \4 ^ 

' ,* ">-■ ■ r 

j j.*..- ' . . -r • / U--> 




^ '^'1 f ■^. 

\ Sf.iiT'i ■ ^ ■*• r-J. • , 

' r- ■ ■ if^.-’’ 




#v. 






. t -'* J; 

’t, ■ “. ■ viC ' ■’'* • ■ 

' • V • ’ v«J> vV . A' i • > • *T 




* 



J.,1 

. V, , » 

I, 


V 


^ ^Vv ' ■ 

■%, ;■ . ■•'• lif 



I , '' ^' , . V ■ ^ i A 

.... 




-J 

■^f ..^V':» 





' "^v 




• t 


.i,.^V'U.'^ , 

' i ' t M ^ 





if 






V. <; 


■ “''v^ :''-^vv'' ■' ■■■'■'-L .. . 

> ' , 


I 

■ >" I 


• * ' ‘l » 

< . A • • 




r 

fW 

'-« •., /'t 

« 


^ 

I < « \ 


% 

• * 



y V ■' , ) 

-i- 


--C. -^ . - >. i- 

I '. . i i 


- 'Al‘ 

Vr 


■S 

r 




V 




. ;► 


♦: 




fr- 


*! 


• •' / 


■J'-. ■>'\<If' 




• %» 
t « 


1 :f. 
y '. * 


•:■ - 


vi- T.' • 

* • ^ 



• * ‘t • 


,!^ •'» 


' >,* . 


t: 




.N^ 


iw# - 

•^. i ^ 


\ •; 


L’. 

ii 




»»1 ■ 

' V 


Vi 


» ' ••4 - ' 

. .P. ••VjV .V 

vv •■■!-^;r 


« 4A' 

\ 


• ■ » 


I «-■•■’• , 


.V 




“'•"'''••I * 

:•-.. ;y»ft •>■ • • . 


■Sv‘'' 

^ • 4 ft ' 


I 


" y-- . 

s '« 

1 * 



k*' ft 



• •..*. ' y 

*••, ,» • 

\t 

' \y ' 

r 

■V,-'' 

' J 

b 

i-: -■ "' 


I ’ **t . 

..‘•/Vr 




“ .'- cv 

*■..»' '' P X ’ 




, y't i. c‘ 

v‘>-. 



■ « 


I 

' r' *.'. 


- ^ . 

' »' .' Vv 


.-’W 


/i». 


^ • 


« 

i-, 


: i.x 


V. 


> ." 


41- »■ .^T 





. f 




.i 





\ 

'j 



EnUrctl aarrdmf/ te act of imcrcfs pil the ff^F dav of Mtrrk tvS. cndoodrich ofMuss a chet,s rtJs < i. i iov ut*.'*n S*;. 



f 


t 


M 


I 


1 




I 

4 


r 


\ 





1 


c 

a 



/ 


\ 


n 


<♦4 






^2>ash t 


fr 










f 





% 


/ 


\ 


« 


/ 




I 

I 




t 


\ 



% 


\ 



\ 


4 










4 


I 


\ 


v‘ '. ■' 


. -'.'^v •- .^f* ’*■ ■*> ' • •■' ^ 




* 

' I 


If * 




• y >fi N, 


' 1 V 


• n •t 
•- 


« . 

\ 


< 





« • 

t ' 

r 


( 









4 



f 


'VI. . 

* 




1 






I 



F.HUreJ ,m tfu- yWl^.i/oi' Mn rh by S. (', I'roJtich o!' J/uj.f. 


('i.Hoviilon .'■‘i’. 



p 


f 



'irlT" 'r Ct. 


r/,-’ " 

^s^rriSart ' I.'^ 

i^ri/Uf/€i// 

/ 



KnfprftT ttcrorJinxf (o cicf cf^ /A^ I'O $. C,Ofocin c/i of .Iftfssac/ufjetts 


* f 





^ . 4 <r ‘' ■ > , 

" ' ' ' . ■ • ■ • • 


■»* 

% 


*V;*i 


. V- ' I. V : " ■; 

» V ' ^ 






%> 




■v, / ■ * ■,^-<^- ^ r, * < 'i ‘ ,r ■ •■ I. _ >v ■ •' 

■ i : ; 

I .' . 4r‘ -.1? .,;/.. .k... ■.,-^«i'''.,. ’ A'-3 ' 'V. K<.- ^>‘‘-- V-'-' 


tti >» 


' ; .a# J | s f r .>i. /. " f ■ « 

■ ■ ■’ \^/\’* '■' -T ■ ■' '/'^ / .X»-. . 


■I"''' ^' ■ ■ ' fc:2'l^,Vv 4 :1# ■ifi' !^ai--'-' ■• •■ii»4 j 

......J^"T'V^-^A^ ■•-I ''-< A* 

'; '■ 4 '^ ■ ‘'vV^ -V^’**^'*^* . ’ ■ ■ A-i 

■ X^' ‘<V i?V - .t ■■ " .- 




i- 'v >• 



f 

# V 


1 * 

A. If ■ It' > >. > 

l»J«n *;» "rf* «*. tl -■ ^ 

/ ^ ,.aAM 




■F --Tl ■ -X;-'''..^ ■"/'’. ,V' ' ' .. 

' ■ . ^ ^ V 4 ' -A . ■ '■ 

^■A>^AAy. -. *' T 


f-ft 'i 

'‘. • V.-' 


■ i i ..A a-mm - 1 • ‘ i4;‘i‘'Q a &! .> 


. y^' jX;’ ^ 


Yi 

. -,' % 
f 

V 



* ‘••fc 


'tA 





i 


^ '^i- jk * -1 4 . 


'■^ issr , 






1 ?:^ ,, 4 

^ t 







/ 4 




f ' ^ 


v..> 




• !»»•» 





k 





A 



M 


* > 



S 

t 




$ 






« . 






> 


I r 

« 


T* 




A 


4 



5 


% 

\ 


i 


« 












4 


/ 


4 




4 



-% •' 


/ 


I 


I 




€ 


•t • 


» 






1 . 

i * 



< 


% 


1 





1 




y 







. r i 

X' 


• * V J. '■ V 


I 


\ . 


.*/ ■ 


k ^ - 

-X"^'-. ■ ' 0 ^- ■“< 






• . 




; 


*• • 


•A 

/ 


u- - * 




'* « 



* * 

\ 9 ^ ^ s t 







at -r )::^i 






a ••■» : ■ 


*< .*#'• • 


•' ;. 


\. . 


• I 


V- ^. ■ :cMw ■> . ' v^. 


\ *' 
• t^> > . 


•’ * 


*^*<5 


* jVL vH ^ ■ V V 41 

X *1 •• ' 

•■ ‘ T'^r 

i :■'}' :: 

. :• > -'ir^ 

'* ' ^ #w*i4. 



#■ 


« 










fe* 



4 X 
♦ • 




" '"V 





•i ' * ^7 


V 

• ■ » 


* 

• ••j 

.‘a’ 




•’ I ‘ 


>>*■ ' 


V' 


m 




V»f 




/ 


V, 


p 

• # 


f 




'• 




✓ 

« 

4 






^ • 


1 




'4 


$- 





■ft 

4 


-<; • / 





« 


# 




4 




» 








\ 



s 







i' 



*• 

4 

¥ 





# 




% 


-J 



V 

s 


# 




r 




. . > 



I- , 




V 












t 




/ 




# 





:j 

0 — 


/V 







r 





% 




( 







■ % 








Ir 


i:nteiitaining*and usef 


LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 


0 028 152 145 7 




CHILDREJV AND YOUTH, 

ILLUSTRATED BY MANY ENGRAVINGS.. 

% 

FOR SALE 3Y 

RICHARDSON, LORD, AND HOLBROOK. 

1. Poter Parley’s Tales of the Sea. 

2. Peter Parley’s Tales of the islands in the Pacific Ocean 

3. Peter Parley’s Talcs of remarkable animals, Q,uadrii}>eds, Birds, Fish- 
es, and Insects. 

4. Peter Parley's Present, with 220 engi’avings. 

5. Ta’es of Travels west of the Mississippi, containing an account of ihe 
adventures of Lewis and Clark, Major Long and Jewett, \yith descrip- 
tions of many tribes of Indians, and the most interesting animals in tlie 
western regions of the United States. 

6. Tales of Travels in CentiTj Africa cpHtaining an account of Denham 
and Clapperton’s expeditions, Parks’ travels, Caillie’s visit to Tunbuc- 
. 00, &c. &c. 

:7. 3’ales of Tmvels in the North of Europe, Lapland, Norway, Sweden, 

' >)(nri-ai . . Rus-S!.’ ? Ptjand. 

tC-'’ thiee })ivri , volr.mes are a part of a series of entertaining 
wnrlv's, edited b> Solon-on Bell, giving an account of the moat hiter- 
esfing things to be fi'atnd in the best books of Modern Travellers. 

8. Tlie Story of the American Revolution, illustrated' by tales, ekctcl.c.- . 
and anecdotes 

9. Tales, Sketches, Anecdotes, and Adventures, drawn from the early 

istoi^. of New-Engiand. Jrt press. 

10. Tales &■' etches. Anecdotes, and Adventures, drawn firom d e early 
Histoiy Sout'.vin States. Tn prtss. 

05^ These three vols. are part of a series of Enteitaining American TTis- 
tories, edited by Lambert Lilly ; they are designed to take the place of 
Fictitious Tales^ and ans'ver as-reading books for chikhen. 


1 - 


1 


